![Page 1: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a](https://reader035.vdocument.in/reader035/viewer/2022062413/5a76533a7f8b9aa3618d22a0/html5/thumbnails/1.jpg)
Chessington Community College
KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
Name__________________________ Tutor Group___________
2|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TABLE OF CONTENTS
WELCOME FROM THE PRINCIPAL 3
KS4 CURRICULUM 4
QUALIFICATIONS INFORMATION 5
CHOOSING YOUR SUBJECTS 5
MAKING A BALANCED CHOICE 6
WHAT IF I MAKE A WRONG CHOICE 6
THE CORE CURRICULUM
ENGLISH LANGUAGE (GCSE) 9
ENGLISH LITERATURE (GCSE) 11
MATHEMATICS (GCSE) 12
SCIENCE - MODULAR (GCSE DOUBLE AWARD) 13
BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE 14
BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN SPORT 15
THE OPTIONAL CURRICULUM
3 DIMENSIONAL DESIGN (GCSE) 19
ART (GCSE) 20
CATERING (GCSE) 22
CERTIFICATE IN CONSTRUCTION 24
DANCE (BTEC LEVEL 2 FIRST CERTIFICATE IN PERFORMING ARTS) 25
DRAMA (GCSE) 26
ETHICS (GCSE) 27
FILM STUDIES (GCSE) 28
FRENCH (GCSE) 29
GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) 30
GRAPHICS (GCSE) 32
HAIRDRESSING (NVQ) 33
HISTORY (GCSE) 34
ICT (CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2) 36
MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE) 37
MOTOR VEHICLE (NVQ) 38
MUSIC (GCSE) 39
MUSIC (BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE ) 40
PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE) 42
SPANISH (GCSE) 43
SPORT (BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA) 44
TEXTILES (GCSE) 45
TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES) 46
KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS 47
Page|3 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
March 2012
Dear Students and Parents
OPTIONS 2012 - 2014
At this time in Year 9 it is important that we begin to look at the process of making choices
for the courses your sondaughter will take during Key Stage 4 The intention at Chessington
Community College is that each student will continue with the core subjects from the
National Curriculum and then be encouraged to choose further GCSE and BTEC courses that
will meet their needs and aspirations for the future
In designing our KS4 curriculum programme we have tried to take into consideration factors
which will give our students the best opportunity for individual success in their future
examinations The programme and the courses will be fully explained to the students during
their lessons Subject teachers heads of house Mr Winchcombe and Mr Clutterbuck are all
available to give students individual advice In addition each student‟s choice of courses
will be reviewed and where necessary individual interviews to discuss choices will take
place There will also be an Options Information Evening on Thursday 15th March starting at
7pm where both students and parents will have the opportunity to discuss further action
appropriate course selection with heads of faculty and subject teachers
We do hope that you will make full use of the opportunities for discussion and that you will
feel able to contact Mr Winchcombe if you wish to clarify any issue
Once the issue of courses for individual students are settled we look forward to all students
enjoying the challenges provided by Key Stage 4 courses and expect to see them working
hard to achieve the success they deserve
Yours sincerely
R Niedermaier-Reed
Principal
4|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
KS4 Curriculum
At Key Stage 4 students will study a bdquocore‟ which covers a broad and balanced range of
subjects in line with the national curriculum
Students then make 4 choices for the rest of their bdquooptional‟ curriculum
Core
EnglishEnglish Literature 2 GCSEs
Mathematics GCSE
Science 2 GCSE
Sport (BTEC) Equivalent to 2 GCSEs
Social Studies (Pastoral Education)
Optional Curriculum
Triple Science
For those students that have excelled in their KS3 Science we will be offering a third science
Teachers will assess student‟s suitability of course and will interview these students in the
Summer Term
English as an Additional Language (EAL)
Overseas students may speak understand or be literate in more than one language and
may have some experience of English but will require support to acquire fluency in English
and to access the curriculum The EAL course helps these students
Part-time studying at Kingston College
We are offering both a Motor Vehicle Level 1 course and a Hairdressing NVQ Level 1 course
Both these are taught at Kingston College on a Friday and would be equal to 2 Option
choices
Art (GCSE) Hairdressing (NVQ)
Catering (GCSE) History (GCSE)
Construction (City and Guild Certificate) ICT (Cambridge Nationals)
3D Design (GCSE) Media Studies (GCSE)
Dance (BTEC) Music (GCSE and BTEC)
Drama (GCSE) Motor Vehicle (NVQ)
Ethics (GCSE) Spanish (GCSE)
Film studies (GCSE) Sport (BTEC)
French (GCSE) Textiles (GCSE)
Geography (GCSE) Triple Science (GCSE)
Graphics (GCSE)
Page|5 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
Qualifications Information
GCSE
General Certification of Secondary Education GCSEs are taken by most school-leaving age
students They are known as Level 2 qualifications
BTEC
BTECs are work-related qualifications suitable for a wide range of students built to
accommodate the needs of employers and allow progression to university They provide a
practical real-world approach to learning without sacrificing any of the essential subject
theory and are recognised by a large number of organisations in a wide range of sectors
BTECs offer natural progression along a vocational path from and to academic
qualifications and university
Cambrige Nationals
Cambridge Nationals are an exam-free alternative to GCSEs taking a more engaging
practical approach to learning and assessment
NVQ
NVQ is work based awards in England Wales and Northern Ireland that are achieved
through assessment and training
Choosing Your Subjects
The subjects and qualifications you study over Years 10 and 11 will affect how you spend
your time during your next two years at school It could also help set you up for the career or
college course you want later on
To help you decide what to study in Years 10 and 11 start by asking yourself what you enjoy
doing and what you‟re good at You need to think about
What you‟re interested in it could be other cultures and languages writing projects
helping people being outdoors or designing things
What types of activity you enjoy most - working things out and thinking them through
practical activities or artistic options like painting drawing or performing music
What do you want to do as a career
You will then ask yourself whether your choices give you a balanced programme and
whether your choices limit your options once you have completed your Year 11 studies
It is very important that you will seek help and advice about your GCSEs Subject teachers
your Head of House and Form Tutor will be very pleased to discuss any problems with you
We hope that your parents will play an active part in advising you on these important
decisions They can either talk to Staff at the Options Evening on Thursday 15th March 2012
or if required make an appointment to see them
Please remember the following points
Do talk to students who are in Year 10 or 11 about a specific subject you might wish to
study
6|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
Do get all the information you can from this booklet and by asking questions before
deciding on your subjects We provide information about all the subjects offered for study
in Years 10 and 11 on the following pages Please read the course descriptions carefully
Try not to consider only the subjects you need but also the subjects that interest you
Try not to choose a subject just because you like (or dislike) the teacher You may have
different teacher next year
Do think about your skills and how you work and try to match these with the different
demands of the different subjects Subjects have different amount of marks awarded for
examinations and for controlled assessments Do think carefully about how you best work
when making your selection of subjects
Try not to choose a subject simply because it sounds new or unusual Make sure you
understand what is involved in taking this subject
Do NOT fill in the subject request sheet until you are happy that you have made the correct
choices for your needs and interests
Making A Balanced Choice
It is important that you continue to study a variety of courses Not only will this contribute to
your general education it will also mean that doors to a wide number of careers and further
study will remain open to you Do remember to consider the range of skills that your subjects
will provide you with
The English Baccalaureate (EBacc)
The English Baccalaureate which was introduced as a performance measure in 2010
performance table is not a new qualification It is a new certificate that will be awarded to
any student who secures a GCSE Grade C or higher in the following subject
English
Mathematics
2 Sciences (Core and Additional or 2 out of Biology Chemistry and physics)
1 Modern Foreign Language or a Classical Language
1 Humanity (History or Geography)
The subjects included are designed to ensure that all students have the opportunity to study
a broad core of subjects ensuring that doors are not closed off to them in terms of future
progression
We allow all students to opt for subjects to make up the EBacc however we do not make it
compulsory for any student It is important that you choose subjects that you enjoy and are
therefore more likely to secure a good grade in You should also consider your own talents
and aspirations for the future
What if I Make A Wrong Choice We hope this will not happen but if it does then we will interview you and if possible swap
your subject What we have found in the past is that students decide on a subject because
their friends have chosen it and after a time the student realises they don‟t like the subject
therefore do not choose a subject because your friend has chosen it
THE
CORE
CURRICULUM
Page|9 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ENGLISH LANGUAGE (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
The skills of reading writing speaking and listening are of vital importance in many areas
Not only are they essential in many careers they also underpin successful study at all levels
and a proficiency in them can also add immeasurably to an individual‟s general quality of
life
This specification is designed to aid and assess such development and to encourage
learners to be inspired moved and changed by following a broad coherent satisfying and
worthwhile course of study It will prepare learners to make informed decisions about further
learning opportunities and career choices and to use language to participate effectively in
society and employment
Different forms of assessment are appropriate to these different skills and this is recognised in
this specification Reading and Writing are assessed through controlled assessment and in
two externally marked units Speaking and Listening are assessed in a variety of different
situations during the course
Assessment
Written Paper
Unit 1 (20) Studying written language - non-fiction texts (40 Raw Marks 40 UMS)
This unit will test through structured questions the reading of two non-fiction texts Non-
fiction texts may include fact-sheets leaflets letters extracts from autobiographies
biographies diaries advertisements reports articles and digital and multi-modal texts of
various kinds from newspapers and magazines brochures and the internet Visual
material will always be included in the material used
Unit 2 (20) Using written language - information and ideas (40 Raw Marks 40 UMS)
This unit will test transactional and discursive writing through two equally weighted tasks
(20 marks each) Across the two tasks students will be offered opportunities to write for a
range of audiences and purposes adapting style to form and real-life context in for
example letters articles leaflets reviews etc
10|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ENGLISH LANGUAGE (GCSE) continued
Exam Board WJEC
Controlled Assessment
Unit 3 (30) Literary reading and creative writing (80 Raw Marks 60 UMS)
Studying written language extended literary text (15)
Students need to present one assignment which is a sustained response to an extended
text The text must either be a Shakespeare play or one chosen from the GCSE English
Literature external assessment set text lists excluding poetry
Using language creative writing (15)
Students will be required to complete ONE piece of descriptive writing and ONE piece of
narrativeexpressive writing drawn from tasks supplied by WJEC
Unit 4 (30) Spoken language (60 Raw Marks 60 UMS)
Using Language Speaking and Listening (Communicating and adapting language
interacting and responding creating and sustaining roles) (20)
Students will be required to complete at least three Speaking and Listening tasks through
the exploration of ideas texts and issues in scripted and improvised work The three tasks
will cover the following areas
1 Communicating and adapting language
2 Interacting and responding
3 Creating and sustaining roles
Studying spoken language Variations choices change in spoken language (10)
Students will be required to study an aspect of spoken language The assignment will be
a sustained response to their own or others‟ uses of spoken language presented by
recording transcript or recollection
Page|11 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ENGLISH LITERATURE (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
This specification is based on the conviction that the study of literature should centre on an
informed personal response to a range of texts in the genres of prose poetry and drama
Assessment is through controlled assessment and examination Teachers and their students
have some flexibility in the choice of texts to be studied and some overlap with GCSE English
Language is possible and indeed encouraged as it is felt that the study of literature can
greatly enhance a student‟s writing skills and that practising hisher own writing skills can lead
a student to increased enjoyment of and success in reading
Assessment
External Assessment
Unit 1 (35)Prose (different cultures) and poetry (contemporary) (50 Raw Marks 70 UMS)
Section A (21) requires study of a prose text from a different culture It will require
students to answer two questions on the chosen prose text
Section B (14) will consist of a question offering some structure for students to explore
respond to and compare two contemporary unseen poems In preparation for this unit
students will need to study at least fifteen poems in addition to those studied for Unit 3
Unit 2a (40) Literary heritage drama and contemporary prose(60 Raw Marks 80 UMS)
This paper requires study of a drama text from the EnglishIrishWelsh literary heritage and a
contemporary prose text It will require students to answer two questions on each text
OR
Unit 2b Contemporary drama and literary heritage prose (60 Raw Marks 80 UMS)
This paper requires study of a contemporary drama text and a prose text from the English
IrishWelsh literary heritage It will require students to answer two questions on each text
Controlled Assessment
Unit 3 (25) Poetry and drama (literary heritage) (40 Raw Marks 50 UMS)
EnglishIrishWelsh literary heritage Poetry and Shakespeare play Assessment will be based
on a single assignment linking a play by Shakespeare and literary heritage poetry Students
will be required to study a Shakespeare play (not Othello or Much Ado about Nothing) and
a group of thematically linked poems taken from the WJEC poetry collection
Assessment for GCSE English Language and GCSE English Literature is tiered ie externally
assessed componentsunits are targeted at the grade ranges of A-D (Higher Tier) and C-G
(Foundation Tier) while controlled assessments cater for the full range of ability Questions and
tasks will be designed to enable students to demonstrate what they know understand and
can do
Tier Grades Available
Higher A A B C D Foundation C D E F G
Students who narrowly fail to achieve Grade D on the Higher Tier will be awarded Grade E
Students who narrowly fail to achieve Grade D on the Higher Tier will be awarded Grade E
12|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MATHEMATICS (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Mathematics is a compulsory part of the curriculum for all students and currently takes four
lessons per week GCSE Mathematics is a linear course with two written examinations one
with a calculator The course takes a holistic approach and a grade C is available on both
foundation and higher papers
Students should develop knowledge skills and understanding of the content They should be
able to use their knowledge and understanding to make connections between
mathematical concepts and apply them to solve real life problems Functional elements of
mathematics are included in each paper
The course starts formally at the end of year 9 building on the work in years 7 and 8 so a
good start is made to cover the necessary material Students will need to apply themselves
to the tasks in class and complete their homework regularly Mathematics teachers are
available outside of lessons to help students who are finding concepts difficult to understand
and a weekly bdquocatch-up‟ club is available Students are set primarily according to ability but
the attitude to learning is also a factor to be considered when the groupings are made
We offer the opportunity to take GCSE Mathematics in Year 10 and providing satisfactory
results are achieved students may be given the opportunity to start the bdquoA‟ level course or to
take an additional GCSE in statistics
Page|13 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SCIENCE - MODULAR (GCSE DOUBLE AWARD)
Exam Board AQA
There have been some major changes to the GCSE science courses which will begin began in
September 2011 There is now more emphasis on bdquoHow Science Works‟ which means not just
learning the theory but understanding the practical side of science and its relation to the
world in which we live
Science is a core subject and is therefore studied by all students The main areas of science
can be broadly broken into Biology Chemistry and Physics
In addition to the above students will be assessed on their knowledge and understanding of
science through coursework which will be set within stimulating contexts that students should
be able to relate to from their science lessons and their experiences of science on a day to
day basis
Year 10
Students in Year 10 will study six modules as indicated below
These six modules will be assessed by tests which will be taken on three separate occasions
throughout the year The final 25 of the marks will be awarded based on coursework
The majority of Year 10 students will gain the first of their two GCSEs in science at the end of
Year 10
Year 11
The structure of the Year 11 course is similar to that of Year 10 in that Biology Chemistry and
Physics will be studied however students will be assessed by means of three written papers
containing structured questions rather than objective tests
GCSE Science A
Biology 1 25
Chemistry 1 25
Physics 1 25
Centre Assessed Coursework 25
GCSE Science B
Biology 2 25
Chemistry 2 25
Physics 2 25
Centre Assessed Coursework 25
14|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SCIENCE - MODULAR (GCSE DOUBLE AWARD) continued
Exam Board AQA
The coursework component will be assessed in a similar way to Year 10 and will carry the same
proportion of marks
Whilst the new GCSE science course is designed to be more interesting than the existing
course it is likely to be rather more challenging Students will need to work consistently hard in
order to achieve high level grades The course has been designed to ensure that all students
regardless of ability gain a good grounding in science The course is also an excellent
preparation for A level studies
BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENTED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE
(EDEXCEL)
For some students who have found the study of Science difficult at Key Stage 3 a more
accessible course is BTEC Science
Students still study the 3 Science disciplines of Chemistry Biology and Physics but combined
into one course
The advantages of this course are that there is no traditional coursework component it is
assignment based so students who find that the stress of exams causes them to do less well
have the opportunity to achieve their potential It also has a practical approach and no final
exam
The course is the equivalent of 2 GCSEs
Page|15 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN SPORT
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The BTEC Level 2 Extended Certificate offers flexibility and a choice of emphasis through the
optional units It is broadly equivalent to two GCSEs
The course provides students with the opportunity to enter employment in the sport and active
leisure sector or to progress to vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel BTEC Level 3
qualifications in Sport and Sport and Exercise Sciences
The course also gives students the opportunity to develop a range of skills and techniques
personal qualities and attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter the
workplace
1 Fitness Testing and Training
This unit gives students the opportunity to explore the essential fitness requirements and training
methods used to achieve successful sports performance They learn how to accurately
conduct fitness and health tests and use key skills to compare the results against national
standards
2 Practical Sport
The aim of this unit is to develop students‟ knowledge of the rules skills and techniques for one
team and one individual sport through practical application Students will develop their
assessment skills as they observe each other perform and communicate effectively to improve
personal performance
3 Anatomy amp Physiology for Sport
The aim of this unit is to give students a good understanding of the structure and function of
the skeletal muscular cardiovascular and respiratory systems of the human body This will help
students to gain a better idea of how their body works so that they can stay healthy
4 Development of Personal Fitness
This unit can prove invaluable to students who wish to stay fit and healthy in the future
Students learn how to get fit by actively working and developing their training skills so that they
can progess their fitness to higher levels
5 Effects of Exercise on the Body Systems
This unit again develops the students‟ awareness of how all systems of their body respond to
exercise Students learn about the great health benefits which can be achieved
(Units to be studied are subject to change)
THE
OPTIONAL
CURRICULUM
Page|19 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
3 DIMENSIONAL DESIGN (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
If you enjoyed designing and making products in the Design amp Technology workshops during
Years 789 and would like to continue making more complex and detailed products
Course Information
Students will be expected to demonstrate skills and
techniques in the context of their chosen area(s) of study
within Three-Dimensional Design
making appropriate use of colour line tone texture
shape and form decoration scale and proportion
using different approaches to recording images such
as observation analysis expression and imagination
showing in their work the ability to respond to an idea concept
issue theme or brief investigating different ways of working as
appropriate to their chosen area(s) of study within Three-
Dimensional Design showing understanding of the relationship of
form and function
making use of appropriate materials tools and techniques
providing evidence of an understanding of spatial qualities
composition rhythm scale and structure
providing evidence of the use of safe working practices
In Year 10 students will design and make a variety of projects such as a Spice rack Toy Car
and a Hand Trowel using a variety of machines and materials They will gain knowledge and
skills in manufacturing techniques production methods and the design process They will be
able to design products on the computer (CAD) and then cut them out on the new CAM
machine
Assessment
This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home is
presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks There is
also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the marks
Career Progression
Students can continue onto the A Level Product design course at Chessington‟s 6th Form
Alternatively they could pursue a career in an Engineering discipline Construction Product
Design or Architecture
20|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ART (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
All students choosing Art and Design as their option are required to
take the unendorsed examination This allows them to produce
work using a number of different techniques which have been listed
below
Painting and drawing
Graphics
Sculptureconstruction
Photography
Printmaking
A foundation course which gives students experience of all of
these is run during the first two terms
Painting and Drawing
The Painting and Drawing course is structured to enable students
regardless of their ability to build on the skills and techniques
they have learned in their first three years at school and at the same time prepare for a GCSE
examination
Programmes of work will largely be determined by the demands of the examination syllabus
but every effort will be made to structure the course so that it meets the needs of the students
whilst taking into account their wide range of abilities
The Painting and Drawing disciplines will form the basis for most practical activities but
students will be encouraged to experiment with and use as broad a range of approaches as
possible in the preparation and production of coursework
3 Dimensional Studies (Sculpture)
The course is designed to develop the student‟s visual awareness sensitivity and understanding
of the work of Artists involving three dimensions in a contemporary and historical context
Students will be encouraged to develop ideas in preliminary studies through research and
experimentation observational recording and analysis of forms and to produce work in the
form of modelling carving casting construction and assembling The important relationships
between urbanrural landscapes communities and cultures will also be studied as will the
interaction of solid and void forms and shape pattern decoration colour texture scale
structure proportion rhythm movement and the effects of light upon three dimensional
objects
Page|21 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ART (GCSE) continued
Exam Board AQA
Printmaking
Students will be able to experiment with a number of simple methods for producing a printed
image Some of the following will be introduced when appropriate
Lino printing
Card printing
Monoprinting
Polystyrene sheet printing
Screen printing
Assessment
Art and Design requires students to carry out and complete work in their own time in school
and at home Preparation and research are an essential element of the course and the use of
sketchbooks when preparing work is encouraged
Coursework will account for 60 of the marks and externally set assignment will account for
40 of the marks
Visits
Students are encouraged to take part in all visits to Museums Galleries and Exhibitions where
the work on display is considered helpful in supporting coursework studies
Career Progression
Fashion Designer Interior Designer Costume Designer Artist Architect Cartoonist Textile
Designer Model Maker etc
22|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CATERING (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
This single GCSE course is a vocational qualification that is
suitable for those students who have an interest in the Catering
Industry and want a broad background in this area It would
also be a good foundation for those who wish to progress to
further education It will offer valuable preparation for students
who may want to enter the many careers in the Food Industry
Students must have a real interest in food and enjoy cooking
They must be prepared to work hard in order to reach a high
standard of presentation in their practical work
Course Information
Students who take the GCSE Catering course will learn about and demonstrate their
knowledge and understanding of the following areas of study
The industry ndash types of establishments that serve food and drink
Job roles employment opportunities and relevant training
Health safety and hygiene
Food preparation cooking and presentation
Nutrition and menu planning
Costing and portion control
Specialist equipment both small and large scale
Communication and record keeping
Environmental considerations
Students will be expected to supply their own ingredients for practical sessions that will include
the selection storage preparation and serving of
Students will also be expected to purchase a white chef‟s jacket from the College which they
must wear to all practical sessions
Meat and poultry Convenience products
Fish Sauces
Eggs Basic dough products
Dairy products Basic pastry products
Cereals flour rice pasta Cakes sponges and scones
Vegetables and fruit
Page|23 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CATERING (GCSE) continued
Exam Board WJEC
Assessment
Visits
It is hoped that there will be some visits to local restaurants and a catering college Chefs may visit
some lessons to give demonstrations or work with students in practical lessons
Career Progression
Sous Chef Cake Decorator Junior Kitchen Assistant WaitressWaiter Nutritionist Dietician Food
Technologist Baker etc
60 of the final grade will come from 2
practical tasks where students must show
catering skills related to food preparation and
service
Each task must be accompanied by a folder
of notes that cover the investigation planning
and evaluation of the task
Task 1 (15 hours) will take place in Year 10
Task 2 (30 hours) will take place in Year 11
40 of the final grade will come from a
written examination paper (1 frac14 hours) on
Catering food and the customer
This will be taken at the end of Year 11
24|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CERTIFICATE IN CONSTRUCTION
Exam Board CITY amp GUILDS
This course is ideal for all students who are considering
a career in any part of the construction or building
industry It is of benefit weather they are considering a
craft or management position
Course Information
Students study for six periods a week and in the first
year concentrate on basic building skills
Carpentry
Electrics
Plumbing
Bricklaying
Health and safety
Site management
This is done through the City and Guilds Introductory Certificate in Basic Construction Skills in which
eight practical tasks must be passed and one theoretical on line test
The second year allows students to develop along their chosen path either developing their craft
skills or moving towards a professional career via the Diplomas in Construction and the Built
Environment This would be an ideal path for those considering a career in
Building management
Architecture
Town planning
Surveying
Engineering
Building control
Environmentalist
Landscape Architecture
Those students not considering a professional career would expand their skills in chosen areas
through further City and Guilds qualifications
Page|25 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 FIRST CERTIFICATE IN PERFORMING ARTS DANCE
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Students will look at FIVE different units in order to achieve a
qualification on this course
The most appropriate units can be selected according to
the individual needs of each group from the following list
Performing Dance
The Development of Dance
Working in the Performing Arts Industry
Professional Development in the Performing Arts
Industry
Understanding Dance
Contemporary Dance
Jazz Dance
Musical Theatre
Makeup for Performers
There is a significant emphasis on Choreographic and
performance skills throughout each unit and students will
be expected to
Learn set dances
Learn dance vocabulary
Choreograph solo duo and small group dances
Improve their performance and technical skills
Perform in front of their peers and a broader based audience
See professionals at work
Write reviews of works
Study the effect of costume set design and props
Look at the cultural and historical context of dances they view
The course is internally assessed throughout by the teacher and students are informally
assessed during every lesson Students will also be assessed more formally through
Assignments which meet the criteria for each Unit These are marked by the teacher and
internally verified by another specialist teacher to ensure that they are of the highest quality
Students opting for this course must understand that to achieve a good grade at BTEC they
have to have a love of making up (choreographing) and performing dances to others They
must also have some basic dance ability such as being able to move in time with the music
Students will need to work in bare feet for much of this course
Students who enjoy all aspects of dance and movement and have the confidence to perform
to a small audience will be well suited to this course Students will be expected to work in their
own time after school to perfect their dances and complete Assignment briefs They should
also be happy to work in a range of different dance styles and not just one particular style
26|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
DRAMA (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
GCSE Drama is an exciting and practical course which offers opportunities to become a skilled
and confident performer
The course aims to encourage students to develop
an interest in and understanding of a range of
drama and theatre experiences
increased self and group awareness
imaginative creative communication and
social skills
a love and appreciation of attending a range of
live theatre experiences
The course consists of two parts
Coursework 60
Two of the following options only one of which may be a technicaldesign skill
Devised thematic work for performance to an audience
Acting
Improvisation
Theatre in Education presentation
Dancedrama
Set
Costume
Make-up
Properties
Masks
Puppets
Lighting
Sound
Stage management
Each option is assessed through two parts
Part One A mark awarded for group and communication skills
Part Two A mark awarded for the final performance
Written Paper 40
2 hours
A choice of any two questions based on the following sections
A Set play bdquoAnimal Farm‟
B Response to live productions seen during the course
Page|27 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ETHICS (GCSE)
Exam Board OCR
The bdquoPhilosophy and Ethics‟ GCSE will allow students to explore the fundamental questions
about life and existence encourage their personal social and cultural development and
enhance their understanding of different cultures and belief systems
Over the course of the two years students will study important and thought-provoking issues
such as the nature and existence of God good and evil and the conflict between religion
and science relationships poverty and medical ethics peace and justice and the role of the
media in today‟s world It is a broad satisfying and worthwhile course of study designed to
challenge and stimulate students and equip them with the necessary skills to lead constructive
and thoughtful lives in the modern world
28|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
FILM STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
ldquoThe secret to film is that its an illusionrdquo
George Lucas Director of Star Wars
This course is ideal for any student who is
Able to work independently or as part of a team
Creative and practical but also analytical
Enthusiastic about films
Interested in making their own short films
Over the two years students will
Plan storyboard film and edit a short film working in a small
group adding their own music and special effects
Understand how films are made and promoted
Learn about the business of making films
Make a close study of one genre of Hollywood films (currently Disaster Films)
Closely research and study at least two different non-Hollywood Films (made in Britain
Europe or Africa)
Prepare their own film promotion campaign
Write an in-depth analysis of films of their choice
Assessment is through
A portfolio of coursework and also
Two end of course examinations
Although it is a new course Film Studies is already a popular choice for many students
combining well with the Media study in English as well as Media
Studies itself Film Studies is increasingly well
thought of by many colleges as it combines
a practical creative approach with
analytical skills
From Citizen Kane to Inception
Page|29 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
FRENCH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
The course outline for French is similar to Spanish It is not compulsory to have previous
knowledge of the language before starting the course but you need to be aware that it will
be more challenging for you and you need to put in a lot of effort to succeed However it is
not at all impossible
30|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GEOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Geography is a fascinating and wide-reaching subject and it has been shown that students
with Geography qualifications are some of the most employable
Why you should take Geography GCSE
It provides you with an understanding of global issues which will affect our lives now and
in the future
By the end of their GCSE you will have a better understanding of the way the world
works
Geography is a good link between the arts and sciences so it will help you in their other
subjects
You will understand how physical landscapes (eg rivers coasts mountains) are formed
You will be allowed to express opinions about people and places
Geography includes a range of academic skills that you will use in your future studies
Skills gained from Geography include
How to research and to investigate
Problem solving
Real world numeracy
How to collect record present and analyse data
Map reading
Creative thinking
How to write in an essay style and in a scientific style
Empathy and understanding of others
Topics of study will include
How are natural landscapes formed and how can we manage
them
What causes and how can we manage natural hazards
How do weather and climate work
How can we manage population around the world
How do towns and cities expand and how are they managed
How and why are some places rich whilst others are poor
How can we ensure development of global resources is sustainable
Page|31 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board AQA
Career Links (As printed by the Royal Geographical Society)
How is the course assessed
GCSE Geography is assessed by two written Examinations (75) and by Coursework (25) in
the form of a Controlled Assessment
Fieldwork at the South Coast and elsewhere is an essential part of this course
Travel and tourist industry
Travel Guide Researcher
Property Researcher
Lawyers
Senior Researcher for County
Council
Government Statistician
TV Locations Unit
Business Consultants
Planners
32|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GRAPHICS (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
If you are interested in the world of advertising like
developing logos and posters always have an interest in
the covers of DVDs books amp games and really enjoy
making products then this is the course for you
Course Information
A large part of the course is a practical investigation
into the techniques and materials used in the
advertising and packaging we see around us every
day
Students will develop skills in drawing both free hand and using computer aided design
model making printing techniques logo designing greetings card and popup book
design and build up skills to design DVD covers labels and posters
To be able to present this to an industrial standard students will use desktop publishing
software such as GIMP (a variation of Photoshop) and computer aided design packages
such as Google Sketchup 2D Design and Fireworks They will get the chance to use the
new computer aided manufacturing milling machine to design and make work like
models signs and games
Assessment
Students will complete a major project and portfolio that counts towards 60 of the overall
GCSE grade Previous projects have included creating a popup book producing
promotional material for the Olympics designing the identity and packaging for a new band
and making a travel game for children
Externally set assignment by the Exam board will account for 40 The typical brief might look
like this
A leading perfumeaftershave manufacturer are aware that the environment is a
current issue The general public are concerned about so want an environmentally
friendly perfumeaftershave bottle and packaging designed to meet the current
market needs You are to design and make a model bottle including the packaging
Career Progression
Or anything in the creative industries
Graphic designer Work in advertising Web designer
Architect Product designer Set designer
Computer game designer Window dresser Magazine editor
Fashion designer Comic book creator Book illustrator
Artist
Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a
range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme
conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)
Content
Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated
situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a
portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are
required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key
skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam
They will study the following subjects at Level 1
Shampoo and condition hair
Blow drying
Contribute to performing and colouring process
Contribute to the development of effective working
relationships
Support the health and safety of the salon
Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas
Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is
complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and
seminars
All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical
assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress
How will they be assessed
They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical
assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on
progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered
individually at different stages throughout the course
There are four areas of assessment
Practical They carry out the skill
Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill
Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit
Online tests
Progression
They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such
as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme
34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and
opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal
subject for you
You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability
to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely
untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills
What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for
History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities
alike It is particularly useful for the following careers
Course Information
The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills
covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of
these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in
the classroom
Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams
almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students
maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two
year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work
Each of the following units is worth 25
Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations
Key topics
bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56
bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)
bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991
Law
Journalism
Television production and research
Advertising
Research
Marketing
Business Management
Accountancy
Archaeology
Museum work
Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939
Key Topics
bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939
bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Holocaust
Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970
Key topics
bull McCarthyism and the Red scare
bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King
bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies
bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)
Representations of History
CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990
36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT
Exam Board OCR
The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-
requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres
and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the
recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students
education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and
employers
Course Information
The course aims to develop
Problem-solving skills through the practical real life
application of ICT to complex problems
The ability to analyse appraise and make critical
judgements about the use of ICT systems
An awareness of the role of ICT in the management
manipulation and dissemination of information
Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with
others
The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and
competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist
tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final
student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms
of ICT problem solving and project management
There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been
completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer
Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc
Assessment
Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two
GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟
equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE
In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students
must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two
mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2
Diploma
Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become
increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics
magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such
as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students
to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages
we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as
they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of
audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-
world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very
relevant and very challenging
Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different
forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is
a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in
a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also
able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in
an organised way
Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to
looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as
bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns
constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe
Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied
interesting and highly rewarding
Coursework
The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall
assessment of the course Students produce three assignments
for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical
Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment
Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical
Production and Evaluation
Assessment
This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is
undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for
the qualification
Recent topics for the examination have included
Soap opera Quiz shows
Action Films The Popular Press
Music magazines
38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning
The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist
learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering
Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills
The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to
broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students
who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical
career within the sector
Progression
The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate
(VRQ) in the appropriate career route
Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using
the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship
framework) in the appropriate route
Potential Job Opportunities
Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder
Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician
Assessment Methods
Multiple Choice Examination
Oral Examination
Portfolio of Evidence
Practical Demonstration Assignment
Practical Examination
Task-based Controlled Assessment
Written Examination
Overall Assessment Method
Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit
The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the
learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test
results
Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing
and ListeningAppraising
Performing (30)
Students perform music throughout the course The two best
recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and
one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any
type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour
time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during
that period
For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental
vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)
a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc
For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an
improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing
a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording
Composing (30)
Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the
exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must
come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed
to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material
to make a new piece out of the old one
ListeningAppraising (40)
Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a
series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final
question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music
played in the exam hall
Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam
The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are
Western Classical Music 1600-1899
Music in the 20th Century
Popular Music in Context
World Music
40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching
research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic
Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not
required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music
classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C
grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas
There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some
they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is
hard work but its good fun too
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC
(EDEXCEL)
The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used
by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the
BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire
assessment is coursework based
Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)
Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the
Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a
portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of
A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links
with others
The Performer‟s role
Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer
Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)
Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students
the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the
equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own
recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves
A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)
including costs
A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it
safely
Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording
techniques
Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what
they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating
various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is
designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to
work in the Music Industry
This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic
Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will
spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software
and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs
The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both
exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both
qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)
Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as
individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily
being assessed on everything at the end of the course
A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction
grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up
with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx
42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will
learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer
software
You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white
photographs
Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based
photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-
journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new
media practice
Assessment
This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home
is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks
There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the
marks
Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SPANISH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
All students have the choice to continue
with Spanish which they have been
studying since Year 7 It would be a wise
choice to continue with Spanish as the
ability to speak a second language is not
only useful but is advantageous in
today‟s world Our closer connection
with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even
a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers
Course Information
The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based
on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage
Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to
communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding
Topics covered are
Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo
Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink
Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo
Free time shopping money new technology sports media
Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo
Home local area and the environment
Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo
School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs
Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and
listening at the end of Year 11
44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2
Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with
the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to
vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport
The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a
range of skills and techniques personal qualities and
attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter
the workplace
Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study
1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction
The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge
and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in
instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning
and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills
2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities
The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire
motivate and improve the performance of a selected target
group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It
encourages students to work in a team situation to organise
plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement
3 Injury in Sport
The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and
their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will
enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries
4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport
The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in
the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and
enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people
(Units to be studied are subject to change)
Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TEXTILES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of
textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The
students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following
areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction
applied textiles and embellished textiles
Assessment and Coursework Balance
In their first year the students will be required to produce two
extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will
follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The
students will work from first hand observations collecting and
developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and
textiles based techniques From this research and developmental
stage students will design and produce a final piece
During the second year students will begin by completing an
extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an
externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted
will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment
will account for 40
The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual
style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they
learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a
more personal response to a theme
Visits
Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources
such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second
year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within
the industry today
Why choose Textiles
Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more
confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level
course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles
The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range
of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior
design styling textiles design and costume design
46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)
Exam Board AQA
Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology
Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three
subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three
separate GCSEs
What are the differences between Triple Science and other
science GCSEs
This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will
be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of
the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award
What are the advantages of studying Triple Science
The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into
bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for
bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge
Who should consider taking Triple Science
Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope
with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a
related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those
students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this
course
The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school
GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics
Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25
Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25
Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25
Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25
Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS
2012 - 2014
Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4
option subjects
Please note
We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If
through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we
cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course
Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012
Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012
Make a record of your choice on the table below before
handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the
Options Information Evening
SUBJECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
Mo
st
De
sire
d
3D Design
Art
Catering
Construction
Dance
Drama
Ethics
Film Studies
French
Geography
Graphics
Hairdressing
History
ICT
Media Studies
Motor Vehicle
Music
Spanish
(Diploma) Sport
Textiles
Triple Sciences
Please tick if you would like to be
considered to do EBacc Please
remember that you need to
include Geography or History and
French or Spanish as your subject
options
Chessington Community College
Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS
Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603
wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk
![Page 2: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a](https://reader035.vdocument.in/reader035/viewer/2022062413/5a76533a7f8b9aa3618d22a0/html5/thumbnails/2.jpg)
2|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TABLE OF CONTENTS
WELCOME FROM THE PRINCIPAL 3
KS4 CURRICULUM 4
QUALIFICATIONS INFORMATION 5
CHOOSING YOUR SUBJECTS 5
MAKING A BALANCED CHOICE 6
WHAT IF I MAKE A WRONG CHOICE 6
THE CORE CURRICULUM
ENGLISH LANGUAGE (GCSE) 9
ENGLISH LITERATURE (GCSE) 11
MATHEMATICS (GCSE) 12
SCIENCE - MODULAR (GCSE DOUBLE AWARD) 13
BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE 14
BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN SPORT 15
THE OPTIONAL CURRICULUM
3 DIMENSIONAL DESIGN (GCSE) 19
ART (GCSE) 20
CATERING (GCSE) 22
CERTIFICATE IN CONSTRUCTION 24
DANCE (BTEC LEVEL 2 FIRST CERTIFICATE IN PERFORMING ARTS) 25
DRAMA (GCSE) 26
ETHICS (GCSE) 27
FILM STUDIES (GCSE) 28
FRENCH (GCSE) 29
GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) 30
GRAPHICS (GCSE) 32
HAIRDRESSING (NVQ) 33
HISTORY (GCSE) 34
ICT (CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2) 36
MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE) 37
MOTOR VEHICLE (NVQ) 38
MUSIC (GCSE) 39
MUSIC (BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE ) 40
PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE) 42
SPANISH (GCSE) 43
SPORT (BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA) 44
TEXTILES (GCSE) 45
TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES) 46
KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS 47
Page|3 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
March 2012
Dear Students and Parents
OPTIONS 2012 - 2014
At this time in Year 9 it is important that we begin to look at the process of making choices
for the courses your sondaughter will take during Key Stage 4 The intention at Chessington
Community College is that each student will continue with the core subjects from the
National Curriculum and then be encouraged to choose further GCSE and BTEC courses that
will meet their needs and aspirations for the future
In designing our KS4 curriculum programme we have tried to take into consideration factors
which will give our students the best opportunity for individual success in their future
examinations The programme and the courses will be fully explained to the students during
their lessons Subject teachers heads of house Mr Winchcombe and Mr Clutterbuck are all
available to give students individual advice In addition each student‟s choice of courses
will be reviewed and where necessary individual interviews to discuss choices will take
place There will also be an Options Information Evening on Thursday 15th March starting at
7pm where both students and parents will have the opportunity to discuss further action
appropriate course selection with heads of faculty and subject teachers
We do hope that you will make full use of the opportunities for discussion and that you will
feel able to contact Mr Winchcombe if you wish to clarify any issue
Once the issue of courses for individual students are settled we look forward to all students
enjoying the challenges provided by Key Stage 4 courses and expect to see them working
hard to achieve the success they deserve
Yours sincerely
R Niedermaier-Reed
Principal
4|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
KS4 Curriculum
At Key Stage 4 students will study a bdquocore‟ which covers a broad and balanced range of
subjects in line with the national curriculum
Students then make 4 choices for the rest of their bdquooptional‟ curriculum
Core
EnglishEnglish Literature 2 GCSEs
Mathematics GCSE
Science 2 GCSE
Sport (BTEC) Equivalent to 2 GCSEs
Social Studies (Pastoral Education)
Optional Curriculum
Triple Science
For those students that have excelled in their KS3 Science we will be offering a third science
Teachers will assess student‟s suitability of course and will interview these students in the
Summer Term
English as an Additional Language (EAL)
Overseas students may speak understand or be literate in more than one language and
may have some experience of English but will require support to acquire fluency in English
and to access the curriculum The EAL course helps these students
Part-time studying at Kingston College
We are offering both a Motor Vehicle Level 1 course and a Hairdressing NVQ Level 1 course
Both these are taught at Kingston College on a Friday and would be equal to 2 Option
choices
Art (GCSE) Hairdressing (NVQ)
Catering (GCSE) History (GCSE)
Construction (City and Guild Certificate) ICT (Cambridge Nationals)
3D Design (GCSE) Media Studies (GCSE)
Dance (BTEC) Music (GCSE and BTEC)
Drama (GCSE) Motor Vehicle (NVQ)
Ethics (GCSE) Spanish (GCSE)
Film studies (GCSE) Sport (BTEC)
French (GCSE) Textiles (GCSE)
Geography (GCSE) Triple Science (GCSE)
Graphics (GCSE)
Page|5 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
Qualifications Information
GCSE
General Certification of Secondary Education GCSEs are taken by most school-leaving age
students They are known as Level 2 qualifications
BTEC
BTECs are work-related qualifications suitable for a wide range of students built to
accommodate the needs of employers and allow progression to university They provide a
practical real-world approach to learning without sacrificing any of the essential subject
theory and are recognised by a large number of organisations in a wide range of sectors
BTECs offer natural progression along a vocational path from and to academic
qualifications and university
Cambrige Nationals
Cambridge Nationals are an exam-free alternative to GCSEs taking a more engaging
practical approach to learning and assessment
NVQ
NVQ is work based awards in England Wales and Northern Ireland that are achieved
through assessment and training
Choosing Your Subjects
The subjects and qualifications you study over Years 10 and 11 will affect how you spend
your time during your next two years at school It could also help set you up for the career or
college course you want later on
To help you decide what to study in Years 10 and 11 start by asking yourself what you enjoy
doing and what you‟re good at You need to think about
What you‟re interested in it could be other cultures and languages writing projects
helping people being outdoors or designing things
What types of activity you enjoy most - working things out and thinking them through
practical activities or artistic options like painting drawing or performing music
What do you want to do as a career
You will then ask yourself whether your choices give you a balanced programme and
whether your choices limit your options once you have completed your Year 11 studies
It is very important that you will seek help and advice about your GCSEs Subject teachers
your Head of House and Form Tutor will be very pleased to discuss any problems with you
We hope that your parents will play an active part in advising you on these important
decisions They can either talk to Staff at the Options Evening on Thursday 15th March 2012
or if required make an appointment to see them
Please remember the following points
Do talk to students who are in Year 10 or 11 about a specific subject you might wish to
study
6|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
Do get all the information you can from this booklet and by asking questions before
deciding on your subjects We provide information about all the subjects offered for study
in Years 10 and 11 on the following pages Please read the course descriptions carefully
Try not to consider only the subjects you need but also the subjects that interest you
Try not to choose a subject just because you like (or dislike) the teacher You may have
different teacher next year
Do think about your skills and how you work and try to match these with the different
demands of the different subjects Subjects have different amount of marks awarded for
examinations and for controlled assessments Do think carefully about how you best work
when making your selection of subjects
Try not to choose a subject simply because it sounds new or unusual Make sure you
understand what is involved in taking this subject
Do NOT fill in the subject request sheet until you are happy that you have made the correct
choices for your needs and interests
Making A Balanced Choice
It is important that you continue to study a variety of courses Not only will this contribute to
your general education it will also mean that doors to a wide number of careers and further
study will remain open to you Do remember to consider the range of skills that your subjects
will provide you with
The English Baccalaureate (EBacc)
The English Baccalaureate which was introduced as a performance measure in 2010
performance table is not a new qualification It is a new certificate that will be awarded to
any student who secures a GCSE Grade C or higher in the following subject
English
Mathematics
2 Sciences (Core and Additional or 2 out of Biology Chemistry and physics)
1 Modern Foreign Language or a Classical Language
1 Humanity (History or Geography)
The subjects included are designed to ensure that all students have the opportunity to study
a broad core of subjects ensuring that doors are not closed off to them in terms of future
progression
We allow all students to opt for subjects to make up the EBacc however we do not make it
compulsory for any student It is important that you choose subjects that you enjoy and are
therefore more likely to secure a good grade in You should also consider your own talents
and aspirations for the future
What if I Make A Wrong Choice We hope this will not happen but if it does then we will interview you and if possible swap
your subject What we have found in the past is that students decide on a subject because
their friends have chosen it and after a time the student realises they don‟t like the subject
therefore do not choose a subject because your friend has chosen it
THE
CORE
CURRICULUM
Page|9 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ENGLISH LANGUAGE (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
The skills of reading writing speaking and listening are of vital importance in many areas
Not only are they essential in many careers they also underpin successful study at all levels
and a proficiency in them can also add immeasurably to an individual‟s general quality of
life
This specification is designed to aid and assess such development and to encourage
learners to be inspired moved and changed by following a broad coherent satisfying and
worthwhile course of study It will prepare learners to make informed decisions about further
learning opportunities and career choices and to use language to participate effectively in
society and employment
Different forms of assessment are appropriate to these different skills and this is recognised in
this specification Reading and Writing are assessed through controlled assessment and in
two externally marked units Speaking and Listening are assessed in a variety of different
situations during the course
Assessment
Written Paper
Unit 1 (20) Studying written language - non-fiction texts (40 Raw Marks 40 UMS)
This unit will test through structured questions the reading of two non-fiction texts Non-
fiction texts may include fact-sheets leaflets letters extracts from autobiographies
biographies diaries advertisements reports articles and digital and multi-modal texts of
various kinds from newspapers and magazines brochures and the internet Visual
material will always be included in the material used
Unit 2 (20) Using written language - information and ideas (40 Raw Marks 40 UMS)
This unit will test transactional and discursive writing through two equally weighted tasks
(20 marks each) Across the two tasks students will be offered opportunities to write for a
range of audiences and purposes adapting style to form and real-life context in for
example letters articles leaflets reviews etc
10|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ENGLISH LANGUAGE (GCSE) continued
Exam Board WJEC
Controlled Assessment
Unit 3 (30) Literary reading and creative writing (80 Raw Marks 60 UMS)
Studying written language extended literary text (15)
Students need to present one assignment which is a sustained response to an extended
text The text must either be a Shakespeare play or one chosen from the GCSE English
Literature external assessment set text lists excluding poetry
Using language creative writing (15)
Students will be required to complete ONE piece of descriptive writing and ONE piece of
narrativeexpressive writing drawn from tasks supplied by WJEC
Unit 4 (30) Spoken language (60 Raw Marks 60 UMS)
Using Language Speaking and Listening (Communicating and adapting language
interacting and responding creating and sustaining roles) (20)
Students will be required to complete at least three Speaking and Listening tasks through
the exploration of ideas texts and issues in scripted and improvised work The three tasks
will cover the following areas
1 Communicating and adapting language
2 Interacting and responding
3 Creating and sustaining roles
Studying spoken language Variations choices change in spoken language (10)
Students will be required to study an aspect of spoken language The assignment will be
a sustained response to their own or others‟ uses of spoken language presented by
recording transcript or recollection
Page|11 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ENGLISH LITERATURE (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
This specification is based on the conviction that the study of literature should centre on an
informed personal response to a range of texts in the genres of prose poetry and drama
Assessment is through controlled assessment and examination Teachers and their students
have some flexibility in the choice of texts to be studied and some overlap with GCSE English
Language is possible and indeed encouraged as it is felt that the study of literature can
greatly enhance a student‟s writing skills and that practising hisher own writing skills can lead
a student to increased enjoyment of and success in reading
Assessment
External Assessment
Unit 1 (35)Prose (different cultures) and poetry (contemporary) (50 Raw Marks 70 UMS)
Section A (21) requires study of a prose text from a different culture It will require
students to answer two questions on the chosen prose text
Section B (14) will consist of a question offering some structure for students to explore
respond to and compare two contemporary unseen poems In preparation for this unit
students will need to study at least fifteen poems in addition to those studied for Unit 3
Unit 2a (40) Literary heritage drama and contemporary prose(60 Raw Marks 80 UMS)
This paper requires study of a drama text from the EnglishIrishWelsh literary heritage and a
contemporary prose text It will require students to answer two questions on each text
OR
Unit 2b Contemporary drama and literary heritage prose (60 Raw Marks 80 UMS)
This paper requires study of a contemporary drama text and a prose text from the English
IrishWelsh literary heritage It will require students to answer two questions on each text
Controlled Assessment
Unit 3 (25) Poetry and drama (literary heritage) (40 Raw Marks 50 UMS)
EnglishIrishWelsh literary heritage Poetry and Shakespeare play Assessment will be based
on a single assignment linking a play by Shakespeare and literary heritage poetry Students
will be required to study a Shakespeare play (not Othello or Much Ado about Nothing) and
a group of thematically linked poems taken from the WJEC poetry collection
Assessment for GCSE English Language and GCSE English Literature is tiered ie externally
assessed componentsunits are targeted at the grade ranges of A-D (Higher Tier) and C-G
(Foundation Tier) while controlled assessments cater for the full range of ability Questions and
tasks will be designed to enable students to demonstrate what they know understand and
can do
Tier Grades Available
Higher A A B C D Foundation C D E F G
Students who narrowly fail to achieve Grade D on the Higher Tier will be awarded Grade E
Students who narrowly fail to achieve Grade D on the Higher Tier will be awarded Grade E
12|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MATHEMATICS (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Mathematics is a compulsory part of the curriculum for all students and currently takes four
lessons per week GCSE Mathematics is a linear course with two written examinations one
with a calculator The course takes a holistic approach and a grade C is available on both
foundation and higher papers
Students should develop knowledge skills and understanding of the content They should be
able to use their knowledge and understanding to make connections between
mathematical concepts and apply them to solve real life problems Functional elements of
mathematics are included in each paper
The course starts formally at the end of year 9 building on the work in years 7 and 8 so a
good start is made to cover the necessary material Students will need to apply themselves
to the tasks in class and complete their homework regularly Mathematics teachers are
available outside of lessons to help students who are finding concepts difficult to understand
and a weekly bdquocatch-up‟ club is available Students are set primarily according to ability but
the attitude to learning is also a factor to be considered when the groupings are made
We offer the opportunity to take GCSE Mathematics in Year 10 and providing satisfactory
results are achieved students may be given the opportunity to start the bdquoA‟ level course or to
take an additional GCSE in statistics
Page|13 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SCIENCE - MODULAR (GCSE DOUBLE AWARD)
Exam Board AQA
There have been some major changes to the GCSE science courses which will begin began in
September 2011 There is now more emphasis on bdquoHow Science Works‟ which means not just
learning the theory but understanding the practical side of science and its relation to the
world in which we live
Science is a core subject and is therefore studied by all students The main areas of science
can be broadly broken into Biology Chemistry and Physics
In addition to the above students will be assessed on their knowledge and understanding of
science through coursework which will be set within stimulating contexts that students should
be able to relate to from their science lessons and their experiences of science on a day to
day basis
Year 10
Students in Year 10 will study six modules as indicated below
These six modules will be assessed by tests which will be taken on three separate occasions
throughout the year The final 25 of the marks will be awarded based on coursework
The majority of Year 10 students will gain the first of their two GCSEs in science at the end of
Year 10
Year 11
The structure of the Year 11 course is similar to that of Year 10 in that Biology Chemistry and
Physics will be studied however students will be assessed by means of three written papers
containing structured questions rather than objective tests
GCSE Science A
Biology 1 25
Chemistry 1 25
Physics 1 25
Centre Assessed Coursework 25
GCSE Science B
Biology 2 25
Chemistry 2 25
Physics 2 25
Centre Assessed Coursework 25
14|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SCIENCE - MODULAR (GCSE DOUBLE AWARD) continued
Exam Board AQA
The coursework component will be assessed in a similar way to Year 10 and will carry the same
proportion of marks
Whilst the new GCSE science course is designed to be more interesting than the existing
course it is likely to be rather more challenging Students will need to work consistently hard in
order to achieve high level grades The course has been designed to ensure that all students
regardless of ability gain a good grounding in science The course is also an excellent
preparation for A level studies
BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENTED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE
(EDEXCEL)
For some students who have found the study of Science difficult at Key Stage 3 a more
accessible course is BTEC Science
Students still study the 3 Science disciplines of Chemistry Biology and Physics but combined
into one course
The advantages of this course are that there is no traditional coursework component it is
assignment based so students who find that the stress of exams causes them to do less well
have the opportunity to achieve their potential It also has a practical approach and no final
exam
The course is the equivalent of 2 GCSEs
Page|15 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN SPORT
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The BTEC Level 2 Extended Certificate offers flexibility and a choice of emphasis through the
optional units It is broadly equivalent to two GCSEs
The course provides students with the opportunity to enter employment in the sport and active
leisure sector or to progress to vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel BTEC Level 3
qualifications in Sport and Sport and Exercise Sciences
The course also gives students the opportunity to develop a range of skills and techniques
personal qualities and attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter the
workplace
1 Fitness Testing and Training
This unit gives students the opportunity to explore the essential fitness requirements and training
methods used to achieve successful sports performance They learn how to accurately
conduct fitness and health tests and use key skills to compare the results against national
standards
2 Practical Sport
The aim of this unit is to develop students‟ knowledge of the rules skills and techniques for one
team and one individual sport through practical application Students will develop their
assessment skills as they observe each other perform and communicate effectively to improve
personal performance
3 Anatomy amp Physiology for Sport
The aim of this unit is to give students a good understanding of the structure and function of
the skeletal muscular cardiovascular and respiratory systems of the human body This will help
students to gain a better idea of how their body works so that they can stay healthy
4 Development of Personal Fitness
This unit can prove invaluable to students who wish to stay fit and healthy in the future
Students learn how to get fit by actively working and developing their training skills so that they
can progess their fitness to higher levels
5 Effects of Exercise on the Body Systems
This unit again develops the students‟ awareness of how all systems of their body respond to
exercise Students learn about the great health benefits which can be achieved
(Units to be studied are subject to change)
THE
OPTIONAL
CURRICULUM
Page|19 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
3 DIMENSIONAL DESIGN (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
If you enjoyed designing and making products in the Design amp Technology workshops during
Years 789 and would like to continue making more complex and detailed products
Course Information
Students will be expected to demonstrate skills and
techniques in the context of their chosen area(s) of study
within Three-Dimensional Design
making appropriate use of colour line tone texture
shape and form decoration scale and proportion
using different approaches to recording images such
as observation analysis expression and imagination
showing in their work the ability to respond to an idea concept
issue theme or brief investigating different ways of working as
appropriate to their chosen area(s) of study within Three-
Dimensional Design showing understanding of the relationship of
form and function
making use of appropriate materials tools and techniques
providing evidence of an understanding of spatial qualities
composition rhythm scale and structure
providing evidence of the use of safe working practices
In Year 10 students will design and make a variety of projects such as a Spice rack Toy Car
and a Hand Trowel using a variety of machines and materials They will gain knowledge and
skills in manufacturing techniques production methods and the design process They will be
able to design products on the computer (CAD) and then cut them out on the new CAM
machine
Assessment
This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home is
presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks There is
also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the marks
Career Progression
Students can continue onto the A Level Product design course at Chessington‟s 6th Form
Alternatively they could pursue a career in an Engineering discipline Construction Product
Design or Architecture
20|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ART (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
All students choosing Art and Design as their option are required to
take the unendorsed examination This allows them to produce
work using a number of different techniques which have been listed
below
Painting and drawing
Graphics
Sculptureconstruction
Photography
Printmaking
A foundation course which gives students experience of all of
these is run during the first two terms
Painting and Drawing
The Painting and Drawing course is structured to enable students
regardless of their ability to build on the skills and techniques
they have learned in their first three years at school and at the same time prepare for a GCSE
examination
Programmes of work will largely be determined by the demands of the examination syllabus
but every effort will be made to structure the course so that it meets the needs of the students
whilst taking into account their wide range of abilities
The Painting and Drawing disciplines will form the basis for most practical activities but
students will be encouraged to experiment with and use as broad a range of approaches as
possible in the preparation and production of coursework
3 Dimensional Studies (Sculpture)
The course is designed to develop the student‟s visual awareness sensitivity and understanding
of the work of Artists involving three dimensions in a contemporary and historical context
Students will be encouraged to develop ideas in preliminary studies through research and
experimentation observational recording and analysis of forms and to produce work in the
form of modelling carving casting construction and assembling The important relationships
between urbanrural landscapes communities and cultures will also be studied as will the
interaction of solid and void forms and shape pattern decoration colour texture scale
structure proportion rhythm movement and the effects of light upon three dimensional
objects
Page|21 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ART (GCSE) continued
Exam Board AQA
Printmaking
Students will be able to experiment with a number of simple methods for producing a printed
image Some of the following will be introduced when appropriate
Lino printing
Card printing
Monoprinting
Polystyrene sheet printing
Screen printing
Assessment
Art and Design requires students to carry out and complete work in their own time in school
and at home Preparation and research are an essential element of the course and the use of
sketchbooks when preparing work is encouraged
Coursework will account for 60 of the marks and externally set assignment will account for
40 of the marks
Visits
Students are encouraged to take part in all visits to Museums Galleries and Exhibitions where
the work on display is considered helpful in supporting coursework studies
Career Progression
Fashion Designer Interior Designer Costume Designer Artist Architect Cartoonist Textile
Designer Model Maker etc
22|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CATERING (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
This single GCSE course is a vocational qualification that is
suitable for those students who have an interest in the Catering
Industry and want a broad background in this area It would
also be a good foundation for those who wish to progress to
further education It will offer valuable preparation for students
who may want to enter the many careers in the Food Industry
Students must have a real interest in food and enjoy cooking
They must be prepared to work hard in order to reach a high
standard of presentation in their practical work
Course Information
Students who take the GCSE Catering course will learn about and demonstrate their
knowledge and understanding of the following areas of study
The industry ndash types of establishments that serve food and drink
Job roles employment opportunities and relevant training
Health safety and hygiene
Food preparation cooking and presentation
Nutrition and menu planning
Costing and portion control
Specialist equipment both small and large scale
Communication and record keeping
Environmental considerations
Students will be expected to supply their own ingredients for practical sessions that will include
the selection storage preparation and serving of
Students will also be expected to purchase a white chef‟s jacket from the College which they
must wear to all practical sessions
Meat and poultry Convenience products
Fish Sauces
Eggs Basic dough products
Dairy products Basic pastry products
Cereals flour rice pasta Cakes sponges and scones
Vegetables and fruit
Page|23 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CATERING (GCSE) continued
Exam Board WJEC
Assessment
Visits
It is hoped that there will be some visits to local restaurants and a catering college Chefs may visit
some lessons to give demonstrations or work with students in practical lessons
Career Progression
Sous Chef Cake Decorator Junior Kitchen Assistant WaitressWaiter Nutritionist Dietician Food
Technologist Baker etc
60 of the final grade will come from 2
practical tasks where students must show
catering skills related to food preparation and
service
Each task must be accompanied by a folder
of notes that cover the investigation planning
and evaluation of the task
Task 1 (15 hours) will take place in Year 10
Task 2 (30 hours) will take place in Year 11
40 of the final grade will come from a
written examination paper (1 frac14 hours) on
Catering food and the customer
This will be taken at the end of Year 11
24|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CERTIFICATE IN CONSTRUCTION
Exam Board CITY amp GUILDS
This course is ideal for all students who are considering
a career in any part of the construction or building
industry It is of benefit weather they are considering a
craft or management position
Course Information
Students study for six periods a week and in the first
year concentrate on basic building skills
Carpentry
Electrics
Plumbing
Bricklaying
Health and safety
Site management
This is done through the City and Guilds Introductory Certificate in Basic Construction Skills in which
eight practical tasks must be passed and one theoretical on line test
The second year allows students to develop along their chosen path either developing their craft
skills or moving towards a professional career via the Diplomas in Construction and the Built
Environment This would be an ideal path for those considering a career in
Building management
Architecture
Town planning
Surveying
Engineering
Building control
Environmentalist
Landscape Architecture
Those students not considering a professional career would expand their skills in chosen areas
through further City and Guilds qualifications
Page|25 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 FIRST CERTIFICATE IN PERFORMING ARTS DANCE
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Students will look at FIVE different units in order to achieve a
qualification on this course
The most appropriate units can be selected according to
the individual needs of each group from the following list
Performing Dance
The Development of Dance
Working in the Performing Arts Industry
Professional Development in the Performing Arts
Industry
Understanding Dance
Contemporary Dance
Jazz Dance
Musical Theatre
Makeup for Performers
There is a significant emphasis on Choreographic and
performance skills throughout each unit and students will
be expected to
Learn set dances
Learn dance vocabulary
Choreograph solo duo and small group dances
Improve their performance and technical skills
Perform in front of their peers and a broader based audience
See professionals at work
Write reviews of works
Study the effect of costume set design and props
Look at the cultural and historical context of dances they view
The course is internally assessed throughout by the teacher and students are informally
assessed during every lesson Students will also be assessed more formally through
Assignments which meet the criteria for each Unit These are marked by the teacher and
internally verified by another specialist teacher to ensure that they are of the highest quality
Students opting for this course must understand that to achieve a good grade at BTEC they
have to have a love of making up (choreographing) and performing dances to others They
must also have some basic dance ability such as being able to move in time with the music
Students will need to work in bare feet for much of this course
Students who enjoy all aspects of dance and movement and have the confidence to perform
to a small audience will be well suited to this course Students will be expected to work in their
own time after school to perfect their dances and complete Assignment briefs They should
also be happy to work in a range of different dance styles and not just one particular style
26|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
DRAMA (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
GCSE Drama is an exciting and practical course which offers opportunities to become a skilled
and confident performer
The course aims to encourage students to develop
an interest in and understanding of a range of
drama and theatre experiences
increased self and group awareness
imaginative creative communication and
social skills
a love and appreciation of attending a range of
live theatre experiences
The course consists of two parts
Coursework 60
Two of the following options only one of which may be a technicaldesign skill
Devised thematic work for performance to an audience
Acting
Improvisation
Theatre in Education presentation
Dancedrama
Set
Costume
Make-up
Properties
Masks
Puppets
Lighting
Sound
Stage management
Each option is assessed through two parts
Part One A mark awarded for group and communication skills
Part Two A mark awarded for the final performance
Written Paper 40
2 hours
A choice of any two questions based on the following sections
A Set play bdquoAnimal Farm‟
B Response to live productions seen during the course
Page|27 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ETHICS (GCSE)
Exam Board OCR
The bdquoPhilosophy and Ethics‟ GCSE will allow students to explore the fundamental questions
about life and existence encourage their personal social and cultural development and
enhance their understanding of different cultures and belief systems
Over the course of the two years students will study important and thought-provoking issues
such as the nature and existence of God good and evil and the conflict between religion
and science relationships poverty and medical ethics peace and justice and the role of the
media in today‟s world It is a broad satisfying and worthwhile course of study designed to
challenge and stimulate students and equip them with the necessary skills to lead constructive
and thoughtful lives in the modern world
28|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
FILM STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
ldquoThe secret to film is that its an illusionrdquo
George Lucas Director of Star Wars
This course is ideal for any student who is
Able to work independently or as part of a team
Creative and practical but also analytical
Enthusiastic about films
Interested in making their own short films
Over the two years students will
Plan storyboard film and edit a short film working in a small
group adding their own music and special effects
Understand how films are made and promoted
Learn about the business of making films
Make a close study of one genre of Hollywood films (currently Disaster Films)
Closely research and study at least two different non-Hollywood Films (made in Britain
Europe or Africa)
Prepare their own film promotion campaign
Write an in-depth analysis of films of their choice
Assessment is through
A portfolio of coursework and also
Two end of course examinations
Although it is a new course Film Studies is already a popular choice for many students
combining well with the Media study in English as well as Media
Studies itself Film Studies is increasingly well
thought of by many colleges as it combines
a practical creative approach with
analytical skills
From Citizen Kane to Inception
Page|29 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
FRENCH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
The course outline for French is similar to Spanish It is not compulsory to have previous
knowledge of the language before starting the course but you need to be aware that it will
be more challenging for you and you need to put in a lot of effort to succeed However it is
not at all impossible
30|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GEOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Geography is a fascinating and wide-reaching subject and it has been shown that students
with Geography qualifications are some of the most employable
Why you should take Geography GCSE
It provides you with an understanding of global issues which will affect our lives now and
in the future
By the end of their GCSE you will have a better understanding of the way the world
works
Geography is a good link between the arts and sciences so it will help you in their other
subjects
You will understand how physical landscapes (eg rivers coasts mountains) are formed
You will be allowed to express opinions about people and places
Geography includes a range of academic skills that you will use in your future studies
Skills gained from Geography include
How to research and to investigate
Problem solving
Real world numeracy
How to collect record present and analyse data
Map reading
Creative thinking
How to write in an essay style and in a scientific style
Empathy and understanding of others
Topics of study will include
How are natural landscapes formed and how can we manage
them
What causes and how can we manage natural hazards
How do weather and climate work
How can we manage population around the world
How do towns and cities expand and how are they managed
How and why are some places rich whilst others are poor
How can we ensure development of global resources is sustainable
Page|31 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board AQA
Career Links (As printed by the Royal Geographical Society)
How is the course assessed
GCSE Geography is assessed by two written Examinations (75) and by Coursework (25) in
the form of a Controlled Assessment
Fieldwork at the South Coast and elsewhere is an essential part of this course
Travel and tourist industry
Travel Guide Researcher
Property Researcher
Lawyers
Senior Researcher for County
Council
Government Statistician
TV Locations Unit
Business Consultants
Planners
32|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GRAPHICS (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
If you are interested in the world of advertising like
developing logos and posters always have an interest in
the covers of DVDs books amp games and really enjoy
making products then this is the course for you
Course Information
A large part of the course is a practical investigation
into the techniques and materials used in the
advertising and packaging we see around us every
day
Students will develop skills in drawing both free hand and using computer aided design
model making printing techniques logo designing greetings card and popup book
design and build up skills to design DVD covers labels and posters
To be able to present this to an industrial standard students will use desktop publishing
software such as GIMP (a variation of Photoshop) and computer aided design packages
such as Google Sketchup 2D Design and Fireworks They will get the chance to use the
new computer aided manufacturing milling machine to design and make work like
models signs and games
Assessment
Students will complete a major project and portfolio that counts towards 60 of the overall
GCSE grade Previous projects have included creating a popup book producing
promotional material for the Olympics designing the identity and packaging for a new band
and making a travel game for children
Externally set assignment by the Exam board will account for 40 The typical brief might look
like this
A leading perfumeaftershave manufacturer are aware that the environment is a
current issue The general public are concerned about so want an environmentally
friendly perfumeaftershave bottle and packaging designed to meet the current
market needs You are to design and make a model bottle including the packaging
Career Progression
Or anything in the creative industries
Graphic designer Work in advertising Web designer
Architect Product designer Set designer
Computer game designer Window dresser Magazine editor
Fashion designer Comic book creator Book illustrator
Artist
Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a
range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme
conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)
Content
Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated
situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a
portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are
required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key
skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam
They will study the following subjects at Level 1
Shampoo and condition hair
Blow drying
Contribute to performing and colouring process
Contribute to the development of effective working
relationships
Support the health and safety of the salon
Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas
Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is
complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and
seminars
All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical
assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress
How will they be assessed
They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical
assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on
progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered
individually at different stages throughout the course
There are four areas of assessment
Practical They carry out the skill
Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill
Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit
Online tests
Progression
They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such
as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme
34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and
opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal
subject for you
You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability
to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely
untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills
What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for
History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities
alike It is particularly useful for the following careers
Course Information
The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills
covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of
these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in
the classroom
Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams
almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students
maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two
year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work
Each of the following units is worth 25
Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations
Key topics
bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56
bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)
bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991
Law
Journalism
Television production and research
Advertising
Research
Marketing
Business Management
Accountancy
Archaeology
Museum work
Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939
Key Topics
bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939
bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Holocaust
Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970
Key topics
bull McCarthyism and the Red scare
bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King
bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies
bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)
Representations of History
CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990
36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT
Exam Board OCR
The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-
requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres
and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the
recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students
education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and
employers
Course Information
The course aims to develop
Problem-solving skills through the practical real life
application of ICT to complex problems
The ability to analyse appraise and make critical
judgements about the use of ICT systems
An awareness of the role of ICT in the management
manipulation and dissemination of information
Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with
others
The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and
competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist
tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final
student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms
of ICT problem solving and project management
There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been
completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer
Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc
Assessment
Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two
GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟
equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE
In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students
must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two
mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2
Diploma
Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become
increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics
magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such
as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students
to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages
we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as
they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of
audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-
world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very
relevant and very challenging
Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different
forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is
a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in
a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also
able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in
an organised way
Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to
looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as
bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns
constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe
Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied
interesting and highly rewarding
Coursework
The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall
assessment of the course Students produce three assignments
for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical
Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment
Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical
Production and Evaluation
Assessment
This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is
undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for
the qualification
Recent topics for the examination have included
Soap opera Quiz shows
Action Films The Popular Press
Music magazines
38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning
The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist
learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering
Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills
The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to
broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students
who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical
career within the sector
Progression
The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate
(VRQ) in the appropriate career route
Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using
the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship
framework) in the appropriate route
Potential Job Opportunities
Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder
Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician
Assessment Methods
Multiple Choice Examination
Oral Examination
Portfolio of Evidence
Practical Demonstration Assignment
Practical Examination
Task-based Controlled Assessment
Written Examination
Overall Assessment Method
Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit
The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the
learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test
results
Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing
and ListeningAppraising
Performing (30)
Students perform music throughout the course The two best
recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and
one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any
type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour
time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during
that period
For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental
vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)
a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc
For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an
improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing
a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording
Composing (30)
Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the
exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must
come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed
to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material
to make a new piece out of the old one
ListeningAppraising (40)
Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a
series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final
question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music
played in the exam hall
Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam
The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are
Western Classical Music 1600-1899
Music in the 20th Century
Popular Music in Context
World Music
40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching
research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic
Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not
required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music
classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C
grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas
There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some
they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is
hard work but its good fun too
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC
(EDEXCEL)
The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used
by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the
BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire
assessment is coursework based
Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)
Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the
Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a
portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of
A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links
with others
The Performer‟s role
Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer
Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)
Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students
the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the
equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own
recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves
A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)
including costs
A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it
safely
Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording
techniques
Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what
they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating
various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is
designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to
work in the Music Industry
This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic
Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will
spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software
and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs
The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both
exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both
qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)
Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as
individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily
being assessed on everything at the end of the course
A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction
grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up
with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx
42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will
learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer
software
You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white
photographs
Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based
photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-
journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new
media practice
Assessment
This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home
is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks
There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the
marks
Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SPANISH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
All students have the choice to continue
with Spanish which they have been
studying since Year 7 It would be a wise
choice to continue with Spanish as the
ability to speak a second language is not
only useful but is advantageous in
today‟s world Our closer connection
with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even
a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers
Course Information
The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based
on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage
Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to
communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding
Topics covered are
Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo
Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink
Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo
Free time shopping money new technology sports media
Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo
Home local area and the environment
Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo
School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs
Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and
listening at the end of Year 11
44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2
Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with
the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to
vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport
The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a
range of skills and techniques personal qualities and
attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter
the workplace
Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study
1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction
The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge
and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in
instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning
and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills
2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities
The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire
motivate and improve the performance of a selected target
group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It
encourages students to work in a team situation to organise
plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement
3 Injury in Sport
The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and
their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will
enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries
4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport
The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in
the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and
enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people
(Units to be studied are subject to change)
Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TEXTILES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of
textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The
students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following
areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction
applied textiles and embellished textiles
Assessment and Coursework Balance
In their first year the students will be required to produce two
extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will
follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The
students will work from first hand observations collecting and
developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and
textiles based techniques From this research and developmental
stage students will design and produce a final piece
During the second year students will begin by completing an
extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an
externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted
will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment
will account for 40
The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual
style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they
learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a
more personal response to a theme
Visits
Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources
such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second
year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within
the industry today
Why choose Textiles
Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more
confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level
course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles
The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range
of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior
design styling textiles design and costume design
46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)
Exam Board AQA
Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology
Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three
subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three
separate GCSEs
What are the differences between Triple Science and other
science GCSEs
This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will
be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of
the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award
What are the advantages of studying Triple Science
The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into
bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for
bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge
Who should consider taking Triple Science
Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope
with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a
related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those
students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this
course
The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school
GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics
Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25
Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25
Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25
Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25
Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS
2012 - 2014
Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4
option subjects
Please note
We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If
through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we
cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course
Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012
Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012
Make a record of your choice on the table below before
handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the
Options Information Evening
SUBJECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
Mo
st
De
sire
d
3D Design
Art
Catering
Construction
Dance
Drama
Ethics
Film Studies
French
Geography
Graphics
Hairdressing
History
ICT
Media Studies
Motor Vehicle
Music
Spanish
(Diploma) Sport
Textiles
Triple Sciences
Please tick if you would like to be
considered to do EBacc Please
remember that you need to
include Geography or History and
French or Spanish as your subject
options
Chessington Community College
Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS
Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603
wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk
![Page 3: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a](https://reader035.vdocument.in/reader035/viewer/2022062413/5a76533a7f8b9aa3618d22a0/html5/thumbnails/3.jpg)
Page|3 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
March 2012
Dear Students and Parents
OPTIONS 2012 - 2014
At this time in Year 9 it is important that we begin to look at the process of making choices
for the courses your sondaughter will take during Key Stage 4 The intention at Chessington
Community College is that each student will continue with the core subjects from the
National Curriculum and then be encouraged to choose further GCSE and BTEC courses that
will meet their needs and aspirations for the future
In designing our KS4 curriculum programme we have tried to take into consideration factors
which will give our students the best opportunity for individual success in their future
examinations The programme and the courses will be fully explained to the students during
their lessons Subject teachers heads of house Mr Winchcombe and Mr Clutterbuck are all
available to give students individual advice In addition each student‟s choice of courses
will be reviewed and where necessary individual interviews to discuss choices will take
place There will also be an Options Information Evening on Thursday 15th March starting at
7pm where both students and parents will have the opportunity to discuss further action
appropriate course selection with heads of faculty and subject teachers
We do hope that you will make full use of the opportunities for discussion and that you will
feel able to contact Mr Winchcombe if you wish to clarify any issue
Once the issue of courses for individual students are settled we look forward to all students
enjoying the challenges provided by Key Stage 4 courses and expect to see them working
hard to achieve the success they deserve
Yours sincerely
R Niedermaier-Reed
Principal
4|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
KS4 Curriculum
At Key Stage 4 students will study a bdquocore‟ which covers a broad and balanced range of
subjects in line with the national curriculum
Students then make 4 choices for the rest of their bdquooptional‟ curriculum
Core
EnglishEnglish Literature 2 GCSEs
Mathematics GCSE
Science 2 GCSE
Sport (BTEC) Equivalent to 2 GCSEs
Social Studies (Pastoral Education)
Optional Curriculum
Triple Science
For those students that have excelled in their KS3 Science we will be offering a third science
Teachers will assess student‟s suitability of course and will interview these students in the
Summer Term
English as an Additional Language (EAL)
Overseas students may speak understand or be literate in more than one language and
may have some experience of English but will require support to acquire fluency in English
and to access the curriculum The EAL course helps these students
Part-time studying at Kingston College
We are offering both a Motor Vehicle Level 1 course and a Hairdressing NVQ Level 1 course
Both these are taught at Kingston College on a Friday and would be equal to 2 Option
choices
Art (GCSE) Hairdressing (NVQ)
Catering (GCSE) History (GCSE)
Construction (City and Guild Certificate) ICT (Cambridge Nationals)
3D Design (GCSE) Media Studies (GCSE)
Dance (BTEC) Music (GCSE and BTEC)
Drama (GCSE) Motor Vehicle (NVQ)
Ethics (GCSE) Spanish (GCSE)
Film studies (GCSE) Sport (BTEC)
French (GCSE) Textiles (GCSE)
Geography (GCSE) Triple Science (GCSE)
Graphics (GCSE)
Page|5 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
Qualifications Information
GCSE
General Certification of Secondary Education GCSEs are taken by most school-leaving age
students They are known as Level 2 qualifications
BTEC
BTECs are work-related qualifications suitable for a wide range of students built to
accommodate the needs of employers and allow progression to university They provide a
practical real-world approach to learning without sacrificing any of the essential subject
theory and are recognised by a large number of organisations in a wide range of sectors
BTECs offer natural progression along a vocational path from and to academic
qualifications and university
Cambrige Nationals
Cambridge Nationals are an exam-free alternative to GCSEs taking a more engaging
practical approach to learning and assessment
NVQ
NVQ is work based awards in England Wales and Northern Ireland that are achieved
through assessment and training
Choosing Your Subjects
The subjects and qualifications you study over Years 10 and 11 will affect how you spend
your time during your next two years at school It could also help set you up for the career or
college course you want later on
To help you decide what to study in Years 10 and 11 start by asking yourself what you enjoy
doing and what you‟re good at You need to think about
What you‟re interested in it could be other cultures and languages writing projects
helping people being outdoors or designing things
What types of activity you enjoy most - working things out and thinking them through
practical activities or artistic options like painting drawing or performing music
What do you want to do as a career
You will then ask yourself whether your choices give you a balanced programme and
whether your choices limit your options once you have completed your Year 11 studies
It is very important that you will seek help and advice about your GCSEs Subject teachers
your Head of House and Form Tutor will be very pleased to discuss any problems with you
We hope that your parents will play an active part in advising you on these important
decisions They can either talk to Staff at the Options Evening on Thursday 15th March 2012
or if required make an appointment to see them
Please remember the following points
Do talk to students who are in Year 10 or 11 about a specific subject you might wish to
study
6|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
Do get all the information you can from this booklet and by asking questions before
deciding on your subjects We provide information about all the subjects offered for study
in Years 10 and 11 on the following pages Please read the course descriptions carefully
Try not to consider only the subjects you need but also the subjects that interest you
Try not to choose a subject just because you like (or dislike) the teacher You may have
different teacher next year
Do think about your skills and how you work and try to match these with the different
demands of the different subjects Subjects have different amount of marks awarded for
examinations and for controlled assessments Do think carefully about how you best work
when making your selection of subjects
Try not to choose a subject simply because it sounds new or unusual Make sure you
understand what is involved in taking this subject
Do NOT fill in the subject request sheet until you are happy that you have made the correct
choices for your needs and interests
Making A Balanced Choice
It is important that you continue to study a variety of courses Not only will this contribute to
your general education it will also mean that doors to a wide number of careers and further
study will remain open to you Do remember to consider the range of skills that your subjects
will provide you with
The English Baccalaureate (EBacc)
The English Baccalaureate which was introduced as a performance measure in 2010
performance table is not a new qualification It is a new certificate that will be awarded to
any student who secures a GCSE Grade C or higher in the following subject
English
Mathematics
2 Sciences (Core and Additional or 2 out of Biology Chemistry and physics)
1 Modern Foreign Language or a Classical Language
1 Humanity (History or Geography)
The subjects included are designed to ensure that all students have the opportunity to study
a broad core of subjects ensuring that doors are not closed off to them in terms of future
progression
We allow all students to opt for subjects to make up the EBacc however we do not make it
compulsory for any student It is important that you choose subjects that you enjoy and are
therefore more likely to secure a good grade in You should also consider your own talents
and aspirations for the future
What if I Make A Wrong Choice We hope this will not happen but if it does then we will interview you and if possible swap
your subject What we have found in the past is that students decide on a subject because
their friends have chosen it and after a time the student realises they don‟t like the subject
therefore do not choose a subject because your friend has chosen it
THE
CORE
CURRICULUM
Page|9 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ENGLISH LANGUAGE (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
The skills of reading writing speaking and listening are of vital importance in many areas
Not only are they essential in many careers they also underpin successful study at all levels
and a proficiency in them can also add immeasurably to an individual‟s general quality of
life
This specification is designed to aid and assess such development and to encourage
learners to be inspired moved and changed by following a broad coherent satisfying and
worthwhile course of study It will prepare learners to make informed decisions about further
learning opportunities and career choices and to use language to participate effectively in
society and employment
Different forms of assessment are appropriate to these different skills and this is recognised in
this specification Reading and Writing are assessed through controlled assessment and in
two externally marked units Speaking and Listening are assessed in a variety of different
situations during the course
Assessment
Written Paper
Unit 1 (20) Studying written language - non-fiction texts (40 Raw Marks 40 UMS)
This unit will test through structured questions the reading of two non-fiction texts Non-
fiction texts may include fact-sheets leaflets letters extracts from autobiographies
biographies diaries advertisements reports articles and digital and multi-modal texts of
various kinds from newspapers and magazines brochures and the internet Visual
material will always be included in the material used
Unit 2 (20) Using written language - information and ideas (40 Raw Marks 40 UMS)
This unit will test transactional and discursive writing through two equally weighted tasks
(20 marks each) Across the two tasks students will be offered opportunities to write for a
range of audiences and purposes adapting style to form and real-life context in for
example letters articles leaflets reviews etc
10|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ENGLISH LANGUAGE (GCSE) continued
Exam Board WJEC
Controlled Assessment
Unit 3 (30) Literary reading and creative writing (80 Raw Marks 60 UMS)
Studying written language extended literary text (15)
Students need to present one assignment which is a sustained response to an extended
text The text must either be a Shakespeare play or one chosen from the GCSE English
Literature external assessment set text lists excluding poetry
Using language creative writing (15)
Students will be required to complete ONE piece of descriptive writing and ONE piece of
narrativeexpressive writing drawn from tasks supplied by WJEC
Unit 4 (30) Spoken language (60 Raw Marks 60 UMS)
Using Language Speaking and Listening (Communicating and adapting language
interacting and responding creating and sustaining roles) (20)
Students will be required to complete at least three Speaking and Listening tasks through
the exploration of ideas texts and issues in scripted and improvised work The three tasks
will cover the following areas
1 Communicating and adapting language
2 Interacting and responding
3 Creating and sustaining roles
Studying spoken language Variations choices change in spoken language (10)
Students will be required to study an aspect of spoken language The assignment will be
a sustained response to their own or others‟ uses of spoken language presented by
recording transcript or recollection
Page|11 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ENGLISH LITERATURE (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
This specification is based on the conviction that the study of literature should centre on an
informed personal response to a range of texts in the genres of prose poetry and drama
Assessment is through controlled assessment and examination Teachers and their students
have some flexibility in the choice of texts to be studied and some overlap with GCSE English
Language is possible and indeed encouraged as it is felt that the study of literature can
greatly enhance a student‟s writing skills and that practising hisher own writing skills can lead
a student to increased enjoyment of and success in reading
Assessment
External Assessment
Unit 1 (35)Prose (different cultures) and poetry (contemporary) (50 Raw Marks 70 UMS)
Section A (21) requires study of a prose text from a different culture It will require
students to answer two questions on the chosen prose text
Section B (14) will consist of a question offering some structure for students to explore
respond to and compare two contemporary unseen poems In preparation for this unit
students will need to study at least fifteen poems in addition to those studied for Unit 3
Unit 2a (40) Literary heritage drama and contemporary prose(60 Raw Marks 80 UMS)
This paper requires study of a drama text from the EnglishIrishWelsh literary heritage and a
contemporary prose text It will require students to answer two questions on each text
OR
Unit 2b Contemporary drama and literary heritage prose (60 Raw Marks 80 UMS)
This paper requires study of a contemporary drama text and a prose text from the English
IrishWelsh literary heritage It will require students to answer two questions on each text
Controlled Assessment
Unit 3 (25) Poetry and drama (literary heritage) (40 Raw Marks 50 UMS)
EnglishIrishWelsh literary heritage Poetry and Shakespeare play Assessment will be based
on a single assignment linking a play by Shakespeare and literary heritage poetry Students
will be required to study a Shakespeare play (not Othello or Much Ado about Nothing) and
a group of thematically linked poems taken from the WJEC poetry collection
Assessment for GCSE English Language and GCSE English Literature is tiered ie externally
assessed componentsunits are targeted at the grade ranges of A-D (Higher Tier) and C-G
(Foundation Tier) while controlled assessments cater for the full range of ability Questions and
tasks will be designed to enable students to demonstrate what they know understand and
can do
Tier Grades Available
Higher A A B C D Foundation C D E F G
Students who narrowly fail to achieve Grade D on the Higher Tier will be awarded Grade E
Students who narrowly fail to achieve Grade D on the Higher Tier will be awarded Grade E
12|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MATHEMATICS (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Mathematics is a compulsory part of the curriculum for all students and currently takes four
lessons per week GCSE Mathematics is a linear course with two written examinations one
with a calculator The course takes a holistic approach and a grade C is available on both
foundation and higher papers
Students should develop knowledge skills and understanding of the content They should be
able to use their knowledge and understanding to make connections between
mathematical concepts and apply them to solve real life problems Functional elements of
mathematics are included in each paper
The course starts formally at the end of year 9 building on the work in years 7 and 8 so a
good start is made to cover the necessary material Students will need to apply themselves
to the tasks in class and complete their homework regularly Mathematics teachers are
available outside of lessons to help students who are finding concepts difficult to understand
and a weekly bdquocatch-up‟ club is available Students are set primarily according to ability but
the attitude to learning is also a factor to be considered when the groupings are made
We offer the opportunity to take GCSE Mathematics in Year 10 and providing satisfactory
results are achieved students may be given the opportunity to start the bdquoA‟ level course or to
take an additional GCSE in statistics
Page|13 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SCIENCE - MODULAR (GCSE DOUBLE AWARD)
Exam Board AQA
There have been some major changes to the GCSE science courses which will begin began in
September 2011 There is now more emphasis on bdquoHow Science Works‟ which means not just
learning the theory but understanding the practical side of science and its relation to the
world in which we live
Science is a core subject and is therefore studied by all students The main areas of science
can be broadly broken into Biology Chemistry and Physics
In addition to the above students will be assessed on their knowledge and understanding of
science through coursework which will be set within stimulating contexts that students should
be able to relate to from their science lessons and their experiences of science on a day to
day basis
Year 10
Students in Year 10 will study six modules as indicated below
These six modules will be assessed by tests which will be taken on three separate occasions
throughout the year The final 25 of the marks will be awarded based on coursework
The majority of Year 10 students will gain the first of their two GCSEs in science at the end of
Year 10
Year 11
The structure of the Year 11 course is similar to that of Year 10 in that Biology Chemistry and
Physics will be studied however students will be assessed by means of three written papers
containing structured questions rather than objective tests
GCSE Science A
Biology 1 25
Chemistry 1 25
Physics 1 25
Centre Assessed Coursework 25
GCSE Science B
Biology 2 25
Chemistry 2 25
Physics 2 25
Centre Assessed Coursework 25
14|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SCIENCE - MODULAR (GCSE DOUBLE AWARD) continued
Exam Board AQA
The coursework component will be assessed in a similar way to Year 10 and will carry the same
proportion of marks
Whilst the new GCSE science course is designed to be more interesting than the existing
course it is likely to be rather more challenging Students will need to work consistently hard in
order to achieve high level grades The course has been designed to ensure that all students
regardless of ability gain a good grounding in science The course is also an excellent
preparation for A level studies
BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENTED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE
(EDEXCEL)
For some students who have found the study of Science difficult at Key Stage 3 a more
accessible course is BTEC Science
Students still study the 3 Science disciplines of Chemistry Biology and Physics but combined
into one course
The advantages of this course are that there is no traditional coursework component it is
assignment based so students who find that the stress of exams causes them to do less well
have the opportunity to achieve their potential It also has a practical approach and no final
exam
The course is the equivalent of 2 GCSEs
Page|15 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN SPORT
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The BTEC Level 2 Extended Certificate offers flexibility and a choice of emphasis through the
optional units It is broadly equivalent to two GCSEs
The course provides students with the opportunity to enter employment in the sport and active
leisure sector or to progress to vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel BTEC Level 3
qualifications in Sport and Sport and Exercise Sciences
The course also gives students the opportunity to develop a range of skills and techniques
personal qualities and attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter the
workplace
1 Fitness Testing and Training
This unit gives students the opportunity to explore the essential fitness requirements and training
methods used to achieve successful sports performance They learn how to accurately
conduct fitness and health tests and use key skills to compare the results against national
standards
2 Practical Sport
The aim of this unit is to develop students‟ knowledge of the rules skills and techniques for one
team and one individual sport through practical application Students will develop their
assessment skills as they observe each other perform and communicate effectively to improve
personal performance
3 Anatomy amp Physiology for Sport
The aim of this unit is to give students a good understanding of the structure and function of
the skeletal muscular cardiovascular and respiratory systems of the human body This will help
students to gain a better idea of how their body works so that they can stay healthy
4 Development of Personal Fitness
This unit can prove invaluable to students who wish to stay fit and healthy in the future
Students learn how to get fit by actively working and developing their training skills so that they
can progess their fitness to higher levels
5 Effects of Exercise on the Body Systems
This unit again develops the students‟ awareness of how all systems of their body respond to
exercise Students learn about the great health benefits which can be achieved
(Units to be studied are subject to change)
THE
OPTIONAL
CURRICULUM
Page|19 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
3 DIMENSIONAL DESIGN (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
If you enjoyed designing and making products in the Design amp Technology workshops during
Years 789 and would like to continue making more complex and detailed products
Course Information
Students will be expected to demonstrate skills and
techniques in the context of their chosen area(s) of study
within Three-Dimensional Design
making appropriate use of colour line tone texture
shape and form decoration scale and proportion
using different approaches to recording images such
as observation analysis expression and imagination
showing in their work the ability to respond to an idea concept
issue theme or brief investigating different ways of working as
appropriate to their chosen area(s) of study within Three-
Dimensional Design showing understanding of the relationship of
form and function
making use of appropriate materials tools and techniques
providing evidence of an understanding of spatial qualities
composition rhythm scale and structure
providing evidence of the use of safe working practices
In Year 10 students will design and make a variety of projects such as a Spice rack Toy Car
and a Hand Trowel using a variety of machines and materials They will gain knowledge and
skills in manufacturing techniques production methods and the design process They will be
able to design products on the computer (CAD) and then cut them out on the new CAM
machine
Assessment
This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home is
presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks There is
also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the marks
Career Progression
Students can continue onto the A Level Product design course at Chessington‟s 6th Form
Alternatively they could pursue a career in an Engineering discipline Construction Product
Design or Architecture
20|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ART (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
All students choosing Art and Design as their option are required to
take the unendorsed examination This allows them to produce
work using a number of different techniques which have been listed
below
Painting and drawing
Graphics
Sculptureconstruction
Photography
Printmaking
A foundation course which gives students experience of all of
these is run during the first two terms
Painting and Drawing
The Painting and Drawing course is structured to enable students
regardless of their ability to build on the skills and techniques
they have learned in their first three years at school and at the same time prepare for a GCSE
examination
Programmes of work will largely be determined by the demands of the examination syllabus
but every effort will be made to structure the course so that it meets the needs of the students
whilst taking into account their wide range of abilities
The Painting and Drawing disciplines will form the basis for most practical activities but
students will be encouraged to experiment with and use as broad a range of approaches as
possible in the preparation and production of coursework
3 Dimensional Studies (Sculpture)
The course is designed to develop the student‟s visual awareness sensitivity and understanding
of the work of Artists involving three dimensions in a contemporary and historical context
Students will be encouraged to develop ideas in preliminary studies through research and
experimentation observational recording and analysis of forms and to produce work in the
form of modelling carving casting construction and assembling The important relationships
between urbanrural landscapes communities and cultures will also be studied as will the
interaction of solid and void forms and shape pattern decoration colour texture scale
structure proportion rhythm movement and the effects of light upon three dimensional
objects
Page|21 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ART (GCSE) continued
Exam Board AQA
Printmaking
Students will be able to experiment with a number of simple methods for producing a printed
image Some of the following will be introduced when appropriate
Lino printing
Card printing
Monoprinting
Polystyrene sheet printing
Screen printing
Assessment
Art and Design requires students to carry out and complete work in their own time in school
and at home Preparation and research are an essential element of the course and the use of
sketchbooks when preparing work is encouraged
Coursework will account for 60 of the marks and externally set assignment will account for
40 of the marks
Visits
Students are encouraged to take part in all visits to Museums Galleries and Exhibitions where
the work on display is considered helpful in supporting coursework studies
Career Progression
Fashion Designer Interior Designer Costume Designer Artist Architect Cartoonist Textile
Designer Model Maker etc
22|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CATERING (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
This single GCSE course is a vocational qualification that is
suitable for those students who have an interest in the Catering
Industry and want a broad background in this area It would
also be a good foundation for those who wish to progress to
further education It will offer valuable preparation for students
who may want to enter the many careers in the Food Industry
Students must have a real interest in food and enjoy cooking
They must be prepared to work hard in order to reach a high
standard of presentation in their practical work
Course Information
Students who take the GCSE Catering course will learn about and demonstrate their
knowledge and understanding of the following areas of study
The industry ndash types of establishments that serve food and drink
Job roles employment opportunities and relevant training
Health safety and hygiene
Food preparation cooking and presentation
Nutrition and menu planning
Costing and portion control
Specialist equipment both small and large scale
Communication and record keeping
Environmental considerations
Students will be expected to supply their own ingredients for practical sessions that will include
the selection storage preparation and serving of
Students will also be expected to purchase a white chef‟s jacket from the College which they
must wear to all practical sessions
Meat and poultry Convenience products
Fish Sauces
Eggs Basic dough products
Dairy products Basic pastry products
Cereals flour rice pasta Cakes sponges and scones
Vegetables and fruit
Page|23 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CATERING (GCSE) continued
Exam Board WJEC
Assessment
Visits
It is hoped that there will be some visits to local restaurants and a catering college Chefs may visit
some lessons to give demonstrations or work with students in practical lessons
Career Progression
Sous Chef Cake Decorator Junior Kitchen Assistant WaitressWaiter Nutritionist Dietician Food
Technologist Baker etc
60 of the final grade will come from 2
practical tasks where students must show
catering skills related to food preparation and
service
Each task must be accompanied by a folder
of notes that cover the investigation planning
and evaluation of the task
Task 1 (15 hours) will take place in Year 10
Task 2 (30 hours) will take place in Year 11
40 of the final grade will come from a
written examination paper (1 frac14 hours) on
Catering food and the customer
This will be taken at the end of Year 11
24|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CERTIFICATE IN CONSTRUCTION
Exam Board CITY amp GUILDS
This course is ideal for all students who are considering
a career in any part of the construction or building
industry It is of benefit weather they are considering a
craft or management position
Course Information
Students study for six periods a week and in the first
year concentrate on basic building skills
Carpentry
Electrics
Plumbing
Bricklaying
Health and safety
Site management
This is done through the City and Guilds Introductory Certificate in Basic Construction Skills in which
eight practical tasks must be passed and one theoretical on line test
The second year allows students to develop along their chosen path either developing their craft
skills or moving towards a professional career via the Diplomas in Construction and the Built
Environment This would be an ideal path for those considering a career in
Building management
Architecture
Town planning
Surveying
Engineering
Building control
Environmentalist
Landscape Architecture
Those students not considering a professional career would expand their skills in chosen areas
through further City and Guilds qualifications
Page|25 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 FIRST CERTIFICATE IN PERFORMING ARTS DANCE
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Students will look at FIVE different units in order to achieve a
qualification on this course
The most appropriate units can be selected according to
the individual needs of each group from the following list
Performing Dance
The Development of Dance
Working in the Performing Arts Industry
Professional Development in the Performing Arts
Industry
Understanding Dance
Contemporary Dance
Jazz Dance
Musical Theatre
Makeup for Performers
There is a significant emphasis on Choreographic and
performance skills throughout each unit and students will
be expected to
Learn set dances
Learn dance vocabulary
Choreograph solo duo and small group dances
Improve their performance and technical skills
Perform in front of their peers and a broader based audience
See professionals at work
Write reviews of works
Study the effect of costume set design and props
Look at the cultural and historical context of dances they view
The course is internally assessed throughout by the teacher and students are informally
assessed during every lesson Students will also be assessed more formally through
Assignments which meet the criteria for each Unit These are marked by the teacher and
internally verified by another specialist teacher to ensure that they are of the highest quality
Students opting for this course must understand that to achieve a good grade at BTEC they
have to have a love of making up (choreographing) and performing dances to others They
must also have some basic dance ability such as being able to move in time with the music
Students will need to work in bare feet for much of this course
Students who enjoy all aspects of dance and movement and have the confidence to perform
to a small audience will be well suited to this course Students will be expected to work in their
own time after school to perfect their dances and complete Assignment briefs They should
also be happy to work in a range of different dance styles and not just one particular style
26|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
DRAMA (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
GCSE Drama is an exciting and practical course which offers opportunities to become a skilled
and confident performer
The course aims to encourage students to develop
an interest in and understanding of a range of
drama and theatre experiences
increased self and group awareness
imaginative creative communication and
social skills
a love and appreciation of attending a range of
live theatre experiences
The course consists of two parts
Coursework 60
Two of the following options only one of which may be a technicaldesign skill
Devised thematic work for performance to an audience
Acting
Improvisation
Theatre in Education presentation
Dancedrama
Set
Costume
Make-up
Properties
Masks
Puppets
Lighting
Sound
Stage management
Each option is assessed through two parts
Part One A mark awarded for group and communication skills
Part Two A mark awarded for the final performance
Written Paper 40
2 hours
A choice of any two questions based on the following sections
A Set play bdquoAnimal Farm‟
B Response to live productions seen during the course
Page|27 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ETHICS (GCSE)
Exam Board OCR
The bdquoPhilosophy and Ethics‟ GCSE will allow students to explore the fundamental questions
about life and existence encourage their personal social and cultural development and
enhance their understanding of different cultures and belief systems
Over the course of the two years students will study important and thought-provoking issues
such as the nature and existence of God good and evil and the conflict between religion
and science relationships poverty and medical ethics peace and justice and the role of the
media in today‟s world It is a broad satisfying and worthwhile course of study designed to
challenge and stimulate students and equip them with the necessary skills to lead constructive
and thoughtful lives in the modern world
28|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
FILM STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
ldquoThe secret to film is that its an illusionrdquo
George Lucas Director of Star Wars
This course is ideal for any student who is
Able to work independently or as part of a team
Creative and practical but also analytical
Enthusiastic about films
Interested in making their own short films
Over the two years students will
Plan storyboard film and edit a short film working in a small
group adding their own music and special effects
Understand how films are made and promoted
Learn about the business of making films
Make a close study of one genre of Hollywood films (currently Disaster Films)
Closely research and study at least two different non-Hollywood Films (made in Britain
Europe or Africa)
Prepare their own film promotion campaign
Write an in-depth analysis of films of their choice
Assessment is through
A portfolio of coursework and also
Two end of course examinations
Although it is a new course Film Studies is already a popular choice for many students
combining well with the Media study in English as well as Media
Studies itself Film Studies is increasingly well
thought of by many colleges as it combines
a practical creative approach with
analytical skills
From Citizen Kane to Inception
Page|29 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
FRENCH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
The course outline for French is similar to Spanish It is not compulsory to have previous
knowledge of the language before starting the course but you need to be aware that it will
be more challenging for you and you need to put in a lot of effort to succeed However it is
not at all impossible
30|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GEOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Geography is a fascinating and wide-reaching subject and it has been shown that students
with Geography qualifications are some of the most employable
Why you should take Geography GCSE
It provides you with an understanding of global issues which will affect our lives now and
in the future
By the end of their GCSE you will have a better understanding of the way the world
works
Geography is a good link between the arts and sciences so it will help you in their other
subjects
You will understand how physical landscapes (eg rivers coasts mountains) are formed
You will be allowed to express opinions about people and places
Geography includes a range of academic skills that you will use in your future studies
Skills gained from Geography include
How to research and to investigate
Problem solving
Real world numeracy
How to collect record present and analyse data
Map reading
Creative thinking
How to write in an essay style and in a scientific style
Empathy and understanding of others
Topics of study will include
How are natural landscapes formed and how can we manage
them
What causes and how can we manage natural hazards
How do weather and climate work
How can we manage population around the world
How do towns and cities expand and how are they managed
How and why are some places rich whilst others are poor
How can we ensure development of global resources is sustainable
Page|31 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board AQA
Career Links (As printed by the Royal Geographical Society)
How is the course assessed
GCSE Geography is assessed by two written Examinations (75) and by Coursework (25) in
the form of a Controlled Assessment
Fieldwork at the South Coast and elsewhere is an essential part of this course
Travel and tourist industry
Travel Guide Researcher
Property Researcher
Lawyers
Senior Researcher for County
Council
Government Statistician
TV Locations Unit
Business Consultants
Planners
32|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GRAPHICS (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
If you are interested in the world of advertising like
developing logos and posters always have an interest in
the covers of DVDs books amp games and really enjoy
making products then this is the course for you
Course Information
A large part of the course is a practical investigation
into the techniques and materials used in the
advertising and packaging we see around us every
day
Students will develop skills in drawing both free hand and using computer aided design
model making printing techniques logo designing greetings card and popup book
design and build up skills to design DVD covers labels and posters
To be able to present this to an industrial standard students will use desktop publishing
software such as GIMP (a variation of Photoshop) and computer aided design packages
such as Google Sketchup 2D Design and Fireworks They will get the chance to use the
new computer aided manufacturing milling machine to design and make work like
models signs and games
Assessment
Students will complete a major project and portfolio that counts towards 60 of the overall
GCSE grade Previous projects have included creating a popup book producing
promotional material for the Olympics designing the identity and packaging for a new band
and making a travel game for children
Externally set assignment by the Exam board will account for 40 The typical brief might look
like this
A leading perfumeaftershave manufacturer are aware that the environment is a
current issue The general public are concerned about so want an environmentally
friendly perfumeaftershave bottle and packaging designed to meet the current
market needs You are to design and make a model bottle including the packaging
Career Progression
Or anything in the creative industries
Graphic designer Work in advertising Web designer
Architect Product designer Set designer
Computer game designer Window dresser Magazine editor
Fashion designer Comic book creator Book illustrator
Artist
Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a
range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme
conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)
Content
Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated
situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a
portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are
required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key
skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam
They will study the following subjects at Level 1
Shampoo and condition hair
Blow drying
Contribute to performing and colouring process
Contribute to the development of effective working
relationships
Support the health and safety of the salon
Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas
Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is
complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and
seminars
All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical
assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress
How will they be assessed
They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical
assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on
progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered
individually at different stages throughout the course
There are four areas of assessment
Practical They carry out the skill
Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill
Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit
Online tests
Progression
They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such
as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme
34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and
opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal
subject for you
You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability
to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely
untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills
What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for
History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities
alike It is particularly useful for the following careers
Course Information
The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills
covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of
these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in
the classroom
Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams
almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students
maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two
year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work
Each of the following units is worth 25
Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations
Key topics
bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56
bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)
bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991
Law
Journalism
Television production and research
Advertising
Research
Marketing
Business Management
Accountancy
Archaeology
Museum work
Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939
Key Topics
bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939
bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Holocaust
Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970
Key topics
bull McCarthyism and the Red scare
bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King
bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies
bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)
Representations of History
CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990
36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT
Exam Board OCR
The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-
requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres
and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the
recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students
education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and
employers
Course Information
The course aims to develop
Problem-solving skills through the practical real life
application of ICT to complex problems
The ability to analyse appraise and make critical
judgements about the use of ICT systems
An awareness of the role of ICT in the management
manipulation and dissemination of information
Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with
others
The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and
competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist
tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final
student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms
of ICT problem solving and project management
There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been
completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer
Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc
Assessment
Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two
GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟
equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE
In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students
must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two
mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2
Diploma
Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become
increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics
magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such
as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students
to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages
we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as
they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of
audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-
world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very
relevant and very challenging
Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different
forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is
a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in
a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also
able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in
an organised way
Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to
looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as
bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns
constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe
Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied
interesting and highly rewarding
Coursework
The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall
assessment of the course Students produce three assignments
for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical
Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment
Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical
Production and Evaluation
Assessment
This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is
undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for
the qualification
Recent topics for the examination have included
Soap opera Quiz shows
Action Films The Popular Press
Music magazines
38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning
The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist
learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering
Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills
The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to
broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students
who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical
career within the sector
Progression
The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate
(VRQ) in the appropriate career route
Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using
the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship
framework) in the appropriate route
Potential Job Opportunities
Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder
Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician
Assessment Methods
Multiple Choice Examination
Oral Examination
Portfolio of Evidence
Practical Demonstration Assignment
Practical Examination
Task-based Controlled Assessment
Written Examination
Overall Assessment Method
Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit
The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the
learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test
results
Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing
and ListeningAppraising
Performing (30)
Students perform music throughout the course The two best
recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and
one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any
type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour
time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during
that period
For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental
vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)
a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc
For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an
improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing
a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording
Composing (30)
Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the
exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must
come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed
to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material
to make a new piece out of the old one
ListeningAppraising (40)
Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a
series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final
question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music
played in the exam hall
Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam
The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are
Western Classical Music 1600-1899
Music in the 20th Century
Popular Music in Context
World Music
40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching
research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic
Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not
required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music
classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C
grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas
There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some
they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is
hard work but its good fun too
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC
(EDEXCEL)
The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used
by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the
BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire
assessment is coursework based
Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)
Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the
Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a
portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of
A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links
with others
The Performer‟s role
Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer
Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)
Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students
the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the
equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own
recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves
A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)
including costs
A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it
safely
Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording
techniques
Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what
they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating
various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is
designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to
work in the Music Industry
This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic
Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will
spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software
and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs
The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both
exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both
qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)
Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as
individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily
being assessed on everything at the end of the course
A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction
grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up
with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx
42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will
learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer
software
You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white
photographs
Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based
photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-
journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new
media practice
Assessment
This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home
is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks
There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the
marks
Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SPANISH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
All students have the choice to continue
with Spanish which they have been
studying since Year 7 It would be a wise
choice to continue with Spanish as the
ability to speak a second language is not
only useful but is advantageous in
today‟s world Our closer connection
with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even
a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers
Course Information
The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based
on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage
Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to
communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding
Topics covered are
Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo
Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink
Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo
Free time shopping money new technology sports media
Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo
Home local area and the environment
Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo
School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs
Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and
listening at the end of Year 11
44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2
Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with
the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to
vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport
The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a
range of skills and techniques personal qualities and
attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter
the workplace
Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study
1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction
The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge
and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in
instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning
and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills
2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities
The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire
motivate and improve the performance of a selected target
group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It
encourages students to work in a team situation to organise
plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement
3 Injury in Sport
The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and
their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will
enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries
4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport
The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in
the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and
enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people
(Units to be studied are subject to change)
Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TEXTILES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of
textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The
students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following
areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction
applied textiles and embellished textiles
Assessment and Coursework Balance
In their first year the students will be required to produce two
extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will
follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The
students will work from first hand observations collecting and
developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and
textiles based techniques From this research and developmental
stage students will design and produce a final piece
During the second year students will begin by completing an
extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an
externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted
will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment
will account for 40
The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual
style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they
learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a
more personal response to a theme
Visits
Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources
such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second
year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within
the industry today
Why choose Textiles
Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more
confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level
course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles
The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range
of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior
design styling textiles design and costume design
46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)
Exam Board AQA
Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology
Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three
subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three
separate GCSEs
What are the differences between Triple Science and other
science GCSEs
This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will
be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of
the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award
What are the advantages of studying Triple Science
The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into
bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for
bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge
Who should consider taking Triple Science
Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope
with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a
related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those
students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this
course
The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school
GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics
Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25
Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25
Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25
Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25
Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS
2012 - 2014
Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4
option subjects
Please note
We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If
through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we
cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course
Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012
Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012
Make a record of your choice on the table below before
handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the
Options Information Evening
SUBJECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
Mo
st
De
sire
d
3D Design
Art
Catering
Construction
Dance
Drama
Ethics
Film Studies
French
Geography
Graphics
Hairdressing
History
ICT
Media Studies
Motor Vehicle
Music
Spanish
(Diploma) Sport
Textiles
Triple Sciences
Please tick if you would like to be
considered to do EBacc Please
remember that you need to
include Geography or History and
French or Spanish as your subject
options
Chessington Community College
Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS
Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603
wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk
![Page 4: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a](https://reader035.vdocument.in/reader035/viewer/2022062413/5a76533a7f8b9aa3618d22a0/html5/thumbnails/4.jpg)
4|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
KS4 Curriculum
At Key Stage 4 students will study a bdquocore‟ which covers a broad and balanced range of
subjects in line with the national curriculum
Students then make 4 choices for the rest of their bdquooptional‟ curriculum
Core
EnglishEnglish Literature 2 GCSEs
Mathematics GCSE
Science 2 GCSE
Sport (BTEC) Equivalent to 2 GCSEs
Social Studies (Pastoral Education)
Optional Curriculum
Triple Science
For those students that have excelled in their KS3 Science we will be offering a third science
Teachers will assess student‟s suitability of course and will interview these students in the
Summer Term
English as an Additional Language (EAL)
Overseas students may speak understand or be literate in more than one language and
may have some experience of English but will require support to acquire fluency in English
and to access the curriculum The EAL course helps these students
Part-time studying at Kingston College
We are offering both a Motor Vehicle Level 1 course and a Hairdressing NVQ Level 1 course
Both these are taught at Kingston College on a Friday and would be equal to 2 Option
choices
Art (GCSE) Hairdressing (NVQ)
Catering (GCSE) History (GCSE)
Construction (City and Guild Certificate) ICT (Cambridge Nationals)
3D Design (GCSE) Media Studies (GCSE)
Dance (BTEC) Music (GCSE and BTEC)
Drama (GCSE) Motor Vehicle (NVQ)
Ethics (GCSE) Spanish (GCSE)
Film studies (GCSE) Sport (BTEC)
French (GCSE) Textiles (GCSE)
Geography (GCSE) Triple Science (GCSE)
Graphics (GCSE)
Page|5 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
Qualifications Information
GCSE
General Certification of Secondary Education GCSEs are taken by most school-leaving age
students They are known as Level 2 qualifications
BTEC
BTECs are work-related qualifications suitable for a wide range of students built to
accommodate the needs of employers and allow progression to university They provide a
practical real-world approach to learning without sacrificing any of the essential subject
theory and are recognised by a large number of organisations in a wide range of sectors
BTECs offer natural progression along a vocational path from and to academic
qualifications and university
Cambrige Nationals
Cambridge Nationals are an exam-free alternative to GCSEs taking a more engaging
practical approach to learning and assessment
NVQ
NVQ is work based awards in England Wales and Northern Ireland that are achieved
through assessment and training
Choosing Your Subjects
The subjects and qualifications you study over Years 10 and 11 will affect how you spend
your time during your next two years at school It could also help set you up for the career or
college course you want later on
To help you decide what to study in Years 10 and 11 start by asking yourself what you enjoy
doing and what you‟re good at You need to think about
What you‟re interested in it could be other cultures and languages writing projects
helping people being outdoors or designing things
What types of activity you enjoy most - working things out and thinking them through
practical activities or artistic options like painting drawing or performing music
What do you want to do as a career
You will then ask yourself whether your choices give you a balanced programme and
whether your choices limit your options once you have completed your Year 11 studies
It is very important that you will seek help and advice about your GCSEs Subject teachers
your Head of House and Form Tutor will be very pleased to discuss any problems with you
We hope that your parents will play an active part in advising you on these important
decisions They can either talk to Staff at the Options Evening on Thursday 15th March 2012
or if required make an appointment to see them
Please remember the following points
Do talk to students who are in Year 10 or 11 about a specific subject you might wish to
study
6|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
Do get all the information you can from this booklet and by asking questions before
deciding on your subjects We provide information about all the subjects offered for study
in Years 10 and 11 on the following pages Please read the course descriptions carefully
Try not to consider only the subjects you need but also the subjects that interest you
Try not to choose a subject just because you like (or dislike) the teacher You may have
different teacher next year
Do think about your skills and how you work and try to match these with the different
demands of the different subjects Subjects have different amount of marks awarded for
examinations and for controlled assessments Do think carefully about how you best work
when making your selection of subjects
Try not to choose a subject simply because it sounds new or unusual Make sure you
understand what is involved in taking this subject
Do NOT fill in the subject request sheet until you are happy that you have made the correct
choices for your needs and interests
Making A Balanced Choice
It is important that you continue to study a variety of courses Not only will this contribute to
your general education it will also mean that doors to a wide number of careers and further
study will remain open to you Do remember to consider the range of skills that your subjects
will provide you with
The English Baccalaureate (EBacc)
The English Baccalaureate which was introduced as a performance measure in 2010
performance table is not a new qualification It is a new certificate that will be awarded to
any student who secures a GCSE Grade C or higher in the following subject
English
Mathematics
2 Sciences (Core and Additional or 2 out of Biology Chemistry and physics)
1 Modern Foreign Language or a Classical Language
1 Humanity (History or Geography)
The subjects included are designed to ensure that all students have the opportunity to study
a broad core of subjects ensuring that doors are not closed off to them in terms of future
progression
We allow all students to opt for subjects to make up the EBacc however we do not make it
compulsory for any student It is important that you choose subjects that you enjoy and are
therefore more likely to secure a good grade in You should also consider your own talents
and aspirations for the future
What if I Make A Wrong Choice We hope this will not happen but if it does then we will interview you and if possible swap
your subject What we have found in the past is that students decide on a subject because
their friends have chosen it and after a time the student realises they don‟t like the subject
therefore do not choose a subject because your friend has chosen it
THE
CORE
CURRICULUM
Page|9 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ENGLISH LANGUAGE (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
The skills of reading writing speaking and listening are of vital importance in many areas
Not only are they essential in many careers they also underpin successful study at all levels
and a proficiency in them can also add immeasurably to an individual‟s general quality of
life
This specification is designed to aid and assess such development and to encourage
learners to be inspired moved and changed by following a broad coherent satisfying and
worthwhile course of study It will prepare learners to make informed decisions about further
learning opportunities and career choices and to use language to participate effectively in
society and employment
Different forms of assessment are appropriate to these different skills and this is recognised in
this specification Reading and Writing are assessed through controlled assessment and in
two externally marked units Speaking and Listening are assessed in a variety of different
situations during the course
Assessment
Written Paper
Unit 1 (20) Studying written language - non-fiction texts (40 Raw Marks 40 UMS)
This unit will test through structured questions the reading of two non-fiction texts Non-
fiction texts may include fact-sheets leaflets letters extracts from autobiographies
biographies diaries advertisements reports articles and digital and multi-modal texts of
various kinds from newspapers and magazines brochures and the internet Visual
material will always be included in the material used
Unit 2 (20) Using written language - information and ideas (40 Raw Marks 40 UMS)
This unit will test transactional and discursive writing through two equally weighted tasks
(20 marks each) Across the two tasks students will be offered opportunities to write for a
range of audiences and purposes adapting style to form and real-life context in for
example letters articles leaflets reviews etc
10|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ENGLISH LANGUAGE (GCSE) continued
Exam Board WJEC
Controlled Assessment
Unit 3 (30) Literary reading and creative writing (80 Raw Marks 60 UMS)
Studying written language extended literary text (15)
Students need to present one assignment which is a sustained response to an extended
text The text must either be a Shakespeare play or one chosen from the GCSE English
Literature external assessment set text lists excluding poetry
Using language creative writing (15)
Students will be required to complete ONE piece of descriptive writing and ONE piece of
narrativeexpressive writing drawn from tasks supplied by WJEC
Unit 4 (30) Spoken language (60 Raw Marks 60 UMS)
Using Language Speaking and Listening (Communicating and adapting language
interacting and responding creating and sustaining roles) (20)
Students will be required to complete at least three Speaking and Listening tasks through
the exploration of ideas texts and issues in scripted and improvised work The three tasks
will cover the following areas
1 Communicating and adapting language
2 Interacting and responding
3 Creating and sustaining roles
Studying spoken language Variations choices change in spoken language (10)
Students will be required to study an aspect of spoken language The assignment will be
a sustained response to their own or others‟ uses of spoken language presented by
recording transcript or recollection
Page|11 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ENGLISH LITERATURE (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
This specification is based on the conviction that the study of literature should centre on an
informed personal response to a range of texts in the genres of prose poetry and drama
Assessment is through controlled assessment and examination Teachers and their students
have some flexibility in the choice of texts to be studied and some overlap with GCSE English
Language is possible and indeed encouraged as it is felt that the study of literature can
greatly enhance a student‟s writing skills and that practising hisher own writing skills can lead
a student to increased enjoyment of and success in reading
Assessment
External Assessment
Unit 1 (35)Prose (different cultures) and poetry (contemporary) (50 Raw Marks 70 UMS)
Section A (21) requires study of a prose text from a different culture It will require
students to answer two questions on the chosen prose text
Section B (14) will consist of a question offering some structure for students to explore
respond to and compare two contemporary unseen poems In preparation for this unit
students will need to study at least fifteen poems in addition to those studied for Unit 3
Unit 2a (40) Literary heritage drama and contemporary prose(60 Raw Marks 80 UMS)
This paper requires study of a drama text from the EnglishIrishWelsh literary heritage and a
contemporary prose text It will require students to answer two questions on each text
OR
Unit 2b Contemporary drama and literary heritage prose (60 Raw Marks 80 UMS)
This paper requires study of a contemporary drama text and a prose text from the English
IrishWelsh literary heritage It will require students to answer two questions on each text
Controlled Assessment
Unit 3 (25) Poetry and drama (literary heritage) (40 Raw Marks 50 UMS)
EnglishIrishWelsh literary heritage Poetry and Shakespeare play Assessment will be based
on a single assignment linking a play by Shakespeare and literary heritage poetry Students
will be required to study a Shakespeare play (not Othello or Much Ado about Nothing) and
a group of thematically linked poems taken from the WJEC poetry collection
Assessment for GCSE English Language and GCSE English Literature is tiered ie externally
assessed componentsunits are targeted at the grade ranges of A-D (Higher Tier) and C-G
(Foundation Tier) while controlled assessments cater for the full range of ability Questions and
tasks will be designed to enable students to demonstrate what they know understand and
can do
Tier Grades Available
Higher A A B C D Foundation C D E F G
Students who narrowly fail to achieve Grade D on the Higher Tier will be awarded Grade E
Students who narrowly fail to achieve Grade D on the Higher Tier will be awarded Grade E
12|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MATHEMATICS (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Mathematics is a compulsory part of the curriculum for all students and currently takes four
lessons per week GCSE Mathematics is a linear course with two written examinations one
with a calculator The course takes a holistic approach and a grade C is available on both
foundation and higher papers
Students should develop knowledge skills and understanding of the content They should be
able to use their knowledge and understanding to make connections between
mathematical concepts and apply them to solve real life problems Functional elements of
mathematics are included in each paper
The course starts formally at the end of year 9 building on the work in years 7 and 8 so a
good start is made to cover the necessary material Students will need to apply themselves
to the tasks in class and complete their homework regularly Mathematics teachers are
available outside of lessons to help students who are finding concepts difficult to understand
and a weekly bdquocatch-up‟ club is available Students are set primarily according to ability but
the attitude to learning is also a factor to be considered when the groupings are made
We offer the opportunity to take GCSE Mathematics in Year 10 and providing satisfactory
results are achieved students may be given the opportunity to start the bdquoA‟ level course or to
take an additional GCSE in statistics
Page|13 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SCIENCE - MODULAR (GCSE DOUBLE AWARD)
Exam Board AQA
There have been some major changes to the GCSE science courses which will begin began in
September 2011 There is now more emphasis on bdquoHow Science Works‟ which means not just
learning the theory but understanding the practical side of science and its relation to the
world in which we live
Science is a core subject and is therefore studied by all students The main areas of science
can be broadly broken into Biology Chemistry and Physics
In addition to the above students will be assessed on their knowledge and understanding of
science through coursework which will be set within stimulating contexts that students should
be able to relate to from their science lessons and their experiences of science on a day to
day basis
Year 10
Students in Year 10 will study six modules as indicated below
These six modules will be assessed by tests which will be taken on three separate occasions
throughout the year The final 25 of the marks will be awarded based on coursework
The majority of Year 10 students will gain the first of their two GCSEs in science at the end of
Year 10
Year 11
The structure of the Year 11 course is similar to that of Year 10 in that Biology Chemistry and
Physics will be studied however students will be assessed by means of three written papers
containing structured questions rather than objective tests
GCSE Science A
Biology 1 25
Chemistry 1 25
Physics 1 25
Centre Assessed Coursework 25
GCSE Science B
Biology 2 25
Chemistry 2 25
Physics 2 25
Centre Assessed Coursework 25
14|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SCIENCE - MODULAR (GCSE DOUBLE AWARD) continued
Exam Board AQA
The coursework component will be assessed in a similar way to Year 10 and will carry the same
proportion of marks
Whilst the new GCSE science course is designed to be more interesting than the existing
course it is likely to be rather more challenging Students will need to work consistently hard in
order to achieve high level grades The course has been designed to ensure that all students
regardless of ability gain a good grounding in science The course is also an excellent
preparation for A level studies
BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENTED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE
(EDEXCEL)
For some students who have found the study of Science difficult at Key Stage 3 a more
accessible course is BTEC Science
Students still study the 3 Science disciplines of Chemistry Biology and Physics but combined
into one course
The advantages of this course are that there is no traditional coursework component it is
assignment based so students who find that the stress of exams causes them to do less well
have the opportunity to achieve their potential It also has a practical approach and no final
exam
The course is the equivalent of 2 GCSEs
Page|15 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN SPORT
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The BTEC Level 2 Extended Certificate offers flexibility and a choice of emphasis through the
optional units It is broadly equivalent to two GCSEs
The course provides students with the opportunity to enter employment in the sport and active
leisure sector or to progress to vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel BTEC Level 3
qualifications in Sport and Sport and Exercise Sciences
The course also gives students the opportunity to develop a range of skills and techniques
personal qualities and attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter the
workplace
1 Fitness Testing and Training
This unit gives students the opportunity to explore the essential fitness requirements and training
methods used to achieve successful sports performance They learn how to accurately
conduct fitness and health tests and use key skills to compare the results against national
standards
2 Practical Sport
The aim of this unit is to develop students‟ knowledge of the rules skills and techniques for one
team and one individual sport through practical application Students will develop their
assessment skills as they observe each other perform and communicate effectively to improve
personal performance
3 Anatomy amp Physiology for Sport
The aim of this unit is to give students a good understanding of the structure and function of
the skeletal muscular cardiovascular and respiratory systems of the human body This will help
students to gain a better idea of how their body works so that they can stay healthy
4 Development of Personal Fitness
This unit can prove invaluable to students who wish to stay fit and healthy in the future
Students learn how to get fit by actively working and developing their training skills so that they
can progess their fitness to higher levels
5 Effects of Exercise on the Body Systems
This unit again develops the students‟ awareness of how all systems of their body respond to
exercise Students learn about the great health benefits which can be achieved
(Units to be studied are subject to change)
THE
OPTIONAL
CURRICULUM
Page|19 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
3 DIMENSIONAL DESIGN (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
If you enjoyed designing and making products in the Design amp Technology workshops during
Years 789 and would like to continue making more complex and detailed products
Course Information
Students will be expected to demonstrate skills and
techniques in the context of their chosen area(s) of study
within Three-Dimensional Design
making appropriate use of colour line tone texture
shape and form decoration scale and proportion
using different approaches to recording images such
as observation analysis expression and imagination
showing in their work the ability to respond to an idea concept
issue theme or brief investigating different ways of working as
appropriate to their chosen area(s) of study within Three-
Dimensional Design showing understanding of the relationship of
form and function
making use of appropriate materials tools and techniques
providing evidence of an understanding of spatial qualities
composition rhythm scale and structure
providing evidence of the use of safe working practices
In Year 10 students will design and make a variety of projects such as a Spice rack Toy Car
and a Hand Trowel using a variety of machines and materials They will gain knowledge and
skills in manufacturing techniques production methods and the design process They will be
able to design products on the computer (CAD) and then cut them out on the new CAM
machine
Assessment
This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home is
presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks There is
also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the marks
Career Progression
Students can continue onto the A Level Product design course at Chessington‟s 6th Form
Alternatively they could pursue a career in an Engineering discipline Construction Product
Design or Architecture
20|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ART (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
All students choosing Art and Design as their option are required to
take the unendorsed examination This allows them to produce
work using a number of different techniques which have been listed
below
Painting and drawing
Graphics
Sculptureconstruction
Photography
Printmaking
A foundation course which gives students experience of all of
these is run during the first two terms
Painting and Drawing
The Painting and Drawing course is structured to enable students
regardless of their ability to build on the skills and techniques
they have learned in their first three years at school and at the same time prepare for a GCSE
examination
Programmes of work will largely be determined by the demands of the examination syllabus
but every effort will be made to structure the course so that it meets the needs of the students
whilst taking into account their wide range of abilities
The Painting and Drawing disciplines will form the basis for most practical activities but
students will be encouraged to experiment with and use as broad a range of approaches as
possible in the preparation and production of coursework
3 Dimensional Studies (Sculpture)
The course is designed to develop the student‟s visual awareness sensitivity and understanding
of the work of Artists involving three dimensions in a contemporary and historical context
Students will be encouraged to develop ideas in preliminary studies through research and
experimentation observational recording and analysis of forms and to produce work in the
form of modelling carving casting construction and assembling The important relationships
between urbanrural landscapes communities and cultures will also be studied as will the
interaction of solid and void forms and shape pattern decoration colour texture scale
structure proportion rhythm movement and the effects of light upon three dimensional
objects
Page|21 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ART (GCSE) continued
Exam Board AQA
Printmaking
Students will be able to experiment with a number of simple methods for producing a printed
image Some of the following will be introduced when appropriate
Lino printing
Card printing
Monoprinting
Polystyrene sheet printing
Screen printing
Assessment
Art and Design requires students to carry out and complete work in their own time in school
and at home Preparation and research are an essential element of the course and the use of
sketchbooks when preparing work is encouraged
Coursework will account for 60 of the marks and externally set assignment will account for
40 of the marks
Visits
Students are encouraged to take part in all visits to Museums Galleries and Exhibitions where
the work on display is considered helpful in supporting coursework studies
Career Progression
Fashion Designer Interior Designer Costume Designer Artist Architect Cartoonist Textile
Designer Model Maker etc
22|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CATERING (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
This single GCSE course is a vocational qualification that is
suitable for those students who have an interest in the Catering
Industry and want a broad background in this area It would
also be a good foundation for those who wish to progress to
further education It will offer valuable preparation for students
who may want to enter the many careers in the Food Industry
Students must have a real interest in food and enjoy cooking
They must be prepared to work hard in order to reach a high
standard of presentation in their practical work
Course Information
Students who take the GCSE Catering course will learn about and demonstrate their
knowledge and understanding of the following areas of study
The industry ndash types of establishments that serve food and drink
Job roles employment opportunities and relevant training
Health safety and hygiene
Food preparation cooking and presentation
Nutrition and menu planning
Costing and portion control
Specialist equipment both small and large scale
Communication and record keeping
Environmental considerations
Students will be expected to supply their own ingredients for practical sessions that will include
the selection storage preparation and serving of
Students will also be expected to purchase a white chef‟s jacket from the College which they
must wear to all practical sessions
Meat and poultry Convenience products
Fish Sauces
Eggs Basic dough products
Dairy products Basic pastry products
Cereals flour rice pasta Cakes sponges and scones
Vegetables and fruit
Page|23 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CATERING (GCSE) continued
Exam Board WJEC
Assessment
Visits
It is hoped that there will be some visits to local restaurants and a catering college Chefs may visit
some lessons to give demonstrations or work with students in practical lessons
Career Progression
Sous Chef Cake Decorator Junior Kitchen Assistant WaitressWaiter Nutritionist Dietician Food
Technologist Baker etc
60 of the final grade will come from 2
practical tasks where students must show
catering skills related to food preparation and
service
Each task must be accompanied by a folder
of notes that cover the investigation planning
and evaluation of the task
Task 1 (15 hours) will take place in Year 10
Task 2 (30 hours) will take place in Year 11
40 of the final grade will come from a
written examination paper (1 frac14 hours) on
Catering food and the customer
This will be taken at the end of Year 11
24|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CERTIFICATE IN CONSTRUCTION
Exam Board CITY amp GUILDS
This course is ideal for all students who are considering
a career in any part of the construction or building
industry It is of benefit weather they are considering a
craft or management position
Course Information
Students study for six periods a week and in the first
year concentrate on basic building skills
Carpentry
Electrics
Plumbing
Bricklaying
Health and safety
Site management
This is done through the City and Guilds Introductory Certificate in Basic Construction Skills in which
eight practical tasks must be passed and one theoretical on line test
The second year allows students to develop along their chosen path either developing their craft
skills or moving towards a professional career via the Diplomas in Construction and the Built
Environment This would be an ideal path for those considering a career in
Building management
Architecture
Town planning
Surveying
Engineering
Building control
Environmentalist
Landscape Architecture
Those students not considering a professional career would expand their skills in chosen areas
through further City and Guilds qualifications
Page|25 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 FIRST CERTIFICATE IN PERFORMING ARTS DANCE
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Students will look at FIVE different units in order to achieve a
qualification on this course
The most appropriate units can be selected according to
the individual needs of each group from the following list
Performing Dance
The Development of Dance
Working in the Performing Arts Industry
Professional Development in the Performing Arts
Industry
Understanding Dance
Contemporary Dance
Jazz Dance
Musical Theatre
Makeup for Performers
There is a significant emphasis on Choreographic and
performance skills throughout each unit and students will
be expected to
Learn set dances
Learn dance vocabulary
Choreograph solo duo and small group dances
Improve their performance and technical skills
Perform in front of their peers and a broader based audience
See professionals at work
Write reviews of works
Study the effect of costume set design and props
Look at the cultural and historical context of dances they view
The course is internally assessed throughout by the teacher and students are informally
assessed during every lesson Students will also be assessed more formally through
Assignments which meet the criteria for each Unit These are marked by the teacher and
internally verified by another specialist teacher to ensure that they are of the highest quality
Students opting for this course must understand that to achieve a good grade at BTEC they
have to have a love of making up (choreographing) and performing dances to others They
must also have some basic dance ability such as being able to move in time with the music
Students will need to work in bare feet for much of this course
Students who enjoy all aspects of dance and movement and have the confidence to perform
to a small audience will be well suited to this course Students will be expected to work in their
own time after school to perfect their dances and complete Assignment briefs They should
also be happy to work in a range of different dance styles and not just one particular style
26|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
DRAMA (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
GCSE Drama is an exciting and practical course which offers opportunities to become a skilled
and confident performer
The course aims to encourage students to develop
an interest in and understanding of a range of
drama and theatre experiences
increased self and group awareness
imaginative creative communication and
social skills
a love and appreciation of attending a range of
live theatre experiences
The course consists of two parts
Coursework 60
Two of the following options only one of which may be a technicaldesign skill
Devised thematic work for performance to an audience
Acting
Improvisation
Theatre in Education presentation
Dancedrama
Set
Costume
Make-up
Properties
Masks
Puppets
Lighting
Sound
Stage management
Each option is assessed through two parts
Part One A mark awarded for group and communication skills
Part Two A mark awarded for the final performance
Written Paper 40
2 hours
A choice of any two questions based on the following sections
A Set play bdquoAnimal Farm‟
B Response to live productions seen during the course
Page|27 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ETHICS (GCSE)
Exam Board OCR
The bdquoPhilosophy and Ethics‟ GCSE will allow students to explore the fundamental questions
about life and existence encourage their personal social and cultural development and
enhance their understanding of different cultures and belief systems
Over the course of the two years students will study important and thought-provoking issues
such as the nature and existence of God good and evil and the conflict between religion
and science relationships poverty and medical ethics peace and justice and the role of the
media in today‟s world It is a broad satisfying and worthwhile course of study designed to
challenge and stimulate students and equip them with the necessary skills to lead constructive
and thoughtful lives in the modern world
28|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
FILM STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
ldquoThe secret to film is that its an illusionrdquo
George Lucas Director of Star Wars
This course is ideal for any student who is
Able to work independently or as part of a team
Creative and practical but also analytical
Enthusiastic about films
Interested in making their own short films
Over the two years students will
Plan storyboard film and edit a short film working in a small
group adding their own music and special effects
Understand how films are made and promoted
Learn about the business of making films
Make a close study of one genre of Hollywood films (currently Disaster Films)
Closely research and study at least two different non-Hollywood Films (made in Britain
Europe or Africa)
Prepare their own film promotion campaign
Write an in-depth analysis of films of their choice
Assessment is through
A portfolio of coursework and also
Two end of course examinations
Although it is a new course Film Studies is already a popular choice for many students
combining well with the Media study in English as well as Media
Studies itself Film Studies is increasingly well
thought of by many colleges as it combines
a practical creative approach with
analytical skills
From Citizen Kane to Inception
Page|29 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
FRENCH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
The course outline for French is similar to Spanish It is not compulsory to have previous
knowledge of the language before starting the course but you need to be aware that it will
be more challenging for you and you need to put in a lot of effort to succeed However it is
not at all impossible
30|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GEOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Geography is a fascinating and wide-reaching subject and it has been shown that students
with Geography qualifications are some of the most employable
Why you should take Geography GCSE
It provides you with an understanding of global issues which will affect our lives now and
in the future
By the end of their GCSE you will have a better understanding of the way the world
works
Geography is a good link between the arts and sciences so it will help you in their other
subjects
You will understand how physical landscapes (eg rivers coasts mountains) are formed
You will be allowed to express opinions about people and places
Geography includes a range of academic skills that you will use in your future studies
Skills gained from Geography include
How to research and to investigate
Problem solving
Real world numeracy
How to collect record present and analyse data
Map reading
Creative thinking
How to write in an essay style and in a scientific style
Empathy and understanding of others
Topics of study will include
How are natural landscapes formed and how can we manage
them
What causes and how can we manage natural hazards
How do weather and climate work
How can we manage population around the world
How do towns and cities expand and how are they managed
How and why are some places rich whilst others are poor
How can we ensure development of global resources is sustainable
Page|31 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board AQA
Career Links (As printed by the Royal Geographical Society)
How is the course assessed
GCSE Geography is assessed by two written Examinations (75) and by Coursework (25) in
the form of a Controlled Assessment
Fieldwork at the South Coast and elsewhere is an essential part of this course
Travel and tourist industry
Travel Guide Researcher
Property Researcher
Lawyers
Senior Researcher for County
Council
Government Statistician
TV Locations Unit
Business Consultants
Planners
32|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GRAPHICS (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
If you are interested in the world of advertising like
developing logos and posters always have an interest in
the covers of DVDs books amp games and really enjoy
making products then this is the course for you
Course Information
A large part of the course is a practical investigation
into the techniques and materials used in the
advertising and packaging we see around us every
day
Students will develop skills in drawing both free hand and using computer aided design
model making printing techniques logo designing greetings card and popup book
design and build up skills to design DVD covers labels and posters
To be able to present this to an industrial standard students will use desktop publishing
software such as GIMP (a variation of Photoshop) and computer aided design packages
such as Google Sketchup 2D Design and Fireworks They will get the chance to use the
new computer aided manufacturing milling machine to design and make work like
models signs and games
Assessment
Students will complete a major project and portfolio that counts towards 60 of the overall
GCSE grade Previous projects have included creating a popup book producing
promotional material for the Olympics designing the identity and packaging for a new band
and making a travel game for children
Externally set assignment by the Exam board will account for 40 The typical brief might look
like this
A leading perfumeaftershave manufacturer are aware that the environment is a
current issue The general public are concerned about so want an environmentally
friendly perfumeaftershave bottle and packaging designed to meet the current
market needs You are to design and make a model bottle including the packaging
Career Progression
Or anything in the creative industries
Graphic designer Work in advertising Web designer
Architect Product designer Set designer
Computer game designer Window dresser Magazine editor
Fashion designer Comic book creator Book illustrator
Artist
Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a
range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme
conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)
Content
Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated
situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a
portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are
required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key
skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam
They will study the following subjects at Level 1
Shampoo and condition hair
Blow drying
Contribute to performing and colouring process
Contribute to the development of effective working
relationships
Support the health and safety of the salon
Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas
Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is
complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and
seminars
All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical
assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress
How will they be assessed
They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical
assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on
progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered
individually at different stages throughout the course
There are four areas of assessment
Practical They carry out the skill
Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill
Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit
Online tests
Progression
They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such
as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme
34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and
opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal
subject for you
You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability
to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely
untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills
What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for
History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities
alike It is particularly useful for the following careers
Course Information
The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills
covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of
these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in
the classroom
Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams
almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students
maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two
year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work
Each of the following units is worth 25
Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations
Key topics
bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56
bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)
bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991
Law
Journalism
Television production and research
Advertising
Research
Marketing
Business Management
Accountancy
Archaeology
Museum work
Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939
Key Topics
bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939
bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Holocaust
Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970
Key topics
bull McCarthyism and the Red scare
bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King
bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies
bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)
Representations of History
CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990
36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT
Exam Board OCR
The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-
requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres
and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the
recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students
education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and
employers
Course Information
The course aims to develop
Problem-solving skills through the practical real life
application of ICT to complex problems
The ability to analyse appraise and make critical
judgements about the use of ICT systems
An awareness of the role of ICT in the management
manipulation and dissemination of information
Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with
others
The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and
competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist
tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final
student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms
of ICT problem solving and project management
There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been
completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer
Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc
Assessment
Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two
GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟
equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE
In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students
must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two
mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2
Diploma
Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become
increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics
magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such
as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students
to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages
we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as
they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of
audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-
world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very
relevant and very challenging
Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different
forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is
a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in
a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also
able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in
an organised way
Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to
looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as
bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns
constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe
Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied
interesting and highly rewarding
Coursework
The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall
assessment of the course Students produce three assignments
for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical
Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment
Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical
Production and Evaluation
Assessment
This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is
undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for
the qualification
Recent topics for the examination have included
Soap opera Quiz shows
Action Films The Popular Press
Music magazines
38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning
The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist
learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering
Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills
The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to
broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students
who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical
career within the sector
Progression
The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate
(VRQ) in the appropriate career route
Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using
the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship
framework) in the appropriate route
Potential Job Opportunities
Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder
Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician
Assessment Methods
Multiple Choice Examination
Oral Examination
Portfolio of Evidence
Practical Demonstration Assignment
Practical Examination
Task-based Controlled Assessment
Written Examination
Overall Assessment Method
Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit
The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the
learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test
results
Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing
and ListeningAppraising
Performing (30)
Students perform music throughout the course The two best
recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and
one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any
type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour
time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during
that period
For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental
vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)
a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc
For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an
improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing
a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording
Composing (30)
Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the
exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must
come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed
to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material
to make a new piece out of the old one
ListeningAppraising (40)
Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a
series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final
question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music
played in the exam hall
Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam
The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are
Western Classical Music 1600-1899
Music in the 20th Century
Popular Music in Context
World Music
40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching
research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic
Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not
required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music
classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C
grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas
There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some
they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is
hard work but its good fun too
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC
(EDEXCEL)
The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used
by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the
BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire
assessment is coursework based
Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)
Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the
Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a
portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of
A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links
with others
The Performer‟s role
Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer
Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)
Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students
the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the
equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own
recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves
A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)
including costs
A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it
safely
Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording
techniques
Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what
they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating
various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is
designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to
work in the Music Industry
This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic
Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will
spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software
and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs
The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both
exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both
qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)
Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as
individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily
being assessed on everything at the end of the course
A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction
grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up
with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx
42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will
learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer
software
You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white
photographs
Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based
photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-
journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new
media practice
Assessment
This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home
is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks
There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the
marks
Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SPANISH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
All students have the choice to continue
with Spanish which they have been
studying since Year 7 It would be a wise
choice to continue with Spanish as the
ability to speak a second language is not
only useful but is advantageous in
today‟s world Our closer connection
with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even
a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers
Course Information
The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based
on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage
Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to
communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding
Topics covered are
Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo
Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink
Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo
Free time shopping money new technology sports media
Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo
Home local area and the environment
Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo
School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs
Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and
listening at the end of Year 11
44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2
Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with
the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to
vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport
The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a
range of skills and techniques personal qualities and
attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter
the workplace
Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study
1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction
The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge
and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in
instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning
and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills
2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities
The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire
motivate and improve the performance of a selected target
group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It
encourages students to work in a team situation to organise
plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement
3 Injury in Sport
The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and
their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will
enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries
4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport
The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in
the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and
enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people
(Units to be studied are subject to change)
Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TEXTILES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of
textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The
students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following
areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction
applied textiles and embellished textiles
Assessment and Coursework Balance
In their first year the students will be required to produce two
extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will
follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The
students will work from first hand observations collecting and
developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and
textiles based techniques From this research and developmental
stage students will design and produce a final piece
During the second year students will begin by completing an
extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an
externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted
will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment
will account for 40
The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual
style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they
learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a
more personal response to a theme
Visits
Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources
such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second
year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within
the industry today
Why choose Textiles
Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more
confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level
course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles
The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range
of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior
design styling textiles design and costume design
46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)
Exam Board AQA
Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology
Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three
subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three
separate GCSEs
What are the differences between Triple Science and other
science GCSEs
This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will
be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of
the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award
What are the advantages of studying Triple Science
The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into
bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for
bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge
Who should consider taking Triple Science
Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope
with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a
related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those
students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this
course
The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school
GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics
Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25
Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25
Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25
Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25
Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS
2012 - 2014
Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4
option subjects
Please note
We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If
through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we
cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course
Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012
Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012
Make a record of your choice on the table below before
handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the
Options Information Evening
SUBJECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
Mo
st
De
sire
d
3D Design
Art
Catering
Construction
Dance
Drama
Ethics
Film Studies
French
Geography
Graphics
Hairdressing
History
ICT
Media Studies
Motor Vehicle
Music
Spanish
(Diploma) Sport
Textiles
Triple Sciences
Please tick if you would like to be
considered to do EBacc Please
remember that you need to
include Geography or History and
French or Spanish as your subject
options
Chessington Community College
Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS
Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603
wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk
![Page 5: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a](https://reader035.vdocument.in/reader035/viewer/2022062413/5a76533a7f8b9aa3618d22a0/html5/thumbnails/5.jpg)
Page|5 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
Qualifications Information
GCSE
General Certification of Secondary Education GCSEs are taken by most school-leaving age
students They are known as Level 2 qualifications
BTEC
BTECs are work-related qualifications suitable for a wide range of students built to
accommodate the needs of employers and allow progression to university They provide a
practical real-world approach to learning without sacrificing any of the essential subject
theory and are recognised by a large number of organisations in a wide range of sectors
BTECs offer natural progression along a vocational path from and to academic
qualifications and university
Cambrige Nationals
Cambridge Nationals are an exam-free alternative to GCSEs taking a more engaging
practical approach to learning and assessment
NVQ
NVQ is work based awards in England Wales and Northern Ireland that are achieved
through assessment and training
Choosing Your Subjects
The subjects and qualifications you study over Years 10 and 11 will affect how you spend
your time during your next two years at school It could also help set you up for the career or
college course you want later on
To help you decide what to study in Years 10 and 11 start by asking yourself what you enjoy
doing and what you‟re good at You need to think about
What you‟re interested in it could be other cultures and languages writing projects
helping people being outdoors or designing things
What types of activity you enjoy most - working things out and thinking them through
practical activities or artistic options like painting drawing or performing music
What do you want to do as a career
You will then ask yourself whether your choices give you a balanced programme and
whether your choices limit your options once you have completed your Year 11 studies
It is very important that you will seek help and advice about your GCSEs Subject teachers
your Head of House and Form Tutor will be very pleased to discuss any problems with you
We hope that your parents will play an active part in advising you on these important
decisions They can either talk to Staff at the Options Evening on Thursday 15th March 2012
or if required make an appointment to see them
Please remember the following points
Do talk to students who are in Year 10 or 11 about a specific subject you might wish to
study
6|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
Do get all the information you can from this booklet and by asking questions before
deciding on your subjects We provide information about all the subjects offered for study
in Years 10 and 11 on the following pages Please read the course descriptions carefully
Try not to consider only the subjects you need but also the subjects that interest you
Try not to choose a subject just because you like (or dislike) the teacher You may have
different teacher next year
Do think about your skills and how you work and try to match these with the different
demands of the different subjects Subjects have different amount of marks awarded for
examinations and for controlled assessments Do think carefully about how you best work
when making your selection of subjects
Try not to choose a subject simply because it sounds new or unusual Make sure you
understand what is involved in taking this subject
Do NOT fill in the subject request sheet until you are happy that you have made the correct
choices for your needs and interests
Making A Balanced Choice
It is important that you continue to study a variety of courses Not only will this contribute to
your general education it will also mean that doors to a wide number of careers and further
study will remain open to you Do remember to consider the range of skills that your subjects
will provide you with
The English Baccalaureate (EBacc)
The English Baccalaureate which was introduced as a performance measure in 2010
performance table is not a new qualification It is a new certificate that will be awarded to
any student who secures a GCSE Grade C or higher in the following subject
English
Mathematics
2 Sciences (Core and Additional or 2 out of Biology Chemistry and physics)
1 Modern Foreign Language or a Classical Language
1 Humanity (History or Geography)
The subjects included are designed to ensure that all students have the opportunity to study
a broad core of subjects ensuring that doors are not closed off to them in terms of future
progression
We allow all students to opt for subjects to make up the EBacc however we do not make it
compulsory for any student It is important that you choose subjects that you enjoy and are
therefore more likely to secure a good grade in You should also consider your own talents
and aspirations for the future
What if I Make A Wrong Choice We hope this will not happen but if it does then we will interview you and if possible swap
your subject What we have found in the past is that students decide on a subject because
their friends have chosen it and after a time the student realises they don‟t like the subject
therefore do not choose a subject because your friend has chosen it
THE
CORE
CURRICULUM
Page|9 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ENGLISH LANGUAGE (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
The skills of reading writing speaking and listening are of vital importance in many areas
Not only are they essential in many careers they also underpin successful study at all levels
and a proficiency in them can also add immeasurably to an individual‟s general quality of
life
This specification is designed to aid and assess such development and to encourage
learners to be inspired moved and changed by following a broad coherent satisfying and
worthwhile course of study It will prepare learners to make informed decisions about further
learning opportunities and career choices and to use language to participate effectively in
society and employment
Different forms of assessment are appropriate to these different skills and this is recognised in
this specification Reading and Writing are assessed through controlled assessment and in
two externally marked units Speaking and Listening are assessed in a variety of different
situations during the course
Assessment
Written Paper
Unit 1 (20) Studying written language - non-fiction texts (40 Raw Marks 40 UMS)
This unit will test through structured questions the reading of two non-fiction texts Non-
fiction texts may include fact-sheets leaflets letters extracts from autobiographies
biographies diaries advertisements reports articles and digital and multi-modal texts of
various kinds from newspapers and magazines brochures and the internet Visual
material will always be included in the material used
Unit 2 (20) Using written language - information and ideas (40 Raw Marks 40 UMS)
This unit will test transactional and discursive writing through two equally weighted tasks
(20 marks each) Across the two tasks students will be offered opportunities to write for a
range of audiences and purposes adapting style to form and real-life context in for
example letters articles leaflets reviews etc
10|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ENGLISH LANGUAGE (GCSE) continued
Exam Board WJEC
Controlled Assessment
Unit 3 (30) Literary reading and creative writing (80 Raw Marks 60 UMS)
Studying written language extended literary text (15)
Students need to present one assignment which is a sustained response to an extended
text The text must either be a Shakespeare play or one chosen from the GCSE English
Literature external assessment set text lists excluding poetry
Using language creative writing (15)
Students will be required to complete ONE piece of descriptive writing and ONE piece of
narrativeexpressive writing drawn from tasks supplied by WJEC
Unit 4 (30) Spoken language (60 Raw Marks 60 UMS)
Using Language Speaking and Listening (Communicating and adapting language
interacting and responding creating and sustaining roles) (20)
Students will be required to complete at least three Speaking and Listening tasks through
the exploration of ideas texts and issues in scripted and improvised work The three tasks
will cover the following areas
1 Communicating and adapting language
2 Interacting and responding
3 Creating and sustaining roles
Studying spoken language Variations choices change in spoken language (10)
Students will be required to study an aspect of spoken language The assignment will be
a sustained response to their own or others‟ uses of spoken language presented by
recording transcript or recollection
Page|11 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ENGLISH LITERATURE (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
This specification is based on the conviction that the study of literature should centre on an
informed personal response to a range of texts in the genres of prose poetry and drama
Assessment is through controlled assessment and examination Teachers and their students
have some flexibility in the choice of texts to be studied and some overlap with GCSE English
Language is possible and indeed encouraged as it is felt that the study of literature can
greatly enhance a student‟s writing skills and that practising hisher own writing skills can lead
a student to increased enjoyment of and success in reading
Assessment
External Assessment
Unit 1 (35)Prose (different cultures) and poetry (contemporary) (50 Raw Marks 70 UMS)
Section A (21) requires study of a prose text from a different culture It will require
students to answer two questions on the chosen prose text
Section B (14) will consist of a question offering some structure for students to explore
respond to and compare two contemporary unseen poems In preparation for this unit
students will need to study at least fifteen poems in addition to those studied for Unit 3
Unit 2a (40) Literary heritage drama and contemporary prose(60 Raw Marks 80 UMS)
This paper requires study of a drama text from the EnglishIrishWelsh literary heritage and a
contemporary prose text It will require students to answer two questions on each text
OR
Unit 2b Contemporary drama and literary heritage prose (60 Raw Marks 80 UMS)
This paper requires study of a contemporary drama text and a prose text from the English
IrishWelsh literary heritage It will require students to answer two questions on each text
Controlled Assessment
Unit 3 (25) Poetry and drama (literary heritage) (40 Raw Marks 50 UMS)
EnglishIrishWelsh literary heritage Poetry and Shakespeare play Assessment will be based
on a single assignment linking a play by Shakespeare and literary heritage poetry Students
will be required to study a Shakespeare play (not Othello or Much Ado about Nothing) and
a group of thematically linked poems taken from the WJEC poetry collection
Assessment for GCSE English Language and GCSE English Literature is tiered ie externally
assessed componentsunits are targeted at the grade ranges of A-D (Higher Tier) and C-G
(Foundation Tier) while controlled assessments cater for the full range of ability Questions and
tasks will be designed to enable students to demonstrate what they know understand and
can do
Tier Grades Available
Higher A A B C D Foundation C D E F G
Students who narrowly fail to achieve Grade D on the Higher Tier will be awarded Grade E
Students who narrowly fail to achieve Grade D on the Higher Tier will be awarded Grade E
12|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MATHEMATICS (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Mathematics is a compulsory part of the curriculum for all students and currently takes four
lessons per week GCSE Mathematics is a linear course with two written examinations one
with a calculator The course takes a holistic approach and a grade C is available on both
foundation and higher papers
Students should develop knowledge skills and understanding of the content They should be
able to use their knowledge and understanding to make connections between
mathematical concepts and apply them to solve real life problems Functional elements of
mathematics are included in each paper
The course starts formally at the end of year 9 building on the work in years 7 and 8 so a
good start is made to cover the necessary material Students will need to apply themselves
to the tasks in class and complete their homework regularly Mathematics teachers are
available outside of lessons to help students who are finding concepts difficult to understand
and a weekly bdquocatch-up‟ club is available Students are set primarily according to ability but
the attitude to learning is also a factor to be considered when the groupings are made
We offer the opportunity to take GCSE Mathematics in Year 10 and providing satisfactory
results are achieved students may be given the opportunity to start the bdquoA‟ level course or to
take an additional GCSE in statistics
Page|13 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SCIENCE - MODULAR (GCSE DOUBLE AWARD)
Exam Board AQA
There have been some major changes to the GCSE science courses which will begin began in
September 2011 There is now more emphasis on bdquoHow Science Works‟ which means not just
learning the theory but understanding the practical side of science and its relation to the
world in which we live
Science is a core subject and is therefore studied by all students The main areas of science
can be broadly broken into Biology Chemistry and Physics
In addition to the above students will be assessed on their knowledge and understanding of
science through coursework which will be set within stimulating contexts that students should
be able to relate to from their science lessons and their experiences of science on a day to
day basis
Year 10
Students in Year 10 will study six modules as indicated below
These six modules will be assessed by tests which will be taken on three separate occasions
throughout the year The final 25 of the marks will be awarded based on coursework
The majority of Year 10 students will gain the first of their two GCSEs in science at the end of
Year 10
Year 11
The structure of the Year 11 course is similar to that of Year 10 in that Biology Chemistry and
Physics will be studied however students will be assessed by means of three written papers
containing structured questions rather than objective tests
GCSE Science A
Biology 1 25
Chemistry 1 25
Physics 1 25
Centre Assessed Coursework 25
GCSE Science B
Biology 2 25
Chemistry 2 25
Physics 2 25
Centre Assessed Coursework 25
14|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SCIENCE - MODULAR (GCSE DOUBLE AWARD) continued
Exam Board AQA
The coursework component will be assessed in a similar way to Year 10 and will carry the same
proportion of marks
Whilst the new GCSE science course is designed to be more interesting than the existing
course it is likely to be rather more challenging Students will need to work consistently hard in
order to achieve high level grades The course has been designed to ensure that all students
regardless of ability gain a good grounding in science The course is also an excellent
preparation for A level studies
BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENTED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE
(EDEXCEL)
For some students who have found the study of Science difficult at Key Stage 3 a more
accessible course is BTEC Science
Students still study the 3 Science disciplines of Chemistry Biology and Physics but combined
into one course
The advantages of this course are that there is no traditional coursework component it is
assignment based so students who find that the stress of exams causes them to do less well
have the opportunity to achieve their potential It also has a practical approach and no final
exam
The course is the equivalent of 2 GCSEs
Page|15 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN SPORT
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The BTEC Level 2 Extended Certificate offers flexibility and a choice of emphasis through the
optional units It is broadly equivalent to two GCSEs
The course provides students with the opportunity to enter employment in the sport and active
leisure sector or to progress to vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel BTEC Level 3
qualifications in Sport and Sport and Exercise Sciences
The course also gives students the opportunity to develop a range of skills and techniques
personal qualities and attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter the
workplace
1 Fitness Testing and Training
This unit gives students the opportunity to explore the essential fitness requirements and training
methods used to achieve successful sports performance They learn how to accurately
conduct fitness and health tests and use key skills to compare the results against national
standards
2 Practical Sport
The aim of this unit is to develop students‟ knowledge of the rules skills and techniques for one
team and one individual sport through practical application Students will develop their
assessment skills as they observe each other perform and communicate effectively to improve
personal performance
3 Anatomy amp Physiology for Sport
The aim of this unit is to give students a good understanding of the structure and function of
the skeletal muscular cardiovascular and respiratory systems of the human body This will help
students to gain a better idea of how their body works so that they can stay healthy
4 Development of Personal Fitness
This unit can prove invaluable to students who wish to stay fit and healthy in the future
Students learn how to get fit by actively working and developing their training skills so that they
can progess their fitness to higher levels
5 Effects of Exercise on the Body Systems
This unit again develops the students‟ awareness of how all systems of their body respond to
exercise Students learn about the great health benefits which can be achieved
(Units to be studied are subject to change)
THE
OPTIONAL
CURRICULUM
Page|19 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
3 DIMENSIONAL DESIGN (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
If you enjoyed designing and making products in the Design amp Technology workshops during
Years 789 and would like to continue making more complex and detailed products
Course Information
Students will be expected to demonstrate skills and
techniques in the context of their chosen area(s) of study
within Three-Dimensional Design
making appropriate use of colour line tone texture
shape and form decoration scale and proportion
using different approaches to recording images such
as observation analysis expression and imagination
showing in their work the ability to respond to an idea concept
issue theme or brief investigating different ways of working as
appropriate to their chosen area(s) of study within Three-
Dimensional Design showing understanding of the relationship of
form and function
making use of appropriate materials tools and techniques
providing evidence of an understanding of spatial qualities
composition rhythm scale and structure
providing evidence of the use of safe working practices
In Year 10 students will design and make a variety of projects such as a Spice rack Toy Car
and a Hand Trowel using a variety of machines and materials They will gain knowledge and
skills in manufacturing techniques production methods and the design process They will be
able to design products on the computer (CAD) and then cut them out on the new CAM
machine
Assessment
This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home is
presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks There is
also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the marks
Career Progression
Students can continue onto the A Level Product design course at Chessington‟s 6th Form
Alternatively they could pursue a career in an Engineering discipline Construction Product
Design or Architecture
20|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ART (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
All students choosing Art and Design as their option are required to
take the unendorsed examination This allows them to produce
work using a number of different techniques which have been listed
below
Painting and drawing
Graphics
Sculptureconstruction
Photography
Printmaking
A foundation course which gives students experience of all of
these is run during the first two terms
Painting and Drawing
The Painting and Drawing course is structured to enable students
regardless of their ability to build on the skills and techniques
they have learned in their first three years at school and at the same time prepare for a GCSE
examination
Programmes of work will largely be determined by the demands of the examination syllabus
but every effort will be made to structure the course so that it meets the needs of the students
whilst taking into account their wide range of abilities
The Painting and Drawing disciplines will form the basis for most practical activities but
students will be encouraged to experiment with and use as broad a range of approaches as
possible in the preparation and production of coursework
3 Dimensional Studies (Sculpture)
The course is designed to develop the student‟s visual awareness sensitivity and understanding
of the work of Artists involving three dimensions in a contemporary and historical context
Students will be encouraged to develop ideas in preliminary studies through research and
experimentation observational recording and analysis of forms and to produce work in the
form of modelling carving casting construction and assembling The important relationships
between urbanrural landscapes communities and cultures will also be studied as will the
interaction of solid and void forms and shape pattern decoration colour texture scale
structure proportion rhythm movement and the effects of light upon three dimensional
objects
Page|21 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ART (GCSE) continued
Exam Board AQA
Printmaking
Students will be able to experiment with a number of simple methods for producing a printed
image Some of the following will be introduced when appropriate
Lino printing
Card printing
Monoprinting
Polystyrene sheet printing
Screen printing
Assessment
Art and Design requires students to carry out and complete work in their own time in school
and at home Preparation and research are an essential element of the course and the use of
sketchbooks when preparing work is encouraged
Coursework will account for 60 of the marks and externally set assignment will account for
40 of the marks
Visits
Students are encouraged to take part in all visits to Museums Galleries and Exhibitions where
the work on display is considered helpful in supporting coursework studies
Career Progression
Fashion Designer Interior Designer Costume Designer Artist Architect Cartoonist Textile
Designer Model Maker etc
22|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CATERING (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
This single GCSE course is a vocational qualification that is
suitable for those students who have an interest in the Catering
Industry and want a broad background in this area It would
also be a good foundation for those who wish to progress to
further education It will offer valuable preparation for students
who may want to enter the many careers in the Food Industry
Students must have a real interest in food and enjoy cooking
They must be prepared to work hard in order to reach a high
standard of presentation in their practical work
Course Information
Students who take the GCSE Catering course will learn about and demonstrate their
knowledge and understanding of the following areas of study
The industry ndash types of establishments that serve food and drink
Job roles employment opportunities and relevant training
Health safety and hygiene
Food preparation cooking and presentation
Nutrition and menu planning
Costing and portion control
Specialist equipment both small and large scale
Communication and record keeping
Environmental considerations
Students will be expected to supply their own ingredients for practical sessions that will include
the selection storage preparation and serving of
Students will also be expected to purchase a white chef‟s jacket from the College which they
must wear to all practical sessions
Meat and poultry Convenience products
Fish Sauces
Eggs Basic dough products
Dairy products Basic pastry products
Cereals flour rice pasta Cakes sponges and scones
Vegetables and fruit
Page|23 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CATERING (GCSE) continued
Exam Board WJEC
Assessment
Visits
It is hoped that there will be some visits to local restaurants and a catering college Chefs may visit
some lessons to give demonstrations or work with students in practical lessons
Career Progression
Sous Chef Cake Decorator Junior Kitchen Assistant WaitressWaiter Nutritionist Dietician Food
Technologist Baker etc
60 of the final grade will come from 2
practical tasks where students must show
catering skills related to food preparation and
service
Each task must be accompanied by a folder
of notes that cover the investigation planning
and evaluation of the task
Task 1 (15 hours) will take place in Year 10
Task 2 (30 hours) will take place in Year 11
40 of the final grade will come from a
written examination paper (1 frac14 hours) on
Catering food and the customer
This will be taken at the end of Year 11
24|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CERTIFICATE IN CONSTRUCTION
Exam Board CITY amp GUILDS
This course is ideal for all students who are considering
a career in any part of the construction or building
industry It is of benefit weather they are considering a
craft or management position
Course Information
Students study for six periods a week and in the first
year concentrate on basic building skills
Carpentry
Electrics
Plumbing
Bricklaying
Health and safety
Site management
This is done through the City and Guilds Introductory Certificate in Basic Construction Skills in which
eight practical tasks must be passed and one theoretical on line test
The second year allows students to develop along their chosen path either developing their craft
skills or moving towards a professional career via the Diplomas in Construction and the Built
Environment This would be an ideal path for those considering a career in
Building management
Architecture
Town planning
Surveying
Engineering
Building control
Environmentalist
Landscape Architecture
Those students not considering a professional career would expand their skills in chosen areas
through further City and Guilds qualifications
Page|25 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 FIRST CERTIFICATE IN PERFORMING ARTS DANCE
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Students will look at FIVE different units in order to achieve a
qualification on this course
The most appropriate units can be selected according to
the individual needs of each group from the following list
Performing Dance
The Development of Dance
Working in the Performing Arts Industry
Professional Development in the Performing Arts
Industry
Understanding Dance
Contemporary Dance
Jazz Dance
Musical Theatre
Makeup for Performers
There is a significant emphasis on Choreographic and
performance skills throughout each unit and students will
be expected to
Learn set dances
Learn dance vocabulary
Choreograph solo duo and small group dances
Improve their performance and technical skills
Perform in front of their peers and a broader based audience
See professionals at work
Write reviews of works
Study the effect of costume set design and props
Look at the cultural and historical context of dances they view
The course is internally assessed throughout by the teacher and students are informally
assessed during every lesson Students will also be assessed more formally through
Assignments which meet the criteria for each Unit These are marked by the teacher and
internally verified by another specialist teacher to ensure that they are of the highest quality
Students opting for this course must understand that to achieve a good grade at BTEC they
have to have a love of making up (choreographing) and performing dances to others They
must also have some basic dance ability such as being able to move in time with the music
Students will need to work in bare feet for much of this course
Students who enjoy all aspects of dance and movement and have the confidence to perform
to a small audience will be well suited to this course Students will be expected to work in their
own time after school to perfect their dances and complete Assignment briefs They should
also be happy to work in a range of different dance styles and not just one particular style
26|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
DRAMA (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
GCSE Drama is an exciting and practical course which offers opportunities to become a skilled
and confident performer
The course aims to encourage students to develop
an interest in and understanding of a range of
drama and theatre experiences
increased self and group awareness
imaginative creative communication and
social skills
a love and appreciation of attending a range of
live theatre experiences
The course consists of two parts
Coursework 60
Two of the following options only one of which may be a technicaldesign skill
Devised thematic work for performance to an audience
Acting
Improvisation
Theatre in Education presentation
Dancedrama
Set
Costume
Make-up
Properties
Masks
Puppets
Lighting
Sound
Stage management
Each option is assessed through two parts
Part One A mark awarded for group and communication skills
Part Two A mark awarded for the final performance
Written Paper 40
2 hours
A choice of any two questions based on the following sections
A Set play bdquoAnimal Farm‟
B Response to live productions seen during the course
Page|27 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ETHICS (GCSE)
Exam Board OCR
The bdquoPhilosophy and Ethics‟ GCSE will allow students to explore the fundamental questions
about life and existence encourage their personal social and cultural development and
enhance their understanding of different cultures and belief systems
Over the course of the two years students will study important and thought-provoking issues
such as the nature and existence of God good and evil and the conflict between religion
and science relationships poverty and medical ethics peace and justice and the role of the
media in today‟s world It is a broad satisfying and worthwhile course of study designed to
challenge and stimulate students and equip them with the necessary skills to lead constructive
and thoughtful lives in the modern world
28|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
FILM STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
ldquoThe secret to film is that its an illusionrdquo
George Lucas Director of Star Wars
This course is ideal for any student who is
Able to work independently or as part of a team
Creative and practical but also analytical
Enthusiastic about films
Interested in making their own short films
Over the two years students will
Plan storyboard film and edit a short film working in a small
group adding their own music and special effects
Understand how films are made and promoted
Learn about the business of making films
Make a close study of one genre of Hollywood films (currently Disaster Films)
Closely research and study at least two different non-Hollywood Films (made in Britain
Europe or Africa)
Prepare their own film promotion campaign
Write an in-depth analysis of films of their choice
Assessment is through
A portfolio of coursework and also
Two end of course examinations
Although it is a new course Film Studies is already a popular choice for many students
combining well with the Media study in English as well as Media
Studies itself Film Studies is increasingly well
thought of by many colleges as it combines
a practical creative approach with
analytical skills
From Citizen Kane to Inception
Page|29 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
FRENCH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
The course outline for French is similar to Spanish It is not compulsory to have previous
knowledge of the language before starting the course but you need to be aware that it will
be more challenging for you and you need to put in a lot of effort to succeed However it is
not at all impossible
30|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GEOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Geography is a fascinating and wide-reaching subject and it has been shown that students
with Geography qualifications are some of the most employable
Why you should take Geography GCSE
It provides you with an understanding of global issues which will affect our lives now and
in the future
By the end of their GCSE you will have a better understanding of the way the world
works
Geography is a good link between the arts and sciences so it will help you in their other
subjects
You will understand how physical landscapes (eg rivers coasts mountains) are formed
You will be allowed to express opinions about people and places
Geography includes a range of academic skills that you will use in your future studies
Skills gained from Geography include
How to research and to investigate
Problem solving
Real world numeracy
How to collect record present and analyse data
Map reading
Creative thinking
How to write in an essay style and in a scientific style
Empathy and understanding of others
Topics of study will include
How are natural landscapes formed and how can we manage
them
What causes and how can we manage natural hazards
How do weather and climate work
How can we manage population around the world
How do towns and cities expand and how are they managed
How and why are some places rich whilst others are poor
How can we ensure development of global resources is sustainable
Page|31 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board AQA
Career Links (As printed by the Royal Geographical Society)
How is the course assessed
GCSE Geography is assessed by two written Examinations (75) and by Coursework (25) in
the form of a Controlled Assessment
Fieldwork at the South Coast and elsewhere is an essential part of this course
Travel and tourist industry
Travel Guide Researcher
Property Researcher
Lawyers
Senior Researcher for County
Council
Government Statistician
TV Locations Unit
Business Consultants
Planners
32|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GRAPHICS (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
If you are interested in the world of advertising like
developing logos and posters always have an interest in
the covers of DVDs books amp games and really enjoy
making products then this is the course for you
Course Information
A large part of the course is a practical investigation
into the techniques and materials used in the
advertising and packaging we see around us every
day
Students will develop skills in drawing both free hand and using computer aided design
model making printing techniques logo designing greetings card and popup book
design and build up skills to design DVD covers labels and posters
To be able to present this to an industrial standard students will use desktop publishing
software such as GIMP (a variation of Photoshop) and computer aided design packages
such as Google Sketchup 2D Design and Fireworks They will get the chance to use the
new computer aided manufacturing milling machine to design and make work like
models signs and games
Assessment
Students will complete a major project and portfolio that counts towards 60 of the overall
GCSE grade Previous projects have included creating a popup book producing
promotional material for the Olympics designing the identity and packaging for a new band
and making a travel game for children
Externally set assignment by the Exam board will account for 40 The typical brief might look
like this
A leading perfumeaftershave manufacturer are aware that the environment is a
current issue The general public are concerned about so want an environmentally
friendly perfumeaftershave bottle and packaging designed to meet the current
market needs You are to design and make a model bottle including the packaging
Career Progression
Or anything in the creative industries
Graphic designer Work in advertising Web designer
Architect Product designer Set designer
Computer game designer Window dresser Magazine editor
Fashion designer Comic book creator Book illustrator
Artist
Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a
range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme
conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)
Content
Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated
situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a
portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are
required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key
skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam
They will study the following subjects at Level 1
Shampoo and condition hair
Blow drying
Contribute to performing and colouring process
Contribute to the development of effective working
relationships
Support the health and safety of the salon
Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas
Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is
complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and
seminars
All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical
assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress
How will they be assessed
They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical
assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on
progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered
individually at different stages throughout the course
There are four areas of assessment
Practical They carry out the skill
Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill
Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit
Online tests
Progression
They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such
as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme
34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and
opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal
subject for you
You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability
to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely
untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills
What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for
History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities
alike It is particularly useful for the following careers
Course Information
The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills
covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of
these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in
the classroom
Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams
almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students
maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two
year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work
Each of the following units is worth 25
Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations
Key topics
bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56
bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)
bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991
Law
Journalism
Television production and research
Advertising
Research
Marketing
Business Management
Accountancy
Archaeology
Museum work
Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939
Key Topics
bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939
bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Holocaust
Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970
Key topics
bull McCarthyism and the Red scare
bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King
bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies
bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)
Representations of History
CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990
36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT
Exam Board OCR
The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-
requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres
and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the
recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students
education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and
employers
Course Information
The course aims to develop
Problem-solving skills through the practical real life
application of ICT to complex problems
The ability to analyse appraise and make critical
judgements about the use of ICT systems
An awareness of the role of ICT in the management
manipulation and dissemination of information
Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with
others
The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and
competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist
tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final
student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms
of ICT problem solving and project management
There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been
completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer
Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc
Assessment
Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two
GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟
equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE
In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students
must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two
mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2
Diploma
Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become
increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics
magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such
as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students
to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages
we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as
they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of
audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-
world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very
relevant and very challenging
Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different
forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is
a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in
a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also
able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in
an organised way
Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to
looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as
bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns
constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe
Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied
interesting and highly rewarding
Coursework
The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall
assessment of the course Students produce three assignments
for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical
Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment
Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical
Production and Evaluation
Assessment
This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is
undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for
the qualification
Recent topics for the examination have included
Soap opera Quiz shows
Action Films The Popular Press
Music magazines
38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning
The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist
learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering
Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills
The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to
broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students
who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical
career within the sector
Progression
The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate
(VRQ) in the appropriate career route
Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using
the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship
framework) in the appropriate route
Potential Job Opportunities
Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder
Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician
Assessment Methods
Multiple Choice Examination
Oral Examination
Portfolio of Evidence
Practical Demonstration Assignment
Practical Examination
Task-based Controlled Assessment
Written Examination
Overall Assessment Method
Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit
The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the
learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test
results
Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing
and ListeningAppraising
Performing (30)
Students perform music throughout the course The two best
recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and
one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any
type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour
time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during
that period
For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental
vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)
a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc
For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an
improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing
a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording
Composing (30)
Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the
exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must
come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed
to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material
to make a new piece out of the old one
ListeningAppraising (40)
Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a
series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final
question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music
played in the exam hall
Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam
The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are
Western Classical Music 1600-1899
Music in the 20th Century
Popular Music in Context
World Music
40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching
research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic
Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not
required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music
classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C
grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas
There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some
they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is
hard work but its good fun too
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC
(EDEXCEL)
The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used
by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the
BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire
assessment is coursework based
Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)
Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the
Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a
portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of
A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links
with others
The Performer‟s role
Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer
Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)
Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students
the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the
equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own
recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves
A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)
including costs
A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it
safely
Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording
techniques
Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what
they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating
various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is
designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to
work in the Music Industry
This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic
Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will
spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software
and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs
The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both
exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both
qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)
Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as
individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily
being assessed on everything at the end of the course
A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction
grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up
with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx
42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will
learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer
software
You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white
photographs
Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based
photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-
journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new
media practice
Assessment
This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home
is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks
There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the
marks
Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SPANISH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
All students have the choice to continue
with Spanish which they have been
studying since Year 7 It would be a wise
choice to continue with Spanish as the
ability to speak a second language is not
only useful but is advantageous in
today‟s world Our closer connection
with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even
a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers
Course Information
The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based
on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage
Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to
communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding
Topics covered are
Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo
Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink
Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo
Free time shopping money new technology sports media
Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo
Home local area and the environment
Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo
School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs
Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and
listening at the end of Year 11
44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2
Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with
the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to
vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport
The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a
range of skills and techniques personal qualities and
attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter
the workplace
Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study
1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction
The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge
and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in
instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning
and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills
2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities
The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire
motivate and improve the performance of a selected target
group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It
encourages students to work in a team situation to organise
plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement
3 Injury in Sport
The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and
their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will
enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries
4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport
The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in
the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and
enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people
(Units to be studied are subject to change)
Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TEXTILES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of
textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The
students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following
areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction
applied textiles and embellished textiles
Assessment and Coursework Balance
In their first year the students will be required to produce two
extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will
follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The
students will work from first hand observations collecting and
developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and
textiles based techniques From this research and developmental
stage students will design and produce a final piece
During the second year students will begin by completing an
extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an
externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted
will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment
will account for 40
The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual
style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they
learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a
more personal response to a theme
Visits
Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources
such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second
year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within
the industry today
Why choose Textiles
Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more
confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level
course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles
The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range
of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior
design styling textiles design and costume design
46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)
Exam Board AQA
Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology
Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three
subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three
separate GCSEs
What are the differences between Triple Science and other
science GCSEs
This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will
be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of
the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award
What are the advantages of studying Triple Science
The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into
bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for
bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge
Who should consider taking Triple Science
Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope
with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a
related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those
students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this
course
The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school
GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics
Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25
Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25
Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25
Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25
Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS
2012 - 2014
Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4
option subjects
Please note
We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If
through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we
cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course
Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012
Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012
Make a record of your choice on the table below before
handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the
Options Information Evening
SUBJECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
Mo
st
De
sire
d
3D Design
Art
Catering
Construction
Dance
Drama
Ethics
Film Studies
French
Geography
Graphics
Hairdressing
History
ICT
Media Studies
Motor Vehicle
Music
Spanish
(Diploma) Sport
Textiles
Triple Sciences
Please tick if you would like to be
considered to do EBacc Please
remember that you need to
include Geography or History and
French or Spanish as your subject
options
Chessington Community College
Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS
Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603
wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk
![Page 6: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a](https://reader035.vdocument.in/reader035/viewer/2022062413/5a76533a7f8b9aa3618d22a0/html5/thumbnails/6.jpg)
6|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
Do get all the information you can from this booklet and by asking questions before
deciding on your subjects We provide information about all the subjects offered for study
in Years 10 and 11 on the following pages Please read the course descriptions carefully
Try not to consider only the subjects you need but also the subjects that interest you
Try not to choose a subject just because you like (or dislike) the teacher You may have
different teacher next year
Do think about your skills and how you work and try to match these with the different
demands of the different subjects Subjects have different amount of marks awarded for
examinations and for controlled assessments Do think carefully about how you best work
when making your selection of subjects
Try not to choose a subject simply because it sounds new or unusual Make sure you
understand what is involved in taking this subject
Do NOT fill in the subject request sheet until you are happy that you have made the correct
choices for your needs and interests
Making A Balanced Choice
It is important that you continue to study a variety of courses Not only will this contribute to
your general education it will also mean that doors to a wide number of careers and further
study will remain open to you Do remember to consider the range of skills that your subjects
will provide you with
The English Baccalaureate (EBacc)
The English Baccalaureate which was introduced as a performance measure in 2010
performance table is not a new qualification It is a new certificate that will be awarded to
any student who secures a GCSE Grade C or higher in the following subject
English
Mathematics
2 Sciences (Core and Additional or 2 out of Biology Chemistry and physics)
1 Modern Foreign Language or a Classical Language
1 Humanity (History or Geography)
The subjects included are designed to ensure that all students have the opportunity to study
a broad core of subjects ensuring that doors are not closed off to them in terms of future
progression
We allow all students to opt for subjects to make up the EBacc however we do not make it
compulsory for any student It is important that you choose subjects that you enjoy and are
therefore more likely to secure a good grade in You should also consider your own talents
and aspirations for the future
What if I Make A Wrong Choice We hope this will not happen but if it does then we will interview you and if possible swap
your subject What we have found in the past is that students decide on a subject because
their friends have chosen it and after a time the student realises they don‟t like the subject
therefore do not choose a subject because your friend has chosen it
THE
CORE
CURRICULUM
Page|9 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ENGLISH LANGUAGE (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
The skills of reading writing speaking and listening are of vital importance in many areas
Not only are they essential in many careers they also underpin successful study at all levels
and a proficiency in them can also add immeasurably to an individual‟s general quality of
life
This specification is designed to aid and assess such development and to encourage
learners to be inspired moved and changed by following a broad coherent satisfying and
worthwhile course of study It will prepare learners to make informed decisions about further
learning opportunities and career choices and to use language to participate effectively in
society and employment
Different forms of assessment are appropriate to these different skills and this is recognised in
this specification Reading and Writing are assessed through controlled assessment and in
two externally marked units Speaking and Listening are assessed in a variety of different
situations during the course
Assessment
Written Paper
Unit 1 (20) Studying written language - non-fiction texts (40 Raw Marks 40 UMS)
This unit will test through structured questions the reading of two non-fiction texts Non-
fiction texts may include fact-sheets leaflets letters extracts from autobiographies
biographies diaries advertisements reports articles and digital and multi-modal texts of
various kinds from newspapers and magazines brochures and the internet Visual
material will always be included in the material used
Unit 2 (20) Using written language - information and ideas (40 Raw Marks 40 UMS)
This unit will test transactional and discursive writing through two equally weighted tasks
(20 marks each) Across the two tasks students will be offered opportunities to write for a
range of audiences and purposes adapting style to form and real-life context in for
example letters articles leaflets reviews etc
10|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ENGLISH LANGUAGE (GCSE) continued
Exam Board WJEC
Controlled Assessment
Unit 3 (30) Literary reading and creative writing (80 Raw Marks 60 UMS)
Studying written language extended literary text (15)
Students need to present one assignment which is a sustained response to an extended
text The text must either be a Shakespeare play or one chosen from the GCSE English
Literature external assessment set text lists excluding poetry
Using language creative writing (15)
Students will be required to complete ONE piece of descriptive writing and ONE piece of
narrativeexpressive writing drawn from tasks supplied by WJEC
Unit 4 (30) Spoken language (60 Raw Marks 60 UMS)
Using Language Speaking and Listening (Communicating and adapting language
interacting and responding creating and sustaining roles) (20)
Students will be required to complete at least three Speaking and Listening tasks through
the exploration of ideas texts and issues in scripted and improvised work The three tasks
will cover the following areas
1 Communicating and adapting language
2 Interacting and responding
3 Creating and sustaining roles
Studying spoken language Variations choices change in spoken language (10)
Students will be required to study an aspect of spoken language The assignment will be
a sustained response to their own or others‟ uses of spoken language presented by
recording transcript or recollection
Page|11 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ENGLISH LITERATURE (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
This specification is based on the conviction that the study of literature should centre on an
informed personal response to a range of texts in the genres of prose poetry and drama
Assessment is through controlled assessment and examination Teachers and their students
have some flexibility in the choice of texts to be studied and some overlap with GCSE English
Language is possible and indeed encouraged as it is felt that the study of literature can
greatly enhance a student‟s writing skills and that practising hisher own writing skills can lead
a student to increased enjoyment of and success in reading
Assessment
External Assessment
Unit 1 (35)Prose (different cultures) and poetry (contemporary) (50 Raw Marks 70 UMS)
Section A (21) requires study of a prose text from a different culture It will require
students to answer two questions on the chosen prose text
Section B (14) will consist of a question offering some structure for students to explore
respond to and compare two contemporary unseen poems In preparation for this unit
students will need to study at least fifteen poems in addition to those studied for Unit 3
Unit 2a (40) Literary heritage drama and contemporary prose(60 Raw Marks 80 UMS)
This paper requires study of a drama text from the EnglishIrishWelsh literary heritage and a
contemporary prose text It will require students to answer two questions on each text
OR
Unit 2b Contemporary drama and literary heritage prose (60 Raw Marks 80 UMS)
This paper requires study of a contemporary drama text and a prose text from the English
IrishWelsh literary heritage It will require students to answer two questions on each text
Controlled Assessment
Unit 3 (25) Poetry and drama (literary heritage) (40 Raw Marks 50 UMS)
EnglishIrishWelsh literary heritage Poetry and Shakespeare play Assessment will be based
on a single assignment linking a play by Shakespeare and literary heritage poetry Students
will be required to study a Shakespeare play (not Othello or Much Ado about Nothing) and
a group of thematically linked poems taken from the WJEC poetry collection
Assessment for GCSE English Language and GCSE English Literature is tiered ie externally
assessed componentsunits are targeted at the grade ranges of A-D (Higher Tier) and C-G
(Foundation Tier) while controlled assessments cater for the full range of ability Questions and
tasks will be designed to enable students to demonstrate what they know understand and
can do
Tier Grades Available
Higher A A B C D Foundation C D E F G
Students who narrowly fail to achieve Grade D on the Higher Tier will be awarded Grade E
Students who narrowly fail to achieve Grade D on the Higher Tier will be awarded Grade E
12|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MATHEMATICS (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Mathematics is a compulsory part of the curriculum for all students and currently takes four
lessons per week GCSE Mathematics is a linear course with two written examinations one
with a calculator The course takes a holistic approach and a grade C is available on both
foundation and higher papers
Students should develop knowledge skills and understanding of the content They should be
able to use their knowledge and understanding to make connections between
mathematical concepts and apply them to solve real life problems Functional elements of
mathematics are included in each paper
The course starts formally at the end of year 9 building on the work in years 7 and 8 so a
good start is made to cover the necessary material Students will need to apply themselves
to the tasks in class and complete their homework regularly Mathematics teachers are
available outside of lessons to help students who are finding concepts difficult to understand
and a weekly bdquocatch-up‟ club is available Students are set primarily according to ability but
the attitude to learning is also a factor to be considered when the groupings are made
We offer the opportunity to take GCSE Mathematics in Year 10 and providing satisfactory
results are achieved students may be given the opportunity to start the bdquoA‟ level course or to
take an additional GCSE in statistics
Page|13 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SCIENCE - MODULAR (GCSE DOUBLE AWARD)
Exam Board AQA
There have been some major changes to the GCSE science courses which will begin began in
September 2011 There is now more emphasis on bdquoHow Science Works‟ which means not just
learning the theory but understanding the practical side of science and its relation to the
world in which we live
Science is a core subject and is therefore studied by all students The main areas of science
can be broadly broken into Biology Chemistry and Physics
In addition to the above students will be assessed on their knowledge and understanding of
science through coursework which will be set within stimulating contexts that students should
be able to relate to from their science lessons and their experiences of science on a day to
day basis
Year 10
Students in Year 10 will study six modules as indicated below
These six modules will be assessed by tests which will be taken on three separate occasions
throughout the year The final 25 of the marks will be awarded based on coursework
The majority of Year 10 students will gain the first of their two GCSEs in science at the end of
Year 10
Year 11
The structure of the Year 11 course is similar to that of Year 10 in that Biology Chemistry and
Physics will be studied however students will be assessed by means of three written papers
containing structured questions rather than objective tests
GCSE Science A
Biology 1 25
Chemistry 1 25
Physics 1 25
Centre Assessed Coursework 25
GCSE Science B
Biology 2 25
Chemistry 2 25
Physics 2 25
Centre Assessed Coursework 25
14|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SCIENCE - MODULAR (GCSE DOUBLE AWARD) continued
Exam Board AQA
The coursework component will be assessed in a similar way to Year 10 and will carry the same
proportion of marks
Whilst the new GCSE science course is designed to be more interesting than the existing
course it is likely to be rather more challenging Students will need to work consistently hard in
order to achieve high level grades The course has been designed to ensure that all students
regardless of ability gain a good grounding in science The course is also an excellent
preparation for A level studies
BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENTED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE
(EDEXCEL)
For some students who have found the study of Science difficult at Key Stage 3 a more
accessible course is BTEC Science
Students still study the 3 Science disciplines of Chemistry Biology and Physics but combined
into one course
The advantages of this course are that there is no traditional coursework component it is
assignment based so students who find that the stress of exams causes them to do less well
have the opportunity to achieve their potential It also has a practical approach and no final
exam
The course is the equivalent of 2 GCSEs
Page|15 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN SPORT
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The BTEC Level 2 Extended Certificate offers flexibility and a choice of emphasis through the
optional units It is broadly equivalent to two GCSEs
The course provides students with the opportunity to enter employment in the sport and active
leisure sector or to progress to vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel BTEC Level 3
qualifications in Sport and Sport and Exercise Sciences
The course also gives students the opportunity to develop a range of skills and techniques
personal qualities and attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter the
workplace
1 Fitness Testing and Training
This unit gives students the opportunity to explore the essential fitness requirements and training
methods used to achieve successful sports performance They learn how to accurately
conduct fitness and health tests and use key skills to compare the results against national
standards
2 Practical Sport
The aim of this unit is to develop students‟ knowledge of the rules skills and techniques for one
team and one individual sport through practical application Students will develop their
assessment skills as they observe each other perform and communicate effectively to improve
personal performance
3 Anatomy amp Physiology for Sport
The aim of this unit is to give students a good understanding of the structure and function of
the skeletal muscular cardiovascular and respiratory systems of the human body This will help
students to gain a better idea of how their body works so that they can stay healthy
4 Development of Personal Fitness
This unit can prove invaluable to students who wish to stay fit and healthy in the future
Students learn how to get fit by actively working and developing their training skills so that they
can progess their fitness to higher levels
5 Effects of Exercise on the Body Systems
This unit again develops the students‟ awareness of how all systems of their body respond to
exercise Students learn about the great health benefits which can be achieved
(Units to be studied are subject to change)
THE
OPTIONAL
CURRICULUM
Page|19 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
3 DIMENSIONAL DESIGN (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
If you enjoyed designing and making products in the Design amp Technology workshops during
Years 789 and would like to continue making more complex and detailed products
Course Information
Students will be expected to demonstrate skills and
techniques in the context of their chosen area(s) of study
within Three-Dimensional Design
making appropriate use of colour line tone texture
shape and form decoration scale and proportion
using different approaches to recording images such
as observation analysis expression and imagination
showing in their work the ability to respond to an idea concept
issue theme or brief investigating different ways of working as
appropriate to their chosen area(s) of study within Three-
Dimensional Design showing understanding of the relationship of
form and function
making use of appropriate materials tools and techniques
providing evidence of an understanding of spatial qualities
composition rhythm scale and structure
providing evidence of the use of safe working practices
In Year 10 students will design and make a variety of projects such as a Spice rack Toy Car
and a Hand Trowel using a variety of machines and materials They will gain knowledge and
skills in manufacturing techniques production methods and the design process They will be
able to design products on the computer (CAD) and then cut them out on the new CAM
machine
Assessment
This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home is
presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks There is
also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the marks
Career Progression
Students can continue onto the A Level Product design course at Chessington‟s 6th Form
Alternatively they could pursue a career in an Engineering discipline Construction Product
Design or Architecture
20|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ART (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
All students choosing Art and Design as their option are required to
take the unendorsed examination This allows them to produce
work using a number of different techniques which have been listed
below
Painting and drawing
Graphics
Sculptureconstruction
Photography
Printmaking
A foundation course which gives students experience of all of
these is run during the first two terms
Painting and Drawing
The Painting and Drawing course is structured to enable students
regardless of their ability to build on the skills and techniques
they have learned in their first three years at school and at the same time prepare for a GCSE
examination
Programmes of work will largely be determined by the demands of the examination syllabus
but every effort will be made to structure the course so that it meets the needs of the students
whilst taking into account their wide range of abilities
The Painting and Drawing disciplines will form the basis for most practical activities but
students will be encouraged to experiment with and use as broad a range of approaches as
possible in the preparation and production of coursework
3 Dimensional Studies (Sculpture)
The course is designed to develop the student‟s visual awareness sensitivity and understanding
of the work of Artists involving three dimensions in a contemporary and historical context
Students will be encouraged to develop ideas in preliminary studies through research and
experimentation observational recording and analysis of forms and to produce work in the
form of modelling carving casting construction and assembling The important relationships
between urbanrural landscapes communities and cultures will also be studied as will the
interaction of solid and void forms and shape pattern decoration colour texture scale
structure proportion rhythm movement and the effects of light upon three dimensional
objects
Page|21 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ART (GCSE) continued
Exam Board AQA
Printmaking
Students will be able to experiment with a number of simple methods for producing a printed
image Some of the following will be introduced when appropriate
Lino printing
Card printing
Monoprinting
Polystyrene sheet printing
Screen printing
Assessment
Art and Design requires students to carry out and complete work in their own time in school
and at home Preparation and research are an essential element of the course and the use of
sketchbooks when preparing work is encouraged
Coursework will account for 60 of the marks and externally set assignment will account for
40 of the marks
Visits
Students are encouraged to take part in all visits to Museums Galleries and Exhibitions where
the work on display is considered helpful in supporting coursework studies
Career Progression
Fashion Designer Interior Designer Costume Designer Artist Architect Cartoonist Textile
Designer Model Maker etc
22|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CATERING (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
This single GCSE course is a vocational qualification that is
suitable for those students who have an interest in the Catering
Industry and want a broad background in this area It would
also be a good foundation for those who wish to progress to
further education It will offer valuable preparation for students
who may want to enter the many careers in the Food Industry
Students must have a real interest in food and enjoy cooking
They must be prepared to work hard in order to reach a high
standard of presentation in their practical work
Course Information
Students who take the GCSE Catering course will learn about and demonstrate their
knowledge and understanding of the following areas of study
The industry ndash types of establishments that serve food and drink
Job roles employment opportunities and relevant training
Health safety and hygiene
Food preparation cooking and presentation
Nutrition and menu planning
Costing and portion control
Specialist equipment both small and large scale
Communication and record keeping
Environmental considerations
Students will be expected to supply their own ingredients for practical sessions that will include
the selection storage preparation and serving of
Students will also be expected to purchase a white chef‟s jacket from the College which they
must wear to all practical sessions
Meat and poultry Convenience products
Fish Sauces
Eggs Basic dough products
Dairy products Basic pastry products
Cereals flour rice pasta Cakes sponges and scones
Vegetables and fruit
Page|23 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CATERING (GCSE) continued
Exam Board WJEC
Assessment
Visits
It is hoped that there will be some visits to local restaurants and a catering college Chefs may visit
some lessons to give demonstrations or work with students in practical lessons
Career Progression
Sous Chef Cake Decorator Junior Kitchen Assistant WaitressWaiter Nutritionist Dietician Food
Technologist Baker etc
60 of the final grade will come from 2
practical tasks where students must show
catering skills related to food preparation and
service
Each task must be accompanied by a folder
of notes that cover the investigation planning
and evaluation of the task
Task 1 (15 hours) will take place in Year 10
Task 2 (30 hours) will take place in Year 11
40 of the final grade will come from a
written examination paper (1 frac14 hours) on
Catering food and the customer
This will be taken at the end of Year 11
24|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CERTIFICATE IN CONSTRUCTION
Exam Board CITY amp GUILDS
This course is ideal for all students who are considering
a career in any part of the construction or building
industry It is of benefit weather they are considering a
craft or management position
Course Information
Students study for six periods a week and in the first
year concentrate on basic building skills
Carpentry
Electrics
Plumbing
Bricklaying
Health and safety
Site management
This is done through the City and Guilds Introductory Certificate in Basic Construction Skills in which
eight practical tasks must be passed and one theoretical on line test
The second year allows students to develop along their chosen path either developing their craft
skills or moving towards a professional career via the Diplomas in Construction and the Built
Environment This would be an ideal path for those considering a career in
Building management
Architecture
Town planning
Surveying
Engineering
Building control
Environmentalist
Landscape Architecture
Those students not considering a professional career would expand their skills in chosen areas
through further City and Guilds qualifications
Page|25 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 FIRST CERTIFICATE IN PERFORMING ARTS DANCE
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Students will look at FIVE different units in order to achieve a
qualification on this course
The most appropriate units can be selected according to
the individual needs of each group from the following list
Performing Dance
The Development of Dance
Working in the Performing Arts Industry
Professional Development in the Performing Arts
Industry
Understanding Dance
Contemporary Dance
Jazz Dance
Musical Theatre
Makeup for Performers
There is a significant emphasis on Choreographic and
performance skills throughout each unit and students will
be expected to
Learn set dances
Learn dance vocabulary
Choreograph solo duo and small group dances
Improve their performance and technical skills
Perform in front of their peers and a broader based audience
See professionals at work
Write reviews of works
Study the effect of costume set design and props
Look at the cultural and historical context of dances they view
The course is internally assessed throughout by the teacher and students are informally
assessed during every lesson Students will also be assessed more formally through
Assignments which meet the criteria for each Unit These are marked by the teacher and
internally verified by another specialist teacher to ensure that they are of the highest quality
Students opting for this course must understand that to achieve a good grade at BTEC they
have to have a love of making up (choreographing) and performing dances to others They
must also have some basic dance ability such as being able to move in time with the music
Students will need to work in bare feet for much of this course
Students who enjoy all aspects of dance and movement and have the confidence to perform
to a small audience will be well suited to this course Students will be expected to work in their
own time after school to perfect their dances and complete Assignment briefs They should
also be happy to work in a range of different dance styles and not just one particular style
26|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
DRAMA (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
GCSE Drama is an exciting and practical course which offers opportunities to become a skilled
and confident performer
The course aims to encourage students to develop
an interest in and understanding of a range of
drama and theatre experiences
increased self and group awareness
imaginative creative communication and
social skills
a love and appreciation of attending a range of
live theatre experiences
The course consists of two parts
Coursework 60
Two of the following options only one of which may be a technicaldesign skill
Devised thematic work for performance to an audience
Acting
Improvisation
Theatre in Education presentation
Dancedrama
Set
Costume
Make-up
Properties
Masks
Puppets
Lighting
Sound
Stage management
Each option is assessed through two parts
Part One A mark awarded for group and communication skills
Part Two A mark awarded for the final performance
Written Paper 40
2 hours
A choice of any two questions based on the following sections
A Set play bdquoAnimal Farm‟
B Response to live productions seen during the course
Page|27 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ETHICS (GCSE)
Exam Board OCR
The bdquoPhilosophy and Ethics‟ GCSE will allow students to explore the fundamental questions
about life and existence encourage their personal social and cultural development and
enhance their understanding of different cultures and belief systems
Over the course of the two years students will study important and thought-provoking issues
such as the nature and existence of God good and evil and the conflict between religion
and science relationships poverty and medical ethics peace and justice and the role of the
media in today‟s world It is a broad satisfying and worthwhile course of study designed to
challenge and stimulate students and equip them with the necessary skills to lead constructive
and thoughtful lives in the modern world
28|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
FILM STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
ldquoThe secret to film is that its an illusionrdquo
George Lucas Director of Star Wars
This course is ideal for any student who is
Able to work independently or as part of a team
Creative and practical but also analytical
Enthusiastic about films
Interested in making their own short films
Over the two years students will
Plan storyboard film and edit a short film working in a small
group adding their own music and special effects
Understand how films are made and promoted
Learn about the business of making films
Make a close study of one genre of Hollywood films (currently Disaster Films)
Closely research and study at least two different non-Hollywood Films (made in Britain
Europe or Africa)
Prepare their own film promotion campaign
Write an in-depth analysis of films of their choice
Assessment is through
A portfolio of coursework and also
Two end of course examinations
Although it is a new course Film Studies is already a popular choice for many students
combining well with the Media study in English as well as Media
Studies itself Film Studies is increasingly well
thought of by many colleges as it combines
a practical creative approach with
analytical skills
From Citizen Kane to Inception
Page|29 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
FRENCH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
The course outline for French is similar to Spanish It is not compulsory to have previous
knowledge of the language before starting the course but you need to be aware that it will
be more challenging for you and you need to put in a lot of effort to succeed However it is
not at all impossible
30|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GEOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Geography is a fascinating and wide-reaching subject and it has been shown that students
with Geography qualifications are some of the most employable
Why you should take Geography GCSE
It provides you with an understanding of global issues which will affect our lives now and
in the future
By the end of their GCSE you will have a better understanding of the way the world
works
Geography is a good link between the arts and sciences so it will help you in their other
subjects
You will understand how physical landscapes (eg rivers coasts mountains) are formed
You will be allowed to express opinions about people and places
Geography includes a range of academic skills that you will use in your future studies
Skills gained from Geography include
How to research and to investigate
Problem solving
Real world numeracy
How to collect record present and analyse data
Map reading
Creative thinking
How to write in an essay style and in a scientific style
Empathy and understanding of others
Topics of study will include
How are natural landscapes formed and how can we manage
them
What causes and how can we manage natural hazards
How do weather and climate work
How can we manage population around the world
How do towns and cities expand and how are they managed
How and why are some places rich whilst others are poor
How can we ensure development of global resources is sustainable
Page|31 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board AQA
Career Links (As printed by the Royal Geographical Society)
How is the course assessed
GCSE Geography is assessed by two written Examinations (75) and by Coursework (25) in
the form of a Controlled Assessment
Fieldwork at the South Coast and elsewhere is an essential part of this course
Travel and tourist industry
Travel Guide Researcher
Property Researcher
Lawyers
Senior Researcher for County
Council
Government Statistician
TV Locations Unit
Business Consultants
Planners
32|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GRAPHICS (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
If you are interested in the world of advertising like
developing logos and posters always have an interest in
the covers of DVDs books amp games and really enjoy
making products then this is the course for you
Course Information
A large part of the course is a practical investigation
into the techniques and materials used in the
advertising and packaging we see around us every
day
Students will develop skills in drawing both free hand and using computer aided design
model making printing techniques logo designing greetings card and popup book
design and build up skills to design DVD covers labels and posters
To be able to present this to an industrial standard students will use desktop publishing
software such as GIMP (a variation of Photoshop) and computer aided design packages
such as Google Sketchup 2D Design and Fireworks They will get the chance to use the
new computer aided manufacturing milling machine to design and make work like
models signs and games
Assessment
Students will complete a major project and portfolio that counts towards 60 of the overall
GCSE grade Previous projects have included creating a popup book producing
promotional material for the Olympics designing the identity and packaging for a new band
and making a travel game for children
Externally set assignment by the Exam board will account for 40 The typical brief might look
like this
A leading perfumeaftershave manufacturer are aware that the environment is a
current issue The general public are concerned about so want an environmentally
friendly perfumeaftershave bottle and packaging designed to meet the current
market needs You are to design and make a model bottle including the packaging
Career Progression
Or anything in the creative industries
Graphic designer Work in advertising Web designer
Architect Product designer Set designer
Computer game designer Window dresser Magazine editor
Fashion designer Comic book creator Book illustrator
Artist
Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a
range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme
conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)
Content
Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated
situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a
portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are
required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key
skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam
They will study the following subjects at Level 1
Shampoo and condition hair
Blow drying
Contribute to performing and colouring process
Contribute to the development of effective working
relationships
Support the health and safety of the salon
Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas
Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is
complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and
seminars
All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical
assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress
How will they be assessed
They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical
assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on
progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered
individually at different stages throughout the course
There are four areas of assessment
Practical They carry out the skill
Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill
Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit
Online tests
Progression
They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such
as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme
34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and
opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal
subject for you
You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability
to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely
untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills
What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for
History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities
alike It is particularly useful for the following careers
Course Information
The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills
covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of
these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in
the classroom
Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams
almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students
maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two
year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work
Each of the following units is worth 25
Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations
Key topics
bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56
bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)
bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991
Law
Journalism
Television production and research
Advertising
Research
Marketing
Business Management
Accountancy
Archaeology
Museum work
Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939
Key Topics
bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939
bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Holocaust
Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970
Key topics
bull McCarthyism and the Red scare
bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King
bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies
bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)
Representations of History
CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990
36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT
Exam Board OCR
The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-
requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres
and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the
recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students
education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and
employers
Course Information
The course aims to develop
Problem-solving skills through the practical real life
application of ICT to complex problems
The ability to analyse appraise and make critical
judgements about the use of ICT systems
An awareness of the role of ICT in the management
manipulation and dissemination of information
Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with
others
The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and
competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist
tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final
student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms
of ICT problem solving and project management
There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been
completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer
Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc
Assessment
Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two
GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟
equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE
In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students
must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two
mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2
Diploma
Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become
increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics
magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such
as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students
to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages
we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as
they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of
audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-
world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very
relevant and very challenging
Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different
forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is
a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in
a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also
able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in
an organised way
Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to
looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as
bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns
constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe
Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied
interesting and highly rewarding
Coursework
The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall
assessment of the course Students produce three assignments
for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical
Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment
Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical
Production and Evaluation
Assessment
This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is
undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for
the qualification
Recent topics for the examination have included
Soap opera Quiz shows
Action Films The Popular Press
Music magazines
38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning
The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist
learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering
Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills
The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to
broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students
who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical
career within the sector
Progression
The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate
(VRQ) in the appropriate career route
Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using
the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship
framework) in the appropriate route
Potential Job Opportunities
Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder
Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician
Assessment Methods
Multiple Choice Examination
Oral Examination
Portfolio of Evidence
Practical Demonstration Assignment
Practical Examination
Task-based Controlled Assessment
Written Examination
Overall Assessment Method
Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit
The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the
learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test
results
Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing
and ListeningAppraising
Performing (30)
Students perform music throughout the course The two best
recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and
one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any
type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour
time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during
that period
For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental
vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)
a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc
For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an
improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing
a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording
Composing (30)
Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the
exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must
come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed
to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material
to make a new piece out of the old one
ListeningAppraising (40)
Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a
series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final
question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music
played in the exam hall
Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam
The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are
Western Classical Music 1600-1899
Music in the 20th Century
Popular Music in Context
World Music
40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching
research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic
Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not
required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music
classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C
grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas
There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some
they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is
hard work but its good fun too
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC
(EDEXCEL)
The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used
by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the
BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire
assessment is coursework based
Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)
Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the
Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a
portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of
A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links
with others
The Performer‟s role
Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer
Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)
Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students
the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the
equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own
recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves
A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)
including costs
A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it
safely
Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording
techniques
Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what
they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating
various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is
designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to
work in the Music Industry
This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic
Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will
spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software
and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs
The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both
exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both
qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)
Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as
individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily
being assessed on everything at the end of the course
A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction
grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up
with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx
42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will
learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer
software
You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white
photographs
Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based
photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-
journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new
media practice
Assessment
This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home
is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks
There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the
marks
Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SPANISH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
All students have the choice to continue
with Spanish which they have been
studying since Year 7 It would be a wise
choice to continue with Spanish as the
ability to speak a second language is not
only useful but is advantageous in
today‟s world Our closer connection
with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even
a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers
Course Information
The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based
on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage
Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to
communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding
Topics covered are
Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo
Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink
Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo
Free time shopping money new technology sports media
Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo
Home local area and the environment
Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo
School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs
Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and
listening at the end of Year 11
44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2
Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with
the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to
vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport
The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a
range of skills and techniques personal qualities and
attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter
the workplace
Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study
1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction
The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge
and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in
instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning
and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills
2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities
The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire
motivate and improve the performance of a selected target
group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It
encourages students to work in a team situation to organise
plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement
3 Injury in Sport
The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and
their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will
enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries
4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport
The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in
the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and
enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people
(Units to be studied are subject to change)
Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TEXTILES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of
textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The
students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following
areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction
applied textiles and embellished textiles
Assessment and Coursework Balance
In their first year the students will be required to produce two
extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will
follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The
students will work from first hand observations collecting and
developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and
textiles based techniques From this research and developmental
stage students will design and produce a final piece
During the second year students will begin by completing an
extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an
externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted
will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment
will account for 40
The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual
style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they
learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a
more personal response to a theme
Visits
Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources
such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second
year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within
the industry today
Why choose Textiles
Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more
confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level
course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles
The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range
of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior
design styling textiles design and costume design
46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)
Exam Board AQA
Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology
Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three
subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three
separate GCSEs
What are the differences between Triple Science and other
science GCSEs
This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will
be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of
the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award
What are the advantages of studying Triple Science
The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into
bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for
bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge
Who should consider taking Triple Science
Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope
with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a
related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those
students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this
course
The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school
GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics
Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25
Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25
Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25
Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25
Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS
2012 - 2014
Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4
option subjects
Please note
We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If
through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we
cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course
Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012
Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012
Make a record of your choice on the table below before
handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the
Options Information Evening
SUBJECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
Mo
st
De
sire
d
3D Design
Art
Catering
Construction
Dance
Drama
Ethics
Film Studies
French
Geography
Graphics
Hairdressing
History
ICT
Media Studies
Motor Vehicle
Music
Spanish
(Diploma) Sport
Textiles
Triple Sciences
Please tick if you would like to be
considered to do EBacc Please
remember that you need to
include Geography or History and
French or Spanish as your subject
options
Chessington Community College
Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS
Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603
wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk
![Page 7: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a](https://reader035.vdocument.in/reader035/viewer/2022062413/5a76533a7f8b9aa3618d22a0/html5/thumbnails/7.jpg)
THE
CORE
CURRICULUM
Page|9 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ENGLISH LANGUAGE (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
The skills of reading writing speaking and listening are of vital importance in many areas
Not only are they essential in many careers they also underpin successful study at all levels
and a proficiency in them can also add immeasurably to an individual‟s general quality of
life
This specification is designed to aid and assess such development and to encourage
learners to be inspired moved and changed by following a broad coherent satisfying and
worthwhile course of study It will prepare learners to make informed decisions about further
learning opportunities and career choices and to use language to participate effectively in
society and employment
Different forms of assessment are appropriate to these different skills and this is recognised in
this specification Reading and Writing are assessed through controlled assessment and in
two externally marked units Speaking and Listening are assessed in a variety of different
situations during the course
Assessment
Written Paper
Unit 1 (20) Studying written language - non-fiction texts (40 Raw Marks 40 UMS)
This unit will test through structured questions the reading of two non-fiction texts Non-
fiction texts may include fact-sheets leaflets letters extracts from autobiographies
biographies diaries advertisements reports articles and digital and multi-modal texts of
various kinds from newspapers and magazines brochures and the internet Visual
material will always be included in the material used
Unit 2 (20) Using written language - information and ideas (40 Raw Marks 40 UMS)
This unit will test transactional and discursive writing through two equally weighted tasks
(20 marks each) Across the two tasks students will be offered opportunities to write for a
range of audiences and purposes adapting style to form and real-life context in for
example letters articles leaflets reviews etc
10|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ENGLISH LANGUAGE (GCSE) continued
Exam Board WJEC
Controlled Assessment
Unit 3 (30) Literary reading and creative writing (80 Raw Marks 60 UMS)
Studying written language extended literary text (15)
Students need to present one assignment which is a sustained response to an extended
text The text must either be a Shakespeare play or one chosen from the GCSE English
Literature external assessment set text lists excluding poetry
Using language creative writing (15)
Students will be required to complete ONE piece of descriptive writing and ONE piece of
narrativeexpressive writing drawn from tasks supplied by WJEC
Unit 4 (30) Spoken language (60 Raw Marks 60 UMS)
Using Language Speaking and Listening (Communicating and adapting language
interacting and responding creating and sustaining roles) (20)
Students will be required to complete at least three Speaking and Listening tasks through
the exploration of ideas texts and issues in scripted and improvised work The three tasks
will cover the following areas
1 Communicating and adapting language
2 Interacting and responding
3 Creating and sustaining roles
Studying spoken language Variations choices change in spoken language (10)
Students will be required to study an aspect of spoken language The assignment will be
a sustained response to their own or others‟ uses of spoken language presented by
recording transcript or recollection
Page|11 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ENGLISH LITERATURE (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
This specification is based on the conviction that the study of literature should centre on an
informed personal response to a range of texts in the genres of prose poetry and drama
Assessment is through controlled assessment and examination Teachers and their students
have some flexibility in the choice of texts to be studied and some overlap with GCSE English
Language is possible and indeed encouraged as it is felt that the study of literature can
greatly enhance a student‟s writing skills and that practising hisher own writing skills can lead
a student to increased enjoyment of and success in reading
Assessment
External Assessment
Unit 1 (35)Prose (different cultures) and poetry (contemporary) (50 Raw Marks 70 UMS)
Section A (21) requires study of a prose text from a different culture It will require
students to answer two questions on the chosen prose text
Section B (14) will consist of a question offering some structure for students to explore
respond to and compare two contemporary unseen poems In preparation for this unit
students will need to study at least fifteen poems in addition to those studied for Unit 3
Unit 2a (40) Literary heritage drama and contemporary prose(60 Raw Marks 80 UMS)
This paper requires study of a drama text from the EnglishIrishWelsh literary heritage and a
contemporary prose text It will require students to answer two questions on each text
OR
Unit 2b Contemporary drama and literary heritage prose (60 Raw Marks 80 UMS)
This paper requires study of a contemporary drama text and a prose text from the English
IrishWelsh literary heritage It will require students to answer two questions on each text
Controlled Assessment
Unit 3 (25) Poetry and drama (literary heritage) (40 Raw Marks 50 UMS)
EnglishIrishWelsh literary heritage Poetry and Shakespeare play Assessment will be based
on a single assignment linking a play by Shakespeare and literary heritage poetry Students
will be required to study a Shakespeare play (not Othello or Much Ado about Nothing) and
a group of thematically linked poems taken from the WJEC poetry collection
Assessment for GCSE English Language and GCSE English Literature is tiered ie externally
assessed componentsunits are targeted at the grade ranges of A-D (Higher Tier) and C-G
(Foundation Tier) while controlled assessments cater for the full range of ability Questions and
tasks will be designed to enable students to demonstrate what they know understand and
can do
Tier Grades Available
Higher A A B C D Foundation C D E F G
Students who narrowly fail to achieve Grade D on the Higher Tier will be awarded Grade E
Students who narrowly fail to achieve Grade D on the Higher Tier will be awarded Grade E
12|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MATHEMATICS (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Mathematics is a compulsory part of the curriculum for all students and currently takes four
lessons per week GCSE Mathematics is a linear course with two written examinations one
with a calculator The course takes a holistic approach and a grade C is available on both
foundation and higher papers
Students should develop knowledge skills and understanding of the content They should be
able to use their knowledge and understanding to make connections between
mathematical concepts and apply them to solve real life problems Functional elements of
mathematics are included in each paper
The course starts formally at the end of year 9 building on the work in years 7 and 8 so a
good start is made to cover the necessary material Students will need to apply themselves
to the tasks in class and complete their homework regularly Mathematics teachers are
available outside of lessons to help students who are finding concepts difficult to understand
and a weekly bdquocatch-up‟ club is available Students are set primarily according to ability but
the attitude to learning is also a factor to be considered when the groupings are made
We offer the opportunity to take GCSE Mathematics in Year 10 and providing satisfactory
results are achieved students may be given the opportunity to start the bdquoA‟ level course or to
take an additional GCSE in statistics
Page|13 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SCIENCE - MODULAR (GCSE DOUBLE AWARD)
Exam Board AQA
There have been some major changes to the GCSE science courses which will begin began in
September 2011 There is now more emphasis on bdquoHow Science Works‟ which means not just
learning the theory but understanding the practical side of science and its relation to the
world in which we live
Science is a core subject and is therefore studied by all students The main areas of science
can be broadly broken into Biology Chemistry and Physics
In addition to the above students will be assessed on their knowledge and understanding of
science through coursework which will be set within stimulating contexts that students should
be able to relate to from their science lessons and their experiences of science on a day to
day basis
Year 10
Students in Year 10 will study six modules as indicated below
These six modules will be assessed by tests which will be taken on three separate occasions
throughout the year The final 25 of the marks will be awarded based on coursework
The majority of Year 10 students will gain the first of their two GCSEs in science at the end of
Year 10
Year 11
The structure of the Year 11 course is similar to that of Year 10 in that Biology Chemistry and
Physics will be studied however students will be assessed by means of three written papers
containing structured questions rather than objective tests
GCSE Science A
Biology 1 25
Chemistry 1 25
Physics 1 25
Centre Assessed Coursework 25
GCSE Science B
Biology 2 25
Chemistry 2 25
Physics 2 25
Centre Assessed Coursework 25
14|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SCIENCE - MODULAR (GCSE DOUBLE AWARD) continued
Exam Board AQA
The coursework component will be assessed in a similar way to Year 10 and will carry the same
proportion of marks
Whilst the new GCSE science course is designed to be more interesting than the existing
course it is likely to be rather more challenging Students will need to work consistently hard in
order to achieve high level grades The course has been designed to ensure that all students
regardless of ability gain a good grounding in science The course is also an excellent
preparation for A level studies
BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENTED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE
(EDEXCEL)
For some students who have found the study of Science difficult at Key Stage 3 a more
accessible course is BTEC Science
Students still study the 3 Science disciplines of Chemistry Biology and Physics but combined
into one course
The advantages of this course are that there is no traditional coursework component it is
assignment based so students who find that the stress of exams causes them to do less well
have the opportunity to achieve their potential It also has a practical approach and no final
exam
The course is the equivalent of 2 GCSEs
Page|15 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN SPORT
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The BTEC Level 2 Extended Certificate offers flexibility and a choice of emphasis through the
optional units It is broadly equivalent to two GCSEs
The course provides students with the opportunity to enter employment in the sport and active
leisure sector or to progress to vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel BTEC Level 3
qualifications in Sport and Sport and Exercise Sciences
The course also gives students the opportunity to develop a range of skills and techniques
personal qualities and attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter the
workplace
1 Fitness Testing and Training
This unit gives students the opportunity to explore the essential fitness requirements and training
methods used to achieve successful sports performance They learn how to accurately
conduct fitness and health tests and use key skills to compare the results against national
standards
2 Practical Sport
The aim of this unit is to develop students‟ knowledge of the rules skills and techniques for one
team and one individual sport through practical application Students will develop their
assessment skills as they observe each other perform and communicate effectively to improve
personal performance
3 Anatomy amp Physiology for Sport
The aim of this unit is to give students a good understanding of the structure and function of
the skeletal muscular cardiovascular and respiratory systems of the human body This will help
students to gain a better idea of how their body works so that they can stay healthy
4 Development of Personal Fitness
This unit can prove invaluable to students who wish to stay fit and healthy in the future
Students learn how to get fit by actively working and developing their training skills so that they
can progess their fitness to higher levels
5 Effects of Exercise on the Body Systems
This unit again develops the students‟ awareness of how all systems of their body respond to
exercise Students learn about the great health benefits which can be achieved
(Units to be studied are subject to change)
THE
OPTIONAL
CURRICULUM
Page|19 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
3 DIMENSIONAL DESIGN (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
If you enjoyed designing and making products in the Design amp Technology workshops during
Years 789 and would like to continue making more complex and detailed products
Course Information
Students will be expected to demonstrate skills and
techniques in the context of their chosen area(s) of study
within Three-Dimensional Design
making appropriate use of colour line tone texture
shape and form decoration scale and proportion
using different approaches to recording images such
as observation analysis expression and imagination
showing in their work the ability to respond to an idea concept
issue theme or brief investigating different ways of working as
appropriate to their chosen area(s) of study within Three-
Dimensional Design showing understanding of the relationship of
form and function
making use of appropriate materials tools and techniques
providing evidence of an understanding of spatial qualities
composition rhythm scale and structure
providing evidence of the use of safe working practices
In Year 10 students will design and make a variety of projects such as a Spice rack Toy Car
and a Hand Trowel using a variety of machines and materials They will gain knowledge and
skills in manufacturing techniques production methods and the design process They will be
able to design products on the computer (CAD) and then cut them out on the new CAM
machine
Assessment
This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home is
presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks There is
also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the marks
Career Progression
Students can continue onto the A Level Product design course at Chessington‟s 6th Form
Alternatively they could pursue a career in an Engineering discipline Construction Product
Design or Architecture
20|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ART (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
All students choosing Art and Design as their option are required to
take the unendorsed examination This allows them to produce
work using a number of different techniques which have been listed
below
Painting and drawing
Graphics
Sculptureconstruction
Photography
Printmaking
A foundation course which gives students experience of all of
these is run during the first two terms
Painting and Drawing
The Painting and Drawing course is structured to enable students
regardless of their ability to build on the skills and techniques
they have learned in their first three years at school and at the same time prepare for a GCSE
examination
Programmes of work will largely be determined by the demands of the examination syllabus
but every effort will be made to structure the course so that it meets the needs of the students
whilst taking into account their wide range of abilities
The Painting and Drawing disciplines will form the basis for most practical activities but
students will be encouraged to experiment with and use as broad a range of approaches as
possible in the preparation and production of coursework
3 Dimensional Studies (Sculpture)
The course is designed to develop the student‟s visual awareness sensitivity and understanding
of the work of Artists involving three dimensions in a contemporary and historical context
Students will be encouraged to develop ideas in preliminary studies through research and
experimentation observational recording and analysis of forms and to produce work in the
form of modelling carving casting construction and assembling The important relationships
between urbanrural landscapes communities and cultures will also be studied as will the
interaction of solid and void forms and shape pattern decoration colour texture scale
structure proportion rhythm movement and the effects of light upon three dimensional
objects
Page|21 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ART (GCSE) continued
Exam Board AQA
Printmaking
Students will be able to experiment with a number of simple methods for producing a printed
image Some of the following will be introduced when appropriate
Lino printing
Card printing
Monoprinting
Polystyrene sheet printing
Screen printing
Assessment
Art and Design requires students to carry out and complete work in their own time in school
and at home Preparation and research are an essential element of the course and the use of
sketchbooks when preparing work is encouraged
Coursework will account for 60 of the marks and externally set assignment will account for
40 of the marks
Visits
Students are encouraged to take part in all visits to Museums Galleries and Exhibitions where
the work on display is considered helpful in supporting coursework studies
Career Progression
Fashion Designer Interior Designer Costume Designer Artist Architect Cartoonist Textile
Designer Model Maker etc
22|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CATERING (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
This single GCSE course is a vocational qualification that is
suitable for those students who have an interest in the Catering
Industry and want a broad background in this area It would
also be a good foundation for those who wish to progress to
further education It will offer valuable preparation for students
who may want to enter the many careers in the Food Industry
Students must have a real interest in food and enjoy cooking
They must be prepared to work hard in order to reach a high
standard of presentation in their practical work
Course Information
Students who take the GCSE Catering course will learn about and demonstrate their
knowledge and understanding of the following areas of study
The industry ndash types of establishments that serve food and drink
Job roles employment opportunities and relevant training
Health safety and hygiene
Food preparation cooking and presentation
Nutrition and menu planning
Costing and portion control
Specialist equipment both small and large scale
Communication and record keeping
Environmental considerations
Students will be expected to supply their own ingredients for practical sessions that will include
the selection storage preparation and serving of
Students will also be expected to purchase a white chef‟s jacket from the College which they
must wear to all practical sessions
Meat and poultry Convenience products
Fish Sauces
Eggs Basic dough products
Dairy products Basic pastry products
Cereals flour rice pasta Cakes sponges and scones
Vegetables and fruit
Page|23 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CATERING (GCSE) continued
Exam Board WJEC
Assessment
Visits
It is hoped that there will be some visits to local restaurants and a catering college Chefs may visit
some lessons to give demonstrations or work with students in practical lessons
Career Progression
Sous Chef Cake Decorator Junior Kitchen Assistant WaitressWaiter Nutritionist Dietician Food
Technologist Baker etc
60 of the final grade will come from 2
practical tasks where students must show
catering skills related to food preparation and
service
Each task must be accompanied by a folder
of notes that cover the investigation planning
and evaluation of the task
Task 1 (15 hours) will take place in Year 10
Task 2 (30 hours) will take place in Year 11
40 of the final grade will come from a
written examination paper (1 frac14 hours) on
Catering food and the customer
This will be taken at the end of Year 11
24|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CERTIFICATE IN CONSTRUCTION
Exam Board CITY amp GUILDS
This course is ideal for all students who are considering
a career in any part of the construction or building
industry It is of benefit weather they are considering a
craft or management position
Course Information
Students study for six periods a week and in the first
year concentrate on basic building skills
Carpentry
Electrics
Plumbing
Bricklaying
Health and safety
Site management
This is done through the City and Guilds Introductory Certificate in Basic Construction Skills in which
eight practical tasks must be passed and one theoretical on line test
The second year allows students to develop along their chosen path either developing their craft
skills or moving towards a professional career via the Diplomas in Construction and the Built
Environment This would be an ideal path for those considering a career in
Building management
Architecture
Town planning
Surveying
Engineering
Building control
Environmentalist
Landscape Architecture
Those students not considering a professional career would expand their skills in chosen areas
through further City and Guilds qualifications
Page|25 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 FIRST CERTIFICATE IN PERFORMING ARTS DANCE
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Students will look at FIVE different units in order to achieve a
qualification on this course
The most appropriate units can be selected according to
the individual needs of each group from the following list
Performing Dance
The Development of Dance
Working in the Performing Arts Industry
Professional Development in the Performing Arts
Industry
Understanding Dance
Contemporary Dance
Jazz Dance
Musical Theatre
Makeup for Performers
There is a significant emphasis on Choreographic and
performance skills throughout each unit and students will
be expected to
Learn set dances
Learn dance vocabulary
Choreograph solo duo and small group dances
Improve their performance and technical skills
Perform in front of their peers and a broader based audience
See professionals at work
Write reviews of works
Study the effect of costume set design and props
Look at the cultural and historical context of dances they view
The course is internally assessed throughout by the teacher and students are informally
assessed during every lesson Students will also be assessed more formally through
Assignments which meet the criteria for each Unit These are marked by the teacher and
internally verified by another specialist teacher to ensure that they are of the highest quality
Students opting for this course must understand that to achieve a good grade at BTEC they
have to have a love of making up (choreographing) and performing dances to others They
must also have some basic dance ability such as being able to move in time with the music
Students will need to work in bare feet for much of this course
Students who enjoy all aspects of dance and movement and have the confidence to perform
to a small audience will be well suited to this course Students will be expected to work in their
own time after school to perfect their dances and complete Assignment briefs They should
also be happy to work in a range of different dance styles and not just one particular style
26|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
DRAMA (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
GCSE Drama is an exciting and practical course which offers opportunities to become a skilled
and confident performer
The course aims to encourage students to develop
an interest in and understanding of a range of
drama and theatre experiences
increased self and group awareness
imaginative creative communication and
social skills
a love and appreciation of attending a range of
live theatre experiences
The course consists of two parts
Coursework 60
Two of the following options only one of which may be a technicaldesign skill
Devised thematic work for performance to an audience
Acting
Improvisation
Theatre in Education presentation
Dancedrama
Set
Costume
Make-up
Properties
Masks
Puppets
Lighting
Sound
Stage management
Each option is assessed through two parts
Part One A mark awarded for group and communication skills
Part Two A mark awarded for the final performance
Written Paper 40
2 hours
A choice of any two questions based on the following sections
A Set play bdquoAnimal Farm‟
B Response to live productions seen during the course
Page|27 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ETHICS (GCSE)
Exam Board OCR
The bdquoPhilosophy and Ethics‟ GCSE will allow students to explore the fundamental questions
about life and existence encourage their personal social and cultural development and
enhance their understanding of different cultures and belief systems
Over the course of the two years students will study important and thought-provoking issues
such as the nature and existence of God good and evil and the conflict between religion
and science relationships poverty and medical ethics peace and justice and the role of the
media in today‟s world It is a broad satisfying and worthwhile course of study designed to
challenge and stimulate students and equip them with the necessary skills to lead constructive
and thoughtful lives in the modern world
28|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
FILM STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
ldquoThe secret to film is that its an illusionrdquo
George Lucas Director of Star Wars
This course is ideal for any student who is
Able to work independently or as part of a team
Creative and practical but also analytical
Enthusiastic about films
Interested in making their own short films
Over the two years students will
Plan storyboard film and edit a short film working in a small
group adding their own music and special effects
Understand how films are made and promoted
Learn about the business of making films
Make a close study of one genre of Hollywood films (currently Disaster Films)
Closely research and study at least two different non-Hollywood Films (made in Britain
Europe or Africa)
Prepare their own film promotion campaign
Write an in-depth analysis of films of their choice
Assessment is through
A portfolio of coursework and also
Two end of course examinations
Although it is a new course Film Studies is already a popular choice for many students
combining well with the Media study in English as well as Media
Studies itself Film Studies is increasingly well
thought of by many colleges as it combines
a practical creative approach with
analytical skills
From Citizen Kane to Inception
Page|29 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
FRENCH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
The course outline for French is similar to Spanish It is not compulsory to have previous
knowledge of the language before starting the course but you need to be aware that it will
be more challenging for you and you need to put in a lot of effort to succeed However it is
not at all impossible
30|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GEOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Geography is a fascinating and wide-reaching subject and it has been shown that students
with Geography qualifications are some of the most employable
Why you should take Geography GCSE
It provides you with an understanding of global issues which will affect our lives now and
in the future
By the end of their GCSE you will have a better understanding of the way the world
works
Geography is a good link between the arts and sciences so it will help you in their other
subjects
You will understand how physical landscapes (eg rivers coasts mountains) are formed
You will be allowed to express opinions about people and places
Geography includes a range of academic skills that you will use in your future studies
Skills gained from Geography include
How to research and to investigate
Problem solving
Real world numeracy
How to collect record present and analyse data
Map reading
Creative thinking
How to write in an essay style and in a scientific style
Empathy and understanding of others
Topics of study will include
How are natural landscapes formed and how can we manage
them
What causes and how can we manage natural hazards
How do weather and climate work
How can we manage population around the world
How do towns and cities expand and how are they managed
How and why are some places rich whilst others are poor
How can we ensure development of global resources is sustainable
Page|31 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board AQA
Career Links (As printed by the Royal Geographical Society)
How is the course assessed
GCSE Geography is assessed by two written Examinations (75) and by Coursework (25) in
the form of a Controlled Assessment
Fieldwork at the South Coast and elsewhere is an essential part of this course
Travel and tourist industry
Travel Guide Researcher
Property Researcher
Lawyers
Senior Researcher for County
Council
Government Statistician
TV Locations Unit
Business Consultants
Planners
32|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GRAPHICS (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
If you are interested in the world of advertising like
developing logos and posters always have an interest in
the covers of DVDs books amp games and really enjoy
making products then this is the course for you
Course Information
A large part of the course is a practical investigation
into the techniques and materials used in the
advertising and packaging we see around us every
day
Students will develop skills in drawing both free hand and using computer aided design
model making printing techniques logo designing greetings card and popup book
design and build up skills to design DVD covers labels and posters
To be able to present this to an industrial standard students will use desktop publishing
software such as GIMP (a variation of Photoshop) and computer aided design packages
such as Google Sketchup 2D Design and Fireworks They will get the chance to use the
new computer aided manufacturing milling machine to design and make work like
models signs and games
Assessment
Students will complete a major project and portfolio that counts towards 60 of the overall
GCSE grade Previous projects have included creating a popup book producing
promotional material for the Olympics designing the identity and packaging for a new band
and making a travel game for children
Externally set assignment by the Exam board will account for 40 The typical brief might look
like this
A leading perfumeaftershave manufacturer are aware that the environment is a
current issue The general public are concerned about so want an environmentally
friendly perfumeaftershave bottle and packaging designed to meet the current
market needs You are to design and make a model bottle including the packaging
Career Progression
Or anything in the creative industries
Graphic designer Work in advertising Web designer
Architect Product designer Set designer
Computer game designer Window dresser Magazine editor
Fashion designer Comic book creator Book illustrator
Artist
Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a
range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme
conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)
Content
Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated
situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a
portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are
required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key
skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam
They will study the following subjects at Level 1
Shampoo and condition hair
Blow drying
Contribute to performing and colouring process
Contribute to the development of effective working
relationships
Support the health and safety of the salon
Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas
Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is
complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and
seminars
All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical
assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress
How will they be assessed
They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical
assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on
progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered
individually at different stages throughout the course
There are four areas of assessment
Practical They carry out the skill
Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill
Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit
Online tests
Progression
They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such
as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme
34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and
opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal
subject for you
You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability
to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely
untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills
What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for
History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities
alike It is particularly useful for the following careers
Course Information
The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills
covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of
these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in
the classroom
Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams
almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students
maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two
year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work
Each of the following units is worth 25
Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations
Key topics
bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56
bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)
bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991
Law
Journalism
Television production and research
Advertising
Research
Marketing
Business Management
Accountancy
Archaeology
Museum work
Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939
Key Topics
bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939
bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Holocaust
Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970
Key topics
bull McCarthyism and the Red scare
bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King
bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies
bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)
Representations of History
CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990
36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT
Exam Board OCR
The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-
requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres
and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the
recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students
education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and
employers
Course Information
The course aims to develop
Problem-solving skills through the practical real life
application of ICT to complex problems
The ability to analyse appraise and make critical
judgements about the use of ICT systems
An awareness of the role of ICT in the management
manipulation and dissemination of information
Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with
others
The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and
competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist
tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final
student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms
of ICT problem solving and project management
There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been
completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer
Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc
Assessment
Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two
GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟
equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE
In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students
must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two
mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2
Diploma
Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become
increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics
magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such
as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students
to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages
we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as
they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of
audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-
world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very
relevant and very challenging
Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different
forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is
a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in
a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also
able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in
an organised way
Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to
looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as
bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns
constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe
Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied
interesting and highly rewarding
Coursework
The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall
assessment of the course Students produce three assignments
for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical
Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment
Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical
Production and Evaluation
Assessment
This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is
undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for
the qualification
Recent topics for the examination have included
Soap opera Quiz shows
Action Films The Popular Press
Music magazines
38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning
The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist
learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering
Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills
The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to
broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students
who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical
career within the sector
Progression
The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate
(VRQ) in the appropriate career route
Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using
the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship
framework) in the appropriate route
Potential Job Opportunities
Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder
Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician
Assessment Methods
Multiple Choice Examination
Oral Examination
Portfolio of Evidence
Practical Demonstration Assignment
Practical Examination
Task-based Controlled Assessment
Written Examination
Overall Assessment Method
Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit
The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the
learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test
results
Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing
and ListeningAppraising
Performing (30)
Students perform music throughout the course The two best
recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and
one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any
type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour
time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during
that period
For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental
vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)
a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc
For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an
improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing
a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording
Composing (30)
Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the
exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must
come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed
to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material
to make a new piece out of the old one
ListeningAppraising (40)
Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a
series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final
question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music
played in the exam hall
Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam
The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are
Western Classical Music 1600-1899
Music in the 20th Century
Popular Music in Context
World Music
40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching
research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic
Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not
required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music
classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C
grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas
There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some
they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is
hard work but its good fun too
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC
(EDEXCEL)
The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used
by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the
BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire
assessment is coursework based
Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)
Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the
Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a
portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of
A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links
with others
The Performer‟s role
Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer
Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)
Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students
the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the
equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own
recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves
A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)
including costs
A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it
safely
Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording
techniques
Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what
they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating
various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is
designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to
work in the Music Industry
This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic
Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will
spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software
and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs
The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both
exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both
qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)
Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as
individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily
being assessed on everything at the end of the course
A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction
grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up
with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx
42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will
learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer
software
You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white
photographs
Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based
photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-
journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new
media practice
Assessment
This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home
is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks
There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the
marks
Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SPANISH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
All students have the choice to continue
with Spanish which they have been
studying since Year 7 It would be a wise
choice to continue with Spanish as the
ability to speak a second language is not
only useful but is advantageous in
today‟s world Our closer connection
with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even
a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers
Course Information
The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based
on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage
Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to
communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding
Topics covered are
Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo
Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink
Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo
Free time shopping money new technology sports media
Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo
Home local area and the environment
Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo
School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs
Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and
listening at the end of Year 11
44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2
Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with
the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to
vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport
The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a
range of skills and techniques personal qualities and
attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter
the workplace
Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study
1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction
The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge
and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in
instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning
and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills
2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities
The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire
motivate and improve the performance of a selected target
group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It
encourages students to work in a team situation to organise
plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement
3 Injury in Sport
The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and
their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will
enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries
4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport
The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in
the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and
enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people
(Units to be studied are subject to change)
Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TEXTILES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of
textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The
students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following
areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction
applied textiles and embellished textiles
Assessment and Coursework Balance
In their first year the students will be required to produce two
extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will
follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The
students will work from first hand observations collecting and
developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and
textiles based techniques From this research and developmental
stage students will design and produce a final piece
During the second year students will begin by completing an
extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an
externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted
will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment
will account for 40
The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual
style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they
learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a
more personal response to a theme
Visits
Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources
such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second
year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within
the industry today
Why choose Textiles
Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more
confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level
course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles
The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range
of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior
design styling textiles design and costume design
46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)
Exam Board AQA
Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology
Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three
subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three
separate GCSEs
What are the differences between Triple Science and other
science GCSEs
This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will
be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of
the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award
What are the advantages of studying Triple Science
The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into
bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for
bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge
Who should consider taking Triple Science
Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope
with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a
related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those
students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this
course
The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school
GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics
Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25
Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25
Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25
Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25
Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS
2012 - 2014
Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4
option subjects
Please note
We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If
through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we
cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course
Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012
Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012
Make a record of your choice on the table below before
handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the
Options Information Evening
SUBJECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
Mo
st
De
sire
d
3D Design
Art
Catering
Construction
Dance
Drama
Ethics
Film Studies
French
Geography
Graphics
Hairdressing
History
ICT
Media Studies
Motor Vehicle
Music
Spanish
(Diploma) Sport
Textiles
Triple Sciences
Please tick if you would like to be
considered to do EBacc Please
remember that you need to
include Geography or History and
French or Spanish as your subject
options
Chessington Community College
Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS
Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603
wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk
![Page 8: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a](https://reader035.vdocument.in/reader035/viewer/2022062413/5a76533a7f8b9aa3618d22a0/html5/thumbnails/8.jpg)
Page|9 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ENGLISH LANGUAGE (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
The skills of reading writing speaking and listening are of vital importance in many areas
Not only are they essential in many careers they also underpin successful study at all levels
and a proficiency in them can also add immeasurably to an individual‟s general quality of
life
This specification is designed to aid and assess such development and to encourage
learners to be inspired moved and changed by following a broad coherent satisfying and
worthwhile course of study It will prepare learners to make informed decisions about further
learning opportunities and career choices and to use language to participate effectively in
society and employment
Different forms of assessment are appropriate to these different skills and this is recognised in
this specification Reading and Writing are assessed through controlled assessment and in
two externally marked units Speaking and Listening are assessed in a variety of different
situations during the course
Assessment
Written Paper
Unit 1 (20) Studying written language - non-fiction texts (40 Raw Marks 40 UMS)
This unit will test through structured questions the reading of two non-fiction texts Non-
fiction texts may include fact-sheets leaflets letters extracts from autobiographies
biographies diaries advertisements reports articles and digital and multi-modal texts of
various kinds from newspapers and magazines brochures and the internet Visual
material will always be included in the material used
Unit 2 (20) Using written language - information and ideas (40 Raw Marks 40 UMS)
This unit will test transactional and discursive writing through two equally weighted tasks
(20 marks each) Across the two tasks students will be offered opportunities to write for a
range of audiences and purposes adapting style to form and real-life context in for
example letters articles leaflets reviews etc
10|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ENGLISH LANGUAGE (GCSE) continued
Exam Board WJEC
Controlled Assessment
Unit 3 (30) Literary reading and creative writing (80 Raw Marks 60 UMS)
Studying written language extended literary text (15)
Students need to present one assignment which is a sustained response to an extended
text The text must either be a Shakespeare play or one chosen from the GCSE English
Literature external assessment set text lists excluding poetry
Using language creative writing (15)
Students will be required to complete ONE piece of descriptive writing and ONE piece of
narrativeexpressive writing drawn from tasks supplied by WJEC
Unit 4 (30) Spoken language (60 Raw Marks 60 UMS)
Using Language Speaking and Listening (Communicating and adapting language
interacting and responding creating and sustaining roles) (20)
Students will be required to complete at least three Speaking and Listening tasks through
the exploration of ideas texts and issues in scripted and improvised work The three tasks
will cover the following areas
1 Communicating and adapting language
2 Interacting and responding
3 Creating and sustaining roles
Studying spoken language Variations choices change in spoken language (10)
Students will be required to study an aspect of spoken language The assignment will be
a sustained response to their own or others‟ uses of spoken language presented by
recording transcript or recollection
Page|11 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ENGLISH LITERATURE (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
This specification is based on the conviction that the study of literature should centre on an
informed personal response to a range of texts in the genres of prose poetry and drama
Assessment is through controlled assessment and examination Teachers and their students
have some flexibility in the choice of texts to be studied and some overlap with GCSE English
Language is possible and indeed encouraged as it is felt that the study of literature can
greatly enhance a student‟s writing skills and that practising hisher own writing skills can lead
a student to increased enjoyment of and success in reading
Assessment
External Assessment
Unit 1 (35)Prose (different cultures) and poetry (contemporary) (50 Raw Marks 70 UMS)
Section A (21) requires study of a prose text from a different culture It will require
students to answer two questions on the chosen prose text
Section B (14) will consist of a question offering some structure for students to explore
respond to and compare two contemporary unseen poems In preparation for this unit
students will need to study at least fifteen poems in addition to those studied for Unit 3
Unit 2a (40) Literary heritage drama and contemporary prose(60 Raw Marks 80 UMS)
This paper requires study of a drama text from the EnglishIrishWelsh literary heritage and a
contemporary prose text It will require students to answer two questions on each text
OR
Unit 2b Contemporary drama and literary heritage prose (60 Raw Marks 80 UMS)
This paper requires study of a contemporary drama text and a prose text from the English
IrishWelsh literary heritage It will require students to answer two questions on each text
Controlled Assessment
Unit 3 (25) Poetry and drama (literary heritage) (40 Raw Marks 50 UMS)
EnglishIrishWelsh literary heritage Poetry and Shakespeare play Assessment will be based
on a single assignment linking a play by Shakespeare and literary heritage poetry Students
will be required to study a Shakespeare play (not Othello or Much Ado about Nothing) and
a group of thematically linked poems taken from the WJEC poetry collection
Assessment for GCSE English Language and GCSE English Literature is tiered ie externally
assessed componentsunits are targeted at the grade ranges of A-D (Higher Tier) and C-G
(Foundation Tier) while controlled assessments cater for the full range of ability Questions and
tasks will be designed to enable students to demonstrate what they know understand and
can do
Tier Grades Available
Higher A A B C D Foundation C D E F G
Students who narrowly fail to achieve Grade D on the Higher Tier will be awarded Grade E
Students who narrowly fail to achieve Grade D on the Higher Tier will be awarded Grade E
12|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MATHEMATICS (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Mathematics is a compulsory part of the curriculum for all students and currently takes four
lessons per week GCSE Mathematics is a linear course with two written examinations one
with a calculator The course takes a holistic approach and a grade C is available on both
foundation and higher papers
Students should develop knowledge skills and understanding of the content They should be
able to use their knowledge and understanding to make connections between
mathematical concepts and apply them to solve real life problems Functional elements of
mathematics are included in each paper
The course starts formally at the end of year 9 building on the work in years 7 and 8 so a
good start is made to cover the necessary material Students will need to apply themselves
to the tasks in class and complete their homework regularly Mathematics teachers are
available outside of lessons to help students who are finding concepts difficult to understand
and a weekly bdquocatch-up‟ club is available Students are set primarily according to ability but
the attitude to learning is also a factor to be considered when the groupings are made
We offer the opportunity to take GCSE Mathematics in Year 10 and providing satisfactory
results are achieved students may be given the opportunity to start the bdquoA‟ level course or to
take an additional GCSE in statistics
Page|13 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SCIENCE - MODULAR (GCSE DOUBLE AWARD)
Exam Board AQA
There have been some major changes to the GCSE science courses which will begin began in
September 2011 There is now more emphasis on bdquoHow Science Works‟ which means not just
learning the theory but understanding the practical side of science and its relation to the
world in which we live
Science is a core subject and is therefore studied by all students The main areas of science
can be broadly broken into Biology Chemistry and Physics
In addition to the above students will be assessed on their knowledge and understanding of
science through coursework which will be set within stimulating contexts that students should
be able to relate to from their science lessons and their experiences of science on a day to
day basis
Year 10
Students in Year 10 will study six modules as indicated below
These six modules will be assessed by tests which will be taken on three separate occasions
throughout the year The final 25 of the marks will be awarded based on coursework
The majority of Year 10 students will gain the first of their two GCSEs in science at the end of
Year 10
Year 11
The structure of the Year 11 course is similar to that of Year 10 in that Biology Chemistry and
Physics will be studied however students will be assessed by means of three written papers
containing structured questions rather than objective tests
GCSE Science A
Biology 1 25
Chemistry 1 25
Physics 1 25
Centre Assessed Coursework 25
GCSE Science B
Biology 2 25
Chemistry 2 25
Physics 2 25
Centre Assessed Coursework 25
14|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SCIENCE - MODULAR (GCSE DOUBLE AWARD) continued
Exam Board AQA
The coursework component will be assessed in a similar way to Year 10 and will carry the same
proportion of marks
Whilst the new GCSE science course is designed to be more interesting than the existing
course it is likely to be rather more challenging Students will need to work consistently hard in
order to achieve high level grades The course has been designed to ensure that all students
regardless of ability gain a good grounding in science The course is also an excellent
preparation for A level studies
BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENTED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE
(EDEXCEL)
For some students who have found the study of Science difficult at Key Stage 3 a more
accessible course is BTEC Science
Students still study the 3 Science disciplines of Chemistry Biology and Physics but combined
into one course
The advantages of this course are that there is no traditional coursework component it is
assignment based so students who find that the stress of exams causes them to do less well
have the opportunity to achieve their potential It also has a practical approach and no final
exam
The course is the equivalent of 2 GCSEs
Page|15 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN SPORT
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The BTEC Level 2 Extended Certificate offers flexibility and a choice of emphasis through the
optional units It is broadly equivalent to two GCSEs
The course provides students with the opportunity to enter employment in the sport and active
leisure sector or to progress to vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel BTEC Level 3
qualifications in Sport and Sport and Exercise Sciences
The course also gives students the opportunity to develop a range of skills and techniques
personal qualities and attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter the
workplace
1 Fitness Testing and Training
This unit gives students the opportunity to explore the essential fitness requirements and training
methods used to achieve successful sports performance They learn how to accurately
conduct fitness and health tests and use key skills to compare the results against national
standards
2 Practical Sport
The aim of this unit is to develop students‟ knowledge of the rules skills and techniques for one
team and one individual sport through practical application Students will develop their
assessment skills as they observe each other perform and communicate effectively to improve
personal performance
3 Anatomy amp Physiology for Sport
The aim of this unit is to give students a good understanding of the structure and function of
the skeletal muscular cardiovascular and respiratory systems of the human body This will help
students to gain a better idea of how their body works so that they can stay healthy
4 Development of Personal Fitness
This unit can prove invaluable to students who wish to stay fit and healthy in the future
Students learn how to get fit by actively working and developing their training skills so that they
can progess their fitness to higher levels
5 Effects of Exercise on the Body Systems
This unit again develops the students‟ awareness of how all systems of their body respond to
exercise Students learn about the great health benefits which can be achieved
(Units to be studied are subject to change)
THE
OPTIONAL
CURRICULUM
Page|19 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
3 DIMENSIONAL DESIGN (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
If you enjoyed designing and making products in the Design amp Technology workshops during
Years 789 and would like to continue making more complex and detailed products
Course Information
Students will be expected to demonstrate skills and
techniques in the context of their chosen area(s) of study
within Three-Dimensional Design
making appropriate use of colour line tone texture
shape and form decoration scale and proportion
using different approaches to recording images such
as observation analysis expression and imagination
showing in their work the ability to respond to an idea concept
issue theme or brief investigating different ways of working as
appropriate to their chosen area(s) of study within Three-
Dimensional Design showing understanding of the relationship of
form and function
making use of appropriate materials tools and techniques
providing evidence of an understanding of spatial qualities
composition rhythm scale and structure
providing evidence of the use of safe working practices
In Year 10 students will design and make a variety of projects such as a Spice rack Toy Car
and a Hand Trowel using a variety of machines and materials They will gain knowledge and
skills in manufacturing techniques production methods and the design process They will be
able to design products on the computer (CAD) and then cut them out on the new CAM
machine
Assessment
This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home is
presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks There is
also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the marks
Career Progression
Students can continue onto the A Level Product design course at Chessington‟s 6th Form
Alternatively they could pursue a career in an Engineering discipline Construction Product
Design or Architecture
20|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ART (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
All students choosing Art and Design as their option are required to
take the unendorsed examination This allows them to produce
work using a number of different techniques which have been listed
below
Painting and drawing
Graphics
Sculptureconstruction
Photography
Printmaking
A foundation course which gives students experience of all of
these is run during the first two terms
Painting and Drawing
The Painting and Drawing course is structured to enable students
regardless of their ability to build on the skills and techniques
they have learned in their first three years at school and at the same time prepare for a GCSE
examination
Programmes of work will largely be determined by the demands of the examination syllabus
but every effort will be made to structure the course so that it meets the needs of the students
whilst taking into account their wide range of abilities
The Painting and Drawing disciplines will form the basis for most practical activities but
students will be encouraged to experiment with and use as broad a range of approaches as
possible in the preparation and production of coursework
3 Dimensional Studies (Sculpture)
The course is designed to develop the student‟s visual awareness sensitivity and understanding
of the work of Artists involving three dimensions in a contemporary and historical context
Students will be encouraged to develop ideas in preliminary studies through research and
experimentation observational recording and analysis of forms and to produce work in the
form of modelling carving casting construction and assembling The important relationships
between urbanrural landscapes communities and cultures will also be studied as will the
interaction of solid and void forms and shape pattern decoration colour texture scale
structure proportion rhythm movement and the effects of light upon three dimensional
objects
Page|21 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ART (GCSE) continued
Exam Board AQA
Printmaking
Students will be able to experiment with a number of simple methods for producing a printed
image Some of the following will be introduced when appropriate
Lino printing
Card printing
Monoprinting
Polystyrene sheet printing
Screen printing
Assessment
Art and Design requires students to carry out and complete work in their own time in school
and at home Preparation and research are an essential element of the course and the use of
sketchbooks when preparing work is encouraged
Coursework will account for 60 of the marks and externally set assignment will account for
40 of the marks
Visits
Students are encouraged to take part in all visits to Museums Galleries and Exhibitions where
the work on display is considered helpful in supporting coursework studies
Career Progression
Fashion Designer Interior Designer Costume Designer Artist Architect Cartoonist Textile
Designer Model Maker etc
22|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CATERING (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
This single GCSE course is a vocational qualification that is
suitable for those students who have an interest in the Catering
Industry and want a broad background in this area It would
also be a good foundation for those who wish to progress to
further education It will offer valuable preparation for students
who may want to enter the many careers in the Food Industry
Students must have a real interest in food and enjoy cooking
They must be prepared to work hard in order to reach a high
standard of presentation in their practical work
Course Information
Students who take the GCSE Catering course will learn about and demonstrate their
knowledge and understanding of the following areas of study
The industry ndash types of establishments that serve food and drink
Job roles employment opportunities and relevant training
Health safety and hygiene
Food preparation cooking and presentation
Nutrition and menu planning
Costing and portion control
Specialist equipment both small and large scale
Communication and record keeping
Environmental considerations
Students will be expected to supply their own ingredients for practical sessions that will include
the selection storage preparation and serving of
Students will also be expected to purchase a white chef‟s jacket from the College which they
must wear to all practical sessions
Meat and poultry Convenience products
Fish Sauces
Eggs Basic dough products
Dairy products Basic pastry products
Cereals flour rice pasta Cakes sponges and scones
Vegetables and fruit
Page|23 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CATERING (GCSE) continued
Exam Board WJEC
Assessment
Visits
It is hoped that there will be some visits to local restaurants and a catering college Chefs may visit
some lessons to give demonstrations or work with students in practical lessons
Career Progression
Sous Chef Cake Decorator Junior Kitchen Assistant WaitressWaiter Nutritionist Dietician Food
Technologist Baker etc
60 of the final grade will come from 2
practical tasks where students must show
catering skills related to food preparation and
service
Each task must be accompanied by a folder
of notes that cover the investigation planning
and evaluation of the task
Task 1 (15 hours) will take place in Year 10
Task 2 (30 hours) will take place in Year 11
40 of the final grade will come from a
written examination paper (1 frac14 hours) on
Catering food and the customer
This will be taken at the end of Year 11
24|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CERTIFICATE IN CONSTRUCTION
Exam Board CITY amp GUILDS
This course is ideal for all students who are considering
a career in any part of the construction or building
industry It is of benefit weather they are considering a
craft or management position
Course Information
Students study for six periods a week and in the first
year concentrate on basic building skills
Carpentry
Electrics
Plumbing
Bricklaying
Health and safety
Site management
This is done through the City and Guilds Introductory Certificate in Basic Construction Skills in which
eight practical tasks must be passed and one theoretical on line test
The second year allows students to develop along their chosen path either developing their craft
skills or moving towards a professional career via the Diplomas in Construction and the Built
Environment This would be an ideal path for those considering a career in
Building management
Architecture
Town planning
Surveying
Engineering
Building control
Environmentalist
Landscape Architecture
Those students not considering a professional career would expand their skills in chosen areas
through further City and Guilds qualifications
Page|25 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 FIRST CERTIFICATE IN PERFORMING ARTS DANCE
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Students will look at FIVE different units in order to achieve a
qualification on this course
The most appropriate units can be selected according to
the individual needs of each group from the following list
Performing Dance
The Development of Dance
Working in the Performing Arts Industry
Professional Development in the Performing Arts
Industry
Understanding Dance
Contemporary Dance
Jazz Dance
Musical Theatre
Makeup for Performers
There is a significant emphasis on Choreographic and
performance skills throughout each unit and students will
be expected to
Learn set dances
Learn dance vocabulary
Choreograph solo duo and small group dances
Improve their performance and technical skills
Perform in front of their peers and a broader based audience
See professionals at work
Write reviews of works
Study the effect of costume set design and props
Look at the cultural and historical context of dances they view
The course is internally assessed throughout by the teacher and students are informally
assessed during every lesson Students will also be assessed more formally through
Assignments which meet the criteria for each Unit These are marked by the teacher and
internally verified by another specialist teacher to ensure that they are of the highest quality
Students opting for this course must understand that to achieve a good grade at BTEC they
have to have a love of making up (choreographing) and performing dances to others They
must also have some basic dance ability such as being able to move in time with the music
Students will need to work in bare feet for much of this course
Students who enjoy all aspects of dance and movement and have the confidence to perform
to a small audience will be well suited to this course Students will be expected to work in their
own time after school to perfect their dances and complete Assignment briefs They should
also be happy to work in a range of different dance styles and not just one particular style
26|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
DRAMA (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
GCSE Drama is an exciting and practical course which offers opportunities to become a skilled
and confident performer
The course aims to encourage students to develop
an interest in and understanding of a range of
drama and theatre experiences
increased self and group awareness
imaginative creative communication and
social skills
a love and appreciation of attending a range of
live theatre experiences
The course consists of two parts
Coursework 60
Two of the following options only one of which may be a technicaldesign skill
Devised thematic work for performance to an audience
Acting
Improvisation
Theatre in Education presentation
Dancedrama
Set
Costume
Make-up
Properties
Masks
Puppets
Lighting
Sound
Stage management
Each option is assessed through two parts
Part One A mark awarded for group and communication skills
Part Two A mark awarded for the final performance
Written Paper 40
2 hours
A choice of any two questions based on the following sections
A Set play bdquoAnimal Farm‟
B Response to live productions seen during the course
Page|27 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ETHICS (GCSE)
Exam Board OCR
The bdquoPhilosophy and Ethics‟ GCSE will allow students to explore the fundamental questions
about life and existence encourage their personal social and cultural development and
enhance their understanding of different cultures and belief systems
Over the course of the two years students will study important and thought-provoking issues
such as the nature and existence of God good and evil and the conflict between religion
and science relationships poverty and medical ethics peace and justice and the role of the
media in today‟s world It is a broad satisfying and worthwhile course of study designed to
challenge and stimulate students and equip them with the necessary skills to lead constructive
and thoughtful lives in the modern world
28|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
FILM STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
ldquoThe secret to film is that its an illusionrdquo
George Lucas Director of Star Wars
This course is ideal for any student who is
Able to work independently or as part of a team
Creative and practical but also analytical
Enthusiastic about films
Interested in making their own short films
Over the two years students will
Plan storyboard film and edit a short film working in a small
group adding their own music and special effects
Understand how films are made and promoted
Learn about the business of making films
Make a close study of one genre of Hollywood films (currently Disaster Films)
Closely research and study at least two different non-Hollywood Films (made in Britain
Europe or Africa)
Prepare their own film promotion campaign
Write an in-depth analysis of films of their choice
Assessment is through
A portfolio of coursework and also
Two end of course examinations
Although it is a new course Film Studies is already a popular choice for many students
combining well with the Media study in English as well as Media
Studies itself Film Studies is increasingly well
thought of by many colleges as it combines
a practical creative approach with
analytical skills
From Citizen Kane to Inception
Page|29 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
FRENCH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
The course outline for French is similar to Spanish It is not compulsory to have previous
knowledge of the language before starting the course but you need to be aware that it will
be more challenging for you and you need to put in a lot of effort to succeed However it is
not at all impossible
30|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GEOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Geography is a fascinating and wide-reaching subject and it has been shown that students
with Geography qualifications are some of the most employable
Why you should take Geography GCSE
It provides you with an understanding of global issues which will affect our lives now and
in the future
By the end of their GCSE you will have a better understanding of the way the world
works
Geography is a good link between the arts and sciences so it will help you in their other
subjects
You will understand how physical landscapes (eg rivers coasts mountains) are formed
You will be allowed to express opinions about people and places
Geography includes a range of academic skills that you will use in your future studies
Skills gained from Geography include
How to research and to investigate
Problem solving
Real world numeracy
How to collect record present and analyse data
Map reading
Creative thinking
How to write in an essay style and in a scientific style
Empathy and understanding of others
Topics of study will include
How are natural landscapes formed and how can we manage
them
What causes and how can we manage natural hazards
How do weather and climate work
How can we manage population around the world
How do towns and cities expand and how are they managed
How and why are some places rich whilst others are poor
How can we ensure development of global resources is sustainable
Page|31 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board AQA
Career Links (As printed by the Royal Geographical Society)
How is the course assessed
GCSE Geography is assessed by two written Examinations (75) and by Coursework (25) in
the form of a Controlled Assessment
Fieldwork at the South Coast and elsewhere is an essential part of this course
Travel and tourist industry
Travel Guide Researcher
Property Researcher
Lawyers
Senior Researcher for County
Council
Government Statistician
TV Locations Unit
Business Consultants
Planners
32|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GRAPHICS (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
If you are interested in the world of advertising like
developing logos and posters always have an interest in
the covers of DVDs books amp games and really enjoy
making products then this is the course for you
Course Information
A large part of the course is a practical investigation
into the techniques and materials used in the
advertising and packaging we see around us every
day
Students will develop skills in drawing both free hand and using computer aided design
model making printing techniques logo designing greetings card and popup book
design and build up skills to design DVD covers labels and posters
To be able to present this to an industrial standard students will use desktop publishing
software such as GIMP (a variation of Photoshop) and computer aided design packages
such as Google Sketchup 2D Design and Fireworks They will get the chance to use the
new computer aided manufacturing milling machine to design and make work like
models signs and games
Assessment
Students will complete a major project and portfolio that counts towards 60 of the overall
GCSE grade Previous projects have included creating a popup book producing
promotional material for the Olympics designing the identity and packaging for a new band
and making a travel game for children
Externally set assignment by the Exam board will account for 40 The typical brief might look
like this
A leading perfumeaftershave manufacturer are aware that the environment is a
current issue The general public are concerned about so want an environmentally
friendly perfumeaftershave bottle and packaging designed to meet the current
market needs You are to design and make a model bottle including the packaging
Career Progression
Or anything in the creative industries
Graphic designer Work in advertising Web designer
Architect Product designer Set designer
Computer game designer Window dresser Magazine editor
Fashion designer Comic book creator Book illustrator
Artist
Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a
range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme
conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)
Content
Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated
situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a
portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are
required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key
skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam
They will study the following subjects at Level 1
Shampoo and condition hair
Blow drying
Contribute to performing and colouring process
Contribute to the development of effective working
relationships
Support the health and safety of the salon
Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas
Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is
complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and
seminars
All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical
assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress
How will they be assessed
They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical
assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on
progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered
individually at different stages throughout the course
There are four areas of assessment
Practical They carry out the skill
Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill
Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit
Online tests
Progression
They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such
as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme
34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and
opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal
subject for you
You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability
to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely
untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills
What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for
History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities
alike It is particularly useful for the following careers
Course Information
The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills
covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of
these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in
the classroom
Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams
almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students
maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two
year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work
Each of the following units is worth 25
Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations
Key topics
bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56
bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)
bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991
Law
Journalism
Television production and research
Advertising
Research
Marketing
Business Management
Accountancy
Archaeology
Museum work
Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939
Key Topics
bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939
bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Holocaust
Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970
Key topics
bull McCarthyism and the Red scare
bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King
bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies
bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)
Representations of History
CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990
36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT
Exam Board OCR
The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-
requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres
and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the
recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students
education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and
employers
Course Information
The course aims to develop
Problem-solving skills through the practical real life
application of ICT to complex problems
The ability to analyse appraise and make critical
judgements about the use of ICT systems
An awareness of the role of ICT in the management
manipulation and dissemination of information
Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with
others
The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and
competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist
tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final
student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms
of ICT problem solving and project management
There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been
completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer
Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc
Assessment
Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two
GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟
equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE
In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students
must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two
mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2
Diploma
Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become
increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics
magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such
as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students
to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages
we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as
they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of
audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-
world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very
relevant and very challenging
Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different
forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is
a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in
a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also
able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in
an organised way
Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to
looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as
bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns
constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe
Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied
interesting and highly rewarding
Coursework
The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall
assessment of the course Students produce three assignments
for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical
Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment
Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical
Production and Evaluation
Assessment
This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is
undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for
the qualification
Recent topics for the examination have included
Soap opera Quiz shows
Action Films The Popular Press
Music magazines
38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning
The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist
learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering
Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills
The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to
broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students
who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical
career within the sector
Progression
The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate
(VRQ) in the appropriate career route
Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using
the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship
framework) in the appropriate route
Potential Job Opportunities
Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder
Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician
Assessment Methods
Multiple Choice Examination
Oral Examination
Portfolio of Evidence
Practical Demonstration Assignment
Practical Examination
Task-based Controlled Assessment
Written Examination
Overall Assessment Method
Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit
The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the
learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test
results
Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing
and ListeningAppraising
Performing (30)
Students perform music throughout the course The two best
recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and
one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any
type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour
time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during
that period
For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental
vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)
a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc
For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an
improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing
a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording
Composing (30)
Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the
exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must
come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed
to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material
to make a new piece out of the old one
ListeningAppraising (40)
Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a
series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final
question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music
played in the exam hall
Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam
The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are
Western Classical Music 1600-1899
Music in the 20th Century
Popular Music in Context
World Music
40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching
research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic
Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not
required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music
classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C
grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas
There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some
they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is
hard work but its good fun too
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC
(EDEXCEL)
The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used
by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the
BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire
assessment is coursework based
Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)
Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the
Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a
portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of
A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links
with others
The Performer‟s role
Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer
Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)
Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students
the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the
equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own
recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves
A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)
including costs
A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it
safely
Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording
techniques
Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what
they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating
various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is
designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to
work in the Music Industry
This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic
Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will
spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software
and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs
The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both
exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both
qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)
Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as
individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily
being assessed on everything at the end of the course
A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction
grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up
with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx
42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will
learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer
software
You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white
photographs
Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based
photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-
journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new
media practice
Assessment
This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home
is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks
There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the
marks
Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SPANISH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
All students have the choice to continue
with Spanish which they have been
studying since Year 7 It would be a wise
choice to continue with Spanish as the
ability to speak a second language is not
only useful but is advantageous in
today‟s world Our closer connection
with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even
a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers
Course Information
The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based
on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage
Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to
communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding
Topics covered are
Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo
Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink
Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo
Free time shopping money new technology sports media
Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo
Home local area and the environment
Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo
School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs
Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and
listening at the end of Year 11
44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2
Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with
the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to
vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport
The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a
range of skills and techniques personal qualities and
attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter
the workplace
Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study
1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction
The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge
and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in
instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning
and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills
2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities
The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire
motivate and improve the performance of a selected target
group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It
encourages students to work in a team situation to organise
plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement
3 Injury in Sport
The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and
their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will
enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries
4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport
The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in
the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and
enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people
(Units to be studied are subject to change)
Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TEXTILES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of
textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The
students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following
areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction
applied textiles and embellished textiles
Assessment and Coursework Balance
In their first year the students will be required to produce two
extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will
follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The
students will work from first hand observations collecting and
developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and
textiles based techniques From this research and developmental
stage students will design and produce a final piece
During the second year students will begin by completing an
extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an
externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted
will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment
will account for 40
The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual
style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they
learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a
more personal response to a theme
Visits
Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources
such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second
year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within
the industry today
Why choose Textiles
Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more
confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level
course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles
The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range
of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior
design styling textiles design and costume design
46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)
Exam Board AQA
Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology
Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three
subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three
separate GCSEs
What are the differences between Triple Science and other
science GCSEs
This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will
be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of
the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award
What are the advantages of studying Triple Science
The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into
bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for
bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge
Who should consider taking Triple Science
Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope
with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a
related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those
students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this
course
The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school
GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics
Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25
Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25
Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25
Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25
Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS
2012 - 2014
Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4
option subjects
Please note
We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If
through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we
cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course
Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012
Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012
Make a record of your choice on the table below before
handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the
Options Information Evening
SUBJECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
Mo
st
De
sire
d
3D Design
Art
Catering
Construction
Dance
Drama
Ethics
Film Studies
French
Geography
Graphics
Hairdressing
History
ICT
Media Studies
Motor Vehicle
Music
Spanish
(Diploma) Sport
Textiles
Triple Sciences
Please tick if you would like to be
considered to do EBacc Please
remember that you need to
include Geography or History and
French or Spanish as your subject
options
Chessington Community College
Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS
Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603
wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk
![Page 9: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a](https://reader035.vdocument.in/reader035/viewer/2022062413/5a76533a7f8b9aa3618d22a0/html5/thumbnails/9.jpg)
10|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ENGLISH LANGUAGE (GCSE) continued
Exam Board WJEC
Controlled Assessment
Unit 3 (30) Literary reading and creative writing (80 Raw Marks 60 UMS)
Studying written language extended literary text (15)
Students need to present one assignment which is a sustained response to an extended
text The text must either be a Shakespeare play or one chosen from the GCSE English
Literature external assessment set text lists excluding poetry
Using language creative writing (15)
Students will be required to complete ONE piece of descriptive writing and ONE piece of
narrativeexpressive writing drawn from tasks supplied by WJEC
Unit 4 (30) Spoken language (60 Raw Marks 60 UMS)
Using Language Speaking and Listening (Communicating and adapting language
interacting and responding creating and sustaining roles) (20)
Students will be required to complete at least three Speaking and Listening tasks through
the exploration of ideas texts and issues in scripted and improvised work The three tasks
will cover the following areas
1 Communicating and adapting language
2 Interacting and responding
3 Creating and sustaining roles
Studying spoken language Variations choices change in spoken language (10)
Students will be required to study an aspect of spoken language The assignment will be
a sustained response to their own or others‟ uses of spoken language presented by
recording transcript or recollection
Page|11 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ENGLISH LITERATURE (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
This specification is based on the conviction that the study of literature should centre on an
informed personal response to a range of texts in the genres of prose poetry and drama
Assessment is through controlled assessment and examination Teachers and their students
have some flexibility in the choice of texts to be studied and some overlap with GCSE English
Language is possible and indeed encouraged as it is felt that the study of literature can
greatly enhance a student‟s writing skills and that practising hisher own writing skills can lead
a student to increased enjoyment of and success in reading
Assessment
External Assessment
Unit 1 (35)Prose (different cultures) and poetry (contemporary) (50 Raw Marks 70 UMS)
Section A (21) requires study of a prose text from a different culture It will require
students to answer two questions on the chosen prose text
Section B (14) will consist of a question offering some structure for students to explore
respond to and compare two contemporary unseen poems In preparation for this unit
students will need to study at least fifteen poems in addition to those studied for Unit 3
Unit 2a (40) Literary heritage drama and contemporary prose(60 Raw Marks 80 UMS)
This paper requires study of a drama text from the EnglishIrishWelsh literary heritage and a
contemporary prose text It will require students to answer two questions on each text
OR
Unit 2b Contemporary drama and literary heritage prose (60 Raw Marks 80 UMS)
This paper requires study of a contemporary drama text and a prose text from the English
IrishWelsh literary heritage It will require students to answer two questions on each text
Controlled Assessment
Unit 3 (25) Poetry and drama (literary heritage) (40 Raw Marks 50 UMS)
EnglishIrishWelsh literary heritage Poetry and Shakespeare play Assessment will be based
on a single assignment linking a play by Shakespeare and literary heritage poetry Students
will be required to study a Shakespeare play (not Othello or Much Ado about Nothing) and
a group of thematically linked poems taken from the WJEC poetry collection
Assessment for GCSE English Language and GCSE English Literature is tiered ie externally
assessed componentsunits are targeted at the grade ranges of A-D (Higher Tier) and C-G
(Foundation Tier) while controlled assessments cater for the full range of ability Questions and
tasks will be designed to enable students to demonstrate what they know understand and
can do
Tier Grades Available
Higher A A B C D Foundation C D E F G
Students who narrowly fail to achieve Grade D on the Higher Tier will be awarded Grade E
Students who narrowly fail to achieve Grade D on the Higher Tier will be awarded Grade E
12|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MATHEMATICS (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Mathematics is a compulsory part of the curriculum for all students and currently takes four
lessons per week GCSE Mathematics is a linear course with two written examinations one
with a calculator The course takes a holistic approach and a grade C is available on both
foundation and higher papers
Students should develop knowledge skills and understanding of the content They should be
able to use their knowledge and understanding to make connections between
mathematical concepts and apply them to solve real life problems Functional elements of
mathematics are included in each paper
The course starts formally at the end of year 9 building on the work in years 7 and 8 so a
good start is made to cover the necessary material Students will need to apply themselves
to the tasks in class and complete their homework regularly Mathematics teachers are
available outside of lessons to help students who are finding concepts difficult to understand
and a weekly bdquocatch-up‟ club is available Students are set primarily according to ability but
the attitude to learning is also a factor to be considered when the groupings are made
We offer the opportunity to take GCSE Mathematics in Year 10 and providing satisfactory
results are achieved students may be given the opportunity to start the bdquoA‟ level course or to
take an additional GCSE in statistics
Page|13 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SCIENCE - MODULAR (GCSE DOUBLE AWARD)
Exam Board AQA
There have been some major changes to the GCSE science courses which will begin began in
September 2011 There is now more emphasis on bdquoHow Science Works‟ which means not just
learning the theory but understanding the practical side of science and its relation to the
world in which we live
Science is a core subject and is therefore studied by all students The main areas of science
can be broadly broken into Biology Chemistry and Physics
In addition to the above students will be assessed on their knowledge and understanding of
science through coursework which will be set within stimulating contexts that students should
be able to relate to from their science lessons and their experiences of science on a day to
day basis
Year 10
Students in Year 10 will study six modules as indicated below
These six modules will be assessed by tests which will be taken on three separate occasions
throughout the year The final 25 of the marks will be awarded based on coursework
The majority of Year 10 students will gain the first of their two GCSEs in science at the end of
Year 10
Year 11
The structure of the Year 11 course is similar to that of Year 10 in that Biology Chemistry and
Physics will be studied however students will be assessed by means of three written papers
containing structured questions rather than objective tests
GCSE Science A
Biology 1 25
Chemistry 1 25
Physics 1 25
Centre Assessed Coursework 25
GCSE Science B
Biology 2 25
Chemistry 2 25
Physics 2 25
Centre Assessed Coursework 25
14|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SCIENCE - MODULAR (GCSE DOUBLE AWARD) continued
Exam Board AQA
The coursework component will be assessed in a similar way to Year 10 and will carry the same
proportion of marks
Whilst the new GCSE science course is designed to be more interesting than the existing
course it is likely to be rather more challenging Students will need to work consistently hard in
order to achieve high level grades The course has been designed to ensure that all students
regardless of ability gain a good grounding in science The course is also an excellent
preparation for A level studies
BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENTED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE
(EDEXCEL)
For some students who have found the study of Science difficult at Key Stage 3 a more
accessible course is BTEC Science
Students still study the 3 Science disciplines of Chemistry Biology and Physics but combined
into one course
The advantages of this course are that there is no traditional coursework component it is
assignment based so students who find that the stress of exams causes them to do less well
have the opportunity to achieve their potential It also has a practical approach and no final
exam
The course is the equivalent of 2 GCSEs
Page|15 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN SPORT
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The BTEC Level 2 Extended Certificate offers flexibility and a choice of emphasis through the
optional units It is broadly equivalent to two GCSEs
The course provides students with the opportunity to enter employment in the sport and active
leisure sector or to progress to vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel BTEC Level 3
qualifications in Sport and Sport and Exercise Sciences
The course also gives students the opportunity to develop a range of skills and techniques
personal qualities and attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter the
workplace
1 Fitness Testing and Training
This unit gives students the opportunity to explore the essential fitness requirements and training
methods used to achieve successful sports performance They learn how to accurately
conduct fitness and health tests and use key skills to compare the results against national
standards
2 Practical Sport
The aim of this unit is to develop students‟ knowledge of the rules skills and techniques for one
team and one individual sport through practical application Students will develop their
assessment skills as they observe each other perform and communicate effectively to improve
personal performance
3 Anatomy amp Physiology for Sport
The aim of this unit is to give students a good understanding of the structure and function of
the skeletal muscular cardiovascular and respiratory systems of the human body This will help
students to gain a better idea of how their body works so that they can stay healthy
4 Development of Personal Fitness
This unit can prove invaluable to students who wish to stay fit and healthy in the future
Students learn how to get fit by actively working and developing their training skills so that they
can progess their fitness to higher levels
5 Effects of Exercise on the Body Systems
This unit again develops the students‟ awareness of how all systems of their body respond to
exercise Students learn about the great health benefits which can be achieved
(Units to be studied are subject to change)
THE
OPTIONAL
CURRICULUM
Page|19 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
3 DIMENSIONAL DESIGN (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
If you enjoyed designing and making products in the Design amp Technology workshops during
Years 789 and would like to continue making more complex and detailed products
Course Information
Students will be expected to demonstrate skills and
techniques in the context of their chosen area(s) of study
within Three-Dimensional Design
making appropriate use of colour line tone texture
shape and form decoration scale and proportion
using different approaches to recording images such
as observation analysis expression and imagination
showing in their work the ability to respond to an idea concept
issue theme or brief investigating different ways of working as
appropriate to their chosen area(s) of study within Three-
Dimensional Design showing understanding of the relationship of
form and function
making use of appropriate materials tools and techniques
providing evidence of an understanding of spatial qualities
composition rhythm scale and structure
providing evidence of the use of safe working practices
In Year 10 students will design and make a variety of projects such as a Spice rack Toy Car
and a Hand Trowel using a variety of machines and materials They will gain knowledge and
skills in manufacturing techniques production methods and the design process They will be
able to design products on the computer (CAD) and then cut them out on the new CAM
machine
Assessment
This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home is
presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks There is
also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the marks
Career Progression
Students can continue onto the A Level Product design course at Chessington‟s 6th Form
Alternatively they could pursue a career in an Engineering discipline Construction Product
Design or Architecture
20|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ART (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
All students choosing Art and Design as their option are required to
take the unendorsed examination This allows them to produce
work using a number of different techniques which have been listed
below
Painting and drawing
Graphics
Sculptureconstruction
Photography
Printmaking
A foundation course which gives students experience of all of
these is run during the first two terms
Painting and Drawing
The Painting and Drawing course is structured to enable students
regardless of their ability to build on the skills and techniques
they have learned in their first three years at school and at the same time prepare for a GCSE
examination
Programmes of work will largely be determined by the demands of the examination syllabus
but every effort will be made to structure the course so that it meets the needs of the students
whilst taking into account their wide range of abilities
The Painting and Drawing disciplines will form the basis for most practical activities but
students will be encouraged to experiment with and use as broad a range of approaches as
possible in the preparation and production of coursework
3 Dimensional Studies (Sculpture)
The course is designed to develop the student‟s visual awareness sensitivity and understanding
of the work of Artists involving three dimensions in a contemporary and historical context
Students will be encouraged to develop ideas in preliminary studies through research and
experimentation observational recording and analysis of forms and to produce work in the
form of modelling carving casting construction and assembling The important relationships
between urbanrural landscapes communities and cultures will also be studied as will the
interaction of solid and void forms and shape pattern decoration colour texture scale
structure proportion rhythm movement and the effects of light upon three dimensional
objects
Page|21 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ART (GCSE) continued
Exam Board AQA
Printmaking
Students will be able to experiment with a number of simple methods for producing a printed
image Some of the following will be introduced when appropriate
Lino printing
Card printing
Monoprinting
Polystyrene sheet printing
Screen printing
Assessment
Art and Design requires students to carry out and complete work in their own time in school
and at home Preparation and research are an essential element of the course and the use of
sketchbooks when preparing work is encouraged
Coursework will account for 60 of the marks and externally set assignment will account for
40 of the marks
Visits
Students are encouraged to take part in all visits to Museums Galleries and Exhibitions where
the work on display is considered helpful in supporting coursework studies
Career Progression
Fashion Designer Interior Designer Costume Designer Artist Architect Cartoonist Textile
Designer Model Maker etc
22|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CATERING (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
This single GCSE course is a vocational qualification that is
suitable for those students who have an interest in the Catering
Industry and want a broad background in this area It would
also be a good foundation for those who wish to progress to
further education It will offer valuable preparation for students
who may want to enter the many careers in the Food Industry
Students must have a real interest in food and enjoy cooking
They must be prepared to work hard in order to reach a high
standard of presentation in their practical work
Course Information
Students who take the GCSE Catering course will learn about and demonstrate their
knowledge and understanding of the following areas of study
The industry ndash types of establishments that serve food and drink
Job roles employment opportunities and relevant training
Health safety and hygiene
Food preparation cooking and presentation
Nutrition and menu planning
Costing and portion control
Specialist equipment both small and large scale
Communication and record keeping
Environmental considerations
Students will be expected to supply their own ingredients for practical sessions that will include
the selection storage preparation and serving of
Students will also be expected to purchase a white chef‟s jacket from the College which they
must wear to all practical sessions
Meat and poultry Convenience products
Fish Sauces
Eggs Basic dough products
Dairy products Basic pastry products
Cereals flour rice pasta Cakes sponges and scones
Vegetables and fruit
Page|23 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CATERING (GCSE) continued
Exam Board WJEC
Assessment
Visits
It is hoped that there will be some visits to local restaurants and a catering college Chefs may visit
some lessons to give demonstrations or work with students in practical lessons
Career Progression
Sous Chef Cake Decorator Junior Kitchen Assistant WaitressWaiter Nutritionist Dietician Food
Technologist Baker etc
60 of the final grade will come from 2
practical tasks where students must show
catering skills related to food preparation and
service
Each task must be accompanied by a folder
of notes that cover the investigation planning
and evaluation of the task
Task 1 (15 hours) will take place in Year 10
Task 2 (30 hours) will take place in Year 11
40 of the final grade will come from a
written examination paper (1 frac14 hours) on
Catering food and the customer
This will be taken at the end of Year 11
24|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CERTIFICATE IN CONSTRUCTION
Exam Board CITY amp GUILDS
This course is ideal for all students who are considering
a career in any part of the construction or building
industry It is of benefit weather they are considering a
craft or management position
Course Information
Students study for six periods a week and in the first
year concentrate on basic building skills
Carpentry
Electrics
Plumbing
Bricklaying
Health and safety
Site management
This is done through the City and Guilds Introductory Certificate in Basic Construction Skills in which
eight practical tasks must be passed and one theoretical on line test
The second year allows students to develop along their chosen path either developing their craft
skills or moving towards a professional career via the Diplomas in Construction and the Built
Environment This would be an ideal path for those considering a career in
Building management
Architecture
Town planning
Surveying
Engineering
Building control
Environmentalist
Landscape Architecture
Those students not considering a professional career would expand their skills in chosen areas
through further City and Guilds qualifications
Page|25 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 FIRST CERTIFICATE IN PERFORMING ARTS DANCE
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Students will look at FIVE different units in order to achieve a
qualification on this course
The most appropriate units can be selected according to
the individual needs of each group from the following list
Performing Dance
The Development of Dance
Working in the Performing Arts Industry
Professional Development in the Performing Arts
Industry
Understanding Dance
Contemporary Dance
Jazz Dance
Musical Theatre
Makeup for Performers
There is a significant emphasis on Choreographic and
performance skills throughout each unit and students will
be expected to
Learn set dances
Learn dance vocabulary
Choreograph solo duo and small group dances
Improve their performance and technical skills
Perform in front of their peers and a broader based audience
See professionals at work
Write reviews of works
Study the effect of costume set design and props
Look at the cultural and historical context of dances they view
The course is internally assessed throughout by the teacher and students are informally
assessed during every lesson Students will also be assessed more formally through
Assignments which meet the criteria for each Unit These are marked by the teacher and
internally verified by another specialist teacher to ensure that they are of the highest quality
Students opting for this course must understand that to achieve a good grade at BTEC they
have to have a love of making up (choreographing) and performing dances to others They
must also have some basic dance ability such as being able to move in time with the music
Students will need to work in bare feet for much of this course
Students who enjoy all aspects of dance and movement and have the confidence to perform
to a small audience will be well suited to this course Students will be expected to work in their
own time after school to perfect their dances and complete Assignment briefs They should
also be happy to work in a range of different dance styles and not just one particular style
26|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
DRAMA (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
GCSE Drama is an exciting and practical course which offers opportunities to become a skilled
and confident performer
The course aims to encourage students to develop
an interest in and understanding of a range of
drama and theatre experiences
increased self and group awareness
imaginative creative communication and
social skills
a love and appreciation of attending a range of
live theatre experiences
The course consists of two parts
Coursework 60
Two of the following options only one of which may be a technicaldesign skill
Devised thematic work for performance to an audience
Acting
Improvisation
Theatre in Education presentation
Dancedrama
Set
Costume
Make-up
Properties
Masks
Puppets
Lighting
Sound
Stage management
Each option is assessed through two parts
Part One A mark awarded for group and communication skills
Part Two A mark awarded for the final performance
Written Paper 40
2 hours
A choice of any two questions based on the following sections
A Set play bdquoAnimal Farm‟
B Response to live productions seen during the course
Page|27 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ETHICS (GCSE)
Exam Board OCR
The bdquoPhilosophy and Ethics‟ GCSE will allow students to explore the fundamental questions
about life and existence encourage their personal social and cultural development and
enhance their understanding of different cultures and belief systems
Over the course of the two years students will study important and thought-provoking issues
such as the nature and existence of God good and evil and the conflict between religion
and science relationships poverty and medical ethics peace and justice and the role of the
media in today‟s world It is a broad satisfying and worthwhile course of study designed to
challenge and stimulate students and equip them with the necessary skills to lead constructive
and thoughtful lives in the modern world
28|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
FILM STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
ldquoThe secret to film is that its an illusionrdquo
George Lucas Director of Star Wars
This course is ideal for any student who is
Able to work independently or as part of a team
Creative and practical but also analytical
Enthusiastic about films
Interested in making their own short films
Over the two years students will
Plan storyboard film and edit a short film working in a small
group adding their own music and special effects
Understand how films are made and promoted
Learn about the business of making films
Make a close study of one genre of Hollywood films (currently Disaster Films)
Closely research and study at least two different non-Hollywood Films (made in Britain
Europe or Africa)
Prepare their own film promotion campaign
Write an in-depth analysis of films of their choice
Assessment is through
A portfolio of coursework and also
Two end of course examinations
Although it is a new course Film Studies is already a popular choice for many students
combining well with the Media study in English as well as Media
Studies itself Film Studies is increasingly well
thought of by many colleges as it combines
a practical creative approach with
analytical skills
From Citizen Kane to Inception
Page|29 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
FRENCH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
The course outline for French is similar to Spanish It is not compulsory to have previous
knowledge of the language before starting the course but you need to be aware that it will
be more challenging for you and you need to put in a lot of effort to succeed However it is
not at all impossible
30|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GEOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Geography is a fascinating and wide-reaching subject and it has been shown that students
with Geography qualifications are some of the most employable
Why you should take Geography GCSE
It provides you with an understanding of global issues which will affect our lives now and
in the future
By the end of their GCSE you will have a better understanding of the way the world
works
Geography is a good link between the arts and sciences so it will help you in their other
subjects
You will understand how physical landscapes (eg rivers coasts mountains) are formed
You will be allowed to express opinions about people and places
Geography includes a range of academic skills that you will use in your future studies
Skills gained from Geography include
How to research and to investigate
Problem solving
Real world numeracy
How to collect record present and analyse data
Map reading
Creative thinking
How to write in an essay style and in a scientific style
Empathy and understanding of others
Topics of study will include
How are natural landscapes formed and how can we manage
them
What causes and how can we manage natural hazards
How do weather and climate work
How can we manage population around the world
How do towns and cities expand and how are they managed
How and why are some places rich whilst others are poor
How can we ensure development of global resources is sustainable
Page|31 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board AQA
Career Links (As printed by the Royal Geographical Society)
How is the course assessed
GCSE Geography is assessed by two written Examinations (75) and by Coursework (25) in
the form of a Controlled Assessment
Fieldwork at the South Coast and elsewhere is an essential part of this course
Travel and tourist industry
Travel Guide Researcher
Property Researcher
Lawyers
Senior Researcher for County
Council
Government Statistician
TV Locations Unit
Business Consultants
Planners
32|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GRAPHICS (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
If you are interested in the world of advertising like
developing logos and posters always have an interest in
the covers of DVDs books amp games and really enjoy
making products then this is the course for you
Course Information
A large part of the course is a practical investigation
into the techniques and materials used in the
advertising and packaging we see around us every
day
Students will develop skills in drawing both free hand and using computer aided design
model making printing techniques logo designing greetings card and popup book
design and build up skills to design DVD covers labels and posters
To be able to present this to an industrial standard students will use desktop publishing
software such as GIMP (a variation of Photoshop) and computer aided design packages
such as Google Sketchup 2D Design and Fireworks They will get the chance to use the
new computer aided manufacturing milling machine to design and make work like
models signs and games
Assessment
Students will complete a major project and portfolio that counts towards 60 of the overall
GCSE grade Previous projects have included creating a popup book producing
promotional material for the Olympics designing the identity and packaging for a new band
and making a travel game for children
Externally set assignment by the Exam board will account for 40 The typical brief might look
like this
A leading perfumeaftershave manufacturer are aware that the environment is a
current issue The general public are concerned about so want an environmentally
friendly perfumeaftershave bottle and packaging designed to meet the current
market needs You are to design and make a model bottle including the packaging
Career Progression
Or anything in the creative industries
Graphic designer Work in advertising Web designer
Architect Product designer Set designer
Computer game designer Window dresser Magazine editor
Fashion designer Comic book creator Book illustrator
Artist
Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a
range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme
conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)
Content
Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated
situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a
portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are
required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key
skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam
They will study the following subjects at Level 1
Shampoo and condition hair
Blow drying
Contribute to performing and colouring process
Contribute to the development of effective working
relationships
Support the health and safety of the salon
Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas
Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is
complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and
seminars
All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical
assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress
How will they be assessed
They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical
assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on
progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered
individually at different stages throughout the course
There are four areas of assessment
Practical They carry out the skill
Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill
Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit
Online tests
Progression
They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such
as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme
34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and
opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal
subject for you
You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability
to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely
untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills
What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for
History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities
alike It is particularly useful for the following careers
Course Information
The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills
covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of
these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in
the classroom
Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams
almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students
maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two
year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work
Each of the following units is worth 25
Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations
Key topics
bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56
bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)
bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991
Law
Journalism
Television production and research
Advertising
Research
Marketing
Business Management
Accountancy
Archaeology
Museum work
Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939
Key Topics
bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939
bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Holocaust
Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970
Key topics
bull McCarthyism and the Red scare
bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King
bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies
bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)
Representations of History
CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990
36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT
Exam Board OCR
The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-
requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres
and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the
recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students
education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and
employers
Course Information
The course aims to develop
Problem-solving skills through the practical real life
application of ICT to complex problems
The ability to analyse appraise and make critical
judgements about the use of ICT systems
An awareness of the role of ICT in the management
manipulation and dissemination of information
Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with
others
The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and
competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist
tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final
student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms
of ICT problem solving and project management
There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been
completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer
Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc
Assessment
Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two
GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟
equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE
In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students
must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two
mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2
Diploma
Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become
increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics
magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such
as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students
to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages
we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as
they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of
audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-
world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very
relevant and very challenging
Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different
forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is
a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in
a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also
able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in
an organised way
Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to
looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as
bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns
constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe
Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied
interesting and highly rewarding
Coursework
The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall
assessment of the course Students produce three assignments
for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical
Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment
Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical
Production and Evaluation
Assessment
This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is
undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for
the qualification
Recent topics for the examination have included
Soap opera Quiz shows
Action Films The Popular Press
Music magazines
38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning
The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist
learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering
Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills
The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to
broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students
who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical
career within the sector
Progression
The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate
(VRQ) in the appropriate career route
Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using
the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship
framework) in the appropriate route
Potential Job Opportunities
Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder
Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician
Assessment Methods
Multiple Choice Examination
Oral Examination
Portfolio of Evidence
Practical Demonstration Assignment
Practical Examination
Task-based Controlled Assessment
Written Examination
Overall Assessment Method
Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit
The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the
learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test
results
Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing
and ListeningAppraising
Performing (30)
Students perform music throughout the course The two best
recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and
one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any
type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour
time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during
that period
For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental
vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)
a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc
For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an
improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing
a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording
Composing (30)
Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the
exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must
come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed
to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material
to make a new piece out of the old one
ListeningAppraising (40)
Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a
series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final
question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music
played in the exam hall
Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam
The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are
Western Classical Music 1600-1899
Music in the 20th Century
Popular Music in Context
World Music
40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching
research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic
Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not
required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music
classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C
grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas
There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some
they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is
hard work but its good fun too
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC
(EDEXCEL)
The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used
by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the
BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire
assessment is coursework based
Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)
Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the
Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a
portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of
A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links
with others
The Performer‟s role
Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer
Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)
Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students
the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the
equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own
recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves
A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)
including costs
A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it
safely
Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording
techniques
Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what
they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating
various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is
designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to
work in the Music Industry
This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic
Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will
spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software
and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs
The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both
exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both
qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)
Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as
individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily
being assessed on everything at the end of the course
A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction
grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up
with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx
42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will
learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer
software
You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white
photographs
Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based
photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-
journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new
media practice
Assessment
This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home
is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks
There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the
marks
Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SPANISH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
All students have the choice to continue
with Spanish which they have been
studying since Year 7 It would be a wise
choice to continue with Spanish as the
ability to speak a second language is not
only useful but is advantageous in
today‟s world Our closer connection
with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even
a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers
Course Information
The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based
on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage
Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to
communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding
Topics covered are
Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo
Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink
Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo
Free time shopping money new technology sports media
Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo
Home local area and the environment
Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo
School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs
Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and
listening at the end of Year 11
44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2
Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with
the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to
vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport
The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a
range of skills and techniques personal qualities and
attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter
the workplace
Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study
1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction
The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge
and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in
instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning
and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills
2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities
The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire
motivate and improve the performance of a selected target
group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It
encourages students to work in a team situation to organise
plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement
3 Injury in Sport
The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and
their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will
enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries
4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport
The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in
the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and
enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people
(Units to be studied are subject to change)
Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TEXTILES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of
textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The
students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following
areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction
applied textiles and embellished textiles
Assessment and Coursework Balance
In their first year the students will be required to produce two
extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will
follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The
students will work from first hand observations collecting and
developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and
textiles based techniques From this research and developmental
stage students will design and produce a final piece
During the second year students will begin by completing an
extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an
externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted
will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment
will account for 40
The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual
style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they
learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a
more personal response to a theme
Visits
Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources
such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second
year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within
the industry today
Why choose Textiles
Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more
confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level
course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles
The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range
of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior
design styling textiles design and costume design
46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)
Exam Board AQA
Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology
Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three
subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three
separate GCSEs
What are the differences between Triple Science and other
science GCSEs
This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will
be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of
the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award
What are the advantages of studying Triple Science
The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into
bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for
bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge
Who should consider taking Triple Science
Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope
with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a
related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those
students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this
course
The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school
GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics
Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25
Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25
Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25
Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25
Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS
2012 - 2014
Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4
option subjects
Please note
We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If
through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we
cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course
Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012
Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012
Make a record of your choice on the table below before
handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the
Options Information Evening
SUBJECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
Mo
st
De
sire
d
3D Design
Art
Catering
Construction
Dance
Drama
Ethics
Film Studies
French
Geography
Graphics
Hairdressing
History
ICT
Media Studies
Motor Vehicle
Music
Spanish
(Diploma) Sport
Textiles
Triple Sciences
Please tick if you would like to be
considered to do EBacc Please
remember that you need to
include Geography or History and
French or Spanish as your subject
options
Chessington Community College
Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS
Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603
wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk
![Page 10: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a](https://reader035.vdocument.in/reader035/viewer/2022062413/5a76533a7f8b9aa3618d22a0/html5/thumbnails/10.jpg)
Page|11 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ENGLISH LITERATURE (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
This specification is based on the conviction that the study of literature should centre on an
informed personal response to a range of texts in the genres of prose poetry and drama
Assessment is through controlled assessment and examination Teachers and their students
have some flexibility in the choice of texts to be studied and some overlap with GCSE English
Language is possible and indeed encouraged as it is felt that the study of literature can
greatly enhance a student‟s writing skills and that practising hisher own writing skills can lead
a student to increased enjoyment of and success in reading
Assessment
External Assessment
Unit 1 (35)Prose (different cultures) and poetry (contemporary) (50 Raw Marks 70 UMS)
Section A (21) requires study of a prose text from a different culture It will require
students to answer two questions on the chosen prose text
Section B (14) will consist of a question offering some structure for students to explore
respond to and compare two contemporary unseen poems In preparation for this unit
students will need to study at least fifteen poems in addition to those studied for Unit 3
Unit 2a (40) Literary heritage drama and contemporary prose(60 Raw Marks 80 UMS)
This paper requires study of a drama text from the EnglishIrishWelsh literary heritage and a
contemporary prose text It will require students to answer two questions on each text
OR
Unit 2b Contemporary drama and literary heritage prose (60 Raw Marks 80 UMS)
This paper requires study of a contemporary drama text and a prose text from the English
IrishWelsh literary heritage It will require students to answer two questions on each text
Controlled Assessment
Unit 3 (25) Poetry and drama (literary heritage) (40 Raw Marks 50 UMS)
EnglishIrishWelsh literary heritage Poetry and Shakespeare play Assessment will be based
on a single assignment linking a play by Shakespeare and literary heritage poetry Students
will be required to study a Shakespeare play (not Othello or Much Ado about Nothing) and
a group of thematically linked poems taken from the WJEC poetry collection
Assessment for GCSE English Language and GCSE English Literature is tiered ie externally
assessed componentsunits are targeted at the grade ranges of A-D (Higher Tier) and C-G
(Foundation Tier) while controlled assessments cater for the full range of ability Questions and
tasks will be designed to enable students to demonstrate what they know understand and
can do
Tier Grades Available
Higher A A B C D Foundation C D E F G
Students who narrowly fail to achieve Grade D on the Higher Tier will be awarded Grade E
Students who narrowly fail to achieve Grade D on the Higher Tier will be awarded Grade E
12|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MATHEMATICS (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Mathematics is a compulsory part of the curriculum for all students and currently takes four
lessons per week GCSE Mathematics is a linear course with two written examinations one
with a calculator The course takes a holistic approach and a grade C is available on both
foundation and higher papers
Students should develop knowledge skills and understanding of the content They should be
able to use their knowledge and understanding to make connections between
mathematical concepts and apply them to solve real life problems Functional elements of
mathematics are included in each paper
The course starts formally at the end of year 9 building on the work in years 7 and 8 so a
good start is made to cover the necessary material Students will need to apply themselves
to the tasks in class and complete their homework regularly Mathematics teachers are
available outside of lessons to help students who are finding concepts difficult to understand
and a weekly bdquocatch-up‟ club is available Students are set primarily according to ability but
the attitude to learning is also a factor to be considered when the groupings are made
We offer the opportunity to take GCSE Mathematics in Year 10 and providing satisfactory
results are achieved students may be given the opportunity to start the bdquoA‟ level course or to
take an additional GCSE in statistics
Page|13 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SCIENCE - MODULAR (GCSE DOUBLE AWARD)
Exam Board AQA
There have been some major changes to the GCSE science courses which will begin began in
September 2011 There is now more emphasis on bdquoHow Science Works‟ which means not just
learning the theory but understanding the practical side of science and its relation to the
world in which we live
Science is a core subject and is therefore studied by all students The main areas of science
can be broadly broken into Biology Chemistry and Physics
In addition to the above students will be assessed on their knowledge and understanding of
science through coursework which will be set within stimulating contexts that students should
be able to relate to from their science lessons and their experiences of science on a day to
day basis
Year 10
Students in Year 10 will study six modules as indicated below
These six modules will be assessed by tests which will be taken on three separate occasions
throughout the year The final 25 of the marks will be awarded based on coursework
The majority of Year 10 students will gain the first of their two GCSEs in science at the end of
Year 10
Year 11
The structure of the Year 11 course is similar to that of Year 10 in that Biology Chemistry and
Physics will be studied however students will be assessed by means of three written papers
containing structured questions rather than objective tests
GCSE Science A
Biology 1 25
Chemistry 1 25
Physics 1 25
Centre Assessed Coursework 25
GCSE Science B
Biology 2 25
Chemistry 2 25
Physics 2 25
Centre Assessed Coursework 25
14|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SCIENCE - MODULAR (GCSE DOUBLE AWARD) continued
Exam Board AQA
The coursework component will be assessed in a similar way to Year 10 and will carry the same
proportion of marks
Whilst the new GCSE science course is designed to be more interesting than the existing
course it is likely to be rather more challenging Students will need to work consistently hard in
order to achieve high level grades The course has been designed to ensure that all students
regardless of ability gain a good grounding in science The course is also an excellent
preparation for A level studies
BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENTED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE
(EDEXCEL)
For some students who have found the study of Science difficult at Key Stage 3 a more
accessible course is BTEC Science
Students still study the 3 Science disciplines of Chemistry Biology and Physics but combined
into one course
The advantages of this course are that there is no traditional coursework component it is
assignment based so students who find that the stress of exams causes them to do less well
have the opportunity to achieve their potential It also has a practical approach and no final
exam
The course is the equivalent of 2 GCSEs
Page|15 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN SPORT
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The BTEC Level 2 Extended Certificate offers flexibility and a choice of emphasis through the
optional units It is broadly equivalent to two GCSEs
The course provides students with the opportunity to enter employment in the sport and active
leisure sector or to progress to vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel BTEC Level 3
qualifications in Sport and Sport and Exercise Sciences
The course also gives students the opportunity to develop a range of skills and techniques
personal qualities and attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter the
workplace
1 Fitness Testing and Training
This unit gives students the opportunity to explore the essential fitness requirements and training
methods used to achieve successful sports performance They learn how to accurately
conduct fitness and health tests and use key skills to compare the results against national
standards
2 Practical Sport
The aim of this unit is to develop students‟ knowledge of the rules skills and techniques for one
team and one individual sport through practical application Students will develop their
assessment skills as they observe each other perform and communicate effectively to improve
personal performance
3 Anatomy amp Physiology for Sport
The aim of this unit is to give students a good understanding of the structure and function of
the skeletal muscular cardiovascular and respiratory systems of the human body This will help
students to gain a better idea of how their body works so that they can stay healthy
4 Development of Personal Fitness
This unit can prove invaluable to students who wish to stay fit and healthy in the future
Students learn how to get fit by actively working and developing their training skills so that they
can progess their fitness to higher levels
5 Effects of Exercise on the Body Systems
This unit again develops the students‟ awareness of how all systems of their body respond to
exercise Students learn about the great health benefits which can be achieved
(Units to be studied are subject to change)
THE
OPTIONAL
CURRICULUM
Page|19 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
3 DIMENSIONAL DESIGN (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
If you enjoyed designing and making products in the Design amp Technology workshops during
Years 789 and would like to continue making more complex and detailed products
Course Information
Students will be expected to demonstrate skills and
techniques in the context of their chosen area(s) of study
within Three-Dimensional Design
making appropriate use of colour line tone texture
shape and form decoration scale and proportion
using different approaches to recording images such
as observation analysis expression and imagination
showing in their work the ability to respond to an idea concept
issue theme or brief investigating different ways of working as
appropriate to their chosen area(s) of study within Three-
Dimensional Design showing understanding of the relationship of
form and function
making use of appropriate materials tools and techniques
providing evidence of an understanding of spatial qualities
composition rhythm scale and structure
providing evidence of the use of safe working practices
In Year 10 students will design and make a variety of projects such as a Spice rack Toy Car
and a Hand Trowel using a variety of machines and materials They will gain knowledge and
skills in manufacturing techniques production methods and the design process They will be
able to design products on the computer (CAD) and then cut them out on the new CAM
machine
Assessment
This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home is
presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks There is
also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the marks
Career Progression
Students can continue onto the A Level Product design course at Chessington‟s 6th Form
Alternatively they could pursue a career in an Engineering discipline Construction Product
Design or Architecture
20|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ART (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
All students choosing Art and Design as their option are required to
take the unendorsed examination This allows them to produce
work using a number of different techniques which have been listed
below
Painting and drawing
Graphics
Sculptureconstruction
Photography
Printmaking
A foundation course which gives students experience of all of
these is run during the first two terms
Painting and Drawing
The Painting and Drawing course is structured to enable students
regardless of their ability to build on the skills and techniques
they have learned in their first three years at school and at the same time prepare for a GCSE
examination
Programmes of work will largely be determined by the demands of the examination syllabus
but every effort will be made to structure the course so that it meets the needs of the students
whilst taking into account their wide range of abilities
The Painting and Drawing disciplines will form the basis for most practical activities but
students will be encouraged to experiment with and use as broad a range of approaches as
possible in the preparation and production of coursework
3 Dimensional Studies (Sculpture)
The course is designed to develop the student‟s visual awareness sensitivity and understanding
of the work of Artists involving three dimensions in a contemporary and historical context
Students will be encouraged to develop ideas in preliminary studies through research and
experimentation observational recording and analysis of forms and to produce work in the
form of modelling carving casting construction and assembling The important relationships
between urbanrural landscapes communities and cultures will also be studied as will the
interaction of solid and void forms and shape pattern decoration colour texture scale
structure proportion rhythm movement and the effects of light upon three dimensional
objects
Page|21 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ART (GCSE) continued
Exam Board AQA
Printmaking
Students will be able to experiment with a number of simple methods for producing a printed
image Some of the following will be introduced when appropriate
Lino printing
Card printing
Monoprinting
Polystyrene sheet printing
Screen printing
Assessment
Art and Design requires students to carry out and complete work in their own time in school
and at home Preparation and research are an essential element of the course and the use of
sketchbooks when preparing work is encouraged
Coursework will account for 60 of the marks and externally set assignment will account for
40 of the marks
Visits
Students are encouraged to take part in all visits to Museums Galleries and Exhibitions where
the work on display is considered helpful in supporting coursework studies
Career Progression
Fashion Designer Interior Designer Costume Designer Artist Architect Cartoonist Textile
Designer Model Maker etc
22|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CATERING (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
This single GCSE course is a vocational qualification that is
suitable for those students who have an interest in the Catering
Industry and want a broad background in this area It would
also be a good foundation for those who wish to progress to
further education It will offer valuable preparation for students
who may want to enter the many careers in the Food Industry
Students must have a real interest in food and enjoy cooking
They must be prepared to work hard in order to reach a high
standard of presentation in their practical work
Course Information
Students who take the GCSE Catering course will learn about and demonstrate their
knowledge and understanding of the following areas of study
The industry ndash types of establishments that serve food and drink
Job roles employment opportunities and relevant training
Health safety and hygiene
Food preparation cooking and presentation
Nutrition and menu planning
Costing and portion control
Specialist equipment both small and large scale
Communication and record keeping
Environmental considerations
Students will be expected to supply their own ingredients for practical sessions that will include
the selection storage preparation and serving of
Students will also be expected to purchase a white chef‟s jacket from the College which they
must wear to all practical sessions
Meat and poultry Convenience products
Fish Sauces
Eggs Basic dough products
Dairy products Basic pastry products
Cereals flour rice pasta Cakes sponges and scones
Vegetables and fruit
Page|23 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CATERING (GCSE) continued
Exam Board WJEC
Assessment
Visits
It is hoped that there will be some visits to local restaurants and a catering college Chefs may visit
some lessons to give demonstrations or work with students in practical lessons
Career Progression
Sous Chef Cake Decorator Junior Kitchen Assistant WaitressWaiter Nutritionist Dietician Food
Technologist Baker etc
60 of the final grade will come from 2
practical tasks where students must show
catering skills related to food preparation and
service
Each task must be accompanied by a folder
of notes that cover the investigation planning
and evaluation of the task
Task 1 (15 hours) will take place in Year 10
Task 2 (30 hours) will take place in Year 11
40 of the final grade will come from a
written examination paper (1 frac14 hours) on
Catering food and the customer
This will be taken at the end of Year 11
24|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CERTIFICATE IN CONSTRUCTION
Exam Board CITY amp GUILDS
This course is ideal for all students who are considering
a career in any part of the construction or building
industry It is of benefit weather they are considering a
craft or management position
Course Information
Students study for six periods a week and in the first
year concentrate on basic building skills
Carpentry
Electrics
Plumbing
Bricklaying
Health and safety
Site management
This is done through the City and Guilds Introductory Certificate in Basic Construction Skills in which
eight practical tasks must be passed and one theoretical on line test
The second year allows students to develop along their chosen path either developing their craft
skills or moving towards a professional career via the Diplomas in Construction and the Built
Environment This would be an ideal path for those considering a career in
Building management
Architecture
Town planning
Surveying
Engineering
Building control
Environmentalist
Landscape Architecture
Those students not considering a professional career would expand their skills in chosen areas
through further City and Guilds qualifications
Page|25 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 FIRST CERTIFICATE IN PERFORMING ARTS DANCE
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Students will look at FIVE different units in order to achieve a
qualification on this course
The most appropriate units can be selected according to
the individual needs of each group from the following list
Performing Dance
The Development of Dance
Working in the Performing Arts Industry
Professional Development in the Performing Arts
Industry
Understanding Dance
Contemporary Dance
Jazz Dance
Musical Theatre
Makeup for Performers
There is a significant emphasis on Choreographic and
performance skills throughout each unit and students will
be expected to
Learn set dances
Learn dance vocabulary
Choreograph solo duo and small group dances
Improve their performance and technical skills
Perform in front of their peers and a broader based audience
See professionals at work
Write reviews of works
Study the effect of costume set design and props
Look at the cultural and historical context of dances they view
The course is internally assessed throughout by the teacher and students are informally
assessed during every lesson Students will also be assessed more formally through
Assignments which meet the criteria for each Unit These are marked by the teacher and
internally verified by another specialist teacher to ensure that they are of the highest quality
Students opting for this course must understand that to achieve a good grade at BTEC they
have to have a love of making up (choreographing) and performing dances to others They
must also have some basic dance ability such as being able to move in time with the music
Students will need to work in bare feet for much of this course
Students who enjoy all aspects of dance and movement and have the confidence to perform
to a small audience will be well suited to this course Students will be expected to work in their
own time after school to perfect their dances and complete Assignment briefs They should
also be happy to work in a range of different dance styles and not just one particular style
26|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
DRAMA (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
GCSE Drama is an exciting and practical course which offers opportunities to become a skilled
and confident performer
The course aims to encourage students to develop
an interest in and understanding of a range of
drama and theatre experiences
increased self and group awareness
imaginative creative communication and
social skills
a love and appreciation of attending a range of
live theatre experiences
The course consists of two parts
Coursework 60
Two of the following options only one of which may be a technicaldesign skill
Devised thematic work for performance to an audience
Acting
Improvisation
Theatre in Education presentation
Dancedrama
Set
Costume
Make-up
Properties
Masks
Puppets
Lighting
Sound
Stage management
Each option is assessed through two parts
Part One A mark awarded for group and communication skills
Part Two A mark awarded for the final performance
Written Paper 40
2 hours
A choice of any two questions based on the following sections
A Set play bdquoAnimal Farm‟
B Response to live productions seen during the course
Page|27 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ETHICS (GCSE)
Exam Board OCR
The bdquoPhilosophy and Ethics‟ GCSE will allow students to explore the fundamental questions
about life and existence encourage their personal social and cultural development and
enhance their understanding of different cultures and belief systems
Over the course of the two years students will study important and thought-provoking issues
such as the nature and existence of God good and evil and the conflict between religion
and science relationships poverty and medical ethics peace and justice and the role of the
media in today‟s world It is a broad satisfying and worthwhile course of study designed to
challenge and stimulate students and equip them with the necessary skills to lead constructive
and thoughtful lives in the modern world
28|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
FILM STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
ldquoThe secret to film is that its an illusionrdquo
George Lucas Director of Star Wars
This course is ideal for any student who is
Able to work independently or as part of a team
Creative and practical but also analytical
Enthusiastic about films
Interested in making their own short films
Over the two years students will
Plan storyboard film and edit a short film working in a small
group adding their own music and special effects
Understand how films are made and promoted
Learn about the business of making films
Make a close study of one genre of Hollywood films (currently Disaster Films)
Closely research and study at least two different non-Hollywood Films (made in Britain
Europe or Africa)
Prepare their own film promotion campaign
Write an in-depth analysis of films of their choice
Assessment is through
A portfolio of coursework and also
Two end of course examinations
Although it is a new course Film Studies is already a popular choice for many students
combining well with the Media study in English as well as Media
Studies itself Film Studies is increasingly well
thought of by many colleges as it combines
a practical creative approach with
analytical skills
From Citizen Kane to Inception
Page|29 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
FRENCH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
The course outline for French is similar to Spanish It is not compulsory to have previous
knowledge of the language before starting the course but you need to be aware that it will
be more challenging for you and you need to put in a lot of effort to succeed However it is
not at all impossible
30|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GEOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Geography is a fascinating and wide-reaching subject and it has been shown that students
with Geography qualifications are some of the most employable
Why you should take Geography GCSE
It provides you with an understanding of global issues which will affect our lives now and
in the future
By the end of their GCSE you will have a better understanding of the way the world
works
Geography is a good link between the arts and sciences so it will help you in their other
subjects
You will understand how physical landscapes (eg rivers coasts mountains) are formed
You will be allowed to express opinions about people and places
Geography includes a range of academic skills that you will use in your future studies
Skills gained from Geography include
How to research and to investigate
Problem solving
Real world numeracy
How to collect record present and analyse data
Map reading
Creative thinking
How to write in an essay style and in a scientific style
Empathy and understanding of others
Topics of study will include
How are natural landscapes formed and how can we manage
them
What causes and how can we manage natural hazards
How do weather and climate work
How can we manage population around the world
How do towns and cities expand and how are they managed
How and why are some places rich whilst others are poor
How can we ensure development of global resources is sustainable
Page|31 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board AQA
Career Links (As printed by the Royal Geographical Society)
How is the course assessed
GCSE Geography is assessed by two written Examinations (75) and by Coursework (25) in
the form of a Controlled Assessment
Fieldwork at the South Coast and elsewhere is an essential part of this course
Travel and tourist industry
Travel Guide Researcher
Property Researcher
Lawyers
Senior Researcher for County
Council
Government Statistician
TV Locations Unit
Business Consultants
Planners
32|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GRAPHICS (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
If you are interested in the world of advertising like
developing logos and posters always have an interest in
the covers of DVDs books amp games and really enjoy
making products then this is the course for you
Course Information
A large part of the course is a practical investigation
into the techniques and materials used in the
advertising and packaging we see around us every
day
Students will develop skills in drawing both free hand and using computer aided design
model making printing techniques logo designing greetings card and popup book
design and build up skills to design DVD covers labels and posters
To be able to present this to an industrial standard students will use desktop publishing
software such as GIMP (a variation of Photoshop) and computer aided design packages
such as Google Sketchup 2D Design and Fireworks They will get the chance to use the
new computer aided manufacturing milling machine to design and make work like
models signs and games
Assessment
Students will complete a major project and portfolio that counts towards 60 of the overall
GCSE grade Previous projects have included creating a popup book producing
promotional material for the Olympics designing the identity and packaging for a new band
and making a travel game for children
Externally set assignment by the Exam board will account for 40 The typical brief might look
like this
A leading perfumeaftershave manufacturer are aware that the environment is a
current issue The general public are concerned about so want an environmentally
friendly perfumeaftershave bottle and packaging designed to meet the current
market needs You are to design and make a model bottle including the packaging
Career Progression
Or anything in the creative industries
Graphic designer Work in advertising Web designer
Architect Product designer Set designer
Computer game designer Window dresser Magazine editor
Fashion designer Comic book creator Book illustrator
Artist
Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a
range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme
conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)
Content
Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated
situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a
portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are
required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key
skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam
They will study the following subjects at Level 1
Shampoo and condition hair
Blow drying
Contribute to performing and colouring process
Contribute to the development of effective working
relationships
Support the health and safety of the salon
Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas
Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is
complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and
seminars
All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical
assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress
How will they be assessed
They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical
assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on
progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered
individually at different stages throughout the course
There are four areas of assessment
Practical They carry out the skill
Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill
Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit
Online tests
Progression
They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such
as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme
34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and
opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal
subject for you
You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability
to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely
untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills
What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for
History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities
alike It is particularly useful for the following careers
Course Information
The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills
covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of
these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in
the classroom
Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams
almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students
maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two
year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work
Each of the following units is worth 25
Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations
Key topics
bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56
bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)
bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991
Law
Journalism
Television production and research
Advertising
Research
Marketing
Business Management
Accountancy
Archaeology
Museum work
Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939
Key Topics
bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939
bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Holocaust
Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970
Key topics
bull McCarthyism and the Red scare
bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King
bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies
bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)
Representations of History
CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990
36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT
Exam Board OCR
The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-
requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres
and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the
recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students
education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and
employers
Course Information
The course aims to develop
Problem-solving skills through the practical real life
application of ICT to complex problems
The ability to analyse appraise and make critical
judgements about the use of ICT systems
An awareness of the role of ICT in the management
manipulation and dissemination of information
Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with
others
The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and
competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist
tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final
student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms
of ICT problem solving and project management
There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been
completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer
Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc
Assessment
Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two
GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟
equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE
In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students
must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two
mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2
Diploma
Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become
increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics
magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such
as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students
to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages
we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as
they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of
audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-
world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very
relevant and very challenging
Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different
forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is
a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in
a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also
able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in
an organised way
Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to
looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as
bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns
constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe
Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied
interesting and highly rewarding
Coursework
The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall
assessment of the course Students produce three assignments
for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical
Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment
Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical
Production and Evaluation
Assessment
This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is
undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for
the qualification
Recent topics for the examination have included
Soap opera Quiz shows
Action Films The Popular Press
Music magazines
38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning
The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist
learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering
Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills
The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to
broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students
who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical
career within the sector
Progression
The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate
(VRQ) in the appropriate career route
Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using
the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship
framework) in the appropriate route
Potential Job Opportunities
Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder
Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician
Assessment Methods
Multiple Choice Examination
Oral Examination
Portfolio of Evidence
Practical Demonstration Assignment
Practical Examination
Task-based Controlled Assessment
Written Examination
Overall Assessment Method
Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit
The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the
learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test
results
Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing
and ListeningAppraising
Performing (30)
Students perform music throughout the course The two best
recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and
one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any
type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour
time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during
that period
For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental
vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)
a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc
For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an
improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing
a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording
Composing (30)
Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the
exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must
come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed
to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material
to make a new piece out of the old one
ListeningAppraising (40)
Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a
series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final
question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music
played in the exam hall
Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam
The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are
Western Classical Music 1600-1899
Music in the 20th Century
Popular Music in Context
World Music
40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching
research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic
Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not
required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music
classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C
grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas
There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some
they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is
hard work but its good fun too
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC
(EDEXCEL)
The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used
by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the
BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire
assessment is coursework based
Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)
Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the
Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a
portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of
A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links
with others
The Performer‟s role
Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer
Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)
Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students
the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the
equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own
recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves
A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)
including costs
A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it
safely
Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording
techniques
Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what
they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating
various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is
designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to
work in the Music Industry
This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic
Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will
spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software
and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs
The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both
exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both
qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)
Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as
individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily
being assessed on everything at the end of the course
A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction
grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up
with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx
42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will
learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer
software
You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white
photographs
Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based
photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-
journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new
media practice
Assessment
This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home
is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks
There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the
marks
Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SPANISH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
All students have the choice to continue
with Spanish which they have been
studying since Year 7 It would be a wise
choice to continue with Spanish as the
ability to speak a second language is not
only useful but is advantageous in
today‟s world Our closer connection
with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even
a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers
Course Information
The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based
on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage
Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to
communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding
Topics covered are
Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo
Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink
Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo
Free time shopping money new technology sports media
Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo
Home local area and the environment
Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo
School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs
Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and
listening at the end of Year 11
44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2
Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with
the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to
vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport
The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a
range of skills and techniques personal qualities and
attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter
the workplace
Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study
1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction
The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge
and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in
instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning
and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills
2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities
The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire
motivate and improve the performance of a selected target
group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It
encourages students to work in a team situation to organise
plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement
3 Injury in Sport
The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and
their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will
enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries
4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport
The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in
the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and
enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people
(Units to be studied are subject to change)
Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TEXTILES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of
textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The
students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following
areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction
applied textiles and embellished textiles
Assessment and Coursework Balance
In their first year the students will be required to produce two
extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will
follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The
students will work from first hand observations collecting and
developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and
textiles based techniques From this research and developmental
stage students will design and produce a final piece
During the second year students will begin by completing an
extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an
externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted
will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment
will account for 40
The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual
style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they
learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a
more personal response to a theme
Visits
Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources
such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second
year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within
the industry today
Why choose Textiles
Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more
confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level
course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles
The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range
of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior
design styling textiles design and costume design
46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)
Exam Board AQA
Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology
Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three
subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three
separate GCSEs
What are the differences between Triple Science and other
science GCSEs
This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will
be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of
the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award
What are the advantages of studying Triple Science
The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into
bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for
bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge
Who should consider taking Triple Science
Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope
with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a
related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those
students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this
course
The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school
GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics
Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25
Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25
Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25
Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25
Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS
2012 - 2014
Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4
option subjects
Please note
We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If
through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we
cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course
Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012
Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012
Make a record of your choice on the table below before
handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the
Options Information Evening
SUBJECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
Mo
st
De
sire
d
3D Design
Art
Catering
Construction
Dance
Drama
Ethics
Film Studies
French
Geography
Graphics
Hairdressing
History
ICT
Media Studies
Motor Vehicle
Music
Spanish
(Diploma) Sport
Textiles
Triple Sciences
Please tick if you would like to be
considered to do EBacc Please
remember that you need to
include Geography or History and
French or Spanish as your subject
options
Chessington Community College
Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS
Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603
wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk
![Page 11: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a](https://reader035.vdocument.in/reader035/viewer/2022062413/5a76533a7f8b9aa3618d22a0/html5/thumbnails/11.jpg)
12|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MATHEMATICS (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Mathematics is a compulsory part of the curriculum for all students and currently takes four
lessons per week GCSE Mathematics is a linear course with two written examinations one
with a calculator The course takes a holistic approach and a grade C is available on both
foundation and higher papers
Students should develop knowledge skills and understanding of the content They should be
able to use their knowledge and understanding to make connections between
mathematical concepts and apply them to solve real life problems Functional elements of
mathematics are included in each paper
The course starts formally at the end of year 9 building on the work in years 7 and 8 so a
good start is made to cover the necessary material Students will need to apply themselves
to the tasks in class and complete their homework regularly Mathematics teachers are
available outside of lessons to help students who are finding concepts difficult to understand
and a weekly bdquocatch-up‟ club is available Students are set primarily according to ability but
the attitude to learning is also a factor to be considered when the groupings are made
We offer the opportunity to take GCSE Mathematics in Year 10 and providing satisfactory
results are achieved students may be given the opportunity to start the bdquoA‟ level course or to
take an additional GCSE in statistics
Page|13 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SCIENCE - MODULAR (GCSE DOUBLE AWARD)
Exam Board AQA
There have been some major changes to the GCSE science courses which will begin began in
September 2011 There is now more emphasis on bdquoHow Science Works‟ which means not just
learning the theory but understanding the practical side of science and its relation to the
world in which we live
Science is a core subject and is therefore studied by all students The main areas of science
can be broadly broken into Biology Chemistry and Physics
In addition to the above students will be assessed on their knowledge and understanding of
science through coursework which will be set within stimulating contexts that students should
be able to relate to from their science lessons and their experiences of science on a day to
day basis
Year 10
Students in Year 10 will study six modules as indicated below
These six modules will be assessed by tests which will be taken on three separate occasions
throughout the year The final 25 of the marks will be awarded based on coursework
The majority of Year 10 students will gain the first of their two GCSEs in science at the end of
Year 10
Year 11
The structure of the Year 11 course is similar to that of Year 10 in that Biology Chemistry and
Physics will be studied however students will be assessed by means of three written papers
containing structured questions rather than objective tests
GCSE Science A
Biology 1 25
Chemistry 1 25
Physics 1 25
Centre Assessed Coursework 25
GCSE Science B
Biology 2 25
Chemistry 2 25
Physics 2 25
Centre Assessed Coursework 25
14|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SCIENCE - MODULAR (GCSE DOUBLE AWARD) continued
Exam Board AQA
The coursework component will be assessed in a similar way to Year 10 and will carry the same
proportion of marks
Whilst the new GCSE science course is designed to be more interesting than the existing
course it is likely to be rather more challenging Students will need to work consistently hard in
order to achieve high level grades The course has been designed to ensure that all students
regardless of ability gain a good grounding in science The course is also an excellent
preparation for A level studies
BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENTED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE
(EDEXCEL)
For some students who have found the study of Science difficult at Key Stage 3 a more
accessible course is BTEC Science
Students still study the 3 Science disciplines of Chemistry Biology and Physics but combined
into one course
The advantages of this course are that there is no traditional coursework component it is
assignment based so students who find that the stress of exams causes them to do less well
have the opportunity to achieve their potential It also has a practical approach and no final
exam
The course is the equivalent of 2 GCSEs
Page|15 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN SPORT
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The BTEC Level 2 Extended Certificate offers flexibility and a choice of emphasis through the
optional units It is broadly equivalent to two GCSEs
The course provides students with the opportunity to enter employment in the sport and active
leisure sector or to progress to vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel BTEC Level 3
qualifications in Sport and Sport and Exercise Sciences
The course also gives students the opportunity to develop a range of skills and techniques
personal qualities and attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter the
workplace
1 Fitness Testing and Training
This unit gives students the opportunity to explore the essential fitness requirements and training
methods used to achieve successful sports performance They learn how to accurately
conduct fitness and health tests and use key skills to compare the results against national
standards
2 Practical Sport
The aim of this unit is to develop students‟ knowledge of the rules skills and techniques for one
team and one individual sport through practical application Students will develop their
assessment skills as they observe each other perform and communicate effectively to improve
personal performance
3 Anatomy amp Physiology for Sport
The aim of this unit is to give students a good understanding of the structure and function of
the skeletal muscular cardiovascular and respiratory systems of the human body This will help
students to gain a better idea of how their body works so that they can stay healthy
4 Development of Personal Fitness
This unit can prove invaluable to students who wish to stay fit and healthy in the future
Students learn how to get fit by actively working and developing their training skills so that they
can progess their fitness to higher levels
5 Effects of Exercise on the Body Systems
This unit again develops the students‟ awareness of how all systems of their body respond to
exercise Students learn about the great health benefits which can be achieved
(Units to be studied are subject to change)
THE
OPTIONAL
CURRICULUM
Page|19 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
3 DIMENSIONAL DESIGN (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
If you enjoyed designing and making products in the Design amp Technology workshops during
Years 789 and would like to continue making more complex and detailed products
Course Information
Students will be expected to demonstrate skills and
techniques in the context of their chosen area(s) of study
within Three-Dimensional Design
making appropriate use of colour line tone texture
shape and form decoration scale and proportion
using different approaches to recording images such
as observation analysis expression and imagination
showing in their work the ability to respond to an idea concept
issue theme or brief investigating different ways of working as
appropriate to their chosen area(s) of study within Three-
Dimensional Design showing understanding of the relationship of
form and function
making use of appropriate materials tools and techniques
providing evidence of an understanding of spatial qualities
composition rhythm scale and structure
providing evidence of the use of safe working practices
In Year 10 students will design and make a variety of projects such as a Spice rack Toy Car
and a Hand Trowel using a variety of machines and materials They will gain knowledge and
skills in manufacturing techniques production methods and the design process They will be
able to design products on the computer (CAD) and then cut them out on the new CAM
machine
Assessment
This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home is
presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks There is
also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the marks
Career Progression
Students can continue onto the A Level Product design course at Chessington‟s 6th Form
Alternatively they could pursue a career in an Engineering discipline Construction Product
Design or Architecture
20|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ART (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
All students choosing Art and Design as their option are required to
take the unendorsed examination This allows them to produce
work using a number of different techniques which have been listed
below
Painting and drawing
Graphics
Sculptureconstruction
Photography
Printmaking
A foundation course which gives students experience of all of
these is run during the first two terms
Painting and Drawing
The Painting and Drawing course is structured to enable students
regardless of their ability to build on the skills and techniques
they have learned in their first three years at school and at the same time prepare for a GCSE
examination
Programmes of work will largely be determined by the demands of the examination syllabus
but every effort will be made to structure the course so that it meets the needs of the students
whilst taking into account their wide range of abilities
The Painting and Drawing disciplines will form the basis for most practical activities but
students will be encouraged to experiment with and use as broad a range of approaches as
possible in the preparation and production of coursework
3 Dimensional Studies (Sculpture)
The course is designed to develop the student‟s visual awareness sensitivity and understanding
of the work of Artists involving three dimensions in a contemporary and historical context
Students will be encouraged to develop ideas in preliminary studies through research and
experimentation observational recording and analysis of forms and to produce work in the
form of modelling carving casting construction and assembling The important relationships
between urbanrural landscapes communities and cultures will also be studied as will the
interaction of solid and void forms and shape pattern decoration colour texture scale
structure proportion rhythm movement and the effects of light upon three dimensional
objects
Page|21 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ART (GCSE) continued
Exam Board AQA
Printmaking
Students will be able to experiment with a number of simple methods for producing a printed
image Some of the following will be introduced when appropriate
Lino printing
Card printing
Monoprinting
Polystyrene sheet printing
Screen printing
Assessment
Art and Design requires students to carry out and complete work in their own time in school
and at home Preparation and research are an essential element of the course and the use of
sketchbooks when preparing work is encouraged
Coursework will account for 60 of the marks and externally set assignment will account for
40 of the marks
Visits
Students are encouraged to take part in all visits to Museums Galleries and Exhibitions where
the work on display is considered helpful in supporting coursework studies
Career Progression
Fashion Designer Interior Designer Costume Designer Artist Architect Cartoonist Textile
Designer Model Maker etc
22|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CATERING (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
This single GCSE course is a vocational qualification that is
suitable for those students who have an interest in the Catering
Industry and want a broad background in this area It would
also be a good foundation for those who wish to progress to
further education It will offer valuable preparation for students
who may want to enter the many careers in the Food Industry
Students must have a real interest in food and enjoy cooking
They must be prepared to work hard in order to reach a high
standard of presentation in their practical work
Course Information
Students who take the GCSE Catering course will learn about and demonstrate their
knowledge and understanding of the following areas of study
The industry ndash types of establishments that serve food and drink
Job roles employment opportunities and relevant training
Health safety and hygiene
Food preparation cooking and presentation
Nutrition and menu planning
Costing and portion control
Specialist equipment both small and large scale
Communication and record keeping
Environmental considerations
Students will be expected to supply their own ingredients for practical sessions that will include
the selection storage preparation and serving of
Students will also be expected to purchase a white chef‟s jacket from the College which they
must wear to all practical sessions
Meat and poultry Convenience products
Fish Sauces
Eggs Basic dough products
Dairy products Basic pastry products
Cereals flour rice pasta Cakes sponges and scones
Vegetables and fruit
Page|23 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CATERING (GCSE) continued
Exam Board WJEC
Assessment
Visits
It is hoped that there will be some visits to local restaurants and a catering college Chefs may visit
some lessons to give demonstrations or work with students in practical lessons
Career Progression
Sous Chef Cake Decorator Junior Kitchen Assistant WaitressWaiter Nutritionist Dietician Food
Technologist Baker etc
60 of the final grade will come from 2
practical tasks where students must show
catering skills related to food preparation and
service
Each task must be accompanied by a folder
of notes that cover the investigation planning
and evaluation of the task
Task 1 (15 hours) will take place in Year 10
Task 2 (30 hours) will take place in Year 11
40 of the final grade will come from a
written examination paper (1 frac14 hours) on
Catering food and the customer
This will be taken at the end of Year 11
24|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CERTIFICATE IN CONSTRUCTION
Exam Board CITY amp GUILDS
This course is ideal for all students who are considering
a career in any part of the construction or building
industry It is of benefit weather they are considering a
craft or management position
Course Information
Students study for six periods a week and in the first
year concentrate on basic building skills
Carpentry
Electrics
Plumbing
Bricklaying
Health and safety
Site management
This is done through the City and Guilds Introductory Certificate in Basic Construction Skills in which
eight practical tasks must be passed and one theoretical on line test
The second year allows students to develop along their chosen path either developing their craft
skills or moving towards a professional career via the Diplomas in Construction and the Built
Environment This would be an ideal path for those considering a career in
Building management
Architecture
Town planning
Surveying
Engineering
Building control
Environmentalist
Landscape Architecture
Those students not considering a professional career would expand their skills in chosen areas
through further City and Guilds qualifications
Page|25 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 FIRST CERTIFICATE IN PERFORMING ARTS DANCE
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Students will look at FIVE different units in order to achieve a
qualification on this course
The most appropriate units can be selected according to
the individual needs of each group from the following list
Performing Dance
The Development of Dance
Working in the Performing Arts Industry
Professional Development in the Performing Arts
Industry
Understanding Dance
Contemporary Dance
Jazz Dance
Musical Theatre
Makeup for Performers
There is a significant emphasis on Choreographic and
performance skills throughout each unit and students will
be expected to
Learn set dances
Learn dance vocabulary
Choreograph solo duo and small group dances
Improve their performance and technical skills
Perform in front of their peers and a broader based audience
See professionals at work
Write reviews of works
Study the effect of costume set design and props
Look at the cultural and historical context of dances they view
The course is internally assessed throughout by the teacher and students are informally
assessed during every lesson Students will also be assessed more formally through
Assignments which meet the criteria for each Unit These are marked by the teacher and
internally verified by another specialist teacher to ensure that they are of the highest quality
Students opting for this course must understand that to achieve a good grade at BTEC they
have to have a love of making up (choreographing) and performing dances to others They
must also have some basic dance ability such as being able to move in time with the music
Students will need to work in bare feet for much of this course
Students who enjoy all aspects of dance and movement and have the confidence to perform
to a small audience will be well suited to this course Students will be expected to work in their
own time after school to perfect their dances and complete Assignment briefs They should
also be happy to work in a range of different dance styles and not just one particular style
26|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
DRAMA (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
GCSE Drama is an exciting and practical course which offers opportunities to become a skilled
and confident performer
The course aims to encourage students to develop
an interest in and understanding of a range of
drama and theatre experiences
increased self and group awareness
imaginative creative communication and
social skills
a love and appreciation of attending a range of
live theatre experiences
The course consists of two parts
Coursework 60
Two of the following options only one of which may be a technicaldesign skill
Devised thematic work for performance to an audience
Acting
Improvisation
Theatre in Education presentation
Dancedrama
Set
Costume
Make-up
Properties
Masks
Puppets
Lighting
Sound
Stage management
Each option is assessed through two parts
Part One A mark awarded for group and communication skills
Part Two A mark awarded for the final performance
Written Paper 40
2 hours
A choice of any two questions based on the following sections
A Set play bdquoAnimal Farm‟
B Response to live productions seen during the course
Page|27 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ETHICS (GCSE)
Exam Board OCR
The bdquoPhilosophy and Ethics‟ GCSE will allow students to explore the fundamental questions
about life and existence encourage their personal social and cultural development and
enhance their understanding of different cultures and belief systems
Over the course of the two years students will study important and thought-provoking issues
such as the nature and existence of God good and evil and the conflict between religion
and science relationships poverty and medical ethics peace and justice and the role of the
media in today‟s world It is a broad satisfying and worthwhile course of study designed to
challenge and stimulate students and equip them with the necessary skills to lead constructive
and thoughtful lives in the modern world
28|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
FILM STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
ldquoThe secret to film is that its an illusionrdquo
George Lucas Director of Star Wars
This course is ideal for any student who is
Able to work independently or as part of a team
Creative and practical but also analytical
Enthusiastic about films
Interested in making their own short films
Over the two years students will
Plan storyboard film and edit a short film working in a small
group adding their own music and special effects
Understand how films are made and promoted
Learn about the business of making films
Make a close study of one genre of Hollywood films (currently Disaster Films)
Closely research and study at least two different non-Hollywood Films (made in Britain
Europe or Africa)
Prepare their own film promotion campaign
Write an in-depth analysis of films of their choice
Assessment is through
A portfolio of coursework and also
Two end of course examinations
Although it is a new course Film Studies is already a popular choice for many students
combining well with the Media study in English as well as Media
Studies itself Film Studies is increasingly well
thought of by many colleges as it combines
a practical creative approach with
analytical skills
From Citizen Kane to Inception
Page|29 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
FRENCH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
The course outline for French is similar to Spanish It is not compulsory to have previous
knowledge of the language before starting the course but you need to be aware that it will
be more challenging for you and you need to put in a lot of effort to succeed However it is
not at all impossible
30|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GEOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Geography is a fascinating and wide-reaching subject and it has been shown that students
with Geography qualifications are some of the most employable
Why you should take Geography GCSE
It provides you with an understanding of global issues which will affect our lives now and
in the future
By the end of their GCSE you will have a better understanding of the way the world
works
Geography is a good link between the arts and sciences so it will help you in their other
subjects
You will understand how physical landscapes (eg rivers coasts mountains) are formed
You will be allowed to express opinions about people and places
Geography includes a range of academic skills that you will use in your future studies
Skills gained from Geography include
How to research and to investigate
Problem solving
Real world numeracy
How to collect record present and analyse data
Map reading
Creative thinking
How to write in an essay style and in a scientific style
Empathy and understanding of others
Topics of study will include
How are natural landscapes formed and how can we manage
them
What causes and how can we manage natural hazards
How do weather and climate work
How can we manage population around the world
How do towns and cities expand and how are they managed
How and why are some places rich whilst others are poor
How can we ensure development of global resources is sustainable
Page|31 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board AQA
Career Links (As printed by the Royal Geographical Society)
How is the course assessed
GCSE Geography is assessed by two written Examinations (75) and by Coursework (25) in
the form of a Controlled Assessment
Fieldwork at the South Coast and elsewhere is an essential part of this course
Travel and tourist industry
Travel Guide Researcher
Property Researcher
Lawyers
Senior Researcher for County
Council
Government Statistician
TV Locations Unit
Business Consultants
Planners
32|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GRAPHICS (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
If you are interested in the world of advertising like
developing logos and posters always have an interest in
the covers of DVDs books amp games and really enjoy
making products then this is the course for you
Course Information
A large part of the course is a practical investigation
into the techniques and materials used in the
advertising and packaging we see around us every
day
Students will develop skills in drawing both free hand and using computer aided design
model making printing techniques logo designing greetings card and popup book
design and build up skills to design DVD covers labels and posters
To be able to present this to an industrial standard students will use desktop publishing
software such as GIMP (a variation of Photoshop) and computer aided design packages
such as Google Sketchup 2D Design and Fireworks They will get the chance to use the
new computer aided manufacturing milling machine to design and make work like
models signs and games
Assessment
Students will complete a major project and portfolio that counts towards 60 of the overall
GCSE grade Previous projects have included creating a popup book producing
promotional material for the Olympics designing the identity and packaging for a new band
and making a travel game for children
Externally set assignment by the Exam board will account for 40 The typical brief might look
like this
A leading perfumeaftershave manufacturer are aware that the environment is a
current issue The general public are concerned about so want an environmentally
friendly perfumeaftershave bottle and packaging designed to meet the current
market needs You are to design and make a model bottle including the packaging
Career Progression
Or anything in the creative industries
Graphic designer Work in advertising Web designer
Architect Product designer Set designer
Computer game designer Window dresser Magazine editor
Fashion designer Comic book creator Book illustrator
Artist
Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a
range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme
conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)
Content
Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated
situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a
portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are
required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key
skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam
They will study the following subjects at Level 1
Shampoo and condition hair
Blow drying
Contribute to performing and colouring process
Contribute to the development of effective working
relationships
Support the health and safety of the salon
Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas
Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is
complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and
seminars
All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical
assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress
How will they be assessed
They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical
assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on
progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered
individually at different stages throughout the course
There are four areas of assessment
Practical They carry out the skill
Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill
Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit
Online tests
Progression
They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such
as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme
34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and
opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal
subject for you
You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability
to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely
untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills
What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for
History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities
alike It is particularly useful for the following careers
Course Information
The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills
covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of
these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in
the classroom
Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams
almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students
maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two
year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work
Each of the following units is worth 25
Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations
Key topics
bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56
bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)
bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991
Law
Journalism
Television production and research
Advertising
Research
Marketing
Business Management
Accountancy
Archaeology
Museum work
Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939
Key Topics
bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939
bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Holocaust
Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970
Key topics
bull McCarthyism and the Red scare
bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King
bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies
bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)
Representations of History
CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990
36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT
Exam Board OCR
The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-
requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres
and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the
recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students
education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and
employers
Course Information
The course aims to develop
Problem-solving skills through the practical real life
application of ICT to complex problems
The ability to analyse appraise and make critical
judgements about the use of ICT systems
An awareness of the role of ICT in the management
manipulation and dissemination of information
Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with
others
The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and
competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist
tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final
student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms
of ICT problem solving and project management
There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been
completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer
Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc
Assessment
Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two
GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟
equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE
In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students
must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two
mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2
Diploma
Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become
increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics
magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such
as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students
to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages
we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as
they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of
audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-
world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very
relevant and very challenging
Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different
forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is
a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in
a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also
able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in
an organised way
Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to
looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as
bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns
constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe
Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied
interesting and highly rewarding
Coursework
The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall
assessment of the course Students produce three assignments
for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical
Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment
Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical
Production and Evaluation
Assessment
This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is
undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for
the qualification
Recent topics for the examination have included
Soap opera Quiz shows
Action Films The Popular Press
Music magazines
38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning
The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist
learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering
Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills
The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to
broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students
who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical
career within the sector
Progression
The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate
(VRQ) in the appropriate career route
Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using
the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship
framework) in the appropriate route
Potential Job Opportunities
Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder
Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician
Assessment Methods
Multiple Choice Examination
Oral Examination
Portfolio of Evidence
Practical Demonstration Assignment
Practical Examination
Task-based Controlled Assessment
Written Examination
Overall Assessment Method
Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit
The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the
learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test
results
Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing
and ListeningAppraising
Performing (30)
Students perform music throughout the course The two best
recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and
one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any
type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour
time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during
that period
For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental
vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)
a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc
For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an
improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing
a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording
Composing (30)
Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the
exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must
come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed
to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material
to make a new piece out of the old one
ListeningAppraising (40)
Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a
series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final
question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music
played in the exam hall
Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam
The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are
Western Classical Music 1600-1899
Music in the 20th Century
Popular Music in Context
World Music
40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching
research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic
Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not
required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music
classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C
grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas
There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some
they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is
hard work but its good fun too
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC
(EDEXCEL)
The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used
by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the
BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire
assessment is coursework based
Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)
Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the
Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a
portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of
A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links
with others
The Performer‟s role
Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer
Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)
Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students
the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the
equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own
recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves
A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)
including costs
A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it
safely
Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording
techniques
Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what
they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating
various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is
designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to
work in the Music Industry
This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic
Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will
spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software
and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs
The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both
exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both
qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)
Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as
individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily
being assessed on everything at the end of the course
A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction
grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up
with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx
42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will
learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer
software
You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white
photographs
Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based
photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-
journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new
media practice
Assessment
This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home
is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks
There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the
marks
Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SPANISH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
All students have the choice to continue
with Spanish which they have been
studying since Year 7 It would be a wise
choice to continue with Spanish as the
ability to speak a second language is not
only useful but is advantageous in
today‟s world Our closer connection
with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even
a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers
Course Information
The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based
on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage
Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to
communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding
Topics covered are
Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo
Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink
Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo
Free time shopping money new technology sports media
Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo
Home local area and the environment
Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo
School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs
Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and
listening at the end of Year 11
44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2
Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with
the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to
vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport
The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a
range of skills and techniques personal qualities and
attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter
the workplace
Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study
1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction
The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge
and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in
instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning
and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills
2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities
The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire
motivate and improve the performance of a selected target
group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It
encourages students to work in a team situation to organise
plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement
3 Injury in Sport
The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and
their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will
enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries
4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport
The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in
the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and
enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people
(Units to be studied are subject to change)
Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TEXTILES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of
textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The
students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following
areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction
applied textiles and embellished textiles
Assessment and Coursework Balance
In their first year the students will be required to produce two
extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will
follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The
students will work from first hand observations collecting and
developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and
textiles based techniques From this research and developmental
stage students will design and produce a final piece
During the second year students will begin by completing an
extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an
externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted
will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment
will account for 40
The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual
style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they
learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a
more personal response to a theme
Visits
Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources
such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second
year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within
the industry today
Why choose Textiles
Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more
confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level
course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles
The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range
of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior
design styling textiles design and costume design
46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)
Exam Board AQA
Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology
Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three
subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three
separate GCSEs
What are the differences between Triple Science and other
science GCSEs
This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will
be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of
the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award
What are the advantages of studying Triple Science
The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into
bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for
bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge
Who should consider taking Triple Science
Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope
with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a
related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those
students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this
course
The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school
GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics
Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25
Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25
Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25
Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25
Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS
2012 - 2014
Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4
option subjects
Please note
We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If
through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we
cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course
Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012
Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012
Make a record of your choice on the table below before
handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the
Options Information Evening
SUBJECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
Mo
st
De
sire
d
3D Design
Art
Catering
Construction
Dance
Drama
Ethics
Film Studies
French
Geography
Graphics
Hairdressing
History
ICT
Media Studies
Motor Vehicle
Music
Spanish
(Diploma) Sport
Textiles
Triple Sciences
Please tick if you would like to be
considered to do EBacc Please
remember that you need to
include Geography or History and
French or Spanish as your subject
options
Chessington Community College
Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS
Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603
wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk
![Page 12: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a](https://reader035.vdocument.in/reader035/viewer/2022062413/5a76533a7f8b9aa3618d22a0/html5/thumbnails/12.jpg)
Page|13 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SCIENCE - MODULAR (GCSE DOUBLE AWARD)
Exam Board AQA
There have been some major changes to the GCSE science courses which will begin began in
September 2011 There is now more emphasis on bdquoHow Science Works‟ which means not just
learning the theory but understanding the practical side of science and its relation to the
world in which we live
Science is a core subject and is therefore studied by all students The main areas of science
can be broadly broken into Biology Chemistry and Physics
In addition to the above students will be assessed on their knowledge and understanding of
science through coursework which will be set within stimulating contexts that students should
be able to relate to from their science lessons and their experiences of science on a day to
day basis
Year 10
Students in Year 10 will study six modules as indicated below
These six modules will be assessed by tests which will be taken on three separate occasions
throughout the year The final 25 of the marks will be awarded based on coursework
The majority of Year 10 students will gain the first of their two GCSEs in science at the end of
Year 10
Year 11
The structure of the Year 11 course is similar to that of Year 10 in that Biology Chemistry and
Physics will be studied however students will be assessed by means of three written papers
containing structured questions rather than objective tests
GCSE Science A
Biology 1 25
Chemistry 1 25
Physics 1 25
Centre Assessed Coursework 25
GCSE Science B
Biology 2 25
Chemistry 2 25
Physics 2 25
Centre Assessed Coursework 25
14|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SCIENCE - MODULAR (GCSE DOUBLE AWARD) continued
Exam Board AQA
The coursework component will be assessed in a similar way to Year 10 and will carry the same
proportion of marks
Whilst the new GCSE science course is designed to be more interesting than the existing
course it is likely to be rather more challenging Students will need to work consistently hard in
order to achieve high level grades The course has been designed to ensure that all students
regardless of ability gain a good grounding in science The course is also an excellent
preparation for A level studies
BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENTED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE
(EDEXCEL)
For some students who have found the study of Science difficult at Key Stage 3 a more
accessible course is BTEC Science
Students still study the 3 Science disciplines of Chemistry Biology and Physics but combined
into one course
The advantages of this course are that there is no traditional coursework component it is
assignment based so students who find that the stress of exams causes them to do less well
have the opportunity to achieve their potential It also has a practical approach and no final
exam
The course is the equivalent of 2 GCSEs
Page|15 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN SPORT
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The BTEC Level 2 Extended Certificate offers flexibility and a choice of emphasis through the
optional units It is broadly equivalent to two GCSEs
The course provides students with the opportunity to enter employment in the sport and active
leisure sector or to progress to vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel BTEC Level 3
qualifications in Sport and Sport and Exercise Sciences
The course also gives students the opportunity to develop a range of skills and techniques
personal qualities and attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter the
workplace
1 Fitness Testing and Training
This unit gives students the opportunity to explore the essential fitness requirements and training
methods used to achieve successful sports performance They learn how to accurately
conduct fitness and health tests and use key skills to compare the results against national
standards
2 Practical Sport
The aim of this unit is to develop students‟ knowledge of the rules skills and techniques for one
team and one individual sport through practical application Students will develop their
assessment skills as they observe each other perform and communicate effectively to improve
personal performance
3 Anatomy amp Physiology for Sport
The aim of this unit is to give students a good understanding of the structure and function of
the skeletal muscular cardiovascular and respiratory systems of the human body This will help
students to gain a better idea of how their body works so that they can stay healthy
4 Development of Personal Fitness
This unit can prove invaluable to students who wish to stay fit and healthy in the future
Students learn how to get fit by actively working and developing their training skills so that they
can progess their fitness to higher levels
5 Effects of Exercise on the Body Systems
This unit again develops the students‟ awareness of how all systems of their body respond to
exercise Students learn about the great health benefits which can be achieved
(Units to be studied are subject to change)
THE
OPTIONAL
CURRICULUM
Page|19 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
3 DIMENSIONAL DESIGN (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
If you enjoyed designing and making products in the Design amp Technology workshops during
Years 789 and would like to continue making more complex and detailed products
Course Information
Students will be expected to demonstrate skills and
techniques in the context of their chosen area(s) of study
within Three-Dimensional Design
making appropriate use of colour line tone texture
shape and form decoration scale and proportion
using different approaches to recording images such
as observation analysis expression and imagination
showing in their work the ability to respond to an idea concept
issue theme or brief investigating different ways of working as
appropriate to their chosen area(s) of study within Three-
Dimensional Design showing understanding of the relationship of
form and function
making use of appropriate materials tools and techniques
providing evidence of an understanding of spatial qualities
composition rhythm scale and structure
providing evidence of the use of safe working practices
In Year 10 students will design and make a variety of projects such as a Spice rack Toy Car
and a Hand Trowel using a variety of machines and materials They will gain knowledge and
skills in manufacturing techniques production methods and the design process They will be
able to design products on the computer (CAD) and then cut them out on the new CAM
machine
Assessment
This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home is
presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks There is
also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the marks
Career Progression
Students can continue onto the A Level Product design course at Chessington‟s 6th Form
Alternatively they could pursue a career in an Engineering discipline Construction Product
Design or Architecture
20|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ART (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
All students choosing Art and Design as their option are required to
take the unendorsed examination This allows them to produce
work using a number of different techniques which have been listed
below
Painting and drawing
Graphics
Sculptureconstruction
Photography
Printmaking
A foundation course which gives students experience of all of
these is run during the first two terms
Painting and Drawing
The Painting and Drawing course is structured to enable students
regardless of their ability to build on the skills and techniques
they have learned in their first three years at school and at the same time prepare for a GCSE
examination
Programmes of work will largely be determined by the demands of the examination syllabus
but every effort will be made to structure the course so that it meets the needs of the students
whilst taking into account their wide range of abilities
The Painting and Drawing disciplines will form the basis for most practical activities but
students will be encouraged to experiment with and use as broad a range of approaches as
possible in the preparation and production of coursework
3 Dimensional Studies (Sculpture)
The course is designed to develop the student‟s visual awareness sensitivity and understanding
of the work of Artists involving three dimensions in a contemporary and historical context
Students will be encouraged to develop ideas in preliminary studies through research and
experimentation observational recording and analysis of forms and to produce work in the
form of modelling carving casting construction and assembling The important relationships
between urbanrural landscapes communities and cultures will also be studied as will the
interaction of solid and void forms and shape pattern decoration colour texture scale
structure proportion rhythm movement and the effects of light upon three dimensional
objects
Page|21 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ART (GCSE) continued
Exam Board AQA
Printmaking
Students will be able to experiment with a number of simple methods for producing a printed
image Some of the following will be introduced when appropriate
Lino printing
Card printing
Monoprinting
Polystyrene sheet printing
Screen printing
Assessment
Art and Design requires students to carry out and complete work in their own time in school
and at home Preparation and research are an essential element of the course and the use of
sketchbooks when preparing work is encouraged
Coursework will account for 60 of the marks and externally set assignment will account for
40 of the marks
Visits
Students are encouraged to take part in all visits to Museums Galleries and Exhibitions where
the work on display is considered helpful in supporting coursework studies
Career Progression
Fashion Designer Interior Designer Costume Designer Artist Architect Cartoonist Textile
Designer Model Maker etc
22|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CATERING (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
This single GCSE course is a vocational qualification that is
suitable for those students who have an interest in the Catering
Industry and want a broad background in this area It would
also be a good foundation for those who wish to progress to
further education It will offer valuable preparation for students
who may want to enter the many careers in the Food Industry
Students must have a real interest in food and enjoy cooking
They must be prepared to work hard in order to reach a high
standard of presentation in their practical work
Course Information
Students who take the GCSE Catering course will learn about and demonstrate their
knowledge and understanding of the following areas of study
The industry ndash types of establishments that serve food and drink
Job roles employment opportunities and relevant training
Health safety and hygiene
Food preparation cooking and presentation
Nutrition and menu planning
Costing and portion control
Specialist equipment both small and large scale
Communication and record keeping
Environmental considerations
Students will be expected to supply their own ingredients for practical sessions that will include
the selection storage preparation and serving of
Students will also be expected to purchase a white chef‟s jacket from the College which they
must wear to all practical sessions
Meat and poultry Convenience products
Fish Sauces
Eggs Basic dough products
Dairy products Basic pastry products
Cereals flour rice pasta Cakes sponges and scones
Vegetables and fruit
Page|23 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CATERING (GCSE) continued
Exam Board WJEC
Assessment
Visits
It is hoped that there will be some visits to local restaurants and a catering college Chefs may visit
some lessons to give demonstrations or work with students in practical lessons
Career Progression
Sous Chef Cake Decorator Junior Kitchen Assistant WaitressWaiter Nutritionist Dietician Food
Technologist Baker etc
60 of the final grade will come from 2
practical tasks where students must show
catering skills related to food preparation and
service
Each task must be accompanied by a folder
of notes that cover the investigation planning
and evaluation of the task
Task 1 (15 hours) will take place in Year 10
Task 2 (30 hours) will take place in Year 11
40 of the final grade will come from a
written examination paper (1 frac14 hours) on
Catering food and the customer
This will be taken at the end of Year 11
24|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CERTIFICATE IN CONSTRUCTION
Exam Board CITY amp GUILDS
This course is ideal for all students who are considering
a career in any part of the construction or building
industry It is of benefit weather they are considering a
craft or management position
Course Information
Students study for six periods a week and in the first
year concentrate on basic building skills
Carpentry
Electrics
Plumbing
Bricklaying
Health and safety
Site management
This is done through the City and Guilds Introductory Certificate in Basic Construction Skills in which
eight practical tasks must be passed and one theoretical on line test
The second year allows students to develop along their chosen path either developing their craft
skills or moving towards a professional career via the Diplomas in Construction and the Built
Environment This would be an ideal path for those considering a career in
Building management
Architecture
Town planning
Surveying
Engineering
Building control
Environmentalist
Landscape Architecture
Those students not considering a professional career would expand their skills in chosen areas
through further City and Guilds qualifications
Page|25 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 FIRST CERTIFICATE IN PERFORMING ARTS DANCE
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Students will look at FIVE different units in order to achieve a
qualification on this course
The most appropriate units can be selected according to
the individual needs of each group from the following list
Performing Dance
The Development of Dance
Working in the Performing Arts Industry
Professional Development in the Performing Arts
Industry
Understanding Dance
Contemporary Dance
Jazz Dance
Musical Theatre
Makeup for Performers
There is a significant emphasis on Choreographic and
performance skills throughout each unit and students will
be expected to
Learn set dances
Learn dance vocabulary
Choreograph solo duo and small group dances
Improve their performance and technical skills
Perform in front of their peers and a broader based audience
See professionals at work
Write reviews of works
Study the effect of costume set design and props
Look at the cultural and historical context of dances they view
The course is internally assessed throughout by the teacher and students are informally
assessed during every lesson Students will also be assessed more formally through
Assignments which meet the criteria for each Unit These are marked by the teacher and
internally verified by another specialist teacher to ensure that they are of the highest quality
Students opting for this course must understand that to achieve a good grade at BTEC they
have to have a love of making up (choreographing) and performing dances to others They
must also have some basic dance ability such as being able to move in time with the music
Students will need to work in bare feet for much of this course
Students who enjoy all aspects of dance and movement and have the confidence to perform
to a small audience will be well suited to this course Students will be expected to work in their
own time after school to perfect their dances and complete Assignment briefs They should
also be happy to work in a range of different dance styles and not just one particular style
26|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
DRAMA (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
GCSE Drama is an exciting and practical course which offers opportunities to become a skilled
and confident performer
The course aims to encourage students to develop
an interest in and understanding of a range of
drama and theatre experiences
increased self and group awareness
imaginative creative communication and
social skills
a love and appreciation of attending a range of
live theatre experiences
The course consists of two parts
Coursework 60
Two of the following options only one of which may be a technicaldesign skill
Devised thematic work for performance to an audience
Acting
Improvisation
Theatre in Education presentation
Dancedrama
Set
Costume
Make-up
Properties
Masks
Puppets
Lighting
Sound
Stage management
Each option is assessed through two parts
Part One A mark awarded for group and communication skills
Part Two A mark awarded for the final performance
Written Paper 40
2 hours
A choice of any two questions based on the following sections
A Set play bdquoAnimal Farm‟
B Response to live productions seen during the course
Page|27 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ETHICS (GCSE)
Exam Board OCR
The bdquoPhilosophy and Ethics‟ GCSE will allow students to explore the fundamental questions
about life and existence encourage their personal social and cultural development and
enhance their understanding of different cultures and belief systems
Over the course of the two years students will study important and thought-provoking issues
such as the nature and existence of God good and evil and the conflict between religion
and science relationships poverty and medical ethics peace and justice and the role of the
media in today‟s world It is a broad satisfying and worthwhile course of study designed to
challenge and stimulate students and equip them with the necessary skills to lead constructive
and thoughtful lives in the modern world
28|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
FILM STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
ldquoThe secret to film is that its an illusionrdquo
George Lucas Director of Star Wars
This course is ideal for any student who is
Able to work independently or as part of a team
Creative and practical but also analytical
Enthusiastic about films
Interested in making their own short films
Over the two years students will
Plan storyboard film and edit a short film working in a small
group adding their own music and special effects
Understand how films are made and promoted
Learn about the business of making films
Make a close study of one genre of Hollywood films (currently Disaster Films)
Closely research and study at least two different non-Hollywood Films (made in Britain
Europe or Africa)
Prepare their own film promotion campaign
Write an in-depth analysis of films of their choice
Assessment is through
A portfolio of coursework and also
Two end of course examinations
Although it is a new course Film Studies is already a popular choice for many students
combining well with the Media study in English as well as Media
Studies itself Film Studies is increasingly well
thought of by many colleges as it combines
a practical creative approach with
analytical skills
From Citizen Kane to Inception
Page|29 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
FRENCH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
The course outline for French is similar to Spanish It is not compulsory to have previous
knowledge of the language before starting the course but you need to be aware that it will
be more challenging for you and you need to put in a lot of effort to succeed However it is
not at all impossible
30|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GEOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Geography is a fascinating and wide-reaching subject and it has been shown that students
with Geography qualifications are some of the most employable
Why you should take Geography GCSE
It provides you with an understanding of global issues which will affect our lives now and
in the future
By the end of their GCSE you will have a better understanding of the way the world
works
Geography is a good link between the arts and sciences so it will help you in their other
subjects
You will understand how physical landscapes (eg rivers coasts mountains) are formed
You will be allowed to express opinions about people and places
Geography includes a range of academic skills that you will use in your future studies
Skills gained from Geography include
How to research and to investigate
Problem solving
Real world numeracy
How to collect record present and analyse data
Map reading
Creative thinking
How to write in an essay style and in a scientific style
Empathy and understanding of others
Topics of study will include
How are natural landscapes formed and how can we manage
them
What causes and how can we manage natural hazards
How do weather and climate work
How can we manage population around the world
How do towns and cities expand and how are they managed
How and why are some places rich whilst others are poor
How can we ensure development of global resources is sustainable
Page|31 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board AQA
Career Links (As printed by the Royal Geographical Society)
How is the course assessed
GCSE Geography is assessed by two written Examinations (75) and by Coursework (25) in
the form of a Controlled Assessment
Fieldwork at the South Coast and elsewhere is an essential part of this course
Travel and tourist industry
Travel Guide Researcher
Property Researcher
Lawyers
Senior Researcher for County
Council
Government Statistician
TV Locations Unit
Business Consultants
Planners
32|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GRAPHICS (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
If you are interested in the world of advertising like
developing logos and posters always have an interest in
the covers of DVDs books amp games and really enjoy
making products then this is the course for you
Course Information
A large part of the course is a practical investigation
into the techniques and materials used in the
advertising and packaging we see around us every
day
Students will develop skills in drawing both free hand and using computer aided design
model making printing techniques logo designing greetings card and popup book
design and build up skills to design DVD covers labels and posters
To be able to present this to an industrial standard students will use desktop publishing
software such as GIMP (a variation of Photoshop) and computer aided design packages
such as Google Sketchup 2D Design and Fireworks They will get the chance to use the
new computer aided manufacturing milling machine to design and make work like
models signs and games
Assessment
Students will complete a major project and portfolio that counts towards 60 of the overall
GCSE grade Previous projects have included creating a popup book producing
promotional material for the Olympics designing the identity and packaging for a new band
and making a travel game for children
Externally set assignment by the Exam board will account for 40 The typical brief might look
like this
A leading perfumeaftershave manufacturer are aware that the environment is a
current issue The general public are concerned about so want an environmentally
friendly perfumeaftershave bottle and packaging designed to meet the current
market needs You are to design and make a model bottle including the packaging
Career Progression
Or anything in the creative industries
Graphic designer Work in advertising Web designer
Architect Product designer Set designer
Computer game designer Window dresser Magazine editor
Fashion designer Comic book creator Book illustrator
Artist
Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a
range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme
conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)
Content
Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated
situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a
portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are
required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key
skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam
They will study the following subjects at Level 1
Shampoo and condition hair
Blow drying
Contribute to performing and colouring process
Contribute to the development of effective working
relationships
Support the health and safety of the salon
Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas
Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is
complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and
seminars
All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical
assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress
How will they be assessed
They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical
assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on
progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered
individually at different stages throughout the course
There are four areas of assessment
Practical They carry out the skill
Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill
Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit
Online tests
Progression
They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such
as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme
34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and
opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal
subject for you
You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability
to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely
untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills
What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for
History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities
alike It is particularly useful for the following careers
Course Information
The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills
covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of
these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in
the classroom
Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams
almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students
maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two
year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work
Each of the following units is worth 25
Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations
Key topics
bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56
bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)
bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991
Law
Journalism
Television production and research
Advertising
Research
Marketing
Business Management
Accountancy
Archaeology
Museum work
Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939
Key Topics
bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939
bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Holocaust
Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970
Key topics
bull McCarthyism and the Red scare
bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King
bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies
bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)
Representations of History
CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990
36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT
Exam Board OCR
The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-
requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres
and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the
recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students
education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and
employers
Course Information
The course aims to develop
Problem-solving skills through the practical real life
application of ICT to complex problems
The ability to analyse appraise and make critical
judgements about the use of ICT systems
An awareness of the role of ICT in the management
manipulation and dissemination of information
Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with
others
The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and
competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist
tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final
student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms
of ICT problem solving and project management
There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been
completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer
Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc
Assessment
Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two
GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟
equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE
In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students
must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two
mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2
Diploma
Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become
increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics
magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such
as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students
to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages
we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as
they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of
audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-
world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very
relevant and very challenging
Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different
forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is
a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in
a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also
able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in
an organised way
Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to
looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as
bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns
constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe
Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied
interesting and highly rewarding
Coursework
The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall
assessment of the course Students produce three assignments
for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical
Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment
Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical
Production and Evaluation
Assessment
This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is
undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for
the qualification
Recent topics for the examination have included
Soap opera Quiz shows
Action Films The Popular Press
Music magazines
38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning
The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist
learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering
Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills
The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to
broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students
who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical
career within the sector
Progression
The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate
(VRQ) in the appropriate career route
Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using
the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship
framework) in the appropriate route
Potential Job Opportunities
Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder
Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician
Assessment Methods
Multiple Choice Examination
Oral Examination
Portfolio of Evidence
Practical Demonstration Assignment
Practical Examination
Task-based Controlled Assessment
Written Examination
Overall Assessment Method
Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit
The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the
learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test
results
Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing
and ListeningAppraising
Performing (30)
Students perform music throughout the course The two best
recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and
one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any
type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour
time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during
that period
For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental
vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)
a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc
For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an
improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing
a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording
Composing (30)
Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the
exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must
come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed
to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material
to make a new piece out of the old one
ListeningAppraising (40)
Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a
series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final
question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music
played in the exam hall
Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam
The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are
Western Classical Music 1600-1899
Music in the 20th Century
Popular Music in Context
World Music
40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching
research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic
Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not
required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music
classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C
grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas
There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some
they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is
hard work but its good fun too
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC
(EDEXCEL)
The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used
by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the
BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire
assessment is coursework based
Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)
Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the
Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a
portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of
A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links
with others
The Performer‟s role
Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer
Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)
Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students
the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the
equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own
recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves
A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)
including costs
A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it
safely
Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording
techniques
Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what
they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating
various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is
designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to
work in the Music Industry
This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic
Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will
spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software
and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs
The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both
exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both
qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)
Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as
individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily
being assessed on everything at the end of the course
A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction
grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up
with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx
42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will
learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer
software
You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white
photographs
Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based
photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-
journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new
media practice
Assessment
This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home
is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks
There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the
marks
Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SPANISH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
All students have the choice to continue
with Spanish which they have been
studying since Year 7 It would be a wise
choice to continue with Spanish as the
ability to speak a second language is not
only useful but is advantageous in
today‟s world Our closer connection
with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even
a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers
Course Information
The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based
on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage
Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to
communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding
Topics covered are
Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo
Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink
Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo
Free time shopping money new technology sports media
Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo
Home local area and the environment
Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo
School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs
Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and
listening at the end of Year 11
44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2
Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with
the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to
vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport
The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a
range of skills and techniques personal qualities and
attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter
the workplace
Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study
1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction
The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge
and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in
instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning
and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills
2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities
The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire
motivate and improve the performance of a selected target
group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It
encourages students to work in a team situation to organise
plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement
3 Injury in Sport
The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and
their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will
enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries
4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport
The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in
the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and
enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people
(Units to be studied are subject to change)
Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TEXTILES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of
textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The
students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following
areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction
applied textiles and embellished textiles
Assessment and Coursework Balance
In their first year the students will be required to produce two
extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will
follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The
students will work from first hand observations collecting and
developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and
textiles based techniques From this research and developmental
stage students will design and produce a final piece
During the second year students will begin by completing an
extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an
externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted
will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment
will account for 40
The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual
style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they
learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a
more personal response to a theme
Visits
Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources
such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second
year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within
the industry today
Why choose Textiles
Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more
confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level
course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles
The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range
of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior
design styling textiles design and costume design
46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)
Exam Board AQA
Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology
Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three
subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three
separate GCSEs
What are the differences between Triple Science and other
science GCSEs
This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will
be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of
the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award
What are the advantages of studying Triple Science
The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into
bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for
bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge
Who should consider taking Triple Science
Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope
with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a
related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those
students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this
course
The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school
GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics
Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25
Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25
Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25
Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25
Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS
2012 - 2014
Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4
option subjects
Please note
We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If
through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we
cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course
Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012
Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012
Make a record of your choice on the table below before
handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the
Options Information Evening
SUBJECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
Mo
st
De
sire
d
3D Design
Art
Catering
Construction
Dance
Drama
Ethics
Film Studies
French
Geography
Graphics
Hairdressing
History
ICT
Media Studies
Motor Vehicle
Music
Spanish
(Diploma) Sport
Textiles
Triple Sciences
Please tick if you would like to be
considered to do EBacc Please
remember that you need to
include Geography or History and
French or Spanish as your subject
options
Chessington Community College
Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS
Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603
wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk
![Page 13: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a](https://reader035.vdocument.in/reader035/viewer/2022062413/5a76533a7f8b9aa3618d22a0/html5/thumbnails/13.jpg)
14|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SCIENCE - MODULAR (GCSE DOUBLE AWARD) continued
Exam Board AQA
The coursework component will be assessed in a similar way to Year 10 and will carry the same
proportion of marks
Whilst the new GCSE science course is designed to be more interesting than the existing
course it is likely to be rather more challenging Students will need to work consistently hard in
order to achieve high level grades The course has been designed to ensure that all students
regardless of ability gain a good grounding in science The course is also an excellent
preparation for A level studies
BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENTED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE
(EDEXCEL)
For some students who have found the study of Science difficult at Key Stage 3 a more
accessible course is BTEC Science
Students still study the 3 Science disciplines of Chemistry Biology and Physics but combined
into one course
The advantages of this course are that there is no traditional coursework component it is
assignment based so students who find that the stress of exams causes them to do less well
have the opportunity to achieve their potential It also has a practical approach and no final
exam
The course is the equivalent of 2 GCSEs
Page|15 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN SPORT
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The BTEC Level 2 Extended Certificate offers flexibility and a choice of emphasis through the
optional units It is broadly equivalent to two GCSEs
The course provides students with the opportunity to enter employment in the sport and active
leisure sector or to progress to vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel BTEC Level 3
qualifications in Sport and Sport and Exercise Sciences
The course also gives students the opportunity to develop a range of skills and techniques
personal qualities and attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter the
workplace
1 Fitness Testing and Training
This unit gives students the opportunity to explore the essential fitness requirements and training
methods used to achieve successful sports performance They learn how to accurately
conduct fitness and health tests and use key skills to compare the results against national
standards
2 Practical Sport
The aim of this unit is to develop students‟ knowledge of the rules skills and techniques for one
team and one individual sport through practical application Students will develop their
assessment skills as they observe each other perform and communicate effectively to improve
personal performance
3 Anatomy amp Physiology for Sport
The aim of this unit is to give students a good understanding of the structure and function of
the skeletal muscular cardiovascular and respiratory systems of the human body This will help
students to gain a better idea of how their body works so that they can stay healthy
4 Development of Personal Fitness
This unit can prove invaluable to students who wish to stay fit and healthy in the future
Students learn how to get fit by actively working and developing their training skills so that they
can progess their fitness to higher levels
5 Effects of Exercise on the Body Systems
This unit again develops the students‟ awareness of how all systems of their body respond to
exercise Students learn about the great health benefits which can be achieved
(Units to be studied are subject to change)
THE
OPTIONAL
CURRICULUM
Page|19 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
3 DIMENSIONAL DESIGN (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
If you enjoyed designing and making products in the Design amp Technology workshops during
Years 789 and would like to continue making more complex and detailed products
Course Information
Students will be expected to demonstrate skills and
techniques in the context of their chosen area(s) of study
within Three-Dimensional Design
making appropriate use of colour line tone texture
shape and form decoration scale and proportion
using different approaches to recording images such
as observation analysis expression and imagination
showing in their work the ability to respond to an idea concept
issue theme or brief investigating different ways of working as
appropriate to their chosen area(s) of study within Three-
Dimensional Design showing understanding of the relationship of
form and function
making use of appropriate materials tools and techniques
providing evidence of an understanding of spatial qualities
composition rhythm scale and structure
providing evidence of the use of safe working practices
In Year 10 students will design and make a variety of projects such as a Spice rack Toy Car
and a Hand Trowel using a variety of machines and materials They will gain knowledge and
skills in manufacturing techniques production methods and the design process They will be
able to design products on the computer (CAD) and then cut them out on the new CAM
machine
Assessment
This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home is
presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks There is
also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the marks
Career Progression
Students can continue onto the A Level Product design course at Chessington‟s 6th Form
Alternatively they could pursue a career in an Engineering discipline Construction Product
Design or Architecture
20|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ART (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
All students choosing Art and Design as their option are required to
take the unendorsed examination This allows them to produce
work using a number of different techniques which have been listed
below
Painting and drawing
Graphics
Sculptureconstruction
Photography
Printmaking
A foundation course which gives students experience of all of
these is run during the first two terms
Painting and Drawing
The Painting and Drawing course is structured to enable students
regardless of their ability to build on the skills and techniques
they have learned in their first three years at school and at the same time prepare for a GCSE
examination
Programmes of work will largely be determined by the demands of the examination syllabus
but every effort will be made to structure the course so that it meets the needs of the students
whilst taking into account their wide range of abilities
The Painting and Drawing disciplines will form the basis for most practical activities but
students will be encouraged to experiment with and use as broad a range of approaches as
possible in the preparation and production of coursework
3 Dimensional Studies (Sculpture)
The course is designed to develop the student‟s visual awareness sensitivity and understanding
of the work of Artists involving three dimensions in a contemporary and historical context
Students will be encouraged to develop ideas in preliminary studies through research and
experimentation observational recording and analysis of forms and to produce work in the
form of modelling carving casting construction and assembling The important relationships
between urbanrural landscapes communities and cultures will also be studied as will the
interaction of solid and void forms and shape pattern decoration colour texture scale
structure proportion rhythm movement and the effects of light upon three dimensional
objects
Page|21 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ART (GCSE) continued
Exam Board AQA
Printmaking
Students will be able to experiment with a number of simple methods for producing a printed
image Some of the following will be introduced when appropriate
Lino printing
Card printing
Monoprinting
Polystyrene sheet printing
Screen printing
Assessment
Art and Design requires students to carry out and complete work in their own time in school
and at home Preparation and research are an essential element of the course and the use of
sketchbooks when preparing work is encouraged
Coursework will account for 60 of the marks and externally set assignment will account for
40 of the marks
Visits
Students are encouraged to take part in all visits to Museums Galleries and Exhibitions where
the work on display is considered helpful in supporting coursework studies
Career Progression
Fashion Designer Interior Designer Costume Designer Artist Architect Cartoonist Textile
Designer Model Maker etc
22|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CATERING (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
This single GCSE course is a vocational qualification that is
suitable for those students who have an interest in the Catering
Industry and want a broad background in this area It would
also be a good foundation for those who wish to progress to
further education It will offer valuable preparation for students
who may want to enter the many careers in the Food Industry
Students must have a real interest in food and enjoy cooking
They must be prepared to work hard in order to reach a high
standard of presentation in their practical work
Course Information
Students who take the GCSE Catering course will learn about and demonstrate their
knowledge and understanding of the following areas of study
The industry ndash types of establishments that serve food and drink
Job roles employment opportunities and relevant training
Health safety and hygiene
Food preparation cooking and presentation
Nutrition and menu planning
Costing and portion control
Specialist equipment both small and large scale
Communication and record keeping
Environmental considerations
Students will be expected to supply their own ingredients for practical sessions that will include
the selection storage preparation and serving of
Students will also be expected to purchase a white chef‟s jacket from the College which they
must wear to all practical sessions
Meat and poultry Convenience products
Fish Sauces
Eggs Basic dough products
Dairy products Basic pastry products
Cereals flour rice pasta Cakes sponges and scones
Vegetables and fruit
Page|23 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CATERING (GCSE) continued
Exam Board WJEC
Assessment
Visits
It is hoped that there will be some visits to local restaurants and a catering college Chefs may visit
some lessons to give demonstrations or work with students in practical lessons
Career Progression
Sous Chef Cake Decorator Junior Kitchen Assistant WaitressWaiter Nutritionist Dietician Food
Technologist Baker etc
60 of the final grade will come from 2
practical tasks where students must show
catering skills related to food preparation and
service
Each task must be accompanied by a folder
of notes that cover the investigation planning
and evaluation of the task
Task 1 (15 hours) will take place in Year 10
Task 2 (30 hours) will take place in Year 11
40 of the final grade will come from a
written examination paper (1 frac14 hours) on
Catering food and the customer
This will be taken at the end of Year 11
24|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CERTIFICATE IN CONSTRUCTION
Exam Board CITY amp GUILDS
This course is ideal for all students who are considering
a career in any part of the construction or building
industry It is of benefit weather they are considering a
craft or management position
Course Information
Students study for six periods a week and in the first
year concentrate on basic building skills
Carpentry
Electrics
Plumbing
Bricklaying
Health and safety
Site management
This is done through the City and Guilds Introductory Certificate in Basic Construction Skills in which
eight practical tasks must be passed and one theoretical on line test
The second year allows students to develop along their chosen path either developing their craft
skills or moving towards a professional career via the Diplomas in Construction and the Built
Environment This would be an ideal path for those considering a career in
Building management
Architecture
Town planning
Surveying
Engineering
Building control
Environmentalist
Landscape Architecture
Those students not considering a professional career would expand their skills in chosen areas
through further City and Guilds qualifications
Page|25 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 FIRST CERTIFICATE IN PERFORMING ARTS DANCE
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Students will look at FIVE different units in order to achieve a
qualification on this course
The most appropriate units can be selected according to
the individual needs of each group from the following list
Performing Dance
The Development of Dance
Working in the Performing Arts Industry
Professional Development in the Performing Arts
Industry
Understanding Dance
Contemporary Dance
Jazz Dance
Musical Theatre
Makeup for Performers
There is a significant emphasis on Choreographic and
performance skills throughout each unit and students will
be expected to
Learn set dances
Learn dance vocabulary
Choreograph solo duo and small group dances
Improve their performance and technical skills
Perform in front of their peers and a broader based audience
See professionals at work
Write reviews of works
Study the effect of costume set design and props
Look at the cultural and historical context of dances they view
The course is internally assessed throughout by the teacher and students are informally
assessed during every lesson Students will also be assessed more formally through
Assignments which meet the criteria for each Unit These are marked by the teacher and
internally verified by another specialist teacher to ensure that they are of the highest quality
Students opting for this course must understand that to achieve a good grade at BTEC they
have to have a love of making up (choreographing) and performing dances to others They
must also have some basic dance ability such as being able to move in time with the music
Students will need to work in bare feet for much of this course
Students who enjoy all aspects of dance and movement and have the confidence to perform
to a small audience will be well suited to this course Students will be expected to work in their
own time after school to perfect their dances and complete Assignment briefs They should
also be happy to work in a range of different dance styles and not just one particular style
26|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
DRAMA (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
GCSE Drama is an exciting and practical course which offers opportunities to become a skilled
and confident performer
The course aims to encourage students to develop
an interest in and understanding of a range of
drama and theatre experiences
increased self and group awareness
imaginative creative communication and
social skills
a love and appreciation of attending a range of
live theatre experiences
The course consists of two parts
Coursework 60
Two of the following options only one of which may be a technicaldesign skill
Devised thematic work for performance to an audience
Acting
Improvisation
Theatre in Education presentation
Dancedrama
Set
Costume
Make-up
Properties
Masks
Puppets
Lighting
Sound
Stage management
Each option is assessed through two parts
Part One A mark awarded for group and communication skills
Part Two A mark awarded for the final performance
Written Paper 40
2 hours
A choice of any two questions based on the following sections
A Set play bdquoAnimal Farm‟
B Response to live productions seen during the course
Page|27 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ETHICS (GCSE)
Exam Board OCR
The bdquoPhilosophy and Ethics‟ GCSE will allow students to explore the fundamental questions
about life and existence encourage their personal social and cultural development and
enhance their understanding of different cultures and belief systems
Over the course of the two years students will study important and thought-provoking issues
such as the nature and existence of God good and evil and the conflict between religion
and science relationships poverty and medical ethics peace and justice and the role of the
media in today‟s world It is a broad satisfying and worthwhile course of study designed to
challenge and stimulate students and equip them with the necessary skills to lead constructive
and thoughtful lives in the modern world
28|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
FILM STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
ldquoThe secret to film is that its an illusionrdquo
George Lucas Director of Star Wars
This course is ideal for any student who is
Able to work independently or as part of a team
Creative and practical but also analytical
Enthusiastic about films
Interested in making their own short films
Over the two years students will
Plan storyboard film and edit a short film working in a small
group adding their own music and special effects
Understand how films are made and promoted
Learn about the business of making films
Make a close study of one genre of Hollywood films (currently Disaster Films)
Closely research and study at least two different non-Hollywood Films (made in Britain
Europe or Africa)
Prepare their own film promotion campaign
Write an in-depth analysis of films of their choice
Assessment is through
A portfolio of coursework and also
Two end of course examinations
Although it is a new course Film Studies is already a popular choice for many students
combining well with the Media study in English as well as Media
Studies itself Film Studies is increasingly well
thought of by many colleges as it combines
a practical creative approach with
analytical skills
From Citizen Kane to Inception
Page|29 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
FRENCH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
The course outline for French is similar to Spanish It is not compulsory to have previous
knowledge of the language before starting the course but you need to be aware that it will
be more challenging for you and you need to put in a lot of effort to succeed However it is
not at all impossible
30|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GEOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Geography is a fascinating and wide-reaching subject and it has been shown that students
with Geography qualifications are some of the most employable
Why you should take Geography GCSE
It provides you with an understanding of global issues which will affect our lives now and
in the future
By the end of their GCSE you will have a better understanding of the way the world
works
Geography is a good link between the arts and sciences so it will help you in their other
subjects
You will understand how physical landscapes (eg rivers coasts mountains) are formed
You will be allowed to express opinions about people and places
Geography includes a range of academic skills that you will use in your future studies
Skills gained from Geography include
How to research and to investigate
Problem solving
Real world numeracy
How to collect record present and analyse data
Map reading
Creative thinking
How to write in an essay style and in a scientific style
Empathy and understanding of others
Topics of study will include
How are natural landscapes formed and how can we manage
them
What causes and how can we manage natural hazards
How do weather and climate work
How can we manage population around the world
How do towns and cities expand and how are they managed
How and why are some places rich whilst others are poor
How can we ensure development of global resources is sustainable
Page|31 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board AQA
Career Links (As printed by the Royal Geographical Society)
How is the course assessed
GCSE Geography is assessed by two written Examinations (75) and by Coursework (25) in
the form of a Controlled Assessment
Fieldwork at the South Coast and elsewhere is an essential part of this course
Travel and tourist industry
Travel Guide Researcher
Property Researcher
Lawyers
Senior Researcher for County
Council
Government Statistician
TV Locations Unit
Business Consultants
Planners
32|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GRAPHICS (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
If you are interested in the world of advertising like
developing logos and posters always have an interest in
the covers of DVDs books amp games and really enjoy
making products then this is the course for you
Course Information
A large part of the course is a practical investigation
into the techniques and materials used in the
advertising and packaging we see around us every
day
Students will develop skills in drawing both free hand and using computer aided design
model making printing techniques logo designing greetings card and popup book
design and build up skills to design DVD covers labels and posters
To be able to present this to an industrial standard students will use desktop publishing
software such as GIMP (a variation of Photoshop) and computer aided design packages
such as Google Sketchup 2D Design and Fireworks They will get the chance to use the
new computer aided manufacturing milling machine to design and make work like
models signs and games
Assessment
Students will complete a major project and portfolio that counts towards 60 of the overall
GCSE grade Previous projects have included creating a popup book producing
promotional material for the Olympics designing the identity and packaging for a new band
and making a travel game for children
Externally set assignment by the Exam board will account for 40 The typical brief might look
like this
A leading perfumeaftershave manufacturer are aware that the environment is a
current issue The general public are concerned about so want an environmentally
friendly perfumeaftershave bottle and packaging designed to meet the current
market needs You are to design and make a model bottle including the packaging
Career Progression
Or anything in the creative industries
Graphic designer Work in advertising Web designer
Architect Product designer Set designer
Computer game designer Window dresser Magazine editor
Fashion designer Comic book creator Book illustrator
Artist
Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a
range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme
conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)
Content
Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated
situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a
portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are
required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key
skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam
They will study the following subjects at Level 1
Shampoo and condition hair
Blow drying
Contribute to performing and colouring process
Contribute to the development of effective working
relationships
Support the health and safety of the salon
Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas
Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is
complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and
seminars
All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical
assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress
How will they be assessed
They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical
assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on
progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered
individually at different stages throughout the course
There are four areas of assessment
Practical They carry out the skill
Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill
Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit
Online tests
Progression
They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such
as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme
34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and
opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal
subject for you
You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability
to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely
untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills
What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for
History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities
alike It is particularly useful for the following careers
Course Information
The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills
covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of
these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in
the classroom
Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams
almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students
maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two
year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work
Each of the following units is worth 25
Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations
Key topics
bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56
bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)
bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991
Law
Journalism
Television production and research
Advertising
Research
Marketing
Business Management
Accountancy
Archaeology
Museum work
Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939
Key Topics
bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939
bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Holocaust
Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970
Key topics
bull McCarthyism and the Red scare
bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King
bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies
bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)
Representations of History
CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990
36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT
Exam Board OCR
The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-
requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres
and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the
recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students
education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and
employers
Course Information
The course aims to develop
Problem-solving skills through the practical real life
application of ICT to complex problems
The ability to analyse appraise and make critical
judgements about the use of ICT systems
An awareness of the role of ICT in the management
manipulation and dissemination of information
Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with
others
The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and
competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist
tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final
student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms
of ICT problem solving and project management
There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been
completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer
Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc
Assessment
Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two
GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟
equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE
In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students
must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two
mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2
Diploma
Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become
increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics
magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such
as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students
to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages
we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as
they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of
audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-
world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very
relevant and very challenging
Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different
forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is
a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in
a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also
able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in
an organised way
Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to
looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as
bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns
constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe
Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied
interesting and highly rewarding
Coursework
The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall
assessment of the course Students produce three assignments
for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical
Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment
Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical
Production and Evaluation
Assessment
This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is
undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for
the qualification
Recent topics for the examination have included
Soap opera Quiz shows
Action Films The Popular Press
Music magazines
38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning
The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist
learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering
Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills
The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to
broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students
who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical
career within the sector
Progression
The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate
(VRQ) in the appropriate career route
Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using
the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship
framework) in the appropriate route
Potential Job Opportunities
Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder
Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician
Assessment Methods
Multiple Choice Examination
Oral Examination
Portfolio of Evidence
Practical Demonstration Assignment
Practical Examination
Task-based Controlled Assessment
Written Examination
Overall Assessment Method
Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit
The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the
learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test
results
Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing
and ListeningAppraising
Performing (30)
Students perform music throughout the course The two best
recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and
one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any
type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour
time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during
that period
For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental
vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)
a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc
For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an
improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing
a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording
Composing (30)
Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the
exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must
come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed
to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material
to make a new piece out of the old one
ListeningAppraising (40)
Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a
series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final
question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music
played in the exam hall
Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam
The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are
Western Classical Music 1600-1899
Music in the 20th Century
Popular Music in Context
World Music
40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching
research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic
Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not
required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music
classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C
grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas
There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some
they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is
hard work but its good fun too
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC
(EDEXCEL)
The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used
by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the
BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire
assessment is coursework based
Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)
Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the
Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a
portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of
A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links
with others
The Performer‟s role
Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer
Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)
Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students
the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the
equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own
recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves
A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)
including costs
A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it
safely
Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording
techniques
Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what
they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating
various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is
designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to
work in the Music Industry
This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic
Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will
spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software
and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs
The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both
exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both
qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)
Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as
individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily
being assessed on everything at the end of the course
A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction
grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up
with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx
42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will
learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer
software
You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white
photographs
Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based
photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-
journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new
media practice
Assessment
This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home
is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks
There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the
marks
Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SPANISH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
All students have the choice to continue
with Spanish which they have been
studying since Year 7 It would be a wise
choice to continue with Spanish as the
ability to speak a second language is not
only useful but is advantageous in
today‟s world Our closer connection
with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even
a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers
Course Information
The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based
on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage
Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to
communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding
Topics covered are
Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo
Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink
Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo
Free time shopping money new technology sports media
Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo
Home local area and the environment
Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo
School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs
Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and
listening at the end of Year 11
44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2
Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with
the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to
vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport
The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a
range of skills and techniques personal qualities and
attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter
the workplace
Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study
1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction
The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge
and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in
instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning
and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills
2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities
The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire
motivate and improve the performance of a selected target
group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It
encourages students to work in a team situation to organise
plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement
3 Injury in Sport
The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and
their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will
enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries
4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport
The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in
the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and
enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people
(Units to be studied are subject to change)
Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TEXTILES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of
textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The
students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following
areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction
applied textiles and embellished textiles
Assessment and Coursework Balance
In their first year the students will be required to produce two
extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will
follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The
students will work from first hand observations collecting and
developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and
textiles based techniques From this research and developmental
stage students will design and produce a final piece
During the second year students will begin by completing an
extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an
externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted
will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment
will account for 40
The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual
style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they
learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a
more personal response to a theme
Visits
Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources
such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second
year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within
the industry today
Why choose Textiles
Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more
confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level
course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles
The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range
of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior
design styling textiles design and costume design
46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)
Exam Board AQA
Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology
Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three
subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three
separate GCSEs
What are the differences between Triple Science and other
science GCSEs
This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will
be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of
the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award
What are the advantages of studying Triple Science
The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into
bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for
bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge
Who should consider taking Triple Science
Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope
with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a
related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those
students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this
course
The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school
GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics
Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25
Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25
Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25
Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25
Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS
2012 - 2014
Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4
option subjects
Please note
We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If
through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we
cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course
Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012
Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012
Make a record of your choice on the table below before
handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the
Options Information Evening
SUBJECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
Mo
st
De
sire
d
3D Design
Art
Catering
Construction
Dance
Drama
Ethics
Film Studies
French
Geography
Graphics
Hairdressing
History
ICT
Media Studies
Motor Vehicle
Music
Spanish
(Diploma) Sport
Textiles
Triple Sciences
Please tick if you would like to be
considered to do EBacc Please
remember that you need to
include Geography or History and
French or Spanish as your subject
options
Chessington Community College
Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS
Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603
wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk
![Page 14: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a](https://reader035.vdocument.in/reader035/viewer/2022062413/5a76533a7f8b9aa3618d22a0/html5/thumbnails/14.jpg)
Page|15 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN SPORT
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The BTEC Level 2 Extended Certificate offers flexibility and a choice of emphasis through the
optional units It is broadly equivalent to two GCSEs
The course provides students with the opportunity to enter employment in the sport and active
leisure sector or to progress to vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel BTEC Level 3
qualifications in Sport and Sport and Exercise Sciences
The course also gives students the opportunity to develop a range of skills and techniques
personal qualities and attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter the
workplace
1 Fitness Testing and Training
This unit gives students the opportunity to explore the essential fitness requirements and training
methods used to achieve successful sports performance They learn how to accurately
conduct fitness and health tests and use key skills to compare the results against national
standards
2 Practical Sport
The aim of this unit is to develop students‟ knowledge of the rules skills and techniques for one
team and one individual sport through practical application Students will develop their
assessment skills as they observe each other perform and communicate effectively to improve
personal performance
3 Anatomy amp Physiology for Sport
The aim of this unit is to give students a good understanding of the structure and function of
the skeletal muscular cardiovascular and respiratory systems of the human body This will help
students to gain a better idea of how their body works so that they can stay healthy
4 Development of Personal Fitness
This unit can prove invaluable to students who wish to stay fit and healthy in the future
Students learn how to get fit by actively working and developing their training skills so that they
can progess their fitness to higher levels
5 Effects of Exercise on the Body Systems
This unit again develops the students‟ awareness of how all systems of their body respond to
exercise Students learn about the great health benefits which can be achieved
(Units to be studied are subject to change)
THE
OPTIONAL
CURRICULUM
Page|19 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
3 DIMENSIONAL DESIGN (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
If you enjoyed designing and making products in the Design amp Technology workshops during
Years 789 and would like to continue making more complex and detailed products
Course Information
Students will be expected to demonstrate skills and
techniques in the context of their chosen area(s) of study
within Three-Dimensional Design
making appropriate use of colour line tone texture
shape and form decoration scale and proportion
using different approaches to recording images such
as observation analysis expression and imagination
showing in their work the ability to respond to an idea concept
issue theme or brief investigating different ways of working as
appropriate to their chosen area(s) of study within Three-
Dimensional Design showing understanding of the relationship of
form and function
making use of appropriate materials tools and techniques
providing evidence of an understanding of spatial qualities
composition rhythm scale and structure
providing evidence of the use of safe working practices
In Year 10 students will design and make a variety of projects such as a Spice rack Toy Car
and a Hand Trowel using a variety of machines and materials They will gain knowledge and
skills in manufacturing techniques production methods and the design process They will be
able to design products on the computer (CAD) and then cut them out on the new CAM
machine
Assessment
This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home is
presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks There is
also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the marks
Career Progression
Students can continue onto the A Level Product design course at Chessington‟s 6th Form
Alternatively they could pursue a career in an Engineering discipline Construction Product
Design or Architecture
20|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ART (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
All students choosing Art and Design as their option are required to
take the unendorsed examination This allows them to produce
work using a number of different techniques which have been listed
below
Painting and drawing
Graphics
Sculptureconstruction
Photography
Printmaking
A foundation course which gives students experience of all of
these is run during the first two terms
Painting and Drawing
The Painting and Drawing course is structured to enable students
regardless of their ability to build on the skills and techniques
they have learned in their first three years at school and at the same time prepare for a GCSE
examination
Programmes of work will largely be determined by the demands of the examination syllabus
but every effort will be made to structure the course so that it meets the needs of the students
whilst taking into account their wide range of abilities
The Painting and Drawing disciplines will form the basis for most practical activities but
students will be encouraged to experiment with and use as broad a range of approaches as
possible in the preparation and production of coursework
3 Dimensional Studies (Sculpture)
The course is designed to develop the student‟s visual awareness sensitivity and understanding
of the work of Artists involving three dimensions in a contemporary and historical context
Students will be encouraged to develop ideas in preliminary studies through research and
experimentation observational recording and analysis of forms and to produce work in the
form of modelling carving casting construction and assembling The important relationships
between urbanrural landscapes communities and cultures will also be studied as will the
interaction of solid and void forms and shape pattern decoration colour texture scale
structure proportion rhythm movement and the effects of light upon three dimensional
objects
Page|21 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ART (GCSE) continued
Exam Board AQA
Printmaking
Students will be able to experiment with a number of simple methods for producing a printed
image Some of the following will be introduced when appropriate
Lino printing
Card printing
Monoprinting
Polystyrene sheet printing
Screen printing
Assessment
Art and Design requires students to carry out and complete work in their own time in school
and at home Preparation and research are an essential element of the course and the use of
sketchbooks when preparing work is encouraged
Coursework will account for 60 of the marks and externally set assignment will account for
40 of the marks
Visits
Students are encouraged to take part in all visits to Museums Galleries and Exhibitions where
the work on display is considered helpful in supporting coursework studies
Career Progression
Fashion Designer Interior Designer Costume Designer Artist Architect Cartoonist Textile
Designer Model Maker etc
22|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CATERING (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
This single GCSE course is a vocational qualification that is
suitable for those students who have an interest in the Catering
Industry and want a broad background in this area It would
also be a good foundation for those who wish to progress to
further education It will offer valuable preparation for students
who may want to enter the many careers in the Food Industry
Students must have a real interest in food and enjoy cooking
They must be prepared to work hard in order to reach a high
standard of presentation in their practical work
Course Information
Students who take the GCSE Catering course will learn about and demonstrate their
knowledge and understanding of the following areas of study
The industry ndash types of establishments that serve food and drink
Job roles employment opportunities and relevant training
Health safety and hygiene
Food preparation cooking and presentation
Nutrition and menu planning
Costing and portion control
Specialist equipment both small and large scale
Communication and record keeping
Environmental considerations
Students will be expected to supply their own ingredients for practical sessions that will include
the selection storage preparation and serving of
Students will also be expected to purchase a white chef‟s jacket from the College which they
must wear to all practical sessions
Meat and poultry Convenience products
Fish Sauces
Eggs Basic dough products
Dairy products Basic pastry products
Cereals flour rice pasta Cakes sponges and scones
Vegetables and fruit
Page|23 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CATERING (GCSE) continued
Exam Board WJEC
Assessment
Visits
It is hoped that there will be some visits to local restaurants and a catering college Chefs may visit
some lessons to give demonstrations or work with students in practical lessons
Career Progression
Sous Chef Cake Decorator Junior Kitchen Assistant WaitressWaiter Nutritionist Dietician Food
Technologist Baker etc
60 of the final grade will come from 2
practical tasks where students must show
catering skills related to food preparation and
service
Each task must be accompanied by a folder
of notes that cover the investigation planning
and evaluation of the task
Task 1 (15 hours) will take place in Year 10
Task 2 (30 hours) will take place in Year 11
40 of the final grade will come from a
written examination paper (1 frac14 hours) on
Catering food and the customer
This will be taken at the end of Year 11
24|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CERTIFICATE IN CONSTRUCTION
Exam Board CITY amp GUILDS
This course is ideal for all students who are considering
a career in any part of the construction or building
industry It is of benefit weather they are considering a
craft or management position
Course Information
Students study for six periods a week and in the first
year concentrate on basic building skills
Carpentry
Electrics
Plumbing
Bricklaying
Health and safety
Site management
This is done through the City and Guilds Introductory Certificate in Basic Construction Skills in which
eight practical tasks must be passed and one theoretical on line test
The second year allows students to develop along their chosen path either developing their craft
skills or moving towards a professional career via the Diplomas in Construction and the Built
Environment This would be an ideal path for those considering a career in
Building management
Architecture
Town planning
Surveying
Engineering
Building control
Environmentalist
Landscape Architecture
Those students not considering a professional career would expand their skills in chosen areas
through further City and Guilds qualifications
Page|25 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 FIRST CERTIFICATE IN PERFORMING ARTS DANCE
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Students will look at FIVE different units in order to achieve a
qualification on this course
The most appropriate units can be selected according to
the individual needs of each group from the following list
Performing Dance
The Development of Dance
Working in the Performing Arts Industry
Professional Development in the Performing Arts
Industry
Understanding Dance
Contemporary Dance
Jazz Dance
Musical Theatre
Makeup for Performers
There is a significant emphasis on Choreographic and
performance skills throughout each unit and students will
be expected to
Learn set dances
Learn dance vocabulary
Choreograph solo duo and small group dances
Improve their performance and technical skills
Perform in front of their peers and a broader based audience
See professionals at work
Write reviews of works
Study the effect of costume set design and props
Look at the cultural and historical context of dances they view
The course is internally assessed throughout by the teacher and students are informally
assessed during every lesson Students will also be assessed more formally through
Assignments which meet the criteria for each Unit These are marked by the teacher and
internally verified by another specialist teacher to ensure that they are of the highest quality
Students opting for this course must understand that to achieve a good grade at BTEC they
have to have a love of making up (choreographing) and performing dances to others They
must also have some basic dance ability such as being able to move in time with the music
Students will need to work in bare feet for much of this course
Students who enjoy all aspects of dance and movement and have the confidence to perform
to a small audience will be well suited to this course Students will be expected to work in their
own time after school to perfect their dances and complete Assignment briefs They should
also be happy to work in a range of different dance styles and not just one particular style
26|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
DRAMA (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
GCSE Drama is an exciting and practical course which offers opportunities to become a skilled
and confident performer
The course aims to encourage students to develop
an interest in and understanding of a range of
drama and theatre experiences
increased self and group awareness
imaginative creative communication and
social skills
a love and appreciation of attending a range of
live theatre experiences
The course consists of two parts
Coursework 60
Two of the following options only one of which may be a technicaldesign skill
Devised thematic work for performance to an audience
Acting
Improvisation
Theatre in Education presentation
Dancedrama
Set
Costume
Make-up
Properties
Masks
Puppets
Lighting
Sound
Stage management
Each option is assessed through two parts
Part One A mark awarded for group and communication skills
Part Two A mark awarded for the final performance
Written Paper 40
2 hours
A choice of any two questions based on the following sections
A Set play bdquoAnimal Farm‟
B Response to live productions seen during the course
Page|27 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ETHICS (GCSE)
Exam Board OCR
The bdquoPhilosophy and Ethics‟ GCSE will allow students to explore the fundamental questions
about life and existence encourage their personal social and cultural development and
enhance their understanding of different cultures and belief systems
Over the course of the two years students will study important and thought-provoking issues
such as the nature and existence of God good and evil and the conflict between religion
and science relationships poverty and medical ethics peace and justice and the role of the
media in today‟s world It is a broad satisfying and worthwhile course of study designed to
challenge and stimulate students and equip them with the necessary skills to lead constructive
and thoughtful lives in the modern world
28|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
FILM STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
ldquoThe secret to film is that its an illusionrdquo
George Lucas Director of Star Wars
This course is ideal for any student who is
Able to work independently or as part of a team
Creative and practical but also analytical
Enthusiastic about films
Interested in making their own short films
Over the two years students will
Plan storyboard film and edit a short film working in a small
group adding their own music and special effects
Understand how films are made and promoted
Learn about the business of making films
Make a close study of one genre of Hollywood films (currently Disaster Films)
Closely research and study at least two different non-Hollywood Films (made in Britain
Europe or Africa)
Prepare their own film promotion campaign
Write an in-depth analysis of films of their choice
Assessment is through
A portfolio of coursework and also
Two end of course examinations
Although it is a new course Film Studies is already a popular choice for many students
combining well with the Media study in English as well as Media
Studies itself Film Studies is increasingly well
thought of by many colleges as it combines
a practical creative approach with
analytical skills
From Citizen Kane to Inception
Page|29 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
FRENCH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
The course outline for French is similar to Spanish It is not compulsory to have previous
knowledge of the language before starting the course but you need to be aware that it will
be more challenging for you and you need to put in a lot of effort to succeed However it is
not at all impossible
30|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GEOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Geography is a fascinating and wide-reaching subject and it has been shown that students
with Geography qualifications are some of the most employable
Why you should take Geography GCSE
It provides you with an understanding of global issues which will affect our lives now and
in the future
By the end of their GCSE you will have a better understanding of the way the world
works
Geography is a good link between the arts and sciences so it will help you in their other
subjects
You will understand how physical landscapes (eg rivers coasts mountains) are formed
You will be allowed to express opinions about people and places
Geography includes a range of academic skills that you will use in your future studies
Skills gained from Geography include
How to research and to investigate
Problem solving
Real world numeracy
How to collect record present and analyse data
Map reading
Creative thinking
How to write in an essay style and in a scientific style
Empathy and understanding of others
Topics of study will include
How are natural landscapes formed and how can we manage
them
What causes and how can we manage natural hazards
How do weather and climate work
How can we manage population around the world
How do towns and cities expand and how are they managed
How and why are some places rich whilst others are poor
How can we ensure development of global resources is sustainable
Page|31 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board AQA
Career Links (As printed by the Royal Geographical Society)
How is the course assessed
GCSE Geography is assessed by two written Examinations (75) and by Coursework (25) in
the form of a Controlled Assessment
Fieldwork at the South Coast and elsewhere is an essential part of this course
Travel and tourist industry
Travel Guide Researcher
Property Researcher
Lawyers
Senior Researcher for County
Council
Government Statistician
TV Locations Unit
Business Consultants
Planners
32|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GRAPHICS (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
If you are interested in the world of advertising like
developing logos and posters always have an interest in
the covers of DVDs books amp games and really enjoy
making products then this is the course for you
Course Information
A large part of the course is a practical investigation
into the techniques and materials used in the
advertising and packaging we see around us every
day
Students will develop skills in drawing both free hand and using computer aided design
model making printing techniques logo designing greetings card and popup book
design and build up skills to design DVD covers labels and posters
To be able to present this to an industrial standard students will use desktop publishing
software such as GIMP (a variation of Photoshop) and computer aided design packages
such as Google Sketchup 2D Design and Fireworks They will get the chance to use the
new computer aided manufacturing milling machine to design and make work like
models signs and games
Assessment
Students will complete a major project and portfolio that counts towards 60 of the overall
GCSE grade Previous projects have included creating a popup book producing
promotional material for the Olympics designing the identity and packaging for a new band
and making a travel game for children
Externally set assignment by the Exam board will account for 40 The typical brief might look
like this
A leading perfumeaftershave manufacturer are aware that the environment is a
current issue The general public are concerned about so want an environmentally
friendly perfumeaftershave bottle and packaging designed to meet the current
market needs You are to design and make a model bottle including the packaging
Career Progression
Or anything in the creative industries
Graphic designer Work in advertising Web designer
Architect Product designer Set designer
Computer game designer Window dresser Magazine editor
Fashion designer Comic book creator Book illustrator
Artist
Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a
range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme
conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)
Content
Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated
situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a
portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are
required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key
skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam
They will study the following subjects at Level 1
Shampoo and condition hair
Blow drying
Contribute to performing and colouring process
Contribute to the development of effective working
relationships
Support the health and safety of the salon
Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas
Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is
complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and
seminars
All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical
assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress
How will they be assessed
They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical
assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on
progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered
individually at different stages throughout the course
There are four areas of assessment
Practical They carry out the skill
Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill
Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit
Online tests
Progression
They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such
as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme
34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and
opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal
subject for you
You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability
to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely
untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills
What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for
History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities
alike It is particularly useful for the following careers
Course Information
The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills
covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of
these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in
the classroom
Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams
almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students
maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two
year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work
Each of the following units is worth 25
Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations
Key topics
bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56
bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)
bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991
Law
Journalism
Television production and research
Advertising
Research
Marketing
Business Management
Accountancy
Archaeology
Museum work
Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939
Key Topics
bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939
bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Holocaust
Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970
Key topics
bull McCarthyism and the Red scare
bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King
bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies
bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)
Representations of History
CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990
36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT
Exam Board OCR
The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-
requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres
and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the
recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students
education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and
employers
Course Information
The course aims to develop
Problem-solving skills through the practical real life
application of ICT to complex problems
The ability to analyse appraise and make critical
judgements about the use of ICT systems
An awareness of the role of ICT in the management
manipulation and dissemination of information
Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with
others
The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and
competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist
tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final
student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms
of ICT problem solving and project management
There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been
completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer
Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc
Assessment
Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two
GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟
equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE
In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students
must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two
mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2
Diploma
Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become
increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics
magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such
as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students
to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages
we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as
they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of
audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-
world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very
relevant and very challenging
Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different
forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is
a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in
a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also
able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in
an organised way
Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to
looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as
bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns
constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe
Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied
interesting and highly rewarding
Coursework
The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall
assessment of the course Students produce three assignments
for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical
Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment
Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical
Production and Evaluation
Assessment
This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is
undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for
the qualification
Recent topics for the examination have included
Soap opera Quiz shows
Action Films The Popular Press
Music magazines
38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning
The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist
learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering
Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills
The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to
broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students
who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical
career within the sector
Progression
The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate
(VRQ) in the appropriate career route
Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using
the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship
framework) in the appropriate route
Potential Job Opportunities
Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder
Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician
Assessment Methods
Multiple Choice Examination
Oral Examination
Portfolio of Evidence
Practical Demonstration Assignment
Practical Examination
Task-based Controlled Assessment
Written Examination
Overall Assessment Method
Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit
The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the
learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test
results
Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing
and ListeningAppraising
Performing (30)
Students perform music throughout the course The two best
recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and
one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any
type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour
time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during
that period
For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental
vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)
a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc
For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an
improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing
a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording
Composing (30)
Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the
exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must
come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed
to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material
to make a new piece out of the old one
ListeningAppraising (40)
Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a
series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final
question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music
played in the exam hall
Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam
The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are
Western Classical Music 1600-1899
Music in the 20th Century
Popular Music in Context
World Music
40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching
research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic
Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not
required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music
classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C
grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas
There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some
they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is
hard work but its good fun too
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC
(EDEXCEL)
The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used
by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the
BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire
assessment is coursework based
Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)
Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the
Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a
portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of
A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links
with others
The Performer‟s role
Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer
Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)
Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students
the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the
equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own
recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves
A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)
including costs
A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it
safely
Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording
techniques
Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what
they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating
various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is
designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to
work in the Music Industry
This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic
Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will
spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software
and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs
The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both
exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both
qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)
Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as
individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily
being assessed on everything at the end of the course
A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction
grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up
with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx
42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will
learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer
software
You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white
photographs
Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based
photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-
journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new
media practice
Assessment
This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home
is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks
There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the
marks
Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SPANISH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
All students have the choice to continue
with Spanish which they have been
studying since Year 7 It would be a wise
choice to continue with Spanish as the
ability to speak a second language is not
only useful but is advantageous in
today‟s world Our closer connection
with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even
a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers
Course Information
The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based
on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage
Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to
communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding
Topics covered are
Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo
Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink
Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo
Free time shopping money new technology sports media
Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo
Home local area and the environment
Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo
School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs
Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and
listening at the end of Year 11
44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2
Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with
the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to
vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport
The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a
range of skills and techniques personal qualities and
attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter
the workplace
Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study
1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction
The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge
and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in
instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning
and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills
2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities
The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire
motivate and improve the performance of a selected target
group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It
encourages students to work in a team situation to organise
plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement
3 Injury in Sport
The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and
their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will
enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries
4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport
The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in
the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and
enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people
(Units to be studied are subject to change)
Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TEXTILES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of
textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The
students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following
areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction
applied textiles and embellished textiles
Assessment and Coursework Balance
In their first year the students will be required to produce two
extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will
follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The
students will work from first hand observations collecting and
developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and
textiles based techniques From this research and developmental
stage students will design and produce a final piece
During the second year students will begin by completing an
extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an
externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted
will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment
will account for 40
The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual
style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they
learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a
more personal response to a theme
Visits
Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources
such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second
year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within
the industry today
Why choose Textiles
Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more
confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level
course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles
The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range
of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior
design styling textiles design and costume design
46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)
Exam Board AQA
Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology
Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three
subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three
separate GCSEs
What are the differences between Triple Science and other
science GCSEs
This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will
be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of
the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award
What are the advantages of studying Triple Science
The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into
bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for
bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge
Who should consider taking Triple Science
Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope
with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a
related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those
students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this
course
The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school
GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics
Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25
Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25
Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25
Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25
Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS
2012 - 2014
Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4
option subjects
Please note
We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If
through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we
cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course
Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012
Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012
Make a record of your choice on the table below before
handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the
Options Information Evening
SUBJECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
Mo
st
De
sire
d
3D Design
Art
Catering
Construction
Dance
Drama
Ethics
Film Studies
French
Geography
Graphics
Hairdressing
History
ICT
Media Studies
Motor Vehicle
Music
Spanish
(Diploma) Sport
Textiles
Triple Sciences
Please tick if you would like to be
considered to do EBacc Please
remember that you need to
include Geography or History and
French or Spanish as your subject
options
Chessington Community College
Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS
Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603
wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk
![Page 15: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a](https://reader035.vdocument.in/reader035/viewer/2022062413/5a76533a7f8b9aa3618d22a0/html5/thumbnails/15.jpg)
THE
OPTIONAL
CURRICULUM
Page|19 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
3 DIMENSIONAL DESIGN (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
If you enjoyed designing and making products in the Design amp Technology workshops during
Years 789 and would like to continue making more complex and detailed products
Course Information
Students will be expected to demonstrate skills and
techniques in the context of their chosen area(s) of study
within Three-Dimensional Design
making appropriate use of colour line tone texture
shape and form decoration scale and proportion
using different approaches to recording images such
as observation analysis expression and imagination
showing in their work the ability to respond to an idea concept
issue theme or brief investigating different ways of working as
appropriate to their chosen area(s) of study within Three-
Dimensional Design showing understanding of the relationship of
form and function
making use of appropriate materials tools and techniques
providing evidence of an understanding of spatial qualities
composition rhythm scale and structure
providing evidence of the use of safe working practices
In Year 10 students will design and make a variety of projects such as a Spice rack Toy Car
and a Hand Trowel using a variety of machines and materials They will gain knowledge and
skills in manufacturing techniques production methods and the design process They will be
able to design products on the computer (CAD) and then cut them out on the new CAM
machine
Assessment
This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home is
presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks There is
also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the marks
Career Progression
Students can continue onto the A Level Product design course at Chessington‟s 6th Form
Alternatively they could pursue a career in an Engineering discipline Construction Product
Design or Architecture
20|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ART (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
All students choosing Art and Design as their option are required to
take the unendorsed examination This allows them to produce
work using a number of different techniques which have been listed
below
Painting and drawing
Graphics
Sculptureconstruction
Photography
Printmaking
A foundation course which gives students experience of all of
these is run during the first two terms
Painting and Drawing
The Painting and Drawing course is structured to enable students
regardless of their ability to build on the skills and techniques
they have learned in their first three years at school and at the same time prepare for a GCSE
examination
Programmes of work will largely be determined by the demands of the examination syllabus
but every effort will be made to structure the course so that it meets the needs of the students
whilst taking into account their wide range of abilities
The Painting and Drawing disciplines will form the basis for most practical activities but
students will be encouraged to experiment with and use as broad a range of approaches as
possible in the preparation and production of coursework
3 Dimensional Studies (Sculpture)
The course is designed to develop the student‟s visual awareness sensitivity and understanding
of the work of Artists involving three dimensions in a contemporary and historical context
Students will be encouraged to develop ideas in preliminary studies through research and
experimentation observational recording and analysis of forms and to produce work in the
form of modelling carving casting construction and assembling The important relationships
between urbanrural landscapes communities and cultures will also be studied as will the
interaction of solid and void forms and shape pattern decoration colour texture scale
structure proportion rhythm movement and the effects of light upon three dimensional
objects
Page|21 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ART (GCSE) continued
Exam Board AQA
Printmaking
Students will be able to experiment with a number of simple methods for producing a printed
image Some of the following will be introduced when appropriate
Lino printing
Card printing
Monoprinting
Polystyrene sheet printing
Screen printing
Assessment
Art and Design requires students to carry out and complete work in their own time in school
and at home Preparation and research are an essential element of the course and the use of
sketchbooks when preparing work is encouraged
Coursework will account for 60 of the marks and externally set assignment will account for
40 of the marks
Visits
Students are encouraged to take part in all visits to Museums Galleries and Exhibitions where
the work on display is considered helpful in supporting coursework studies
Career Progression
Fashion Designer Interior Designer Costume Designer Artist Architect Cartoonist Textile
Designer Model Maker etc
22|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CATERING (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
This single GCSE course is a vocational qualification that is
suitable for those students who have an interest in the Catering
Industry and want a broad background in this area It would
also be a good foundation for those who wish to progress to
further education It will offer valuable preparation for students
who may want to enter the many careers in the Food Industry
Students must have a real interest in food and enjoy cooking
They must be prepared to work hard in order to reach a high
standard of presentation in their practical work
Course Information
Students who take the GCSE Catering course will learn about and demonstrate their
knowledge and understanding of the following areas of study
The industry ndash types of establishments that serve food and drink
Job roles employment opportunities and relevant training
Health safety and hygiene
Food preparation cooking and presentation
Nutrition and menu planning
Costing and portion control
Specialist equipment both small and large scale
Communication and record keeping
Environmental considerations
Students will be expected to supply their own ingredients for practical sessions that will include
the selection storage preparation and serving of
Students will also be expected to purchase a white chef‟s jacket from the College which they
must wear to all practical sessions
Meat and poultry Convenience products
Fish Sauces
Eggs Basic dough products
Dairy products Basic pastry products
Cereals flour rice pasta Cakes sponges and scones
Vegetables and fruit
Page|23 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CATERING (GCSE) continued
Exam Board WJEC
Assessment
Visits
It is hoped that there will be some visits to local restaurants and a catering college Chefs may visit
some lessons to give demonstrations or work with students in practical lessons
Career Progression
Sous Chef Cake Decorator Junior Kitchen Assistant WaitressWaiter Nutritionist Dietician Food
Technologist Baker etc
60 of the final grade will come from 2
practical tasks where students must show
catering skills related to food preparation and
service
Each task must be accompanied by a folder
of notes that cover the investigation planning
and evaluation of the task
Task 1 (15 hours) will take place in Year 10
Task 2 (30 hours) will take place in Year 11
40 of the final grade will come from a
written examination paper (1 frac14 hours) on
Catering food and the customer
This will be taken at the end of Year 11
24|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CERTIFICATE IN CONSTRUCTION
Exam Board CITY amp GUILDS
This course is ideal for all students who are considering
a career in any part of the construction or building
industry It is of benefit weather they are considering a
craft or management position
Course Information
Students study for six periods a week and in the first
year concentrate on basic building skills
Carpentry
Electrics
Plumbing
Bricklaying
Health and safety
Site management
This is done through the City and Guilds Introductory Certificate in Basic Construction Skills in which
eight practical tasks must be passed and one theoretical on line test
The second year allows students to develop along their chosen path either developing their craft
skills or moving towards a professional career via the Diplomas in Construction and the Built
Environment This would be an ideal path for those considering a career in
Building management
Architecture
Town planning
Surveying
Engineering
Building control
Environmentalist
Landscape Architecture
Those students not considering a professional career would expand their skills in chosen areas
through further City and Guilds qualifications
Page|25 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 FIRST CERTIFICATE IN PERFORMING ARTS DANCE
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Students will look at FIVE different units in order to achieve a
qualification on this course
The most appropriate units can be selected according to
the individual needs of each group from the following list
Performing Dance
The Development of Dance
Working in the Performing Arts Industry
Professional Development in the Performing Arts
Industry
Understanding Dance
Contemporary Dance
Jazz Dance
Musical Theatre
Makeup for Performers
There is a significant emphasis on Choreographic and
performance skills throughout each unit and students will
be expected to
Learn set dances
Learn dance vocabulary
Choreograph solo duo and small group dances
Improve their performance and technical skills
Perform in front of their peers and a broader based audience
See professionals at work
Write reviews of works
Study the effect of costume set design and props
Look at the cultural and historical context of dances they view
The course is internally assessed throughout by the teacher and students are informally
assessed during every lesson Students will also be assessed more formally through
Assignments which meet the criteria for each Unit These are marked by the teacher and
internally verified by another specialist teacher to ensure that they are of the highest quality
Students opting for this course must understand that to achieve a good grade at BTEC they
have to have a love of making up (choreographing) and performing dances to others They
must also have some basic dance ability such as being able to move in time with the music
Students will need to work in bare feet for much of this course
Students who enjoy all aspects of dance and movement and have the confidence to perform
to a small audience will be well suited to this course Students will be expected to work in their
own time after school to perfect their dances and complete Assignment briefs They should
also be happy to work in a range of different dance styles and not just one particular style
26|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
DRAMA (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
GCSE Drama is an exciting and practical course which offers opportunities to become a skilled
and confident performer
The course aims to encourage students to develop
an interest in and understanding of a range of
drama and theatre experiences
increased self and group awareness
imaginative creative communication and
social skills
a love and appreciation of attending a range of
live theatre experiences
The course consists of two parts
Coursework 60
Two of the following options only one of which may be a technicaldesign skill
Devised thematic work for performance to an audience
Acting
Improvisation
Theatre in Education presentation
Dancedrama
Set
Costume
Make-up
Properties
Masks
Puppets
Lighting
Sound
Stage management
Each option is assessed through two parts
Part One A mark awarded for group and communication skills
Part Two A mark awarded for the final performance
Written Paper 40
2 hours
A choice of any two questions based on the following sections
A Set play bdquoAnimal Farm‟
B Response to live productions seen during the course
Page|27 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ETHICS (GCSE)
Exam Board OCR
The bdquoPhilosophy and Ethics‟ GCSE will allow students to explore the fundamental questions
about life and existence encourage their personal social and cultural development and
enhance their understanding of different cultures and belief systems
Over the course of the two years students will study important and thought-provoking issues
such as the nature and existence of God good and evil and the conflict between religion
and science relationships poverty and medical ethics peace and justice and the role of the
media in today‟s world It is a broad satisfying and worthwhile course of study designed to
challenge and stimulate students and equip them with the necessary skills to lead constructive
and thoughtful lives in the modern world
28|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
FILM STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
ldquoThe secret to film is that its an illusionrdquo
George Lucas Director of Star Wars
This course is ideal for any student who is
Able to work independently or as part of a team
Creative and practical but also analytical
Enthusiastic about films
Interested in making their own short films
Over the two years students will
Plan storyboard film and edit a short film working in a small
group adding their own music and special effects
Understand how films are made and promoted
Learn about the business of making films
Make a close study of one genre of Hollywood films (currently Disaster Films)
Closely research and study at least two different non-Hollywood Films (made in Britain
Europe or Africa)
Prepare their own film promotion campaign
Write an in-depth analysis of films of their choice
Assessment is through
A portfolio of coursework and also
Two end of course examinations
Although it is a new course Film Studies is already a popular choice for many students
combining well with the Media study in English as well as Media
Studies itself Film Studies is increasingly well
thought of by many colleges as it combines
a practical creative approach with
analytical skills
From Citizen Kane to Inception
Page|29 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
FRENCH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
The course outline for French is similar to Spanish It is not compulsory to have previous
knowledge of the language before starting the course but you need to be aware that it will
be more challenging for you and you need to put in a lot of effort to succeed However it is
not at all impossible
30|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GEOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Geography is a fascinating and wide-reaching subject and it has been shown that students
with Geography qualifications are some of the most employable
Why you should take Geography GCSE
It provides you with an understanding of global issues which will affect our lives now and
in the future
By the end of their GCSE you will have a better understanding of the way the world
works
Geography is a good link between the arts and sciences so it will help you in their other
subjects
You will understand how physical landscapes (eg rivers coasts mountains) are formed
You will be allowed to express opinions about people and places
Geography includes a range of academic skills that you will use in your future studies
Skills gained from Geography include
How to research and to investigate
Problem solving
Real world numeracy
How to collect record present and analyse data
Map reading
Creative thinking
How to write in an essay style and in a scientific style
Empathy and understanding of others
Topics of study will include
How are natural landscapes formed and how can we manage
them
What causes and how can we manage natural hazards
How do weather and climate work
How can we manage population around the world
How do towns and cities expand and how are they managed
How and why are some places rich whilst others are poor
How can we ensure development of global resources is sustainable
Page|31 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board AQA
Career Links (As printed by the Royal Geographical Society)
How is the course assessed
GCSE Geography is assessed by two written Examinations (75) and by Coursework (25) in
the form of a Controlled Assessment
Fieldwork at the South Coast and elsewhere is an essential part of this course
Travel and tourist industry
Travel Guide Researcher
Property Researcher
Lawyers
Senior Researcher for County
Council
Government Statistician
TV Locations Unit
Business Consultants
Planners
32|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GRAPHICS (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
If you are interested in the world of advertising like
developing logos and posters always have an interest in
the covers of DVDs books amp games and really enjoy
making products then this is the course for you
Course Information
A large part of the course is a practical investigation
into the techniques and materials used in the
advertising and packaging we see around us every
day
Students will develop skills in drawing both free hand and using computer aided design
model making printing techniques logo designing greetings card and popup book
design and build up skills to design DVD covers labels and posters
To be able to present this to an industrial standard students will use desktop publishing
software such as GIMP (a variation of Photoshop) and computer aided design packages
such as Google Sketchup 2D Design and Fireworks They will get the chance to use the
new computer aided manufacturing milling machine to design and make work like
models signs and games
Assessment
Students will complete a major project and portfolio that counts towards 60 of the overall
GCSE grade Previous projects have included creating a popup book producing
promotional material for the Olympics designing the identity and packaging for a new band
and making a travel game for children
Externally set assignment by the Exam board will account for 40 The typical brief might look
like this
A leading perfumeaftershave manufacturer are aware that the environment is a
current issue The general public are concerned about so want an environmentally
friendly perfumeaftershave bottle and packaging designed to meet the current
market needs You are to design and make a model bottle including the packaging
Career Progression
Or anything in the creative industries
Graphic designer Work in advertising Web designer
Architect Product designer Set designer
Computer game designer Window dresser Magazine editor
Fashion designer Comic book creator Book illustrator
Artist
Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a
range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme
conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)
Content
Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated
situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a
portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are
required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key
skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam
They will study the following subjects at Level 1
Shampoo and condition hair
Blow drying
Contribute to performing and colouring process
Contribute to the development of effective working
relationships
Support the health and safety of the salon
Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas
Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is
complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and
seminars
All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical
assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress
How will they be assessed
They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical
assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on
progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered
individually at different stages throughout the course
There are four areas of assessment
Practical They carry out the skill
Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill
Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit
Online tests
Progression
They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such
as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme
34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and
opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal
subject for you
You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability
to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely
untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills
What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for
History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities
alike It is particularly useful for the following careers
Course Information
The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills
covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of
these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in
the classroom
Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams
almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students
maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two
year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work
Each of the following units is worth 25
Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations
Key topics
bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56
bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)
bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991
Law
Journalism
Television production and research
Advertising
Research
Marketing
Business Management
Accountancy
Archaeology
Museum work
Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939
Key Topics
bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939
bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Holocaust
Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970
Key topics
bull McCarthyism and the Red scare
bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King
bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies
bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)
Representations of History
CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990
36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT
Exam Board OCR
The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-
requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres
and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the
recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students
education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and
employers
Course Information
The course aims to develop
Problem-solving skills through the practical real life
application of ICT to complex problems
The ability to analyse appraise and make critical
judgements about the use of ICT systems
An awareness of the role of ICT in the management
manipulation and dissemination of information
Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with
others
The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and
competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist
tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final
student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms
of ICT problem solving and project management
There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been
completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer
Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc
Assessment
Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two
GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟
equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE
In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students
must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two
mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2
Diploma
Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become
increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics
magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such
as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students
to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages
we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as
they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of
audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-
world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very
relevant and very challenging
Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different
forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is
a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in
a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also
able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in
an organised way
Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to
looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as
bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns
constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe
Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied
interesting and highly rewarding
Coursework
The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall
assessment of the course Students produce three assignments
for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical
Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment
Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical
Production and Evaluation
Assessment
This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is
undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for
the qualification
Recent topics for the examination have included
Soap opera Quiz shows
Action Films The Popular Press
Music magazines
38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning
The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist
learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering
Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills
The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to
broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students
who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical
career within the sector
Progression
The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate
(VRQ) in the appropriate career route
Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using
the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship
framework) in the appropriate route
Potential Job Opportunities
Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder
Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician
Assessment Methods
Multiple Choice Examination
Oral Examination
Portfolio of Evidence
Practical Demonstration Assignment
Practical Examination
Task-based Controlled Assessment
Written Examination
Overall Assessment Method
Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit
The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the
learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test
results
Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing
and ListeningAppraising
Performing (30)
Students perform music throughout the course The two best
recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and
one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any
type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour
time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during
that period
For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental
vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)
a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc
For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an
improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing
a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording
Composing (30)
Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the
exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must
come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed
to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material
to make a new piece out of the old one
ListeningAppraising (40)
Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a
series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final
question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music
played in the exam hall
Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam
The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are
Western Classical Music 1600-1899
Music in the 20th Century
Popular Music in Context
World Music
40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching
research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic
Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not
required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music
classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C
grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas
There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some
they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is
hard work but its good fun too
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC
(EDEXCEL)
The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used
by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the
BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire
assessment is coursework based
Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)
Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the
Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a
portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of
A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links
with others
The Performer‟s role
Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer
Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)
Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students
the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the
equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own
recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves
A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)
including costs
A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it
safely
Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording
techniques
Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what
they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating
various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is
designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to
work in the Music Industry
This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic
Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will
spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software
and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs
The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both
exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both
qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)
Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as
individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily
being assessed on everything at the end of the course
A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction
grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up
with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx
42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will
learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer
software
You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white
photographs
Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based
photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-
journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new
media practice
Assessment
This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home
is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks
There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the
marks
Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SPANISH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
All students have the choice to continue
with Spanish which they have been
studying since Year 7 It would be a wise
choice to continue with Spanish as the
ability to speak a second language is not
only useful but is advantageous in
today‟s world Our closer connection
with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even
a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers
Course Information
The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based
on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage
Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to
communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding
Topics covered are
Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo
Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink
Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo
Free time shopping money new technology sports media
Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo
Home local area and the environment
Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo
School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs
Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and
listening at the end of Year 11
44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2
Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with
the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to
vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport
The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a
range of skills and techniques personal qualities and
attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter
the workplace
Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study
1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction
The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge
and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in
instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning
and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills
2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities
The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire
motivate and improve the performance of a selected target
group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It
encourages students to work in a team situation to organise
plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement
3 Injury in Sport
The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and
their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will
enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries
4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport
The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in
the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and
enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people
(Units to be studied are subject to change)
Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TEXTILES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of
textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The
students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following
areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction
applied textiles and embellished textiles
Assessment and Coursework Balance
In their first year the students will be required to produce two
extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will
follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The
students will work from first hand observations collecting and
developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and
textiles based techniques From this research and developmental
stage students will design and produce a final piece
During the second year students will begin by completing an
extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an
externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted
will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment
will account for 40
The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual
style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they
learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a
more personal response to a theme
Visits
Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources
such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second
year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within
the industry today
Why choose Textiles
Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more
confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level
course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles
The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range
of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior
design styling textiles design and costume design
46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)
Exam Board AQA
Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology
Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three
subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three
separate GCSEs
What are the differences between Triple Science and other
science GCSEs
This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will
be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of
the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award
What are the advantages of studying Triple Science
The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into
bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for
bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge
Who should consider taking Triple Science
Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope
with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a
related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those
students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this
course
The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school
GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics
Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25
Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25
Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25
Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25
Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS
2012 - 2014
Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4
option subjects
Please note
We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If
through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we
cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course
Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012
Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012
Make a record of your choice on the table below before
handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the
Options Information Evening
SUBJECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
Mo
st
De
sire
d
3D Design
Art
Catering
Construction
Dance
Drama
Ethics
Film Studies
French
Geography
Graphics
Hairdressing
History
ICT
Media Studies
Motor Vehicle
Music
Spanish
(Diploma) Sport
Textiles
Triple Sciences
Please tick if you would like to be
considered to do EBacc Please
remember that you need to
include Geography or History and
French or Spanish as your subject
options
Chessington Community College
Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS
Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603
wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk
![Page 16: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a](https://reader035.vdocument.in/reader035/viewer/2022062413/5a76533a7f8b9aa3618d22a0/html5/thumbnails/16.jpg)
Page|19 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
3 DIMENSIONAL DESIGN (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
If you enjoyed designing and making products in the Design amp Technology workshops during
Years 789 and would like to continue making more complex and detailed products
Course Information
Students will be expected to demonstrate skills and
techniques in the context of their chosen area(s) of study
within Three-Dimensional Design
making appropriate use of colour line tone texture
shape and form decoration scale and proportion
using different approaches to recording images such
as observation analysis expression and imagination
showing in their work the ability to respond to an idea concept
issue theme or brief investigating different ways of working as
appropriate to their chosen area(s) of study within Three-
Dimensional Design showing understanding of the relationship of
form and function
making use of appropriate materials tools and techniques
providing evidence of an understanding of spatial qualities
composition rhythm scale and structure
providing evidence of the use of safe working practices
In Year 10 students will design and make a variety of projects such as a Spice rack Toy Car
and a Hand Trowel using a variety of machines and materials They will gain knowledge and
skills in manufacturing techniques production methods and the design process They will be
able to design products on the computer (CAD) and then cut them out on the new CAM
machine
Assessment
This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home is
presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks There is
also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the marks
Career Progression
Students can continue onto the A Level Product design course at Chessington‟s 6th Form
Alternatively they could pursue a career in an Engineering discipline Construction Product
Design or Architecture
20|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ART (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
All students choosing Art and Design as their option are required to
take the unendorsed examination This allows them to produce
work using a number of different techniques which have been listed
below
Painting and drawing
Graphics
Sculptureconstruction
Photography
Printmaking
A foundation course which gives students experience of all of
these is run during the first two terms
Painting and Drawing
The Painting and Drawing course is structured to enable students
regardless of their ability to build on the skills and techniques
they have learned in their first three years at school and at the same time prepare for a GCSE
examination
Programmes of work will largely be determined by the demands of the examination syllabus
but every effort will be made to structure the course so that it meets the needs of the students
whilst taking into account their wide range of abilities
The Painting and Drawing disciplines will form the basis for most practical activities but
students will be encouraged to experiment with and use as broad a range of approaches as
possible in the preparation and production of coursework
3 Dimensional Studies (Sculpture)
The course is designed to develop the student‟s visual awareness sensitivity and understanding
of the work of Artists involving three dimensions in a contemporary and historical context
Students will be encouraged to develop ideas in preliminary studies through research and
experimentation observational recording and analysis of forms and to produce work in the
form of modelling carving casting construction and assembling The important relationships
between urbanrural landscapes communities and cultures will also be studied as will the
interaction of solid and void forms and shape pattern decoration colour texture scale
structure proportion rhythm movement and the effects of light upon three dimensional
objects
Page|21 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ART (GCSE) continued
Exam Board AQA
Printmaking
Students will be able to experiment with a number of simple methods for producing a printed
image Some of the following will be introduced when appropriate
Lino printing
Card printing
Monoprinting
Polystyrene sheet printing
Screen printing
Assessment
Art and Design requires students to carry out and complete work in their own time in school
and at home Preparation and research are an essential element of the course and the use of
sketchbooks when preparing work is encouraged
Coursework will account for 60 of the marks and externally set assignment will account for
40 of the marks
Visits
Students are encouraged to take part in all visits to Museums Galleries and Exhibitions where
the work on display is considered helpful in supporting coursework studies
Career Progression
Fashion Designer Interior Designer Costume Designer Artist Architect Cartoonist Textile
Designer Model Maker etc
22|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CATERING (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
This single GCSE course is a vocational qualification that is
suitable for those students who have an interest in the Catering
Industry and want a broad background in this area It would
also be a good foundation for those who wish to progress to
further education It will offer valuable preparation for students
who may want to enter the many careers in the Food Industry
Students must have a real interest in food and enjoy cooking
They must be prepared to work hard in order to reach a high
standard of presentation in their practical work
Course Information
Students who take the GCSE Catering course will learn about and demonstrate their
knowledge and understanding of the following areas of study
The industry ndash types of establishments that serve food and drink
Job roles employment opportunities and relevant training
Health safety and hygiene
Food preparation cooking and presentation
Nutrition and menu planning
Costing and portion control
Specialist equipment both small and large scale
Communication and record keeping
Environmental considerations
Students will be expected to supply their own ingredients for practical sessions that will include
the selection storage preparation and serving of
Students will also be expected to purchase a white chef‟s jacket from the College which they
must wear to all practical sessions
Meat and poultry Convenience products
Fish Sauces
Eggs Basic dough products
Dairy products Basic pastry products
Cereals flour rice pasta Cakes sponges and scones
Vegetables and fruit
Page|23 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CATERING (GCSE) continued
Exam Board WJEC
Assessment
Visits
It is hoped that there will be some visits to local restaurants and a catering college Chefs may visit
some lessons to give demonstrations or work with students in practical lessons
Career Progression
Sous Chef Cake Decorator Junior Kitchen Assistant WaitressWaiter Nutritionist Dietician Food
Technologist Baker etc
60 of the final grade will come from 2
practical tasks where students must show
catering skills related to food preparation and
service
Each task must be accompanied by a folder
of notes that cover the investigation planning
and evaluation of the task
Task 1 (15 hours) will take place in Year 10
Task 2 (30 hours) will take place in Year 11
40 of the final grade will come from a
written examination paper (1 frac14 hours) on
Catering food and the customer
This will be taken at the end of Year 11
24|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CERTIFICATE IN CONSTRUCTION
Exam Board CITY amp GUILDS
This course is ideal for all students who are considering
a career in any part of the construction or building
industry It is of benefit weather they are considering a
craft or management position
Course Information
Students study for six periods a week and in the first
year concentrate on basic building skills
Carpentry
Electrics
Plumbing
Bricklaying
Health and safety
Site management
This is done through the City and Guilds Introductory Certificate in Basic Construction Skills in which
eight practical tasks must be passed and one theoretical on line test
The second year allows students to develop along their chosen path either developing their craft
skills or moving towards a professional career via the Diplomas in Construction and the Built
Environment This would be an ideal path for those considering a career in
Building management
Architecture
Town planning
Surveying
Engineering
Building control
Environmentalist
Landscape Architecture
Those students not considering a professional career would expand their skills in chosen areas
through further City and Guilds qualifications
Page|25 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 FIRST CERTIFICATE IN PERFORMING ARTS DANCE
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Students will look at FIVE different units in order to achieve a
qualification on this course
The most appropriate units can be selected according to
the individual needs of each group from the following list
Performing Dance
The Development of Dance
Working in the Performing Arts Industry
Professional Development in the Performing Arts
Industry
Understanding Dance
Contemporary Dance
Jazz Dance
Musical Theatre
Makeup for Performers
There is a significant emphasis on Choreographic and
performance skills throughout each unit and students will
be expected to
Learn set dances
Learn dance vocabulary
Choreograph solo duo and small group dances
Improve their performance and technical skills
Perform in front of their peers and a broader based audience
See professionals at work
Write reviews of works
Study the effect of costume set design and props
Look at the cultural and historical context of dances they view
The course is internally assessed throughout by the teacher and students are informally
assessed during every lesson Students will also be assessed more formally through
Assignments which meet the criteria for each Unit These are marked by the teacher and
internally verified by another specialist teacher to ensure that they are of the highest quality
Students opting for this course must understand that to achieve a good grade at BTEC they
have to have a love of making up (choreographing) and performing dances to others They
must also have some basic dance ability such as being able to move in time with the music
Students will need to work in bare feet for much of this course
Students who enjoy all aspects of dance and movement and have the confidence to perform
to a small audience will be well suited to this course Students will be expected to work in their
own time after school to perfect their dances and complete Assignment briefs They should
also be happy to work in a range of different dance styles and not just one particular style
26|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
DRAMA (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
GCSE Drama is an exciting and practical course which offers opportunities to become a skilled
and confident performer
The course aims to encourage students to develop
an interest in and understanding of a range of
drama and theatre experiences
increased self and group awareness
imaginative creative communication and
social skills
a love and appreciation of attending a range of
live theatre experiences
The course consists of two parts
Coursework 60
Two of the following options only one of which may be a technicaldesign skill
Devised thematic work for performance to an audience
Acting
Improvisation
Theatre in Education presentation
Dancedrama
Set
Costume
Make-up
Properties
Masks
Puppets
Lighting
Sound
Stage management
Each option is assessed through two parts
Part One A mark awarded for group and communication skills
Part Two A mark awarded for the final performance
Written Paper 40
2 hours
A choice of any two questions based on the following sections
A Set play bdquoAnimal Farm‟
B Response to live productions seen during the course
Page|27 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ETHICS (GCSE)
Exam Board OCR
The bdquoPhilosophy and Ethics‟ GCSE will allow students to explore the fundamental questions
about life and existence encourage their personal social and cultural development and
enhance their understanding of different cultures and belief systems
Over the course of the two years students will study important and thought-provoking issues
such as the nature and existence of God good and evil and the conflict between religion
and science relationships poverty and medical ethics peace and justice and the role of the
media in today‟s world It is a broad satisfying and worthwhile course of study designed to
challenge and stimulate students and equip them with the necessary skills to lead constructive
and thoughtful lives in the modern world
28|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
FILM STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
ldquoThe secret to film is that its an illusionrdquo
George Lucas Director of Star Wars
This course is ideal for any student who is
Able to work independently or as part of a team
Creative and practical but also analytical
Enthusiastic about films
Interested in making their own short films
Over the two years students will
Plan storyboard film and edit a short film working in a small
group adding their own music and special effects
Understand how films are made and promoted
Learn about the business of making films
Make a close study of one genre of Hollywood films (currently Disaster Films)
Closely research and study at least two different non-Hollywood Films (made in Britain
Europe or Africa)
Prepare their own film promotion campaign
Write an in-depth analysis of films of their choice
Assessment is through
A portfolio of coursework and also
Two end of course examinations
Although it is a new course Film Studies is already a popular choice for many students
combining well with the Media study in English as well as Media
Studies itself Film Studies is increasingly well
thought of by many colleges as it combines
a practical creative approach with
analytical skills
From Citizen Kane to Inception
Page|29 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
FRENCH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
The course outline for French is similar to Spanish It is not compulsory to have previous
knowledge of the language before starting the course but you need to be aware that it will
be more challenging for you and you need to put in a lot of effort to succeed However it is
not at all impossible
30|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GEOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Geography is a fascinating and wide-reaching subject and it has been shown that students
with Geography qualifications are some of the most employable
Why you should take Geography GCSE
It provides you with an understanding of global issues which will affect our lives now and
in the future
By the end of their GCSE you will have a better understanding of the way the world
works
Geography is a good link between the arts and sciences so it will help you in their other
subjects
You will understand how physical landscapes (eg rivers coasts mountains) are formed
You will be allowed to express opinions about people and places
Geography includes a range of academic skills that you will use in your future studies
Skills gained from Geography include
How to research and to investigate
Problem solving
Real world numeracy
How to collect record present and analyse data
Map reading
Creative thinking
How to write in an essay style and in a scientific style
Empathy and understanding of others
Topics of study will include
How are natural landscapes formed and how can we manage
them
What causes and how can we manage natural hazards
How do weather and climate work
How can we manage population around the world
How do towns and cities expand and how are they managed
How and why are some places rich whilst others are poor
How can we ensure development of global resources is sustainable
Page|31 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board AQA
Career Links (As printed by the Royal Geographical Society)
How is the course assessed
GCSE Geography is assessed by two written Examinations (75) and by Coursework (25) in
the form of a Controlled Assessment
Fieldwork at the South Coast and elsewhere is an essential part of this course
Travel and tourist industry
Travel Guide Researcher
Property Researcher
Lawyers
Senior Researcher for County
Council
Government Statistician
TV Locations Unit
Business Consultants
Planners
32|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GRAPHICS (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
If you are interested in the world of advertising like
developing logos and posters always have an interest in
the covers of DVDs books amp games and really enjoy
making products then this is the course for you
Course Information
A large part of the course is a practical investigation
into the techniques and materials used in the
advertising and packaging we see around us every
day
Students will develop skills in drawing both free hand and using computer aided design
model making printing techniques logo designing greetings card and popup book
design and build up skills to design DVD covers labels and posters
To be able to present this to an industrial standard students will use desktop publishing
software such as GIMP (a variation of Photoshop) and computer aided design packages
such as Google Sketchup 2D Design and Fireworks They will get the chance to use the
new computer aided manufacturing milling machine to design and make work like
models signs and games
Assessment
Students will complete a major project and portfolio that counts towards 60 of the overall
GCSE grade Previous projects have included creating a popup book producing
promotional material for the Olympics designing the identity and packaging for a new band
and making a travel game for children
Externally set assignment by the Exam board will account for 40 The typical brief might look
like this
A leading perfumeaftershave manufacturer are aware that the environment is a
current issue The general public are concerned about so want an environmentally
friendly perfumeaftershave bottle and packaging designed to meet the current
market needs You are to design and make a model bottle including the packaging
Career Progression
Or anything in the creative industries
Graphic designer Work in advertising Web designer
Architect Product designer Set designer
Computer game designer Window dresser Magazine editor
Fashion designer Comic book creator Book illustrator
Artist
Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a
range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme
conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)
Content
Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated
situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a
portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are
required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key
skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam
They will study the following subjects at Level 1
Shampoo and condition hair
Blow drying
Contribute to performing and colouring process
Contribute to the development of effective working
relationships
Support the health and safety of the salon
Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas
Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is
complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and
seminars
All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical
assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress
How will they be assessed
They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical
assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on
progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered
individually at different stages throughout the course
There are four areas of assessment
Practical They carry out the skill
Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill
Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit
Online tests
Progression
They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such
as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme
34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and
opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal
subject for you
You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability
to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely
untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills
What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for
History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities
alike It is particularly useful for the following careers
Course Information
The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills
covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of
these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in
the classroom
Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams
almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students
maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two
year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work
Each of the following units is worth 25
Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations
Key topics
bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56
bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)
bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991
Law
Journalism
Television production and research
Advertising
Research
Marketing
Business Management
Accountancy
Archaeology
Museum work
Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939
Key Topics
bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939
bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Holocaust
Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970
Key topics
bull McCarthyism and the Red scare
bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King
bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies
bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)
Representations of History
CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990
36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT
Exam Board OCR
The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-
requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres
and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the
recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students
education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and
employers
Course Information
The course aims to develop
Problem-solving skills through the practical real life
application of ICT to complex problems
The ability to analyse appraise and make critical
judgements about the use of ICT systems
An awareness of the role of ICT in the management
manipulation and dissemination of information
Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with
others
The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and
competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist
tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final
student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms
of ICT problem solving and project management
There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been
completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer
Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc
Assessment
Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two
GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟
equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE
In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students
must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two
mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2
Diploma
Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become
increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics
magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such
as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students
to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages
we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as
they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of
audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-
world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very
relevant and very challenging
Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different
forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is
a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in
a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also
able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in
an organised way
Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to
looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as
bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns
constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe
Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied
interesting and highly rewarding
Coursework
The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall
assessment of the course Students produce three assignments
for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical
Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment
Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical
Production and Evaluation
Assessment
This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is
undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for
the qualification
Recent topics for the examination have included
Soap opera Quiz shows
Action Films The Popular Press
Music magazines
38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning
The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist
learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering
Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills
The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to
broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students
who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical
career within the sector
Progression
The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate
(VRQ) in the appropriate career route
Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using
the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship
framework) in the appropriate route
Potential Job Opportunities
Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder
Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician
Assessment Methods
Multiple Choice Examination
Oral Examination
Portfolio of Evidence
Practical Demonstration Assignment
Practical Examination
Task-based Controlled Assessment
Written Examination
Overall Assessment Method
Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit
The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the
learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test
results
Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing
and ListeningAppraising
Performing (30)
Students perform music throughout the course The two best
recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and
one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any
type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour
time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during
that period
For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental
vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)
a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc
For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an
improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing
a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording
Composing (30)
Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the
exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must
come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed
to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material
to make a new piece out of the old one
ListeningAppraising (40)
Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a
series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final
question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music
played in the exam hall
Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam
The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are
Western Classical Music 1600-1899
Music in the 20th Century
Popular Music in Context
World Music
40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching
research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic
Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not
required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music
classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C
grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas
There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some
they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is
hard work but its good fun too
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC
(EDEXCEL)
The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used
by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the
BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire
assessment is coursework based
Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)
Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the
Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a
portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of
A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links
with others
The Performer‟s role
Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer
Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)
Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students
the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the
equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own
recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves
A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)
including costs
A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it
safely
Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording
techniques
Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what
they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating
various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is
designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to
work in the Music Industry
This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic
Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will
spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software
and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs
The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both
exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both
qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)
Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as
individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily
being assessed on everything at the end of the course
A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction
grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up
with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx
42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will
learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer
software
You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white
photographs
Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based
photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-
journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new
media practice
Assessment
This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home
is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks
There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the
marks
Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SPANISH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
All students have the choice to continue
with Spanish which they have been
studying since Year 7 It would be a wise
choice to continue with Spanish as the
ability to speak a second language is not
only useful but is advantageous in
today‟s world Our closer connection
with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even
a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers
Course Information
The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based
on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage
Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to
communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding
Topics covered are
Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo
Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink
Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo
Free time shopping money new technology sports media
Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo
Home local area and the environment
Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo
School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs
Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and
listening at the end of Year 11
44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2
Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with
the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to
vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport
The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a
range of skills and techniques personal qualities and
attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter
the workplace
Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study
1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction
The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge
and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in
instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning
and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills
2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities
The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire
motivate and improve the performance of a selected target
group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It
encourages students to work in a team situation to organise
plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement
3 Injury in Sport
The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and
their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will
enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries
4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport
The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in
the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and
enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people
(Units to be studied are subject to change)
Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TEXTILES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of
textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The
students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following
areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction
applied textiles and embellished textiles
Assessment and Coursework Balance
In their first year the students will be required to produce two
extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will
follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The
students will work from first hand observations collecting and
developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and
textiles based techniques From this research and developmental
stage students will design and produce a final piece
During the second year students will begin by completing an
extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an
externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted
will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment
will account for 40
The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual
style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they
learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a
more personal response to a theme
Visits
Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources
such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second
year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within
the industry today
Why choose Textiles
Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more
confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level
course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles
The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range
of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior
design styling textiles design and costume design
46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)
Exam Board AQA
Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology
Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three
subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three
separate GCSEs
What are the differences between Triple Science and other
science GCSEs
This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will
be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of
the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award
What are the advantages of studying Triple Science
The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into
bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for
bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge
Who should consider taking Triple Science
Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope
with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a
related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those
students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this
course
The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school
GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics
Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25
Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25
Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25
Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25
Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS
2012 - 2014
Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4
option subjects
Please note
We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If
through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we
cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course
Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012
Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012
Make a record of your choice on the table below before
handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the
Options Information Evening
SUBJECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
Mo
st
De
sire
d
3D Design
Art
Catering
Construction
Dance
Drama
Ethics
Film Studies
French
Geography
Graphics
Hairdressing
History
ICT
Media Studies
Motor Vehicle
Music
Spanish
(Diploma) Sport
Textiles
Triple Sciences
Please tick if you would like to be
considered to do EBacc Please
remember that you need to
include Geography or History and
French or Spanish as your subject
options
Chessington Community College
Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS
Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603
wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk
![Page 17: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a](https://reader035.vdocument.in/reader035/viewer/2022062413/5a76533a7f8b9aa3618d22a0/html5/thumbnails/17.jpg)
20|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ART (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
All students choosing Art and Design as their option are required to
take the unendorsed examination This allows them to produce
work using a number of different techniques which have been listed
below
Painting and drawing
Graphics
Sculptureconstruction
Photography
Printmaking
A foundation course which gives students experience of all of
these is run during the first two terms
Painting and Drawing
The Painting and Drawing course is structured to enable students
regardless of their ability to build on the skills and techniques
they have learned in their first three years at school and at the same time prepare for a GCSE
examination
Programmes of work will largely be determined by the demands of the examination syllabus
but every effort will be made to structure the course so that it meets the needs of the students
whilst taking into account their wide range of abilities
The Painting and Drawing disciplines will form the basis for most practical activities but
students will be encouraged to experiment with and use as broad a range of approaches as
possible in the preparation and production of coursework
3 Dimensional Studies (Sculpture)
The course is designed to develop the student‟s visual awareness sensitivity and understanding
of the work of Artists involving three dimensions in a contemporary and historical context
Students will be encouraged to develop ideas in preliminary studies through research and
experimentation observational recording and analysis of forms and to produce work in the
form of modelling carving casting construction and assembling The important relationships
between urbanrural landscapes communities and cultures will also be studied as will the
interaction of solid and void forms and shape pattern decoration colour texture scale
structure proportion rhythm movement and the effects of light upon three dimensional
objects
Page|21 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ART (GCSE) continued
Exam Board AQA
Printmaking
Students will be able to experiment with a number of simple methods for producing a printed
image Some of the following will be introduced when appropriate
Lino printing
Card printing
Monoprinting
Polystyrene sheet printing
Screen printing
Assessment
Art and Design requires students to carry out and complete work in their own time in school
and at home Preparation and research are an essential element of the course and the use of
sketchbooks when preparing work is encouraged
Coursework will account for 60 of the marks and externally set assignment will account for
40 of the marks
Visits
Students are encouraged to take part in all visits to Museums Galleries and Exhibitions where
the work on display is considered helpful in supporting coursework studies
Career Progression
Fashion Designer Interior Designer Costume Designer Artist Architect Cartoonist Textile
Designer Model Maker etc
22|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CATERING (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
This single GCSE course is a vocational qualification that is
suitable for those students who have an interest in the Catering
Industry and want a broad background in this area It would
also be a good foundation for those who wish to progress to
further education It will offer valuable preparation for students
who may want to enter the many careers in the Food Industry
Students must have a real interest in food and enjoy cooking
They must be prepared to work hard in order to reach a high
standard of presentation in their practical work
Course Information
Students who take the GCSE Catering course will learn about and demonstrate their
knowledge and understanding of the following areas of study
The industry ndash types of establishments that serve food and drink
Job roles employment opportunities and relevant training
Health safety and hygiene
Food preparation cooking and presentation
Nutrition and menu planning
Costing and portion control
Specialist equipment both small and large scale
Communication and record keeping
Environmental considerations
Students will be expected to supply their own ingredients for practical sessions that will include
the selection storage preparation and serving of
Students will also be expected to purchase a white chef‟s jacket from the College which they
must wear to all practical sessions
Meat and poultry Convenience products
Fish Sauces
Eggs Basic dough products
Dairy products Basic pastry products
Cereals flour rice pasta Cakes sponges and scones
Vegetables and fruit
Page|23 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CATERING (GCSE) continued
Exam Board WJEC
Assessment
Visits
It is hoped that there will be some visits to local restaurants and a catering college Chefs may visit
some lessons to give demonstrations or work with students in practical lessons
Career Progression
Sous Chef Cake Decorator Junior Kitchen Assistant WaitressWaiter Nutritionist Dietician Food
Technologist Baker etc
60 of the final grade will come from 2
practical tasks where students must show
catering skills related to food preparation and
service
Each task must be accompanied by a folder
of notes that cover the investigation planning
and evaluation of the task
Task 1 (15 hours) will take place in Year 10
Task 2 (30 hours) will take place in Year 11
40 of the final grade will come from a
written examination paper (1 frac14 hours) on
Catering food and the customer
This will be taken at the end of Year 11
24|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CERTIFICATE IN CONSTRUCTION
Exam Board CITY amp GUILDS
This course is ideal for all students who are considering
a career in any part of the construction or building
industry It is of benefit weather they are considering a
craft or management position
Course Information
Students study for six periods a week and in the first
year concentrate on basic building skills
Carpentry
Electrics
Plumbing
Bricklaying
Health and safety
Site management
This is done through the City and Guilds Introductory Certificate in Basic Construction Skills in which
eight practical tasks must be passed and one theoretical on line test
The second year allows students to develop along their chosen path either developing their craft
skills or moving towards a professional career via the Diplomas in Construction and the Built
Environment This would be an ideal path for those considering a career in
Building management
Architecture
Town planning
Surveying
Engineering
Building control
Environmentalist
Landscape Architecture
Those students not considering a professional career would expand their skills in chosen areas
through further City and Guilds qualifications
Page|25 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 FIRST CERTIFICATE IN PERFORMING ARTS DANCE
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Students will look at FIVE different units in order to achieve a
qualification on this course
The most appropriate units can be selected according to
the individual needs of each group from the following list
Performing Dance
The Development of Dance
Working in the Performing Arts Industry
Professional Development in the Performing Arts
Industry
Understanding Dance
Contemporary Dance
Jazz Dance
Musical Theatre
Makeup for Performers
There is a significant emphasis on Choreographic and
performance skills throughout each unit and students will
be expected to
Learn set dances
Learn dance vocabulary
Choreograph solo duo and small group dances
Improve their performance and technical skills
Perform in front of their peers and a broader based audience
See professionals at work
Write reviews of works
Study the effect of costume set design and props
Look at the cultural and historical context of dances they view
The course is internally assessed throughout by the teacher and students are informally
assessed during every lesson Students will also be assessed more formally through
Assignments which meet the criteria for each Unit These are marked by the teacher and
internally verified by another specialist teacher to ensure that they are of the highest quality
Students opting for this course must understand that to achieve a good grade at BTEC they
have to have a love of making up (choreographing) and performing dances to others They
must also have some basic dance ability such as being able to move in time with the music
Students will need to work in bare feet for much of this course
Students who enjoy all aspects of dance and movement and have the confidence to perform
to a small audience will be well suited to this course Students will be expected to work in their
own time after school to perfect their dances and complete Assignment briefs They should
also be happy to work in a range of different dance styles and not just one particular style
26|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
DRAMA (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
GCSE Drama is an exciting and practical course which offers opportunities to become a skilled
and confident performer
The course aims to encourage students to develop
an interest in and understanding of a range of
drama and theatre experiences
increased self and group awareness
imaginative creative communication and
social skills
a love and appreciation of attending a range of
live theatre experiences
The course consists of two parts
Coursework 60
Two of the following options only one of which may be a technicaldesign skill
Devised thematic work for performance to an audience
Acting
Improvisation
Theatre in Education presentation
Dancedrama
Set
Costume
Make-up
Properties
Masks
Puppets
Lighting
Sound
Stage management
Each option is assessed through two parts
Part One A mark awarded for group and communication skills
Part Two A mark awarded for the final performance
Written Paper 40
2 hours
A choice of any two questions based on the following sections
A Set play bdquoAnimal Farm‟
B Response to live productions seen during the course
Page|27 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ETHICS (GCSE)
Exam Board OCR
The bdquoPhilosophy and Ethics‟ GCSE will allow students to explore the fundamental questions
about life and existence encourage their personal social and cultural development and
enhance their understanding of different cultures and belief systems
Over the course of the two years students will study important and thought-provoking issues
such as the nature and existence of God good and evil and the conflict between religion
and science relationships poverty and medical ethics peace and justice and the role of the
media in today‟s world It is a broad satisfying and worthwhile course of study designed to
challenge and stimulate students and equip them with the necessary skills to lead constructive
and thoughtful lives in the modern world
28|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
FILM STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
ldquoThe secret to film is that its an illusionrdquo
George Lucas Director of Star Wars
This course is ideal for any student who is
Able to work independently or as part of a team
Creative and practical but also analytical
Enthusiastic about films
Interested in making their own short films
Over the two years students will
Plan storyboard film and edit a short film working in a small
group adding their own music and special effects
Understand how films are made and promoted
Learn about the business of making films
Make a close study of one genre of Hollywood films (currently Disaster Films)
Closely research and study at least two different non-Hollywood Films (made in Britain
Europe or Africa)
Prepare their own film promotion campaign
Write an in-depth analysis of films of their choice
Assessment is through
A portfolio of coursework and also
Two end of course examinations
Although it is a new course Film Studies is already a popular choice for many students
combining well with the Media study in English as well as Media
Studies itself Film Studies is increasingly well
thought of by many colleges as it combines
a practical creative approach with
analytical skills
From Citizen Kane to Inception
Page|29 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
FRENCH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
The course outline for French is similar to Spanish It is not compulsory to have previous
knowledge of the language before starting the course but you need to be aware that it will
be more challenging for you and you need to put in a lot of effort to succeed However it is
not at all impossible
30|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GEOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Geography is a fascinating and wide-reaching subject and it has been shown that students
with Geography qualifications are some of the most employable
Why you should take Geography GCSE
It provides you with an understanding of global issues which will affect our lives now and
in the future
By the end of their GCSE you will have a better understanding of the way the world
works
Geography is a good link between the arts and sciences so it will help you in their other
subjects
You will understand how physical landscapes (eg rivers coasts mountains) are formed
You will be allowed to express opinions about people and places
Geography includes a range of academic skills that you will use in your future studies
Skills gained from Geography include
How to research and to investigate
Problem solving
Real world numeracy
How to collect record present and analyse data
Map reading
Creative thinking
How to write in an essay style and in a scientific style
Empathy and understanding of others
Topics of study will include
How are natural landscapes formed and how can we manage
them
What causes and how can we manage natural hazards
How do weather and climate work
How can we manage population around the world
How do towns and cities expand and how are they managed
How and why are some places rich whilst others are poor
How can we ensure development of global resources is sustainable
Page|31 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board AQA
Career Links (As printed by the Royal Geographical Society)
How is the course assessed
GCSE Geography is assessed by two written Examinations (75) and by Coursework (25) in
the form of a Controlled Assessment
Fieldwork at the South Coast and elsewhere is an essential part of this course
Travel and tourist industry
Travel Guide Researcher
Property Researcher
Lawyers
Senior Researcher for County
Council
Government Statistician
TV Locations Unit
Business Consultants
Planners
32|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GRAPHICS (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
If you are interested in the world of advertising like
developing logos and posters always have an interest in
the covers of DVDs books amp games and really enjoy
making products then this is the course for you
Course Information
A large part of the course is a practical investigation
into the techniques and materials used in the
advertising and packaging we see around us every
day
Students will develop skills in drawing both free hand and using computer aided design
model making printing techniques logo designing greetings card and popup book
design and build up skills to design DVD covers labels and posters
To be able to present this to an industrial standard students will use desktop publishing
software such as GIMP (a variation of Photoshop) and computer aided design packages
such as Google Sketchup 2D Design and Fireworks They will get the chance to use the
new computer aided manufacturing milling machine to design and make work like
models signs and games
Assessment
Students will complete a major project and portfolio that counts towards 60 of the overall
GCSE grade Previous projects have included creating a popup book producing
promotional material for the Olympics designing the identity and packaging for a new band
and making a travel game for children
Externally set assignment by the Exam board will account for 40 The typical brief might look
like this
A leading perfumeaftershave manufacturer are aware that the environment is a
current issue The general public are concerned about so want an environmentally
friendly perfumeaftershave bottle and packaging designed to meet the current
market needs You are to design and make a model bottle including the packaging
Career Progression
Or anything in the creative industries
Graphic designer Work in advertising Web designer
Architect Product designer Set designer
Computer game designer Window dresser Magazine editor
Fashion designer Comic book creator Book illustrator
Artist
Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a
range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme
conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)
Content
Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated
situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a
portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are
required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key
skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam
They will study the following subjects at Level 1
Shampoo and condition hair
Blow drying
Contribute to performing and colouring process
Contribute to the development of effective working
relationships
Support the health and safety of the salon
Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas
Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is
complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and
seminars
All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical
assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress
How will they be assessed
They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical
assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on
progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered
individually at different stages throughout the course
There are four areas of assessment
Practical They carry out the skill
Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill
Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit
Online tests
Progression
They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such
as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme
34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and
opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal
subject for you
You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability
to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely
untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills
What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for
History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities
alike It is particularly useful for the following careers
Course Information
The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills
covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of
these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in
the classroom
Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams
almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students
maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two
year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work
Each of the following units is worth 25
Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations
Key topics
bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56
bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)
bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991
Law
Journalism
Television production and research
Advertising
Research
Marketing
Business Management
Accountancy
Archaeology
Museum work
Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939
Key Topics
bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939
bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Holocaust
Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970
Key topics
bull McCarthyism and the Red scare
bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King
bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies
bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)
Representations of History
CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990
36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT
Exam Board OCR
The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-
requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres
and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the
recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students
education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and
employers
Course Information
The course aims to develop
Problem-solving skills through the practical real life
application of ICT to complex problems
The ability to analyse appraise and make critical
judgements about the use of ICT systems
An awareness of the role of ICT in the management
manipulation and dissemination of information
Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with
others
The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and
competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist
tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final
student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms
of ICT problem solving and project management
There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been
completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer
Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc
Assessment
Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two
GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟
equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE
In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students
must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two
mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2
Diploma
Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become
increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics
magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such
as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students
to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages
we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as
they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of
audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-
world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very
relevant and very challenging
Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different
forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is
a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in
a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also
able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in
an organised way
Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to
looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as
bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns
constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe
Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied
interesting and highly rewarding
Coursework
The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall
assessment of the course Students produce three assignments
for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical
Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment
Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical
Production and Evaluation
Assessment
This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is
undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for
the qualification
Recent topics for the examination have included
Soap opera Quiz shows
Action Films The Popular Press
Music magazines
38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning
The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist
learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering
Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills
The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to
broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students
who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical
career within the sector
Progression
The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate
(VRQ) in the appropriate career route
Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using
the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship
framework) in the appropriate route
Potential Job Opportunities
Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder
Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician
Assessment Methods
Multiple Choice Examination
Oral Examination
Portfolio of Evidence
Practical Demonstration Assignment
Practical Examination
Task-based Controlled Assessment
Written Examination
Overall Assessment Method
Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit
The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the
learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test
results
Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing
and ListeningAppraising
Performing (30)
Students perform music throughout the course The two best
recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and
one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any
type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour
time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during
that period
For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental
vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)
a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc
For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an
improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing
a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording
Composing (30)
Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the
exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must
come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed
to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material
to make a new piece out of the old one
ListeningAppraising (40)
Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a
series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final
question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music
played in the exam hall
Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam
The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are
Western Classical Music 1600-1899
Music in the 20th Century
Popular Music in Context
World Music
40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching
research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic
Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not
required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music
classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C
grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas
There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some
they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is
hard work but its good fun too
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC
(EDEXCEL)
The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used
by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the
BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire
assessment is coursework based
Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)
Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the
Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a
portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of
A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links
with others
The Performer‟s role
Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer
Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)
Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students
the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the
equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own
recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves
A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)
including costs
A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it
safely
Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording
techniques
Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what
they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating
various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is
designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to
work in the Music Industry
This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic
Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will
spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software
and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs
The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both
exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both
qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)
Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as
individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily
being assessed on everything at the end of the course
A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction
grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up
with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx
42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will
learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer
software
You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white
photographs
Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based
photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-
journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new
media practice
Assessment
This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home
is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks
There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the
marks
Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SPANISH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
All students have the choice to continue
with Spanish which they have been
studying since Year 7 It would be a wise
choice to continue with Spanish as the
ability to speak a second language is not
only useful but is advantageous in
today‟s world Our closer connection
with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even
a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers
Course Information
The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based
on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage
Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to
communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding
Topics covered are
Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo
Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink
Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo
Free time shopping money new technology sports media
Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo
Home local area and the environment
Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo
School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs
Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and
listening at the end of Year 11
44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2
Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with
the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to
vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport
The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a
range of skills and techniques personal qualities and
attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter
the workplace
Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study
1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction
The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge
and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in
instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning
and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills
2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities
The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire
motivate and improve the performance of a selected target
group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It
encourages students to work in a team situation to organise
plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement
3 Injury in Sport
The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and
their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will
enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries
4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport
The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in
the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and
enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people
(Units to be studied are subject to change)
Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TEXTILES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of
textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The
students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following
areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction
applied textiles and embellished textiles
Assessment and Coursework Balance
In their first year the students will be required to produce two
extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will
follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The
students will work from first hand observations collecting and
developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and
textiles based techniques From this research and developmental
stage students will design and produce a final piece
During the second year students will begin by completing an
extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an
externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted
will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment
will account for 40
The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual
style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they
learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a
more personal response to a theme
Visits
Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources
such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second
year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within
the industry today
Why choose Textiles
Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more
confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level
course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles
The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range
of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior
design styling textiles design and costume design
46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)
Exam Board AQA
Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology
Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three
subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three
separate GCSEs
What are the differences between Triple Science and other
science GCSEs
This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will
be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of
the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award
What are the advantages of studying Triple Science
The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into
bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for
bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge
Who should consider taking Triple Science
Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope
with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a
related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those
students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this
course
The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school
GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics
Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25
Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25
Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25
Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25
Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS
2012 - 2014
Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4
option subjects
Please note
We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If
through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we
cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course
Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012
Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012
Make a record of your choice on the table below before
handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the
Options Information Evening
SUBJECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
Mo
st
De
sire
d
3D Design
Art
Catering
Construction
Dance
Drama
Ethics
Film Studies
French
Geography
Graphics
Hairdressing
History
ICT
Media Studies
Motor Vehicle
Music
Spanish
(Diploma) Sport
Textiles
Triple Sciences
Please tick if you would like to be
considered to do EBacc Please
remember that you need to
include Geography or History and
French or Spanish as your subject
options
Chessington Community College
Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS
Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603
wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk
![Page 18: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a](https://reader035.vdocument.in/reader035/viewer/2022062413/5a76533a7f8b9aa3618d22a0/html5/thumbnails/18.jpg)
Page|21 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ART (GCSE) continued
Exam Board AQA
Printmaking
Students will be able to experiment with a number of simple methods for producing a printed
image Some of the following will be introduced when appropriate
Lino printing
Card printing
Monoprinting
Polystyrene sheet printing
Screen printing
Assessment
Art and Design requires students to carry out and complete work in their own time in school
and at home Preparation and research are an essential element of the course and the use of
sketchbooks when preparing work is encouraged
Coursework will account for 60 of the marks and externally set assignment will account for
40 of the marks
Visits
Students are encouraged to take part in all visits to Museums Galleries and Exhibitions where
the work on display is considered helpful in supporting coursework studies
Career Progression
Fashion Designer Interior Designer Costume Designer Artist Architect Cartoonist Textile
Designer Model Maker etc
22|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CATERING (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
This single GCSE course is a vocational qualification that is
suitable for those students who have an interest in the Catering
Industry and want a broad background in this area It would
also be a good foundation for those who wish to progress to
further education It will offer valuable preparation for students
who may want to enter the many careers in the Food Industry
Students must have a real interest in food and enjoy cooking
They must be prepared to work hard in order to reach a high
standard of presentation in their practical work
Course Information
Students who take the GCSE Catering course will learn about and demonstrate their
knowledge and understanding of the following areas of study
The industry ndash types of establishments that serve food and drink
Job roles employment opportunities and relevant training
Health safety and hygiene
Food preparation cooking and presentation
Nutrition and menu planning
Costing and portion control
Specialist equipment both small and large scale
Communication and record keeping
Environmental considerations
Students will be expected to supply their own ingredients for practical sessions that will include
the selection storage preparation and serving of
Students will also be expected to purchase a white chef‟s jacket from the College which they
must wear to all practical sessions
Meat and poultry Convenience products
Fish Sauces
Eggs Basic dough products
Dairy products Basic pastry products
Cereals flour rice pasta Cakes sponges and scones
Vegetables and fruit
Page|23 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CATERING (GCSE) continued
Exam Board WJEC
Assessment
Visits
It is hoped that there will be some visits to local restaurants and a catering college Chefs may visit
some lessons to give demonstrations or work with students in practical lessons
Career Progression
Sous Chef Cake Decorator Junior Kitchen Assistant WaitressWaiter Nutritionist Dietician Food
Technologist Baker etc
60 of the final grade will come from 2
practical tasks where students must show
catering skills related to food preparation and
service
Each task must be accompanied by a folder
of notes that cover the investigation planning
and evaluation of the task
Task 1 (15 hours) will take place in Year 10
Task 2 (30 hours) will take place in Year 11
40 of the final grade will come from a
written examination paper (1 frac14 hours) on
Catering food and the customer
This will be taken at the end of Year 11
24|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CERTIFICATE IN CONSTRUCTION
Exam Board CITY amp GUILDS
This course is ideal for all students who are considering
a career in any part of the construction or building
industry It is of benefit weather they are considering a
craft or management position
Course Information
Students study for six periods a week and in the first
year concentrate on basic building skills
Carpentry
Electrics
Plumbing
Bricklaying
Health and safety
Site management
This is done through the City and Guilds Introductory Certificate in Basic Construction Skills in which
eight practical tasks must be passed and one theoretical on line test
The second year allows students to develop along their chosen path either developing their craft
skills or moving towards a professional career via the Diplomas in Construction and the Built
Environment This would be an ideal path for those considering a career in
Building management
Architecture
Town planning
Surveying
Engineering
Building control
Environmentalist
Landscape Architecture
Those students not considering a professional career would expand their skills in chosen areas
through further City and Guilds qualifications
Page|25 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 FIRST CERTIFICATE IN PERFORMING ARTS DANCE
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Students will look at FIVE different units in order to achieve a
qualification on this course
The most appropriate units can be selected according to
the individual needs of each group from the following list
Performing Dance
The Development of Dance
Working in the Performing Arts Industry
Professional Development in the Performing Arts
Industry
Understanding Dance
Contemporary Dance
Jazz Dance
Musical Theatre
Makeup for Performers
There is a significant emphasis on Choreographic and
performance skills throughout each unit and students will
be expected to
Learn set dances
Learn dance vocabulary
Choreograph solo duo and small group dances
Improve their performance and technical skills
Perform in front of their peers and a broader based audience
See professionals at work
Write reviews of works
Study the effect of costume set design and props
Look at the cultural and historical context of dances they view
The course is internally assessed throughout by the teacher and students are informally
assessed during every lesson Students will also be assessed more formally through
Assignments which meet the criteria for each Unit These are marked by the teacher and
internally verified by another specialist teacher to ensure that they are of the highest quality
Students opting for this course must understand that to achieve a good grade at BTEC they
have to have a love of making up (choreographing) and performing dances to others They
must also have some basic dance ability such as being able to move in time with the music
Students will need to work in bare feet for much of this course
Students who enjoy all aspects of dance and movement and have the confidence to perform
to a small audience will be well suited to this course Students will be expected to work in their
own time after school to perfect their dances and complete Assignment briefs They should
also be happy to work in a range of different dance styles and not just one particular style
26|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
DRAMA (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
GCSE Drama is an exciting and practical course which offers opportunities to become a skilled
and confident performer
The course aims to encourage students to develop
an interest in and understanding of a range of
drama and theatre experiences
increased self and group awareness
imaginative creative communication and
social skills
a love and appreciation of attending a range of
live theatre experiences
The course consists of two parts
Coursework 60
Two of the following options only one of which may be a technicaldesign skill
Devised thematic work for performance to an audience
Acting
Improvisation
Theatre in Education presentation
Dancedrama
Set
Costume
Make-up
Properties
Masks
Puppets
Lighting
Sound
Stage management
Each option is assessed through two parts
Part One A mark awarded for group and communication skills
Part Two A mark awarded for the final performance
Written Paper 40
2 hours
A choice of any two questions based on the following sections
A Set play bdquoAnimal Farm‟
B Response to live productions seen during the course
Page|27 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ETHICS (GCSE)
Exam Board OCR
The bdquoPhilosophy and Ethics‟ GCSE will allow students to explore the fundamental questions
about life and existence encourage their personal social and cultural development and
enhance their understanding of different cultures and belief systems
Over the course of the two years students will study important and thought-provoking issues
such as the nature and existence of God good and evil and the conflict between religion
and science relationships poverty and medical ethics peace and justice and the role of the
media in today‟s world It is a broad satisfying and worthwhile course of study designed to
challenge and stimulate students and equip them with the necessary skills to lead constructive
and thoughtful lives in the modern world
28|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
FILM STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
ldquoThe secret to film is that its an illusionrdquo
George Lucas Director of Star Wars
This course is ideal for any student who is
Able to work independently or as part of a team
Creative and practical but also analytical
Enthusiastic about films
Interested in making their own short films
Over the two years students will
Plan storyboard film and edit a short film working in a small
group adding their own music and special effects
Understand how films are made and promoted
Learn about the business of making films
Make a close study of one genre of Hollywood films (currently Disaster Films)
Closely research and study at least two different non-Hollywood Films (made in Britain
Europe or Africa)
Prepare their own film promotion campaign
Write an in-depth analysis of films of their choice
Assessment is through
A portfolio of coursework and also
Two end of course examinations
Although it is a new course Film Studies is already a popular choice for many students
combining well with the Media study in English as well as Media
Studies itself Film Studies is increasingly well
thought of by many colleges as it combines
a practical creative approach with
analytical skills
From Citizen Kane to Inception
Page|29 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
FRENCH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
The course outline for French is similar to Spanish It is not compulsory to have previous
knowledge of the language before starting the course but you need to be aware that it will
be more challenging for you and you need to put in a lot of effort to succeed However it is
not at all impossible
30|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GEOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Geography is a fascinating and wide-reaching subject and it has been shown that students
with Geography qualifications are some of the most employable
Why you should take Geography GCSE
It provides you with an understanding of global issues which will affect our lives now and
in the future
By the end of their GCSE you will have a better understanding of the way the world
works
Geography is a good link between the arts and sciences so it will help you in their other
subjects
You will understand how physical landscapes (eg rivers coasts mountains) are formed
You will be allowed to express opinions about people and places
Geography includes a range of academic skills that you will use in your future studies
Skills gained from Geography include
How to research and to investigate
Problem solving
Real world numeracy
How to collect record present and analyse data
Map reading
Creative thinking
How to write in an essay style and in a scientific style
Empathy and understanding of others
Topics of study will include
How are natural landscapes formed and how can we manage
them
What causes and how can we manage natural hazards
How do weather and climate work
How can we manage population around the world
How do towns and cities expand and how are they managed
How and why are some places rich whilst others are poor
How can we ensure development of global resources is sustainable
Page|31 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board AQA
Career Links (As printed by the Royal Geographical Society)
How is the course assessed
GCSE Geography is assessed by two written Examinations (75) and by Coursework (25) in
the form of a Controlled Assessment
Fieldwork at the South Coast and elsewhere is an essential part of this course
Travel and tourist industry
Travel Guide Researcher
Property Researcher
Lawyers
Senior Researcher for County
Council
Government Statistician
TV Locations Unit
Business Consultants
Planners
32|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GRAPHICS (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
If you are interested in the world of advertising like
developing logos and posters always have an interest in
the covers of DVDs books amp games and really enjoy
making products then this is the course for you
Course Information
A large part of the course is a practical investigation
into the techniques and materials used in the
advertising and packaging we see around us every
day
Students will develop skills in drawing both free hand and using computer aided design
model making printing techniques logo designing greetings card and popup book
design and build up skills to design DVD covers labels and posters
To be able to present this to an industrial standard students will use desktop publishing
software such as GIMP (a variation of Photoshop) and computer aided design packages
such as Google Sketchup 2D Design and Fireworks They will get the chance to use the
new computer aided manufacturing milling machine to design and make work like
models signs and games
Assessment
Students will complete a major project and portfolio that counts towards 60 of the overall
GCSE grade Previous projects have included creating a popup book producing
promotional material for the Olympics designing the identity and packaging for a new band
and making a travel game for children
Externally set assignment by the Exam board will account for 40 The typical brief might look
like this
A leading perfumeaftershave manufacturer are aware that the environment is a
current issue The general public are concerned about so want an environmentally
friendly perfumeaftershave bottle and packaging designed to meet the current
market needs You are to design and make a model bottle including the packaging
Career Progression
Or anything in the creative industries
Graphic designer Work in advertising Web designer
Architect Product designer Set designer
Computer game designer Window dresser Magazine editor
Fashion designer Comic book creator Book illustrator
Artist
Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a
range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme
conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)
Content
Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated
situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a
portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are
required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key
skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam
They will study the following subjects at Level 1
Shampoo and condition hair
Blow drying
Contribute to performing and colouring process
Contribute to the development of effective working
relationships
Support the health and safety of the salon
Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas
Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is
complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and
seminars
All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical
assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress
How will they be assessed
They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical
assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on
progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered
individually at different stages throughout the course
There are four areas of assessment
Practical They carry out the skill
Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill
Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit
Online tests
Progression
They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such
as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme
34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and
opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal
subject for you
You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability
to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely
untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills
What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for
History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities
alike It is particularly useful for the following careers
Course Information
The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills
covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of
these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in
the classroom
Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams
almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students
maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two
year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work
Each of the following units is worth 25
Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations
Key topics
bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56
bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)
bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991
Law
Journalism
Television production and research
Advertising
Research
Marketing
Business Management
Accountancy
Archaeology
Museum work
Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939
Key Topics
bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939
bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Holocaust
Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970
Key topics
bull McCarthyism and the Red scare
bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King
bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies
bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)
Representations of History
CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990
36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT
Exam Board OCR
The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-
requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres
and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the
recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students
education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and
employers
Course Information
The course aims to develop
Problem-solving skills through the practical real life
application of ICT to complex problems
The ability to analyse appraise and make critical
judgements about the use of ICT systems
An awareness of the role of ICT in the management
manipulation and dissemination of information
Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with
others
The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and
competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist
tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final
student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms
of ICT problem solving and project management
There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been
completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer
Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc
Assessment
Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two
GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟
equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE
In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students
must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two
mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2
Diploma
Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become
increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics
magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such
as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students
to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages
we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as
they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of
audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-
world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very
relevant and very challenging
Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different
forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is
a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in
a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also
able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in
an organised way
Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to
looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as
bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns
constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe
Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied
interesting and highly rewarding
Coursework
The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall
assessment of the course Students produce three assignments
for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical
Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment
Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical
Production and Evaluation
Assessment
This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is
undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for
the qualification
Recent topics for the examination have included
Soap opera Quiz shows
Action Films The Popular Press
Music magazines
38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning
The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist
learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering
Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills
The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to
broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students
who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical
career within the sector
Progression
The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate
(VRQ) in the appropriate career route
Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using
the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship
framework) in the appropriate route
Potential Job Opportunities
Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder
Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician
Assessment Methods
Multiple Choice Examination
Oral Examination
Portfolio of Evidence
Practical Demonstration Assignment
Practical Examination
Task-based Controlled Assessment
Written Examination
Overall Assessment Method
Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit
The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the
learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test
results
Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing
and ListeningAppraising
Performing (30)
Students perform music throughout the course The two best
recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and
one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any
type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour
time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during
that period
For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental
vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)
a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc
For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an
improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing
a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording
Composing (30)
Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the
exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must
come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed
to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material
to make a new piece out of the old one
ListeningAppraising (40)
Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a
series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final
question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music
played in the exam hall
Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam
The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are
Western Classical Music 1600-1899
Music in the 20th Century
Popular Music in Context
World Music
40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching
research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic
Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not
required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music
classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C
grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas
There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some
they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is
hard work but its good fun too
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC
(EDEXCEL)
The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used
by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the
BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire
assessment is coursework based
Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)
Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the
Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a
portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of
A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links
with others
The Performer‟s role
Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer
Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)
Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students
the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the
equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own
recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves
A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)
including costs
A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it
safely
Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording
techniques
Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what
they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating
various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is
designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to
work in the Music Industry
This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic
Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will
spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software
and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs
The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both
exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both
qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)
Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as
individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily
being assessed on everything at the end of the course
A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction
grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up
with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx
42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will
learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer
software
You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white
photographs
Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based
photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-
journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new
media practice
Assessment
This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home
is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks
There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the
marks
Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SPANISH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
All students have the choice to continue
with Spanish which they have been
studying since Year 7 It would be a wise
choice to continue with Spanish as the
ability to speak a second language is not
only useful but is advantageous in
today‟s world Our closer connection
with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even
a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers
Course Information
The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based
on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage
Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to
communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding
Topics covered are
Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo
Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink
Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo
Free time shopping money new technology sports media
Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo
Home local area and the environment
Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo
School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs
Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and
listening at the end of Year 11
44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2
Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with
the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to
vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport
The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a
range of skills and techniques personal qualities and
attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter
the workplace
Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study
1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction
The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge
and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in
instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning
and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills
2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities
The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire
motivate and improve the performance of a selected target
group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It
encourages students to work in a team situation to organise
plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement
3 Injury in Sport
The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and
their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will
enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries
4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport
The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in
the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and
enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people
(Units to be studied are subject to change)
Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TEXTILES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of
textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The
students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following
areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction
applied textiles and embellished textiles
Assessment and Coursework Balance
In their first year the students will be required to produce two
extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will
follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The
students will work from first hand observations collecting and
developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and
textiles based techniques From this research and developmental
stage students will design and produce a final piece
During the second year students will begin by completing an
extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an
externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted
will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment
will account for 40
The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual
style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they
learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a
more personal response to a theme
Visits
Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources
such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second
year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within
the industry today
Why choose Textiles
Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more
confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level
course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles
The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range
of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior
design styling textiles design and costume design
46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)
Exam Board AQA
Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology
Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three
subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three
separate GCSEs
What are the differences between Triple Science and other
science GCSEs
This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will
be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of
the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award
What are the advantages of studying Triple Science
The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into
bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for
bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge
Who should consider taking Triple Science
Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope
with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a
related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those
students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this
course
The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school
GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics
Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25
Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25
Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25
Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25
Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS
2012 - 2014
Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4
option subjects
Please note
We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If
through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we
cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course
Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012
Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012
Make a record of your choice on the table below before
handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the
Options Information Evening
SUBJECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
Mo
st
De
sire
d
3D Design
Art
Catering
Construction
Dance
Drama
Ethics
Film Studies
French
Geography
Graphics
Hairdressing
History
ICT
Media Studies
Motor Vehicle
Music
Spanish
(Diploma) Sport
Textiles
Triple Sciences
Please tick if you would like to be
considered to do EBacc Please
remember that you need to
include Geography or History and
French or Spanish as your subject
options
Chessington Community College
Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS
Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603
wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk
![Page 19: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a](https://reader035.vdocument.in/reader035/viewer/2022062413/5a76533a7f8b9aa3618d22a0/html5/thumbnails/19.jpg)
22|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CATERING (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
This single GCSE course is a vocational qualification that is
suitable for those students who have an interest in the Catering
Industry and want a broad background in this area It would
also be a good foundation for those who wish to progress to
further education It will offer valuable preparation for students
who may want to enter the many careers in the Food Industry
Students must have a real interest in food and enjoy cooking
They must be prepared to work hard in order to reach a high
standard of presentation in their practical work
Course Information
Students who take the GCSE Catering course will learn about and demonstrate their
knowledge and understanding of the following areas of study
The industry ndash types of establishments that serve food and drink
Job roles employment opportunities and relevant training
Health safety and hygiene
Food preparation cooking and presentation
Nutrition and menu planning
Costing and portion control
Specialist equipment both small and large scale
Communication and record keeping
Environmental considerations
Students will be expected to supply their own ingredients for practical sessions that will include
the selection storage preparation and serving of
Students will also be expected to purchase a white chef‟s jacket from the College which they
must wear to all practical sessions
Meat and poultry Convenience products
Fish Sauces
Eggs Basic dough products
Dairy products Basic pastry products
Cereals flour rice pasta Cakes sponges and scones
Vegetables and fruit
Page|23 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CATERING (GCSE) continued
Exam Board WJEC
Assessment
Visits
It is hoped that there will be some visits to local restaurants and a catering college Chefs may visit
some lessons to give demonstrations or work with students in practical lessons
Career Progression
Sous Chef Cake Decorator Junior Kitchen Assistant WaitressWaiter Nutritionist Dietician Food
Technologist Baker etc
60 of the final grade will come from 2
practical tasks where students must show
catering skills related to food preparation and
service
Each task must be accompanied by a folder
of notes that cover the investigation planning
and evaluation of the task
Task 1 (15 hours) will take place in Year 10
Task 2 (30 hours) will take place in Year 11
40 of the final grade will come from a
written examination paper (1 frac14 hours) on
Catering food and the customer
This will be taken at the end of Year 11
24|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CERTIFICATE IN CONSTRUCTION
Exam Board CITY amp GUILDS
This course is ideal for all students who are considering
a career in any part of the construction or building
industry It is of benefit weather they are considering a
craft or management position
Course Information
Students study for six periods a week and in the first
year concentrate on basic building skills
Carpentry
Electrics
Plumbing
Bricklaying
Health and safety
Site management
This is done through the City and Guilds Introductory Certificate in Basic Construction Skills in which
eight practical tasks must be passed and one theoretical on line test
The second year allows students to develop along their chosen path either developing their craft
skills or moving towards a professional career via the Diplomas in Construction and the Built
Environment This would be an ideal path for those considering a career in
Building management
Architecture
Town planning
Surveying
Engineering
Building control
Environmentalist
Landscape Architecture
Those students not considering a professional career would expand their skills in chosen areas
through further City and Guilds qualifications
Page|25 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 FIRST CERTIFICATE IN PERFORMING ARTS DANCE
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Students will look at FIVE different units in order to achieve a
qualification on this course
The most appropriate units can be selected according to
the individual needs of each group from the following list
Performing Dance
The Development of Dance
Working in the Performing Arts Industry
Professional Development in the Performing Arts
Industry
Understanding Dance
Contemporary Dance
Jazz Dance
Musical Theatre
Makeup for Performers
There is a significant emphasis on Choreographic and
performance skills throughout each unit and students will
be expected to
Learn set dances
Learn dance vocabulary
Choreograph solo duo and small group dances
Improve their performance and technical skills
Perform in front of their peers and a broader based audience
See professionals at work
Write reviews of works
Study the effect of costume set design and props
Look at the cultural and historical context of dances they view
The course is internally assessed throughout by the teacher and students are informally
assessed during every lesson Students will also be assessed more formally through
Assignments which meet the criteria for each Unit These are marked by the teacher and
internally verified by another specialist teacher to ensure that they are of the highest quality
Students opting for this course must understand that to achieve a good grade at BTEC they
have to have a love of making up (choreographing) and performing dances to others They
must also have some basic dance ability such as being able to move in time with the music
Students will need to work in bare feet for much of this course
Students who enjoy all aspects of dance and movement and have the confidence to perform
to a small audience will be well suited to this course Students will be expected to work in their
own time after school to perfect their dances and complete Assignment briefs They should
also be happy to work in a range of different dance styles and not just one particular style
26|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
DRAMA (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
GCSE Drama is an exciting and practical course which offers opportunities to become a skilled
and confident performer
The course aims to encourage students to develop
an interest in and understanding of a range of
drama and theatre experiences
increased self and group awareness
imaginative creative communication and
social skills
a love and appreciation of attending a range of
live theatre experiences
The course consists of two parts
Coursework 60
Two of the following options only one of which may be a technicaldesign skill
Devised thematic work for performance to an audience
Acting
Improvisation
Theatre in Education presentation
Dancedrama
Set
Costume
Make-up
Properties
Masks
Puppets
Lighting
Sound
Stage management
Each option is assessed through two parts
Part One A mark awarded for group and communication skills
Part Two A mark awarded for the final performance
Written Paper 40
2 hours
A choice of any two questions based on the following sections
A Set play bdquoAnimal Farm‟
B Response to live productions seen during the course
Page|27 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ETHICS (GCSE)
Exam Board OCR
The bdquoPhilosophy and Ethics‟ GCSE will allow students to explore the fundamental questions
about life and existence encourage their personal social and cultural development and
enhance their understanding of different cultures and belief systems
Over the course of the two years students will study important and thought-provoking issues
such as the nature and existence of God good and evil and the conflict between religion
and science relationships poverty and medical ethics peace and justice and the role of the
media in today‟s world It is a broad satisfying and worthwhile course of study designed to
challenge and stimulate students and equip them with the necessary skills to lead constructive
and thoughtful lives in the modern world
28|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
FILM STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
ldquoThe secret to film is that its an illusionrdquo
George Lucas Director of Star Wars
This course is ideal for any student who is
Able to work independently or as part of a team
Creative and practical but also analytical
Enthusiastic about films
Interested in making their own short films
Over the two years students will
Plan storyboard film and edit a short film working in a small
group adding their own music and special effects
Understand how films are made and promoted
Learn about the business of making films
Make a close study of one genre of Hollywood films (currently Disaster Films)
Closely research and study at least two different non-Hollywood Films (made in Britain
Europe or Africa)
Prepare their own film promotion campaign
Write an in-depth analysis of films of their choice
Assessment is through
A portfolio of coursework and also
Two end of course examinations
Although it is a new course Film Studies is already a popular choice for many students
combining well with the Media study in English as well as Media
Studies itself Film Studies is increasingly well
thought of by many colleges as it combines
a practical creative approach with
analytical skills
From Citizen Kane to Inception
Page|29 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
FRENCH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
The course outline for French is similar to Spanish It is not compulsory to have previous
knowledge of the language before starting the course but you need to be aware that it will
be more challenging for you and you need to put in a lot of effort to succeed However it is
not at all impossible
30|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GEOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Geography is a fascinating and wide-reaching subject and it has been shown that students
with Geography qualifications are some of the most employable
Why you should take Geography GCSE
It provides you with an understanding of global issues which will affect our lives now and
in the future
By the end of their GCSE you will have a better understanding of the way the world
works
Geography is a good link between the arts and sciences so it will help you in their other
subjects
You will understand how physical landscapes (eg rivers coasts mountains) are formed
You will be allowed to express opinions about people and places
Geography includes a range of academic skills that you will use in your future studies
Skills gained from Geography include
How to research and to investigate
Problem solving
Real world numeracy
How to collect record present and analyse data
Map reading
Creative thinking
How to write in an essay style and in a scientific style
Empathy and understanding of others
Topics of study will include
How are natural landscapes formed and how can we manage
them
What causes and how can we manage natural hazards
How do weather and climate work
How can we manage population around the world
How do towns and cities expand and how are they managed
How and why are some places rich whilst others are poor
How can we ensure development of global resources is sustainable
Page|31 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board AQA
Career Links (As printed by the Royal Geographical Society)
How is the course assessed
GCSE Geography is assessed by two written Examinations (75) and by Coursework (25) in
the form of a Controlled Assessment
Fieldwork at the South Coast and elsewhere is an essential part of this course
Travel and tourist industry
Travel Guide Researcher
Property Researcher
Lawyers
Senior Researcher for County
Council
Government Statistician
TV Locations Unit
Business Consultants
Planners
32|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GRAPHICS (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
If you are interested in the world of advertising like
developing logos and posters always have an interest in
the covers of DVDs books amp games and really enjoy
making products then this is the course for you
Course Information
A large part of the course is a practical investigation
into the techniques and materials used in the
advertising and packaging we see around us every
day
Students will develop skills in drawing both free hand and using computer aided design
model making printing techniques logo designing greetings card and popup book
design and build up skills to design DVD covers labels and posters
To be able to present this to an industrial standard students will use desktop publishing
software such as GIMP (a variation of Photoshop) and computer aided design packages
such as Google Sketchup 2D Design and Fireworks They will get the chance to use the
new computer aided manufacturing milling machine to design and make work like
models signs and games
Assessment
Students will complete a major project and portfolio that counts towards 60 of the overall
GCSE grade Previous projects have included creating a popup book producing
promotional material for the Olympics designing the identity and packaging for a new band
and making a travel game for children
Externally set assignment by the Exam board will account for 40 The typical brief might look
like this
A leading perfumeaftershave manufacturer are aware that the environment is a
current issue The general public are concerned about so want an environmentally
friendly perfumeaftershave bottle and packaging designed to meet the current
market needs You are to design and make a model bottle including the packaging
Career Progression
Or anything in the creative industries
Graphic designer Work in advertising Web designer
Architect Product designer Set designer
Computer game designer Window dresser Magazine editor
Fashion designer Comic book creator Book illustrator
Artist
Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a
range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme
conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)
Content
Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated
situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a
portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are
required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key
skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam
They will study the following subjects at Level 1
Shampoo and condition hair
Blow drying
Contribute to performing and colouring process
Contribute to the development of effective working
relationships
Support the health and safety of the salon
Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas
Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is
complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and
seminars
All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical
assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress
How will they be assessed
They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical
assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on
progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered
individually at different stages throughout the course
There are four areas of assessment
Practical They carry out the skill
Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill
Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit
Online tests
Progression
They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such
as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme
34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and
opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal
subject for you
You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability
to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely
untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills
What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for
History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities
alike It is particularly useful for the following careers
Course Information
The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills
covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of
these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in
the classroom
Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams
almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students
maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two
year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work
Each of the following units is worth 25
Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations
Key topics
bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56
bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)
bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991
Law
Journalism
Television production and research
Advertising
Research
Marketing
Business Management
Accountancy
Archaeology
Museum work
Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939
Key Topics
bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939
bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Holocaust
Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970
Key topics
bull McCarthyism and the Red scare
bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King
bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies
bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)
Representations of History
CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990
36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT
Exam Board OCR
The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-
requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres
and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the
recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students
education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and
employers
Course Information
The course aims to develop
Problem-solving skills through the practical real life
application of ICT to complex problems
The ability to analyse appraise and make critical
judgements about the use of ICT systems
An awareness of the role of ICT in the management
manipulation and dissemination of information
Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with
others
The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and
competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist
tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final
student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms
of ICT problem solving and project management
There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been
completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer
Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc
Assessment
Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two
GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟
equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE
In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students
must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two
mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2
Diploma
Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become
increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics
magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such
as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students
to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages
we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as
they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of
audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-
world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very
relevant and very challenging
Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different
forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is
a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in
a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also
able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in
an organised way
Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to
looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as
bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns
constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe
Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied
interesting and highly rewarding
Coursework
The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall
assessment of the course Students produce three assignments
for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical
Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment
Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical
Production and Evaluation
Assessment
This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is
undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for
the qualification
Recent topics for the examination have included
Soap opera Quiz shows
Action Films The Popular Press
Music magazines
38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning
The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist
learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering
Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills
The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to
broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students
who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical
career within the sector
Progression
The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate
(VRQ) in the appropriate career route
Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using
the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship
framework) in the appropriate route
Potential Job Opportunities
Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder
Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician
Assessment Methods
Multiple Choice Examination
Oral Examination
Portfolio of Evidence
Practical Demonstration Assignment
Practical Examination
Task-based Controlled Assessment
Written Examination
Overall Assessment Method
Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit
The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the
learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test
results
Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing
and ListeningAppraising
Performing (30)
Students perform music throughout the course The two best
recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and
one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any
type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour
time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during
that period
For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental
vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)
a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc
For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an
improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing
a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording
Composing (30)
Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the
exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must
come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed
to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material
to make a new piece out of the old one
ListeningAppraising (40)
Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a
series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final
question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music
played in the exam hall
Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam
The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are
Western Classical Music 1600-1899
Music in the 20th Century
Popular Music in Context
World Music
40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching
research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic
Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not
required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music
classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C
grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas
There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some
they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is
hard work but its good fun too
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC
(EDEXCEL)
The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used
by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the
BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire
assessment is coursework based
Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)
Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the
Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a
portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of
A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links
with others
The Performer‟s role
Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer
Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)
Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students
the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the
equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own
recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves
A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)
including costs
A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it
safely
Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording
techniques
Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what
they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating
various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is
designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to
work in the Music Industry
This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic
Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will
spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software
and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs
The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both
exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both
qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)
Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as
individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily
being assessed on everything at the end of the course
A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction
grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up
with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx
42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will
learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer
software
You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white
photographs
Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based
photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-
journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new
media practice
Assessment
This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home
is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks
There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the
marks
Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SPANISH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
All students have the choice to continue
with Spanish which they have been
studying since Year 7 It would be a wise
choice to continue with Spanish as the
ability to speak a second language is not
only useful but is advantageous in
today‟s world Our closer connection
with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even
a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers
Course Information
The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based
on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage
Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to
communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding
Topics covered are
Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo
Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink
Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo
Free time shopping money new technology sports media
Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo
Home local area and the environment
Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo
School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs
Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and
listening at the end of Year 11
44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2
Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with
the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to
vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport
The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a
range of skills and techniques personal qualities and
attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter
the workplace
Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study
1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction
The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge
and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in
instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning
and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills
2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities
The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire
motivate and improve the performance of a selected target
group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It
encourages students to work in a team situation to organise
plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement
3 Injury in Sport
The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and
their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will
enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries
4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport
The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in
the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and
enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people
(Units to be studied are subject to change)
Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TEXTILES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of
textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The
students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following
areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction
applied textiles and embellished textiles
Assessment and Coursework Balance
In their first year the students will be required to produce two
extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will
follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The
students will work from first hand observations collecting and
developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and
textiles based techniques From this research and developmental
stage students will design and produce a final piece
During the second year students will begin by completing an
extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an
externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted
will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment
will account for 40
The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual
style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they
learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a
more personal response to a theme
Visits
Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources
such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second
year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within
the industry today
Why choose Textiles
Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more
confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level
course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles
The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range
of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior
design styling textiles design and costume design
46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)
Exam Board AQA
Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology
Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three
subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three
separate GCSEs
What are the differences between Triple Science and other
science GCSEs
This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will
be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of
the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award
What are the advantages of studying Triple Science
The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into
bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for
bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge
Who should consider taking Triple Science
Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope
with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a
related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those
students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this
course
The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school
GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics
Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25
Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25
Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25
Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25
Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS
2012 - 2014
Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4
option subjects
Please note
We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If
through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we
cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course
Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012
Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012
Make a record of your choice on the table below before
handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the
Options Information Evening
SUBJECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
Mo
st
De
sire
d
3D Design
Art
Catering
Construction
Dance
Drama
Ethics
Film Studies
French
Geography
Graphics
Hairdressing
History
ICT
Media Studies
Motor Vehicle
Music
Spanish
(Diploma) Sport
Textiles
Triple Sciences
Please tick if you would like to be
considered to do EBacc Please
remember that you need to
include Geography or History and
French or Spanish as your subject
options
Chessington Community College
Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS
Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603
wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk
![Page 20: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a](https://reader035.vdocument.in/reader035/viewer/2022062413/5a76533a7f8b9aa3618d22a0/html5/thumbnails/20.jpg)
Page|23 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CATERING (GCSE) continued
Exam Board WJEC
Assessment
Visits
It is hoped that there will be some visits to local restaurants and a catering college Chefs may visit
some lessons to give demonstrations or work with students in practical lessons
Career Progression
Sous Chef Cake Decorator Junior Kitchen Assistant WaitressWaiter Nutritionist Dietician Food
Technologist Baker etc
60 of the final grade will come from 2
practical tasks where students must show
catering skills related to food preparation and
service
Each task must be accompanied by a folder
of notes that cover the investigation planning
and evaluation of the task
Task 1 (15 hours) will take place in Year 10
Task 2 (30 hours) will take place in Year 11
40 of the final grade will come from a
written examination paper (1 frac14 hours) on
Catering food and the customer
This will be taken at the end of Year 11
24|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CERTIFICATE IN CONSTRUCTION
Exam Board CITY amp GUILDS
This course is ideal for all students who are considering
a career in any part of the construction or building
industry It is of benefit weather they are considering a
craft or management position
Course Information
Students study for six periods a week and in the first
year concentrate on basic building skills
Carpentry
Electrics
Plumbing
Bricklaying
Health and safety
Site management
This is done through the City and Guilds Introductory Certificate in Basic Construction Skills in which
eight practical tasks must be passed and one theoretical on line test
The second year allows students to develop along their chosen path either developing their craft
skills or moving towards a professional career via the Diplomas in Construction and the Built
Environment This would be an ideal path for those considering a career in
Building management
Architecture
Town planning
Surveying
Engineering
Building control
Environmentalist
Landscape Architecture
Those students not considering a professional career would expand their skills in chosen areas
through further City and Guilds qualifications
Page|25 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 FIRST CERTIFICATE IN PERFORMING ARTS DANCE
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Students will look at FIVE different units in order to achieve a
qualification on this course
The most appropriate units can be selected according to
the individual needs of each group from the following list
Performing Dance
The Development of Dance
Working in the Performing Arts Industry
Professional Development in the Performing Arts
Industry
Understanding Dance
Contemporary Dance
Jazz Dance
Musical Theatre
Makeup for Performers
There is a significant emphasis on Choreographic and
performance skills throughout each unit and students will
be expected to
Learn set dances
Learn dance vocabulary
Choreograph solo duo and small group dances
Improve their performance and technical skills
Perform in front of their peers and a broader based audience
See professionals at work
Write reviews of works
Study the effect of costume set design and props
Look at the cultural and historical context of dances they view
The course is internally assessed throughout by the teacher and students are informally
assessed during every lesson Students will also be assessed more formally through
Assignments which meet the criteria for each Unit These are marked by the teacher and
internally verified by another specialist teacher to ensure that they are of the highest quality
Students opting for this course must understand that to achieve a good grade at BTEC they
have to have a love of making up (choreographing) and performing dances to others They
must also have some basic dance ability such as being able to move in time with the music
Students will need to work in bare feet for much of this course
Students who enjoy all aspects of dance and movement and have the confidence to perform
to a small audience will be well suited to this course Students will be expected to work in their
own time after school to perfect their dances and complete Assignment briefs They should
also be happy to work in a range of different dance styles and not just one particular style
26|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
DRAMA (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
GCSE Drama is an exciting and practical course which offers opportunities to become a skilled
and confident performer
The course aims to encourage students to develop
an interest in and understanding of a range of
drama and theatre experiences
increased self and group awareness
imaginative creative communication and
social skills
a love and appreciation of attending a range of
live theatre experiences
The course consists of two parts
Coursework 60
Two of the following options only one of which may be a technicaldesign skill
Devised thematic work for performance to an audience
Acting
Improvisation
Theatre in Education presentation
Dancedrama
Set
Costume
Make-up
Properties
Masks
Puppets
Lighting
Sound
Stage management
Each option is assessed through two parts
Part One A mark awarded for group and communication skills
Part Two A mark awarded for the final performance
Written Paper 40
2 hours
A choice of any two questions based on the following sections
A Set play bdquoAnimal Farm‟
B Response to live productions seen during the course
Page|27 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ETHICS (GCSE)
Exam Board OCR
The bdquoPhilosophy and Ethics‟ GCSE will allow students to explore the fundamental questions
about life and existence encourage their personal social and cultural development and
enhance their understanding of different cultures and belief systems
Over the course of the two years students will study important and thought-provoking issues
such as the nature and existence of God good and evil and the conflict between religion
and science relationships poverty and medical ethics peace and justice and the role of the
media in today‟s world It is a broad satisfying and worthwhile course of study designed to
challenge and stimulate students and equip them with the necessary skills to lead constructive
and thoughtful lives in the modern world
28|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
FILM STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
ldquoThe secret to film is that its an illusionrdquo
George Lucas Director of Star Wars
This course is ideal for any student who is
Able to work independently or as part of a team
Creative and practical but also analytical
Enthusiastic about films
Interested in making their own short films
Over the two years students will
Plan storyboard film and edit a short film working in a small
group adding their own music and special effects
Understand how films are made and promoted
Learn about the business of making films
Make a close study of one genre of Hollywood films (currently Disaster Films)
Closely research and study at least two different non-Hollywood Films (made in Britain
Europe or Africa)
Prepare their own film promotion campaign
Write an in-depth analysis of films of their choice
Assessment is through
A portfolio of coursework and also
Two end of course examinations
Although it is a new course Film Studies is already a popular choice for many students
combining well with the Media study in English as well as Media
Studies itself Film Studies is increasingly well
thought of by many colleges as it combines
a practical creative approach with
analytical skills
From Citizen Kane to Inception
Page|29 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
FRENCH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
The course outline for French is similar to Spanish It is not compulsory to have previous
knowledge of the language before starting the course but you need to be aware that it will
be more challenging for you and you need to put in a lot of effort to succeed However it is
not at all impossible
30|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GEOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Geography is a fascinating and wide-reaching subject and it has been shown that students
with Geography qualifications are some of the most employable
Why you should take Geography GCSE
It provides you with an understanding of global issues which will affect our lives now and
in the future
By the end of their GCSE you will have a better understanding of the way the world
works
Geography is a good link between the arts and sciences so it will help you in their other
subjects
You will understand how physical landscapes (eg rivers coasts mountains) are formed
You will be allowed to express opinions about people and places
Geography includes a range of academic skills that you will use in your future studies
Skills gained from Geography include
How to research and to investigate
Problem solving
Real world numeracy
How to collect record present and analyse data
Map reading
Creative thinking
How to write in an essay style and in a scientific style
Empathy and understanding of others
Topics of study will include
How are natural landscapes formed and how can we manage
them
What causes and how can we manage natural hazards
How do weather and climate work
How can we manage population around the world
How do towns and cities expand and how are they managed
How and why are some places rich whilst others are poor
How can we ensure development of global resources is sustainable
Page|31 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board AQA
Career Links (As printed by the Royal Geographical Society)
How is the course assessed
GCSE Geography is assessed by two written Examinations (75) and by Coursework (25) in
the form of a Controlled Assessment
Fieldwork at the South Coast and elsewhere is an essential part of this course
Travel and tourist industry
Travel Guide Researcher
Property Researcher
Lawyers
Senior Researcher for County
Council
Government Statistician
TV Locations Unit
Business Consultants
Planners
32|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GRAPHICS (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
If you are interested in the world of advertising like
developing logos and posters always have an interest in
the covers of DVDs books amp games and really enjoy
making products then this is the course for you
Course Information
A large part of the course is a practical investigation
into the techniques and materials used in the
advertising and packaging we see around us every
day
Students will develop skills in drawing both free hand and using computer aided design
model making printing techniques logo designing greetings card and popup book
design and build up skills to design DVD covers labels and posters
To be able to present this to an industrial standard students will use desktop publishing
software such as GIMP (a variation of Photoshop) and computer aided design packages
such as Google Sketchup 2D Design and Fireworks They will get the chance to use the
new computer aided manufacturing milling machine to design and make work like
models signs and games
Assessment
Students will complete a major project and portfolio that counts towards 60 of the overall
GCSE grade Previous projects have included creating a popup book producing
promotional material for the Olympics designing the identity and packaging for a new band
and making a travel game for children
Externally set assignment by the Exam board will account for 40 The typical brief might look
like this
A leading perfumeaftershave manufacturer are aware that the environment is a
current issue The general public are concerned about so want an environmentally
friendly perfumeaftershave bottle and packaging designed to meet the current
market needs You are to design and make a model bottle including the packaging
Career Progression
Or anything in the creative industries
Graphic designer Work in advertising Web designer
Architect Product designer Set designer
Computer game designer Window dresser Magazine editor
Fashion designer Comic book creator Book illustrator
Artist
Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a
range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme
conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)
Content
Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated
situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a
portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are
required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key
skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam
They will study the following subjects at Level 1
Shampoo and condition hair
Blow drying
Contribute to performing and colouring process
Contribute to the development of effective working
relationships
Support the health and safety of the salon
Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas
Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is
complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and
seminars
All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical
assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress
How will they be assessed
They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical
assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on
progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered
individually at different stages throughout the course
There are four areas of assessment
Practical They carry out the skill
Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill
Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit
Online tests
Progression
They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such
as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme
34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and
opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal
subject for you
You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability
to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely
untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills
What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for
History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities
alike It is particularly useful for the following careers
Course Information
The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills
covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of
these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in
the classroom
Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams
almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students
maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two
year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work
Each of the following units is worth 25
Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations
Key topics
bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56
bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)
bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991
Law
Journalism
Television production and research
Advertising
Research
Marketing
Business Management
Accountancy
Archaeology
Museum work
Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939
Key Topics
bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939
bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Holocaust
Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970
Key topics
bull McCarthyism and the Red scare
bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King
bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies
bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)
Representations of History
CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990
36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT
Exam Board OCR
The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-
requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres
and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the
recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students
education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and
employers
Course Information
The course aims to develop
Problem-solving skills through the practical real life
application of ICT to complex problems
The ability to analyse appraise and make critical
judgements about the use of ICT systems
An awareness of the role of ICT in the management
manipulation and dissemination of information
Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with
others
The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and
competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist
tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final
student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms
of ICT problem solving and project management
There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been
completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer
Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc
Assessment
Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two
GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟
equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE
In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students
must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two
mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2
Diploma
Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become
increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics
magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such
as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students
to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages
we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as
they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of
audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-
world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very
relevant and very challenging
Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different
forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is
a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in
a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also
able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in
an organised way
Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to
looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as
bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns
constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe
Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied
interesting and highly rewarding
Coursework
The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall
assessment of the course Students produce three assignments
for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical
Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment
Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical
Production and Evaluation
Assessment
This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is
undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for
the qualification
Recent topics for the examination have included
Soap opera Quiz shows
Action Films The Popular Press
Music magazines
38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning
The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist
learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering
Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills
The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to
broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students
who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical
career within the sector
Progression
The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate
(VRQ) in the appropriate career route
Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using
the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship
framework) in the appropriate route
Potential Job Opportunities
Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder
Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician
Assessment Methods
Multiple Choice Examination
Oral Examination
Portfolio of Evidence
Practical Demonstration Assignment
Practical Examination
Task-based Controlled Assessment
Written Examination
Overall Assessment Method
Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit
The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the
learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test
results
Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing
and ListeningAppraising
Performing (30)
Students perform music throughout the course The two best
recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and
one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any
type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour
time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during
that period
For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental
vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)
a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc
For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an
improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing
a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording
Composing (30)
Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the
exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must
come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed
to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material
to make a new piece out of the old one
ListeningAppraising (40)
Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a
series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final
question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music
played in the exam hall
Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam
The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are
Western Classical Music 1600-1899
Music in the 20th Century
Popular Music in Context
World Music
40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching
research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic
Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not
required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music
classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C
grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas
There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some
they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is
hard work but its good fun too
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC
(EDEXCEL)
The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used
by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the
BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire
assessment is coursework based
Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)
Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the
Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a
portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of
A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links
with others
The Performer‟s role
Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer
Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)
Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students
the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the
equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own
recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves
A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)
including costs
A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it
safely
Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording
techniques
Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what
they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating
various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is
designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to
work in the Music Industry
This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic
Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will
spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software
and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs
The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both
exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both
qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)
Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as
individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily
being assessed on everything at the end of the course
A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction
grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up
with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx
42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will
learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer
software
You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white
photographs
Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based
photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-
journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new
media practice
Assessment
This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home
is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks
There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the
marks
Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SPANISH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
All students have the choice to continue
with Spanish which they have been
studying since Year 7 It would be a wise
choice to continue with Spanish as the
ability to speak a second language is not
only useful but is advantageous in
today‟s world Our closer connection
with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even
a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers
Course Information
The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based
on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage
Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to
communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding
Topics covered are
Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo
Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink
Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo
Free time shopping money new technology sports media
Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo
Home local area and the environment
Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo
School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs
Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and
listening at the end of Year 11
44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2
Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with
the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to
vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport
The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a
range of skills and techniques personal qualities and
attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter
the workplace
Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study
1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction
The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge
and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in
instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning
and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills
2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities
The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire
motivate and improve the performance of a selected target
group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It
encourages students to work in a team situation to organise
plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement
3 Injury in Sport
The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and
their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will
enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries
4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport
The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in
the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and
enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people
(Units to be studied are subject to change)
Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TEXTILES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of
textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The
students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following
areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction
applied textiles and embellished textiles
Assessment and Coursework Balance
In their first year the students will be required to produce two
extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will
follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The
students will work from first hand observations collecting and
developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and
textiles based techniques From this research and developmental
stage students will design and produce a final piece
During the second year students will begin by completing an
extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an
externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted
will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment
will account for 40
The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual
style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they
learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a
more personal response to a theme
Visits
Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources
such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second
year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within
the industry today
Why choose Textiles
Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more
confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level
course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles
The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range
of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior
design styling textiles design and costume design
46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)
Exam Board AQA
Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology
Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three
subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three
separate GCSEs
What are the differences between Triple Science and other
science GCSEs
This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will
be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of
the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award
What are the advantages of studying Triple Science
The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into
bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for
bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge
Who should consider taking Triple Science
Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope
with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a
related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those
students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this
course
The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school
GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics
Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25
Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25
Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25
Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25
Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS
2012 - 2014
Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4
option subjects
Please note
We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If
through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we
cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course
Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012
Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012
Make a record of your choice on the table below before
handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the
Options Information Evening
SUBJECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
Mo
st
De
sire
d
3D Design
Art
Catering
Construction
Dance
Drama
Ethics
Film Studies
French
Geography
Graphics
Hairdressing
History
ICT
Media Studies
Motor Vehicle
Music
Spanish
(Diploma) Sport
Textiles
Triple Sciences
Please tick if you would like to be
considered to do EBacc Please
remember that you need to
include Geography or History and
French or Spanish as your subject
options
Chessington Community College
Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS
Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603
wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk
![Page 21: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a](https://reader035.vdocument.in/reader035/viewer/2022062413/5a76533a7f8b9aa3618d22a0/html5/thumbnails/21.jpg)
24|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CERTIFICATE IN CONSTRUCTION
Exam Board CITY amp GUILDS
This course is ideal for all students who are considering
a career in any part of the construction or building
industry It is of benefit weather they are considering a
craft or management position
Course Information
Students study for six periods a week and in the first
year concentrate on basic building skills
Carpentry
Electrics
Plumbing
Bricklaying
Health and safety
Site management
This is done through the City and Guilds Introductory Certificate in Basic Construction Skills in which
eight practical tasks must be passed and one theoretical on line test
The second year allows students to develop along their chosen path either developing their craft
skills or moving towards a professional career via the Diplomas in Construction and the Built
Environment This would be an ideal path for those considering a career in
Building management
Architecture
Town planning
Surveying
Engineering
Building control
Environmentalist
Landscape Architecture
Those students not considering a professional career would expand their skills in chosen areas
through further City and Guilds qualifications
Page|25 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 FIRST CERTIFICATE IN PERFORMING ARTS DANCE
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Students will look at FIVE different units in order to achieve a
qualification on this course
The most appropriate units can be selected according to
the individual needs of each group from the following list
Performing Dance
The Development of Dance
Working in the Performing Arts Industry
Professional Development in the Performing Arts
Industry
Understanding Dance
Contemporary Dance
Jazz Dance
Musical Theatre
Makeup for Performers
There is a significant emphasis on Choreographic and
performance skills throughout each unit and students will
be expected to
Learn set dances
Learn dance vocabulary
Choreograph solo duo and small group dances
Improve their performance and technical skills
Perform in front of their peers and a broader based audience
See professionals at work
Write reviews of works
Study the effect of costume set design and props
Look at the cultural and historical context of dances they view
The course is internally assessed throughout by the teacher and students are informally
assessed during every lesson Students will also be assessed more formally through
Assignments which meet the criteria for each Unit These are marked by the teacher and
internally verified by another specialist teacher to ensure that they are of the highest quality
Students opting for this course must understand that to achieve a good grade at BTEC they
have to have a love of making up (choreographing) and performing dances to others They
must also have some basic dance ability such as being able to move in time with the music
Students will need to work in bare feet for much of this course
Students who enjoy all aspects of dance and movement and have the confidence to perform
to a small audience will be well suited to this course Students will be expected to work in their
own time after school to perfect their dances and complete Assignment briefs They should
also be happy to work in a range of different dance styles and not just one particular style
26|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
DRAMA (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
GCSE Drama is an exciting and practical course which offers opportunities to become a skilled
and confident performer
The course aims to encourage students to develop
an interest in and understanding of a range of
drama and theatre experiences
increased self and group awareness
imaginative creative communication and
social skills
a love and appreciation of attending a range of
live theatre experiences
The course consists of two parts
Coursework 60
Two of the following options only one of which may be a technicaldesign skill
Devised thematic work for performance to an audience
Acting
Improvisation
Theatre in Education presentation
Dancedrama
Set
Costume
Make-up
Properties
Masks
Puppets
Lighting
Sound
Stage management
Each option is assessed through two parts
Part One A mark awarded for group and communication skills
Part Two A mark awarded for the final performance
Written Paper 40
2 hours
A choice of any two questions based on the following sections
A Set play bdquoAnimal Farm‟
B Response to live productions seen during the course
Page|27 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ETHICS (GCSE)
Exam Board OCR
The bdquoPhilosophy and Ethics‟ GCSE will allow students to explore the fundamental questions
about life and existence encourage their personal social and cultural development and
enhance their understanding of different cultures and belief systems
Over the course of the two years students will study important and thought-provoking issues
such as the nature and existence of God good and evil and the conflict between religion
and science relationships poverty and medical ethics peace and justice and the role of the
media in today‟s world It is a broad satisfying and worthwhile course of study designed to
challenge and stimulate students and equip them with the necessary skills to lead constructive
and thoughtful lives in the modern world
28|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
FILM STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
ldquoThe secret to film is that its an illusionrdquo
George Lucas Director of Star Wars
This course is ideal for any student who is
Able to work independently or as part of a team
Creative and practical but also analytical
Enthusiastic about films
Interested in making their own short films
Over the two years students will
Plan storyboard film and edit a short film working in a small
group adding their own music and special effects
Understand how films are made and promoted
Learn about the business of making films
Make a close study of one genre of Hollywood films (currently Disaster Films)
Closely research and study at least two different non-Hollywood Films (made in Britain
Europe or Africa)
Prepare their own film promotion campaign
Write an in-depth analysis of films of their choice
Assessment is through
A portfolio of coursework and also
Two end of course examinations
Although it is a new course Film Studies is already a popular choice for many students
combining well with the Media study in English as well as Media
Studies itself Film Studies is increasingly well
thought of by many colleges as it combines
a practical creative approach with
analytical skills
From Citizen Kane to Inception
Page|29 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
FRENCH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
The course outline for French is similar to Spanish It is not compulsory to have previous
knowledge of the language before starting the course but you need to be aware that it will
be more challenging for you and you need to put in a lot of effort to succeed However it is
not at all impossible
30|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GEOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Geography is a fascinating and wide-reaching subject and it has been shown that students
with Geography qualifications are some of the most employable
Why you should take Geography GCSE
It provides you with an understanding of global issues which will affect our lives now and
in the future
By the end of their GCSE you will have a better understanding of the way the world
works
Geography is a good link between the arts and sciences so it will help you in their other
subjects
You will understand how physical landscapes (eg rivers coasts mountains) are formed
You will be allowed to express opinions about people and places
Geography includes a range of academic skills that you will use in your future studies
Skills gained from Geography include
How to research and to investigate
Problem solving
Real world numeracy
How to collect record present and analyse data
Map reading
Creative thinking
How to write in an essay style and in a scientific style
Empathy and understanding of others
Topics of study will include
How are natural landscapes formed and how can we manage
them
What causes and how can we manage natural hazards
How do weather and climate work
How can we manage population around the world
How do towns and cities expand and how are they managed
How and why are some places rich whilst others are poor
How can we ensure development of global resources is sustainable
Page|31 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board AQA
Career Links (As printed by the Royal Geographical Society)
How is the course assessed
GCSE Geography is assessed by two written Examinations (75) and by Coursework (25) in
the form of a Controlled Assessment
Fieldwork at the South Coast and elsewhere is an essential part of this course
Travel and tourist industry
Travel Guide Researcher
Property Researcher
Lawyers
Senior Researcher for County
Council
Government Statistician
TV Locations Unit
Business Consultants
Planners
32|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GRAPHICS (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
If you are interested in the world of advertising like
developing logos and posters always have an interest in
the covers of DVDs books amp games and really enjoy
making products then this is the course for you
Course Information
A large part of the course is a practical investigation
into the techniques and materials used in the
advertising and packaging we see around us every
day
Students will develop skills in drawing both free hand and using computer aided design
model making printing techniques logo designing greetings card and popup book
design and build up skills to design DVD covers labels and posters
To be able to present this to an industrial standard students will use desktop publishing
software such as GIMP (a variation of Photoshop) and computer aided design packages
such as Google Sketchup 2D Design and Fireworks They will get the chance to use the
new computer aided manufacturing milling machine to design and make work like
models signs and games
Assessment
Students will complete a major project and portfolio that counts towards 60 of the overall
GCSE grade Previous projects have included creating a popup book producing
promotional material for the Olympics designing the identity and packaging for a new band
and making a travel game for children
Externally set assignment by the Exam board will account for 40 The typical brief might look
like this
A leading perfumeaftershave manufacturer are aware that the environment is a
current issue The general public are concerned about so want an environmentally
friendly perfumeaftershave bottle and packaging designed to meet the current
market needs You are to design and make a model bottle including the packaging
Career Progression
Or anything in the creative industries
Graphic designer Work in advertising Web designer
Architect Product designer Set designer
Computer game designer Window dresser Magazine editor
Fashion designer Comic book creator Book illustrator
Artist
Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a
range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme
conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)
Content
Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated
situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a
portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are
required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key
skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam
They will study the following subjects at Level 1
Shampoo and condition hair
Blow drying
Contribute to performing and colouring process
Contribute to the development of effective working
relationships
Support the health and safety of the salon
Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas
Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is
complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and
seminars
All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical
assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress
How will they be assessed
They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical
assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on
progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered
individually at different stages throughout the course
There are four areas of assessment
Practical They carry out the skill
Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill
Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit
Online tests
Progression
They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such
as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme
34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and
opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal
subject for you
You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability
to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely
untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills
What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for
History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities
alike It is particularly useful for the following careers
Course Information
The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills
covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of
these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in
the classroom
Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams
almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students
maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two
year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work
Each of the following units is worth 25
Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations
Key topics
bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56
bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)
bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991
Law
Journalism
Television production and research
Advertising
Research
Marketing
Business Management
Accountancy
Archaeology
Museum work
Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939
Key Topics
bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939
bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Holocaust
Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970
Key topics
bull McCarthyism and the Red scare
bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King
bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies
bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)
Representations of History
CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990
36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT
Exam Board OCR
The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-
requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres
and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the
recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students
education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and
employers
Course Information
The course aims to develop
Problem-solving skills through the practical real life
application of ICT to complex problems
The ability to analyse appraise and make critical
judgements about the use of ICT systems
An awareness of the role of ICT in the management
manipulation and dissemination of information
Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with
others
The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and
competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist
tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final
student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms
of ICT problem solving and project management
There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been
completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer
Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc
Assessment
Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two
GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟
equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE
In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students
must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two
mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2
Diploma
Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become
increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics
magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such
as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students
to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages
we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as
they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of
audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-
world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very
relevant and very challenging
Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different
forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is
a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in
a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also
able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in
an organised way
Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to
looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as
bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns
constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe
Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied
interesting and highly rewarding
Coursework
The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall
assessment of the course Students produce three assignments
for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical
Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment
Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical
Production and Evaluation
Assessment
This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is
undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for
the qualification
Recent topics for the examination have included
Soap opera Quiz shows
Action Films The Popular Press
Music magazines
38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning
The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist
learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering
Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills
The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to
broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students
who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical
career within the sector
Progression
The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate
(VRQ) in the appropriate career route
Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using
the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship
framework) in the appropriate route
Potential Job Opportunities
Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder
Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician
Assessment Methods
Multiple Choice Examination
Oral Examination
Portfolio of Evidence
Practical Demonstration Assignment
Practical Examination
Task-based Controlled Assessment
Written Examination
Overall Assessment Method
Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit
The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the
learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test
results
Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing
and ListeningAppraising
Performing (30)
Students perform music throughout the course The two best
recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and
one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any
type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour
time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during
that period
For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental
vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)
a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc
For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an
improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing
a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording
Composing (30)
Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the
exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must
come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed
to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material
to make a new piece out of the old one
ListeningAppraising (40)
Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a
series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final
question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music
played in the exam hall
Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam
The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are
Western Classical Music 1600-1899
Music in the 20th Century
Popular Music in Context
World Music
40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching
research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic
Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not
required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music
classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C
grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas
There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some
they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is
hard work but its good fun too
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC
(EDEXCEL)
The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used
by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the
BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire
assessment is coursework based
Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)
Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the
Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a
portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of
A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links
with others
The Performer‟s role
Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer
Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)
Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students
the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the
equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own
recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves
A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)
including costs
A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it
safely
Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording
techniques
Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what
they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating
various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is
designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to
work in the Music Industry
This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic
Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will
spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software
and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs
The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both
exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both
qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)
Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as
individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily
being assessed on everything at the end of the course
A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction
grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up
with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx
42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will
learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer
software
You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white
photographs
Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based
photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-
journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new
media practice
Assessment
This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home
is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks
There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the
marks
Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SPANISH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
All students have the choice to continue
with Spanish which they have been
studying since Year 7 It would be a wise
choice to continue with Spanish as the
ability to speak a second language is not
only useful but is advantageous in
today‟s world Our closer connection
with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even
a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers
Course Information
The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based
on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage
Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to
communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding
Topics covered are
Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo
Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink
Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo
Free time shopping money new technology sports media
Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo
Home local area and the environment
Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo
School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs
Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and
listening at the end of Year 11
44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2
Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with
the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to
vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport
The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a
range of skills and techniques personal qualities and
attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter
the workplace
Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study
1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction
The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge
and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in
instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning
and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills
2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities
The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire
motivate and improve the performance of a selected target
group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It
encourages students to work in a team situation to organise
plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement
3 Injury in Sport
The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and
their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will
enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries
4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport
The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in
the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and
enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people
(Units to be studied are subject to change)
Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TEXTILES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of
textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The
students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following
areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction
applied textiles and embellished textiles
Assessment and Coursework Balance
In their first year the students will be required to produce two
extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will
follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The
students will work from first hand observations collecting and
developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and
textiles based techniques From this research and developmental
stage students will design and produce a final piece
During the second year students will begin by completing an
extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an
externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted
will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment
will account for 40
The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual
style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they
learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a
more personal response to a theme
Visits
Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources
such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second
year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within
the industry today
Why choose Textiles
Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more
confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level
course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles
The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range
of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior
design styling textiles design and costume design
46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)
Exam Board AQA
Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology
Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three
subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three
separate GCSEs
What are the differences between Triple Science and other
science GCSEs
This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will
be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of
the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award
What are the advantages of studying Triple Science
The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into
bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for
bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge
Who should consider taking Triple Science
Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope
with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a
related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those
students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this
course
The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school
GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics
Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25
Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25
Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25
Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25
Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS
2012 - 2014
Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4
option subjects
Please note
We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If
through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we
cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course
Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012
Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012
Make a record of your choice on the table below before
handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the
Options Information Evening
SUBJECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
Mo
st
De
sire
d
3D Design
Art
Catering
Construction
Dance
Drama
Ethics
Film Studies
French
Geography
Graphics
Hairdressing
History
ICT
Media Studies
Motor Vehicle
Music
Spanish
(Diploma) Sport
Textiles
Triple Sciences
Please tick if you would like to be
considered to do EBacc Please
remember that you need to
include Geography or History and
French or Spanish as your subject
options
Chessington Community College
Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS
Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603
wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk
![Page 22: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a](https://reader035.vdocument.in/reader035/viewer/2022062413/5a76533a7f8b9aa3618d22a0/html5/thumbnails/22.jpg)
Page|25 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 FIRST CERTIFICATE IN PERFORMING ARTS DANCE
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Students will look at FIVE different units in order to achieve a
qualification on this course
The most appropriate units can be selected according to
the individual needs of each group from the following list
Performing Dance
The Development of Dance
Working in the Performing Arts Industry
Professional Development in the Performing Arts
Industry
Understanding Dance
Contemporary Dance
Jazz Dance
Musical Theatre
Makeup for Performers
There is a significant emphasis on Choreographic and
performance skills throughout each unit and students will
be expected to
Learn set dances
Learn dance vocabulary
Choreograph solo duo and small group dances
Improve their performance and technical skills
Perform in front of their peers and a broader based audience
See professionals at work
Write reviews of works
Study the effect of costume set design and props
Look at the cultural and historical context of dances they view
The course is internally assessed throughout by the teacher and students are informally
assessed during every lesson Students will also be assessed more formally through
Assignments which meet the criteria for each Unit These are marked by the teacher and
internally verified by another specialist teacher to ensure that they are of the highest quality
Students opting for this course must understand that to achieve a good grade at BTEC they
have to have a love of making up (choreographing) and performing dances to others They
must also have some basic dance ability such as being able to move in time with the music
Students will need to work in bare feet for much of this course
Students who enjoy all aspects of dance and movement and have the confidence to perform
to a small audience will be well suited to this course Students will be expected to work in their
own time after school to perfect their dances and complete Assignment briefs They should
also be happy to work in a range of different dance styles and not just one particular style
26|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
DRAMA (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
GCSE Drama is an exciting and practical course which offers opportunities to become a skilled
and confident performer
The course aims to encourage students to develop
an interest in and understanding of a range of
drama and theatre experiences
increased self and group awareness
imaginative creative communication and
social skills
a love and appreciation of attending a range of
live theatre experiences
The course consists of two parts
Coursework 60
Two of the following options only one of which may be a technicaldesign skill
Devised thematic work for performance to an audience
Acting
Improvisation
Theatre in Education presentation
Dancedrama
Set
Costume
Make-up
Properties
Masks
Puppets
Lighting
Sound
Stage management
Each option is assessed through two parts
Part One A mark awarded for group and communication skills
Part Two A mark awarded for the final performance
Written Paper 40
2 hours
A choice of any two questions based on the following sections
A Set play bdquoAnimal Farm‟
B Response to live productions seen during the course
Page|27 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ETHICS (GCSE)
Exam Board OCR
The bdquoPhilosophy and Ethics‟ GCSE will allow students to explore the fundamental questions
about life and existence encourage their personal social and cultural development and
enhance their understanding of different cultures and belief systems
Over the course of the two years students will study important and thought-provoking issues
such as the nature and existence of God good and evil and the conflict between religion
and science relationships poverty and medical ethics peace and justice and the role of the
media in today‟s world It is a broad satisfying and worthwhile course of study designed to
challenge and stimulate students and equip them with the necessary skills to lead constructive
and thoughtful lives in the modern world
28|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
FILM STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
ldquoThe secret to film is that its an illusionrdquo
George Lucas Director of Star Wars
This course is ideal for any student who is
Able to work independently or as part of a team
Creative and practical but also analytical
Enthusiastic about films
Interested in making their own short films
Over the two years students will
Plan storyboard film and edit a short film working in a small
group adding their own music and special effects
Understand how films are made and promoted
Learn about the business of making films
Make a close study of one genre of Hollywood films (currently Disaster Films)
Closely research and study at least two different non-Hollywood Films (made in Britain
Europe or Africa)
Prepare their own film promotion campaign
Write an in-depth analysis of films of their choice
Assessment is through
A portfolio of coursework and also
Two end of course examinations
Although it is a new course Film Studies is already a popular choice for many students
combining well with the Media study in English as well as Media
Studies itself Film Studies is increasingly well
thought of by many colleges as it combines
a practical creative approach with
analytical skills
From Citizen Kane to Inception
Page|29 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
FRENCH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
The course outline for French is similar to Spanish It is not compulsory to have previous
knowledge of the language before starting the course but you need to be aware that it will
be more challenging for you and you need to put in a lot of effort to succeed However it is
not at all impossible
30|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GEOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Geography is a fascinating and wide-reaching subject and it has been shown that students
with Geography qualifications are some of the most employable
Why you should take Geography GCSE
It provides you with an understanding of global issues which will affect our lives now and
in the future
By the end of their GCSE you will have a better understanding of the way the world
works
Geography is a good link between the arts and sciences so it will help you in their other
subjects
You will understand how physical landscapes (eg rivers coasts mountains) are formed
You will be allowed to express opinions about people and places
Geography includes a range of academic skills that you will use in your future studies
Skills gained from Geography include
How to research and to investigate
Problem solving
Real world numeracy
How to collect record present and analyse data
Map reading
Creative thinking
How to write in an essay style and in a scientific style
Empathy and understanding of others
Topics of study will include
How are natural landscapes formed and how can we manage
them
What causes and how can we manage natural hazards
How do weather and climate work
How can we manage population around the world
How do towns and cities expand and how are they managed
How and why are some places rich whilst others are poor
How can we ensure development of global resources is sustainable
Page|31 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board AQA
Career Links (As printed by the Royal Geographical Society)
How is the course assessed
GCSE Geography is assessed by two written Examinations (75) and by Coursework (25) in
the form of a Controlled Assessment
Fieldwork at the South Coast and elsewhere is an essential part of this course
Travel and tourist industry
Travel Guide Researcher
Property Researcher
Lawyers
Senior Researcher for County
Council
Government Statistician
TV Locations Unit
Business Consultants
Planners
32|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GRAPHICS (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
If you are interested in the world of advertising like
developing logos and posters always have an interest in
the covers of DVDs books amp games and really enjoy
making products then this is the course for you
Course Information
A large part of the course is a practical investigation
into the techniques and materials used in the
advertising and packaging we see around us every
day
Students will develop skills in drawing both free hand and using computer aided design
model making printing techniques logo designing greetings card and popup book
design and build up skills to design DVD covers labels and posters
To be able to present this to an industrial standard students will use desktop publishing
software such as GIMP (a variation of Photoshop) and computer aided design packages
such as Google Sketchup 2D Design and Fireworks They will get the chance to use the
new computer aided manufacturing milling machine to design and make work like
models signs and games
Assessment
Students will complete a major project and portfolio that counts towards 60 of the overall
GCSE grade Previous projects have included creating a popup book producing
promotional material for the Olympics designing the identity and packaging for a new band
and making a travel game for children
Externally set assignment by the Exam board will account for 40 The typical brief might look
like this
A leading perfumeaftershave manufacturer are aware that the environment is a
current issue The general public are concerned about so want an environmentally
friendly perfumeaftershave bottle and packaging designed to meet the current
market needs You are to design and make a model bottle including the packaging
Career Progression
Or anything in the creative industries
Graphic designer Work in advertising Web designer
Architect Product designer Set designer
Computer game designer Window dresser Magazine editor
Fashion designer Comic book creator Book illustrator
Artist
Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a
range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme
conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)
Content
Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated
situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a
portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are
required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key
skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam
They will study the following subjects at Level 1
Shampoo and condition hair
Blow drying
Contribute to performing and colouring process
Contribute to the development of effective working
relationships
Support the health and safety of the salon
Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas
Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is
complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and
seminars
All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical
assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress
How will they be assessed
They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical
assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on
progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered
individually at different stages throughout the course
There are four areas of assessment
Practical They carry out the skill
Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill
Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit
Online tests
Progression
They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such
as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme
34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and
opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal
subject for you
You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability
to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely
untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills
What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for
History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities
alike It is particularly useful for the following careers
Course Information
The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills
covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of
these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in
the classroom
Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams
almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students
maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two
year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work
Each of the following units is worth 25
Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations
Key topics
bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56
bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)
bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991
Law
Journalism
Television production and research
Advertising
Research
Marketing
Business Management
Accountancy
Archaeology
Museum work
Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939
Key Topics
bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939
bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Holocaust
Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970
Key topics
bull McCarthyism and the Red scare
bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King
bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies
bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)
Representations of History
CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990
36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT
Exam Board OCR
The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-
requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres
and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the
recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students
education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and
employers
Course Information
The course aims to develop
Problem-solving skills through the practical real life
application of ICT to complex problems
The ability to analyse appraise and make critical
judgements about the use of ICT systems
An awareness of the role of ICT in the management
manipulation and dissemination of information
Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with
others
The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and
competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist
tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final
student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms
of ICT problem solving and project management
There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been
completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer
Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc
Assessment
Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two
GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟
equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE
In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students
must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two
mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2
Diploma
Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become
increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics
magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such
as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students
to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages
we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as
they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of
audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-
world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very
relevant and very challenging
Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different
forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is
a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in
a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also
able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in
an organised way
Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to
looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as
bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns
constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe
Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied
interesting and highly rewarding
Coursework
The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall
assessment of the course Students produce three assignments
for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical
Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment
Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical
Production and Evaluation
Assessment
This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is
undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for
the qualification
Recent topics for the examination have included
Soap opera Quiz shows
Action Films The Popular Press
Music magazines
38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning
The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist
learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering
Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills
The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to
broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students
who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical
career within the sector
Progression
The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate
(VRQ) in the appropriate career route
Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using
the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship
framework) in the appropriate route
Potential Job Opportunities
Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder
Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician
Assessment Methods
Multiple Choice Examination
Oral Examination
Portfolio of Evidence
Practical Demonstration Assignment
Practical Examination
Task-based Controlled Assessment
Written Examination
Overall Assessment Method
Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit
The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the
learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test
results
Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing
and ListeningAppraising
Performing (30)
Students perform music throughout the course The two best
recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and
one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any
type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour
time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during
that period
For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental
vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)
a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc
For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an
improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing
a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording
Composing (30)
Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the
exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must
come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed
to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material
to make a new piece out of the old one
ListeningAppraising (40)
Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a
series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final
question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music
played in the exam hall
Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam
The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are
Western Classical Music 1600-1899
Music in the 20th Century
Popular Music in Context
World Music
40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching
research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic
Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not
required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music
classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C
grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas
There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some
they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is
hard work but its good fun too
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC
(EDEXCEL)
The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used
by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the
BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire
assessment is coursework based
Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)
Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the
Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a
portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of
A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links
with others
The Performer‟s role
Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer
Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)
Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students
the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the
equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own
recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves
A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)
including costs
A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it
safely
Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording
techniques
Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what
they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating
various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is
designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to
work in the Music Industry
This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic
Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will
spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software
and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs
The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both
exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both
qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)
Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as
individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily
being assessed on everything at the end of the course
A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction
grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up
with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx
42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will
learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer
software
You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white
photographs
Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based
photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-
journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new
media practice
Assessment
This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home
is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks
There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the
marks
Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SPANISH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
All students have the choice to continue
with Spanish which they have been
studying since Year 7 It would be a wise
choice to continue with Spanish as the
ability to speak a second language is not
only useful but is advantageous in
today‟s world Our closer connection
with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even
a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers
Course Information
The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based
on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage
Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to
communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding
Topics covered are
Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo
Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink
Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo
Free time shopping money new technology sports media
Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo
Home local area and the environment
Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo
School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs
Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and
listening at the end of Year 11
44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2
Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with
the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to
vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport
The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a
range of skills and techniques personal qualities and
attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter
the workplace
Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study
1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction
The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge
and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in
instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning
and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills
2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities
The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire
motivate and improve the performance of a selected target
group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It
encourages students to work in a team situation to organise
plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement
3 Injury in Sport
The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and
their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will
enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries
4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport
The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in
the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and
enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people
(Units to be studied are subject to change)
Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TEXTILES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of
textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The
students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following
areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction
applied textiles and embellished textiles
Assessment and Coursework Balance
In their first year the students will be required to produce two
extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will
follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The
students will work from first hand observations collecting and
developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and
textiles based techniques From this research and developmental
stage students will design and produce a final piece
During the second year students will begin by completing an
extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an
externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted
will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment
will account for 40
The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual
style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they
learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a
more personal response to a theme
Visits
Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources
such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second
year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within
the industry today
Why choose Textiles
Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more
confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level
course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles
The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range
of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior
design styling textiles design and costume design
46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)
Exam Board AQA
Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology
Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three
subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three
separate GCSEs
What are the differences between Triple Science and other
science GCSEs
This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will
be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of
the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award
What are the advantages of studying Triple Science
The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into
bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for
bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge
Who should consider taking Triple Science
Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope
with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a
related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those
students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this
course
The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school
GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics
Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25
Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25
Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25
Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25
Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS
2012 - 2014
Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4
option subjects
Please note
We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If
through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we
cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course
Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012
Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012
Make a record of your choice on the table below before
handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the
Options Information Evening
SUBJECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
Mo
st
De
sire
d
3D Design
Art
Catering
Construction
Dance
Drama
Ethics
Film Studies
French
Geography
Graphics
Hairdressing
History
ICT
Media Studies
Motor Vehicle
Music
Spanish
(Diploma) Sport
Textiles
Triple Sciences
Please tick if you would like to be
considered to do EBacc Please
remember that you need to
include Geography or History and
French or Spanish as your subject
options
Chessington Community College
Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS
Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603
wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk
![Page 23: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a](https://reader035.vdocument.in/reader035/viewer/2022062413/5a76533a7f8b9aa3618d22a0/html5/thumbnails/23.jpg)
26|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
DRAMA (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
GCSE Drama is an exciting and practical course which offers opportunities to become a skilled
and confident performer
The course aims to encourage students to develop
an interest in and understanding of a range of
drama and theatre experiences
increased self and group awareness
imaginative creative communication and
social skills
a love and appreciation of attending a range of
live theatre experiences
The course consists of two parts
Coursework 60
Two of the following options only one of which may be a technicaldesign skill
Devised thematic work for performance to an audience
Acting
Improvisation
Theatre in Education presentation
Dancedrama
Set
Costume
Make-up
Properties
Masks
Puppets
Lighting
Sound
Stage management
Each option is assessed through two parts
Part One A mark awarded for group and communication skills
Part Two A mark awarded for the final performance
Written Paper 40
2 hours
A choice of any two questions based on the following sections
A Set play bdquoAnimal Farm‟
B Response to live productions seen during the course
Page|27 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ETHICS (GCSE)
Exam Board OCR
The bdquoPhilosophy and Ethics‟ GCSE will allow students to explore the fundamental questions
about life and existence encourage their personal social and cultural development and
enhance their understanding of different cultures and belief systems
Over the course of the two years students will study important and thought-provoking issues
such as the nature and existence of God good and evil and the conflict between religion
and science relationships poverty and medical ethics peace and justice and the role of the
media in today‟s world It is a broad satisfying and worthwhile course of study designed to
challenge and stimulate students and equip them with the necessary skills to lead constructive
and thoughtful lives in the modern world
28|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
FILM STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
ldquoThe secret to film is that its an illusionrdquo
George Lucas Director of Star Wars
This course is ideal for any student who is
Able to work independently or as part of a team
Creative and practical but also analytical
Enthusiastic about films
Interested in making their own short films
Over the two years students will
Plan storyboard film and edit a short film working in a small
group adding their own music and special effects
Understand how films are made and promoted
Learn about the business of making films
Make a close study of one genre of Hollywood films (currently Disaster Films)
Closely research and study at least two different non-Hollywood Films (made in Britain
Europe or Africa)
Prepare their own film promotion campaign
Write an in-depth analysis of films of their choice
Assessment is through
A portfolio of coursework and also
Two end of course examinations
Although it is a new course Film Studies is already a popular choice for many students
combining well with the Media study in English as well as Media
Studies itself Film Studies is increasingly well
thought of by many colleges as it combines
a practical creative approach with
analytical skills
From Citizen Kane to Inception
Page|29 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
FRENCH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
The course outline for French is similar to Spanish It is not compulsory to have previous
knowledge of the language before starting the course but you need to be aware that it will
be more challenging for you and you need to put in a lot of effort to succeed However it is
not at all impossible
30|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GEOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Geography is a fascinating and wide-reaching subject and it has been shown that students
with Geography qualifications are some of the most employable
Why you should take Geography GCSE
It provides you with an understanding of global issues which will affect our lives now and
in the future
By the end of their GCSE you will have a better understanding of the way the world
works
Geography is a good link between the arts and sciences so it will help you in their other
subjects
You will understand how physical landscapes (eg rivers coasts mountains) are formed
You will be allowed to express opinions about people and places
Geography includes a range of academic skills that you will use in your future studies
Skills gained from Geography include
How to research and to investigate
Problem solving
Real world numeracy
How to collect record present and analyse data
Map reading
Creative thinking
How to write in an essay style and in a scientific style
Empathy and understanding of others
Topics of study will include
How are natural landscapes formed and how can we manage
them
What causes and how can we manage natural hazards
How do weather and climate work
How can we manage population around the world
How do towns and cities expand and how are they managed
How and why are some places rich whilst others are poor
How can we ensure development of global resources is sustainable
Page|31 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board AQA
Career Links (As printed by the Royal Geographical Society)
How is the course assessed
GCSE Geography is assessed by two written Examinations (75) and by Coursework (25) in
the form of a Controlled Assessment
Fieldwork at the South Coast and elsewhere is an essential part of this course
Travel and tourist industry
Travel Guide Researcher
Property Researcher
Lawyers
Senior Researcher for County
Council
Government Statistician
TV Locations Unit
Business Consultants
Planners
32|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GRAPHICS (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
If you are interested in the world of advertising like
developing logos and posters always have an interest in
the covers of DVDs books amp games and really enjoy
making products then this is the course for you
Course Information
A large part of the course is a practical investigation
into the techniques and materials used in the
advertising and packaging we see around us every
day
Students will develop skills in drawing both free hand and using computer aided design
model making printing techniques logo designing greetings card and popup book
design and build up skills to design DVD covers labels and posters
To be able to present this to an industrial standard students will use desktop publishing
software such as GIMP (a variation of Photoshop) and computer aided design packages
such as Google Sketchup 2D Design and Fireworks They will get the chance to use the
new computer aided manufacturing milling machine to design and make work like
models signs and games
Assessment
Students will complete a major project and portfolio that counts towards 60 of the overall
GCSE grade Previous projects have included creating a popup book producing
promotional material for the Olympics designing the identity and packaging for a new band
and making a travel game for children
Externally set assignment by the Exam board will account for 40 The typical brief might look
like this
A leading perfumeaftershave manufacturer are aware that the environment is a
current issue The general public are concerned about so want an environmentally
friendly perfumeaftershave bottle and packaging designed to meet the current
market needs You are to design and make a model bottle including the packaging
Career Progression
Or anything in the creative industries
Graphic designer Work in advertising Web designer
Architect Product designer Set designer
Computer game designer Window dresser Magazine editor
Fashion designer Comic book creator Book illustrator
Artist
Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a
range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme
conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)
Content
Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated
situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a
portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are
required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key
skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam
They will study the following subjects at Level 1
Shampoo and condition hair
Blow drying
Contribute to performing and colouring process
Contribute to the development of effective working
relationships
Support the health and safety of the salon
Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas
Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is
complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and
seminars
All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical
assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress
How will they be assessed
They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical
assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on
progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered
individually at different stages throughout the course
There are four areas of assessment
Practical They carry out the skill
Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill
Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit
Online tests
Progression
They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such
as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme
34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and
opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal
subject for you
You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability
to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely
untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills
What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for
History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities
alike It is particularly useful for the following careers
Course Information
The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills
covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of
these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in
the classroom
Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams
almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students
maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two
year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work
Each of the following units is worth 25
Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations
Key topics
bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56
bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)
bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991
Law
Journalism
Television production and research
Advertising
Research
Marketing
Business Management
Accountancy
Archaeology
Museum work
Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939
Key Topics
bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939
bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Holocaust
Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970
Key topics
bull McCarthyism and the Red scare
bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King
bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies
bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)
Representations of History
CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990
36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT
Exam Board OCR
The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-
requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres
and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the
recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students
education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and
employers
Course Information
The course aims to develop
Problem-solving skills through the practical real life
application of ICT to complex problems
The ability to analyse appraise and make critical
judgements about the use of ICT systems
An awareness of the role of ICT in the management
manipulation and dissemination of information
Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with
others
The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and
competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist
tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final
student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms
of ICT problem solving and project management
There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been
completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer
Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc
Assessment
Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two
GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟
equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE
In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students
must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two
mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2
Diploma
Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become
increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics
magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such
as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students
to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages
we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as
they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of
audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-
world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very
relevant and very challenging
Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different
forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is
a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in
a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also
able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in
an organised way
Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to
looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as
bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns
constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe
Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied
interesting and highly rewarding
Coursework
The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall
assessment of the course Students produce three assignments
for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical
Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment
Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical
Production and Evaluation
Assessment
This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is
undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for
the qualification
Recent topics for the examination have included
Soap opera Quiz shows
Action Films The Popular Press
Music magazines
38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning
The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist
learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering
Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills
The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to
broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students
who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical
career within the sector
Progression
The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate
(VRQ) in the appropriate career route
Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using
the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship
framework) in the appropriate route
Potential Job Opportunities
Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder
Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician
Assessment Methods
Multiple Choice Examination
Oral Examination
Portfolio of Evidence
Practical Demonstration Assignment
Practical Examination
Task-based Controlled Assessment
Written Examination
Overall Assessment Method
Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit
The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the
learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test
results
Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing
and ListeningAppraising
Performing (30)
Students perform music throughout the course The two best
recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and
one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any
type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour
time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during
that period
For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental
vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)
a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc
For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an
improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing
a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording
Composing (30)
Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the
exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must
come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed
to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material
to make a new piece out of the old one
ListeningAppraising (40)
Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a
series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final
question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music
played in the exam hall
Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam
The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are
Western Classical Music 1600-1899
Music in the 20th Century
Popular Music in Context
World Music
40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching
research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic
Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not
required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music
classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C
grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas
There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some
they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is
hard work but its good fun too
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC
(EDEXCEL)
The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used
by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the
BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire
assessment is coursework based
Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)
Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the
Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a
portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of
A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links
with others
The Performer‟s role
Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer
Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)
Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students
the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the
equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own
recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves
A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)
including costs
A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it
safely
Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording
techniques
Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what
they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating
various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is
designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to
work in the Music Industry
This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic
Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will
spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software
and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs
The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both
exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both
qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)
Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as
individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily
being assessed on everything at the end of the course
A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction
grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up
with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx
42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will
learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer
software
You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white
photographs
Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based
photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-
journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new
media practice
Assessment
This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home
is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks
There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the
marks
Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SPANISH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
All students have the choice to continue
with Spanish which they have been
studying since Year 7 It would be a wise
choice to continue with Spanish as the
ability to speak a second language is not
only useful but is advantageous in
today‟s world Our closer connection
with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even
a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers
Course Information
The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based
on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage
Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to
communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding
Topics covered are
Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo
Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink
Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo
Free time shopping money new technology sports media
Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo
Home local area and the environment
Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo
School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs
Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and
listening at the end of Year 11
44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2
Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with
the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to
vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport
The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a
range of skills and techniques personal qualities and
attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter
the workplace
Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study
1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction
The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge
and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in
instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning
and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills
2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities
The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire
motivate and improve the performance of a selected target
group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It
encourages students to work in a team situation to organise
plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement
3 Injury in Sport
The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and
their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will
enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries
4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport
The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in
the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and
enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people
(Units to be studied are subject to change)
Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TEXTILES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of
textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The
students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following
areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction
applied textiles and embellished textiles
Assessment and Coursework Balance
In their first year the students will be required to produce two
extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will
follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The
students will work from first hand observations collecting and
developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and
textiles based techniques From this research and developmental
stage students will design and produce a final piece
During the second year students will begin by completing an
extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an
externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted
will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment
will account for 40
The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual
style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they
learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a
more personal response to a theme
Visits
Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources
such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second
year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within
the industry today
Why choose Textiles
Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more
confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level
course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles
The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range
of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior
design styling textiles design and costume design
46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)
Exam Board AQA
Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology
Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three
subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three
separate GCSEs
What are the differences between Triple Science and other
science GCSEs
This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will
be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of
the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award
What are the advantages of studying Triple Science
The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into
bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for
bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge
Who should consider taking Triple Science
Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope
with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a
related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those
students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this
course
The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school
GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics
Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25
Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25
Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25
Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25
Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS
2012 - 2014
Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4
option subjects
Please note
We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If
through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we
cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course
Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012
Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012
Make a record of your choice on the table below before
handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the
Options Information Evening
SUBJECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
Mo
st
De
sire
d
3D Design
Art
Catering
Construction
Dance
Drama
Ethics
Film Studies
French
Geography
Graphics
Hairdressing
History
ICT
Media Studies
Motor Vehicle
Music
Spanish
(Diploma) Sport
Textiles
Triple Sciences
Please tick if you would like to be
considered to do EBacc Please
remember that you need to
include Geography or History and
French or Spanish as your subject
options
Chessington Community College
Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS
Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603
wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk
![Page 24: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a](https://reader035.vdocument.in/reader035/viewer/2022062413/5a76533a7f8b9aa3618d22a0/html5/thumbnails/24.jpg)
Page|27 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
ETHICS (GCSE)
Exam Board OCR
The bdquoPhilosophy and Ethics‟ GCSE will allow students to explore the fundamental questions
about life and existence encourage their personal social and cultural development and
enhance their understanding of different cultures and belief systems
Over the course of the two years students will study important and thought-provoking issues
such as the nature and existence of God good and evil and the conflict between religion
and science relationships poverty and medical ethics peace and justice and the role of the
media in today‟s world It is a broad satisfying and worthwhile course of study designed to
challenge and stimulate students and equip them with the necessary skills to lead constructive
and thoughtful lives in the modern world
28|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
FILM STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
ldquoThe secret to film is that its an illusionrdquo
George Lucas Director of Star Wars
This course is ideal for any student who is
Able to work independently or as part of a team
Creative and practical but also analytical
Enthusiastic about films
Interested in making their own short films
Over the two years students will
Plan storyboard film and edit a short film working in a small
group adding their own music and special effects
Understand how films are made and promoted
Learn about the business of making films
Make a close study of one genre of Hollywood films (currently Disaster Films)
Closely research and study at least two different non-Hollywood Films (made in Britain
Europe or Africa)
Prepare their own film promotion campaign
Write an in-depth analysis of films of their choice
Assessment is through
A portfolio of coursework and also
Two end of course examinations
Although it is a new course Film Studies is already a popular choice for many students
combining well with the Media study in English as well as Media
Studies itself Film Studies is increasingly well
thought of by many colleges as it combines
a practical creative approach with
analytical skills
From Citizen Kane to Inception
Page|29 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
FRENCH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
The course outline for French is similar to Spanish It is not compulsory to have previous
knowledge of the language before starting the course but you need to be aware that it will
be more challenging for you and you need to put in a lot of effort to succeed However it is
not at all impossible
30|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GEOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Geography is a fascinating and wide-reaching subject and it has been shown that students
with Geography qualifications are some of the most employable
Why you should take Geography GCSE
It provides you with an understanding of global issues which will affect our lives now and
in the future
By the end of their GCSE you will have a better understanding of the way the world
works
Geography is a good link between the arts and sciences so it will help you in their other
subjects
You will understand how physical landscapes (eg rivers coasts mountains) are formed
You will be allowed to express opinions about people and places
Geography includes a range of academic skills that you will use in your future studies
Skills gained from Geography include
How to research and to investigate
Problem solving
Real world numeracy
How to collect record present and analyse data
Map reading
Creative thinking
How to write in an essay style and in a scientific style
Empathy and understanding of others
Topics of study will include
How are natural landscapes formed and how can we manage
them
What causes and how can we manage natural hazards
How do weather and climate work
How can we manage population around the world
How do towns and cities expand and how are they managed
How and why are some places rich whilst others are poor
How can we ensure development of global resources is sustainable
Page|31 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board AQA
Career Links (As printed by the Royal Geographical Society)
How is the course assessed
GCSE Geography is assessed by two written Examinations (75) and by Coursework (25) in
the form of a Controlled Assessment
Fieldwork at the South Coast and elsewhere is an essential part of this course
Travel and tourist industry
Travel Guide Researcher
Property Researcher
Lawyers
Senior Researcher for County
Council
Government Statistician
TV Locations Unit
Business Consultants
Planners
32|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GRAPHICS (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
If you are interested in the world of advertising like
developing logos and posters always have an interest in
the covers of DVDs books amp games and really enjoy
making products then this is the course for you
Course Information
A large part of the course is a practical investigation
into the techniques and materials used in the
advertising and packaging we see around us every
day
Students will develop skills in drawing both free hand and using computer aided design
model making printing techniques logo designing greetings card and popup book
design and build up skills to design DVD covers labels and posters
To be able to present this to an industrial standard students will use desktop publishing
software such as GIMP (a variation of Photoshop) and computer aided design packages
such as Google Sketchup 2D Design and Fireworks They will get the chance to use the
new computer aided manufacturing milling machine to design and make work like
models signs and games
Assessment
Students will complete a major project and portfolio that counts towards 60 of the overall
GCSE grade Previous projects have included creating a popup book producing
promotional material for the Olympics designing the identity and packaging for a new band
and making a travel game for children
Externally set assignment by the Exam board will account for 40 The typical brief might look
like this
A leading perfumeaftershave manufacturer are aware that the environment is a
current issue The general public are concerned about so want an environmentally
friendly perfumeaftershave bottle and packaging designed to meet the current
market needs You are to design and make a model bottle including the packaging
Career Progression
Or anything in the creative industries
Graphic designer Work in advertising Web designer
Architect Product designer Set designer
Computer game designer Window dresser Magazine editor
Fashion designer Comic book creator Book illustrator
Artist
Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a
range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme
conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)
Content
Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated
situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a
portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are
required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key
skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam
They will study the following subjects at Level 1
Shampoo and condition hair
Blow drying
Contribute to performing and colouring process
Contribute to the development of effective working
relationships
Support the health and safety of the salon
Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas
Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is
complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and
seminars
All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical
assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress
How will they be assessed
They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical
assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on
progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered
individually at different stages throughout the course
There are four areas of assessment
Practical They carry out the skill
Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill
Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit
Online tests
Progression
They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such
as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme
34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and
opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal
subject for you
You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability
to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely
untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills
What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for
History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities
alike It is particularly useful for the following careers
Course Information
The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills
covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of
these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in
the classroom
Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams
almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students
maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two
year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work
Each of the following units is worth 25
Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations
Key topics
bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56
bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)
bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991
Law
Journalism
Television production and research
Advertising
Research
Marketing
Business Management
Accountancy
Archaeology
Museum work
Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939
Key Topics
bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939
bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Holocaust
Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970
Key topics
bull McCarthyism and the Red scare
bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King
bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies
bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)
Representations of History
CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990
36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT
Exam Board OCR
The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-
requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres
and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the
recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students
education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and
employers
Course Information
The course aims to develop
Problem-solving skills through the practical real life
application of ICT to complex problems
The ability to analyse appraise and make critical
judgements about the use of ICT systems
An awareness of the role of ICT in the management
manipulation and dissemination of information
Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with
others
The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and
competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist
tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final
student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms
of ICT problem solving and project management
There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been
completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer
Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc
Assessment
Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two
GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟
equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE
In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students
must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two
mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2
Diploma
Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become
increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics
magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such
as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students
to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages
we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as
they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of
audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-
world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very
relevant and very challenging
Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different
forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is
a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in
a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also
able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in
an organised way
Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to
looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as
bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns
constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe
Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied
interesting and highly rewarding
Coursework
The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall
assessment of the course Students produce three assignments
for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical
Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment
Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical
Production and Evaluation
Assessment
This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is
undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for
the qualification
Recent topics for the examination have included
Soap opera Quiz shows
Action Films The Popular Press
Music magazines
38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning
The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist
learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering
Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills
The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to
broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students
who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical
career within the sector
Progression
The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate
(VRQ) in the appropriate career route
Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using
the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship
framework) in the appropriate route
Potential Job Opportunities
Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder
Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician
Assessment Methods
Multiple Choice Examination
Oral Examination
Portfolio of Evidence
Practical Demonstration Assignment
Practical Examination
Task-based Controlled Assessment
Written Examination
Overall Assessment Method
Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit
The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the
learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test
results
Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing
and ListeningAppraising
Performing (30)
Students perform music throughout the course The two best
recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and
one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any
type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour
time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during
that period
For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental
vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)
a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc
For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an
improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing
a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording
Composing (30)
Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the
exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must
come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed
to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material
to make a new piece out of the old one
ListeningAppraising (40)
Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a
series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final
question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music
played in the exam hall
Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam
The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are
Western Classical Music 1600-1899
Music in the 20th Century
Popular Music in Context
World Music
40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching
research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic
Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not
required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music
classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C
grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas
There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some
they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is
hard work but its good fun too
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC
(EDEXCEL)
The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used
by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the
BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire
assessment is coursework based
Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)
Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the
Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a
portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of
A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links
with others
The Performer‟s role
Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer
Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)
Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students
the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the
equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own
recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves
A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)
including costs
A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it
safely
Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording
techniques
Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what
they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating
various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is
designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to
work in the Music Industry
This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic
Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will
spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software
and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs
The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both
exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both
qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)
Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as
individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily
being assessed on everything at the end of the course
A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction
grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up
with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx
42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will
learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer
software
You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white
photographs
Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based
photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-
journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new
media practice
Assessment
This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home
is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks
There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the
marks
Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SPANISH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
All students have the choice to continue
with Spanish which they have been
studying since Year 7 It would be a wise
choice to continue with Spanish as the
ability to speak a second language is not
only useful but is advantageous in
today‟s world Our closer connection
with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even
a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers
Course Information
The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based
on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage
Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to
communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding
Topics covered are
Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo
Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink
Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo
Free time shopping money new technology sports media
Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo
Home local area and the environment
Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo
School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs
Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and
listening at the end of Year 11
44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2
Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with
the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to
vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport
The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a
range of skills and techniques personal qualities and
attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter
the workplace
Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study
1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction
The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge
and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in
instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning
and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills
2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities
The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire
motivate and improve the performance of a selected target
group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It
encourages students to work in a team situation to organise
plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement
3 Injury in Sport
The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and
their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will
enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries
4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport
The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in
the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and
enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people
(Units to be studied are subject to change)
Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TEXTILES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of
textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The
students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following
areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction
applied textiles and embellished textiles
Assessment and Coursework Balance
In their first year the students will be required to produce two
extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will
follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The
students will work from first hand observations collecting and
developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and
textiles based techniques From this research and developmental
stage students will design and produce a final piece
During the second year students will begin by completing an
extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an
externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted
will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment
will account for 40
The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual
style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they
learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a
more personal response to a theme
Visits
Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources
such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second
year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within
the industry today
Why choose Textiles
Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more
confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level
course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles
The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range
of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior
design styling textiles design and costume design
46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)
Exam Board AQA
Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology
Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three
subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three
separate GCSEs
What are the differences between Triple Science and other
science GCSEs
This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will
be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of
the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award
What are the advantages of studying Triple Science
The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into
bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for
bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge
Who should consider taking Triple Science
Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope
with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a
related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those
students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this
course
The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school
GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics
Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25
Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25
Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25
Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25
Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS
2012 - 2014
Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4
option subjects
Please note
We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If
through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we
cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course
Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012
Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012
Make a record of your choice on the table below before
handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the
Options Information Evening
SUBJECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
Mo
st
De
sire
d
3D Design
Art
Catering
Construction
Dance
Drama
Ethics
Film Studies
French
Geography
Graphics
Hairdressing
History
ICT
Media Studies
Motor Vehicle
Music
Spanish
(Diploma) Sport
Textiles
Triple Sciences
Please tick if you would like to be
considered to do EBacc Please
remember that you need to
include Geography or History and
French or Spanish as your subject
options
Chessington Community College
Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS
Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603
wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk
![Page 25: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a](https://reader035.vdocument.in/reader035/viewer/2022062413/5a76533a7f8b9aa3618d22a0/html5/thumbnails/25.jpg)
28|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
FILM STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board WJEC
ldquoThe secret to film is that its an illusionrdquo
George Lucas Director of Star Wars
This course is ideal for any student who is
Able to work independently or as part of a team
Creative and practical but also analytical
Enthusiastic about films
Interested in making their own short films
Over the two years students will
Plan storyboard film and edit a short film working in a small
group adding their own music and special effects
Understand how films are made and promoted
Learn about the business of making films
Make a close study of one genre of Hollywood films (currently Disaster Films)
Closely research and study at least two different non-Hollywood Films (made in Britain
Europe or Africa)
Prepare their own film promotion campaign
Write an in-depth analysis of films of their choice
Assessment is through
A portfolio of coursework and also
Two end of course examinations
Although it is a new course Film Studies is already a popular choice for many students
combining well with the Media study in English as well as Media
Studies itself Film Studies is increasingly well
thought of by many colleges as it combines
a practical creative approach with
analytical skills
From Citizen Kane to Inception
Page|29 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
FRENCH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
The course outline for French is similar to Spanish It is not compulsory to have previous
knowledge of the language before starting the course but you need to be aware that it will
be more challenging for you and you need to put in a lot of effort to succeed However it is
not at all impossible
30|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GEOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Geography is a fascinating and wide-reaching subject and it has been shown that students
with Geography qualifications are some of the most employable
Why you should take Geography GCSE
It provides you with an understanding of global issues which will affect our lives now and
in the future
By the end of their GCSE you will have a better understanding of the way the world
works
Geography is a good link between the arts and sciences so it will help you in their other
subjects
You will understand how physical landscapes (eg rivers coasts mountains) are formed
You will be allowed to express opinions about people and places
Geography includes a range of academic skills that you will use in your future studies
Skills gained from Geography include
How to research and to investigate
Problem solving
Real world numeracy
How to collect record present and analyse data
Map reading
Creative thinking
How to write in an essay style and in a scientific style
Empathy and understanding of others
Topics of study will include
How are natural landscapes formed and how can we manage
them
What causes and how can we manage natural hazards
How do weather and climate work
How can we manage population around the world
How do towns and cities expand and how are they managed
How and why are some places rich whilst others are poor
How can we ensure development of global resources is sustainable
Page|31 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board AQA
Career Links (As printed by the Royal Geographical Society)
How is the course assessed
GCSE Geography is assessed by two written Examinations (75) and by Coursework (25) in
the form of a Controlled Assessment
Fieldwork at the South Coast and elsewhere is an essential part of this course
Travel and tourist industry
Travel Guide Researcher
Property Researcher
Lawyers
Senior Researcher for County
Council
Government Statistician
TV Locations Unit
Business Consultants
Planners
32|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GRAPHICS (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
If you are interested in the world of advertising like
developing logos and posters always have an interest in
the covers of DVDs books amp games and really enjoy
making products then this is the course for you
Course Information
A large part of the course is a practical investigation
into the techniques and materials used in the
advertising and packaging we see around us every
day
Students will develop skills in drawing both free hand and using computer aided design
model making printing techniques logo designing greetings card and popup book
design and build up skills to design DVD covers labels and posters
To be able to present this to an industrial standard students will use desktop publishing
software such as GIMP (a variation of Photoshop) and computer aided design packages
such as Google Sketchup 2D Design and Fireworks They will get the chance to use the
new computer aided manufacturing milling machine to design and make work like
models signs and games
Assessment
Students will complete a major project and portfolio that counts towards 60 of the overall
GCSE grade Previous projects have included creating a popup book producing
promotional material for the Olympics designing the identity and packaging for a new band
and making a travel game for children
Externally set assignment by the Exam board will account for 40 The typical brief might look
like this
A leading perfumeaftershave manufacturer are aware that the environment is a
current issue The general public are concerned about so want an environmentally
friendly perfumeaftershave bottle and packaging designed to meet the current
market needs You are to design and make a model bottle including the packaging
Career Progression
Or anything in the creative industries
Graphic designer Work in advertising Web designer
Architect Product designer Set designer
Computer game designer Window dresser Magazine editor
Fashion designer Comic book creator Book illustrator
Artist
Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a
range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme
conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)
Content
Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated
situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a
portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are
required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key
skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam
They will study the following subjects at Level 1
Shampoo and condition hair
Blow drying
Contribute to performing and colouring process
Contribute to the development of effective working
relationships
Support the health and safety of the salon
Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas
Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is
complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and
seminars
All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical
assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress
How will they be assessed
They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical
assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on
progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered
individually at different stages throughout the course
There are four areas of assessment
Practical They carry out the skill
Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill
Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit
Online tests
Progression
They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such
as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme
34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and
opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal
subject for you
You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability
to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely
untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills
What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for
History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities
alike It is particularly useful for the following careers
Course Information
The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills
covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of
these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in
the classroom
Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams
almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students
maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two
year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work
Each of the following units is worth 25
Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations
Key topics
bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56
bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)
bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991
Law
Journalism
Television production and research
Advertising
Research
Marketing
Business Management
Accountancy
Archaeology
Museum work
Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939
Key Topics
bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939
bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Holocaust
Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970
Key topics
bull McCarthyism and the Red scare
bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King
bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies
bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)
Representations of History
CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990
36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT
Exam Board OCR
The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-
requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres
and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the
recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students
education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and
employers
Course Information
The course aims to develop
Problem-solving skills through the practical real life
application of ICT to complex problems
The ability to analyse appraise and make critical
judgements about the use of ICT systems
An awareness of the role of ICT in the management
manipulation and dissemination of information
Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with
others
The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and
competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist
tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final
student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms
of ICT problem solving and project management
There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been
completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer
Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc
Assessment
Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two
GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟
equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE
In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students
must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two
mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2
Diploma
Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become
increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics
magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such
as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students
to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages
we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as
they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of
audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-
world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very
relevant and very challenging
Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different
forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is
a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in
a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also
able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in
an organised way
Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to
looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as
bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns
constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe
Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied
interesting and highly rewarding
Coursework
The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall
assessment of the course Students produce three assignments
for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical
Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment
Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical
Production and Evaluation
Assessment
This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is
undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for
the qualification
Recent topics for the examination have included
Soap opera Quiz shows
Action Films The Popular Press
Music magazines
38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning
The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist
learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering
Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills
The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to
broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students
who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical
career within the sector
Progression
The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate
(VRQ) in the appropriate career route
Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using
the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship
framework) in the appropriate route
Potential Job Opportunities
Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder
Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician
Assessment Methods
Multiple Choice Examination
Oral Examination
Portfolio of Evidence
Practical Demonstration Assignment
Practical Examination
Task-based Controlled Assessment
Written Examination
Overall Assessment Method
Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit
The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the
learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test
results
Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing
and ListeningAppraising
Performing (30)
Students perform music throughout the course The two best
recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and
one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any
type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour
time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during
that period
For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental
vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)
a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc
For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an
improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing
a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording
Composing (30)
Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the
exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must
come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed
to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material
to make a new piece out of the old one
ListeningAppraising (40)
Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a
series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final
question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music
played in the exam hall
Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam
The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are
Western Classical Music 1600-1899
Music in the 20th Century
Popular Music in Context
World Music
40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching
research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic
Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not
required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music
classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C
grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas
There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some
they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is
hard work but its good fun too
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC
(EDEXCEL)
The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used
by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the
BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire
assessment is coursework based
Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)
Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the
Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a
portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of
A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links
with others
The Performer‟s role
Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer
Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)
Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students
the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the
equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own
recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves
A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)
including costs
A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it
safely
Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording
techniques
Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what
they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating
various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is
designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to
work in the Music Industry
This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic
Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will
spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software
and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs
The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both
exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both
qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)
Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as
individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily
being assessed on everything at the end of the course
A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction
grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up
with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx
42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will
learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer
software
You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white
photographs
Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based
photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-
journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new
media practice
Assessment
This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home
is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks
There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the
marks
Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SPANISH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
All students have the choice to continue
with Spanish which they have been
studying since Year 7 It would be a wise
choice to continue with Spanish as the
ability to speak a second language is not
only useful but is advantageous in
today‟s world Our closer connection
with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even
a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers
Course Information
The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based
on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage
Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to
communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding
Topics covered are
Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo
Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink
Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo
Free time shopping money new technology sports media
Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo
Home local area and the environment
Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo
School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs
Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and
listening at the end of Year 11
44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2
Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with
the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to
vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport
The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a
range of skills and techniques personal qualities and
attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter
the workplace
Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study
1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction
The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge
and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in
instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning
and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills
2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities
The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire
motivate and improve the performance of a selected target
group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It
encourages students to work in a team situation to organise
plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement
3 Injury in Sport
The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and
their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will
enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries
4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport
The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in
the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and
enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people
(Units to be studied are subject to change)
Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TEXTILES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of
textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The
students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following
areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction
applied textiles and embellished textiles
Assessment and Coursework Balance
In their first year the students will be required to produce two
extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will
follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The
students will work from first hand observations collecting and
developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and
textiles based techniques From this research and developmental
stage students will design and produce a final piece
During the second year students will begin by completing an
extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an
externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted
will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment
will account for 40
The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual
style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they
learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a
more personal response to a theme
Visits
Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources
such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second
year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within
the industry today
Why choose Textiles
Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more
confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level
course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles
The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range
of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior
design styling textiles design and costume design
46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)
Exam Board AQA
Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology
Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three
subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three
separate GCSEs
What are the differences between Triple Science and other
science GCSEs
This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will
be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of
the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award
What are the advantages of studying Triple Science
The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into
bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for
bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge
Who should consider taking Triple Science
Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope
with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a
related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those
students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this
course
The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school
GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics
Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25
Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25
Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25
Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25
Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS
2012 - 2014
Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4
option subjects
Please note
We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If
through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we
cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course
Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012
Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012
Make a record of your choice on the table below before
handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the
Options Information Evening
SUBJECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
Mo
st
De
sire
d
3D Design
Art
Catering
Construction
Dance
Drama
Ethics
Film Studies
French
Geography
Graphics
Hairdressing
History
ICT
Media Studies
Motor Vehicle
Music
Spanish
(Diploma) Sport
Textiles
Triple Sciences
Please tick if you would like to be
considered to do EBacc Please
remember that you need to
include Geography or History and
French or Spanish as your subject
options
Chessington Community College
Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS
Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603
wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk
![Page 26: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a](https://reader035.vdocument.in/reader035/viewer/2022062413/5a76533a7f8b9aa3618d22a0/html5/thumbnails/26.jpg)
Page|29 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
FRENCH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
The course outline for French is similar to Spanish It is not compulsory to have previous
knowledge of the language before starting the course but you need to be aware that it will
be more challenging for you and you need to put in a lot of effort to succeed However it is
not at all impossible
30|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GEOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Geography is a fascinating and wide-reaching subject and it has been shown that students
with Geography qualifications are some of the most employable
Why you should take Geography GCSE
It provides you with an understanding of global issues which will affect our lives now and
in the future
By the end of their GCSE you will have a better understanding of the way the world
works
Geography is a good link between the arts and sciences so it will help you in their other
subjects
You will understand how physical landscapes (eg rivers coasts mountains) are formed
You will be allowed to express opinions about people and places
Geography includes a range of academic skills that you will use in your future studies
Skills gained from Geography include
How to research and to investigate
Problem solving
Real world numeracy
How to collect record present and analyse data
Map reading
Creative thinking
How to write in an essay style and in a scientific style
Empathy and understanding of others
Topics of study will include
How are natural landscapes formed and how can we manage
them
What causes and how can we manage natural hazards
How do weather and climate work
How can we manage population around the world
How do towns and cities expand and how are they managed
How and why are some places rich whilst others are poor
How can we ensure development of global resources is sustainable
Page|31 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board AQA
Career Links (As printed by the Royal Geographical Society)
How is the course assessed
GCSE Geography is assessed by two written Examinations (75) and by Coursework (25) in
the form of a Controlled Assessment
Fieldwork at the South Coast and elsewhere is an essential part of this course
Travel and tourist industry
Travel Guide Researcher
Property Researcher
Lawyers
Senior Researcher for County
Council
Government Statistician
TV Locations Unit
Business Consultants
Planners
32|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GRAPHICS (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
If you are interested in the world of advertising like
developing logos and posters always have an interest in
the covers of DVDs books amp games and really enjoy
making products then this is the course for you
Course Information
A large part of the course is a practical investigation
into the techniques and materials used in the
advertising and packaging we see around us every
day
Students will develop skills in drawing both free hand and using computer aided design
model making printing techniques logo designing greetings card and popup book
design and build up skills to design DVD covers labels and posters
To be able to present this to an industrial standard students will use desktop publishing
software such as GIMP (a variation of Photoshop) and computer aided design packages
such as Google Sketchup 2D Design and Fireworks They will get the chance to use the
new computer aided manufacturing milling machine to design and make work like
models signs and games
Assessment
Students will complete a major project and portfolio that counts towards 60 of the overall
GCSE grade Previous projects have included creating a popup book producing
promotional material for the Olympics designing the identity and packaging for a new band
and making a travel game for children
Externally set assignment by the Exam board will account for 40 The typical brief might look
like this
A leading perfumeaftershave manufacturer are aware that the environment is a
current issue The general public are concerned about so want an environmentally
friendly perfumeaftershave bottle and packaging designed to meet the current
market needs You are to design and make a model bottle including the packaging
Career Progression
Or anything in the creative industries
Graphic designer Work in advertising Web designer
Architect Product designer Set designer
Computer game designer Window dresser Magazine editor
Fashion designer Comic book creator Book illustrator
Artist
Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a
range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme
conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)
Content
Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated
situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a
portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are
required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key
skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam
They will study the following subjects at Level 1
Shampoo and condition hair
Blow drying
Contribute to performing and colouring process
Contribute to the development of effective working
relationships
Support the health and safety of the salon
Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas
Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is
complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and
seminars
All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical
assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress
How will they be assessed
They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical
assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on
progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered
individually at different stages throughout the course
There are four areas of assessment
Practical They carry out the skill
Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill
Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit
Online tests
Progression
They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such
as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme
34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and
opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal
subject for you
You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability
to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely
untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills
What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for
History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities
alike It is particularly useful for the following careers
Course Information
The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills
covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of
these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in
the classroom
Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams
almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students
maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two
year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work
Each of the following units is worth 25
Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations
Key topics
bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56
bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)
bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991
Law
Journalism
Television production and research
Advertising
Research
Marketing
Business Management
Accountancy
Archaeology
Museum work
Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939
Key Topics
bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939
bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Holocaust
Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970
Key topics
bull McCarthyism and the Red scare
bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King
bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies
bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)
Representations of History
CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990
36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT
Exam Board OCR
The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-
requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres
and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the
recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students
education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and
employers
Course Information
The course aims to develop
Problem-solving skills through the practical real life
application of ICT to complex problems
The ability to analyse appraise and make critical
judgements about the use of ICT systems
An awareness of the role of ICT in the management
manipulation and dissemination of information
Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with
others
The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and
competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist
tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final
student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms
of ICT problem solving and project management
There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been
completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer
Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc
Assessment
Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two
GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟
equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE
In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students
must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two
mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2
Diploma
Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become
increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics
magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such
as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students
to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages
we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as
they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of
audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-
world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very
relevant and very challenging
Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different
forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is
a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in
a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also
able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in
an organised way
Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to
looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as
bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns
constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe
Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied
interesting and highly rewarding
Coursework
The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall
assessment of the course Students produce three assignments
for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical
Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment
Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical
Production and Evaluation
Assessment
This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is
undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for
the qualification
Recent topics for the examination have included
Soap opera Quiz shows
Action Films The Popular Press
Music magazines
38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning
The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist
learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering
Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills
The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to
broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students
who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical
career within the sector
Progression
The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate
(VRQ) in the appropriate career route
Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using
the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship
framework) in the appropriate route
Potential Job Opportunities
Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder
Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician
Assessment Methods
Multiple Choice Examination
Oral Examination
Portfolio of Evidence
Practical Demonstration Assignment
Practical Examination
Task-based Controlled Assessment
Written Examination
Overall Assessment Method
Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit
The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the
learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test
results
Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing
and ListeningAppraising
Performing (30)
Students perform music throughout the course The two best
recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and
one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any
type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour
time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during
that period
For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental
vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)
a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc
For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an
improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing
a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording
Composing (30)
Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the
exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must
come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed
to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material
to make a new piece out of the old one
ListeningAppraising (40)
Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a
series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final
question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music
played in the exam hall
Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam
The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are
Western Classical Music 1600-1899
Music in the 20th Century
Popular Music in Context
World Music
40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching
research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic
Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not
required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music
classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C
grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas
There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some
they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is
hard work but its good fun too
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC
(EDEXCEL)
The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used
by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the
BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire
assessment is coursework based
Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)
Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the
Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a
portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of
A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links
with others
The Performer‟s role
Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer
Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)
Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students
the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the
equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own
recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves
A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)
including costs
A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it
safely
Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording
techniques
Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what
they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating
various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is
designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to
work in the Music Industry
This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic
Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will
spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software
and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs
The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both
exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both
qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)
Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as
individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily
being assessed on everything at the end of the course
A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction
grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up
with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx
42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will
learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer
software
You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white
photographs
Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based
photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-
journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new
media practice
Assessment
This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home
is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks
There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the
marks
Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SPANISH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
All students have the choice to continue
with Spanish which they have been
studying since Year 7 It would be a wise
choice to continue with Spanish as the
ability to speak a second language is not
only useful but is advantageous in
today‟s world Our closer connection
with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even
a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers
Course Information
The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based
on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage
Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to
communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding
Topics covered are
Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo
Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink
Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo
Free time shopping money new technology sports media
Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo
Home local area and the environment
Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo
School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs
Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and
listening at the end of Year 11
44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2
Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with
the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to
vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport
The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a
range of skills and techniques personal qualities and
attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter
the workplace
Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study
1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction
The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge
and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in
instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning
and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills
2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities
The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire
motivate and improve the performance of a selected target
group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It
encourages students to work in a team situation to organise
plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement
3 Injury in Sport
The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and
their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will
enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries
4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport
The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in
the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and
enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people
(Units to be studied are subject to change)
Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TEXTILES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of
textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The
students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following
areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction
applied textiles and embellished textiles
Assessment and Coursework Balance
In their first year the students will be required to produce two
extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will
follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The
students will work from first hand observations collecting and
developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and
textiles based techniques From this research and developmental
stage students will design and produce a final piece
During the second year students will begin by completing an
extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an
externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted
will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment
will account for 40
The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual
style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they
learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a
more personal response to a theme
Visits
Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources
such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second
year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within
the industry today
Why choose Textiles
Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more
confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level
course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles
The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range
of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior
design styling textiles design and costume design
46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)
Exam Board AQA
Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology
Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three
subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three
separate GCSEs
What are the differences between Triple Science and other
science GCSEs
This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will
be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of
the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award
What are the advantages of studying Triple Science
The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into
bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for
bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge
Who should consider taking Triple Science
Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope
with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a
related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those
students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this
course
The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school
GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics
Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25
Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25
Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25
Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25
Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS
2012 - 2014
Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4
option subjects
Please note
We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If
through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we
cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course
Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012
Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012
Make a record of your choice on the table below before
handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the
Options Information Evening
SUBJECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
Mo
st
De
sire
d
3D Design
Art
Catering
Construction
Dance
Drama
Ethics
Film Studies
French
Geography
Graphics
Hairdressing
History
ICT
Media Studies
Motor Vehicle
Music
Spanish
(Diploma) Sport
Textiles
Triple Sciences
Please tick if you would like to be
considered to do EBacc Please
remember that you need to
include Geography or History and
French or Spanish as your subject
options
Chessington Community College
Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS
Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603
wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk
![Page 27: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a](https://reader035.vdocument.in/reader035/viewer/2022062413/5a76533a7f8b9aa3618d22a0/html5/thumbnails/27.jpg)
30|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GEOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Geography is a fascinating and wide-reaching subject and it has been shown that students
with Geography qualifications are some of the most employable
Why you should take Geography GCSE
It provides you with an understanding of global issues which will affect our lives now and
in the future
By the end of their GCSE you will have a better understanding of the way the world
works
Geography is a good link between the arts and sciences so it will help you in their other
subjects
You will understand how physical landscapes (eg rivers coasts mountains) are formed
You will be allowed to express opinions about people and places
Geography includes a range of academic skills that you will use in your future studies
Skills gained from Geography include
How to research and to investigate
Problem solving
Real world numeracy
How to collect record present and analyse data
Map reading
Creative thinking
How to write in an essay style and in a scientific style
Empathy and understanding of others
Topics of study will include
How are natural landscapes formed and how can we manage
them
What causes and how can we manage natural hazards
How do weather and climate work
How can we manage population around the world
How do towns and cities expand and how are they managed
How and why are some places rich whilst others are poor
How can we ensure development of global resources is sustainable
Page|31 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board AQA
Career Links (As printed by the Royal Geographical Society)
How is the course assessed
GCSE Geography is assessed by two written Examinations (75) and by Coursework (25) in
the form of a Controlled Assessment
Fieldwork at the South Coast and elsewhere is an essential part of this course
Travel and tourist industry
Travel Guide Researcher
Property Researcher
Lawyers
Senior Researcher for County
Council
Government Statistician
TV Locations Unit
Business Consultants
Planners
32|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GRAPHICS (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
If you are interested in the world of advertising like
developing logos and posters always have an interest in
the covers of DVDs books amp games and really enjoy
making products then this is the course for you
Course Information
A large part of the course is a practical investigation
into the techniques and materials used in the
advertising and packaging we see around us every
day
Students will develop skills in drawing both free hand and using computer aided design
model making printing techniques logo designing greetings card and popup book
design and build up skills to design DVD covers labels and posters
To be able to present this to an industrial standard students will use desktop publishing
software such as GIMP (a variation of Photoshop) and computer aided design packages
such as Google Sketchup 2D Design and Fireworks They will get the chance to use the
new computer aided manufacturing milling machine to design and make work like
models signs and games
Assessment
Students will complete a major project and portfolio that counts towards 60 of the overall
GCSE grade Previous projects have included creating a popup book producing
promotional material for the Olympics designing the identity and packaging for a new band
and making a travel game for children
Externally set assignment by the Exam board will account for 40 The typical brief might look
like this
A leading perfumeaftershave manufacturer are aware that the environment is a
current issue The general public are concerned about so want an environmentally
friendly perfumeaftershave bottle and packaging designed to meet the current
market needs You are to design and make a model bottle including the packaging
Career Progression
Or anything in the creative industries
Graphic designer Work in advertising Web designer
Architect Product designer Set designer
Computer game designer Window dresser Magazine editor
Fashion designer Comic book creator Book illustrator
Artist
Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a
range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme
conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)
Content
Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated
situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a
portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are
required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key
skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam
They will study the following subjects at Level 1
Shampoo and condition hair
Blow drying
Contribute to performing and colouring process
Contribute to the development of effective working
relationships
Support the health and safety of the salon
Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas
Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is
complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and
seminars
All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical
assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress
How will they be assessed
They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical
assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on
progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered
individually at different stages throughout the course
There are four areas of assessment
Practical They carry out the skill
Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill
Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit
Online tests
Progression
They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such
as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme
34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and
opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal
subject for you
You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability
to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely
untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills
What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for
History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities
alike It is particularly useful for the following careers
Course Information
The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills
covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of
these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in
the classroom
Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams
almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students
maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two
year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work
Each of the following units is worth 25
Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations
Key topics
bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56
bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)
bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991
Law
Journalism
Television production and research
Advertising
Research
Marketing
Business Management
Accountancy
Archaeology
Museum work
Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939
Key Topics
bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939
bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Holocaust
Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970
Key topics
bull McCarthyism and the Red scare
bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King
bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies
bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)
Representations of History
CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990
36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT
Exam Board OCR
The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-
requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres
and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the
recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students
education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and
employers
Course Information
The course aims to develop
Problem-solving skills through the practical real life
application of ICT to complex problems
The ability to analyse appraise and make critical
judgements about the use of ICT systems
An awareness of the role of ICT in the management
manipulation and dissemination of information
Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with
others
The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and
competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist
tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final
student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms
of ICT problem solving and project management
There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been
completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer
Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc
Assessment
Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two
GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟
equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE
In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students
must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two
mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2
Diploma
Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become
increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics
magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such
as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students
to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages
we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as
they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of
audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-
world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very
relevant and very challenging
Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different
forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is
a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in
a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also
able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in
an organised way
Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to
looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as
bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns
constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe
Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied
interesting and highly rewarding
Coursework
The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall
assessment of the course Students produce three assignments
for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical
Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment
Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical
Production and Evaluation
Assessment
This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is
undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for
the qualification
Recent topics for the examination have included
Soap opera Quiz shows
Action Films The Popular Press
Music magazines
38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning
The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist
learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering
Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills
The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to
broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students
who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical
career within the sector
Progression
The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate
(VRQ) in the appropriate career route
Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using
the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship
framework) in the appropriate route
Potential Job Opportunities
Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder
Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician
Assessment Methods
Multiple Choice Examination
Oral Examination
Portfolio of Evidence
Practical Demonstration Assignment
Practical Examination
Task-based Controlled Assessment
Written Examination
Overall Assessment Method
Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit
The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the
learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test
results
Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing
and ListeningAppraising
Performing (30)
Students perform music throughout the course The two best
recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and
one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any
type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour
time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during
that period
For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental
vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)
a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc
For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an
improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing
a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording
Composing (30)
Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the
exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must
come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed
to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material
to make a new piece out of the old one
ListeningAppraising (40)
Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a
series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final
question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music
played in the exam hall
Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam
The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are
Western Classical Music 1600-1899
Music in the 20th Century
Popular Music in Context
World Music
40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching
research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic
Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not
required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music
classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C
grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas
There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some
they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is
hard work but its good fun too
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC
(EDEXCEL)
The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used
by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the
BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire
assessment is coursework based
Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)
Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the
Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a
portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of
A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links
with others
The Performer‟s role
Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer
Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)
Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students
the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the
equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own
recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves
A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)
including costs
A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it
safely
Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording
techniques
Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what
they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating
various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is
designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to
work in the Music Industry
This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic
Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will
spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software
and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs
The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both
exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both
qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)
Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as
individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily
being assessed on everything at the end of the course
A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction
grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up
with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx
42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will
learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer
software
You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white
photographs
Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based
photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-
journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new
media practice
Assessment
This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home
is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks
There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the
marks
Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SPANISH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
All students have the choice to continue
with Spanish which they have been
studying since Year 7 It would be a wise
choice to continue with Spanish as the
ability to speak a second language is not
only useful but is advantageous in
today‟s world Our closer connection
with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even
a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers
Course Information
The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based
on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage
Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to
communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding
Topics covered are
Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo
Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink
Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo
Free time shopping money new technology sports media
Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo
Home local area and the environment
Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo
School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs
Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and
listening at the end of Year 11
44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2
Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with
the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to
vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport
The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a
range of skills and techniques personal qualities and
attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter
the workplace
Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study
1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction
The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge
and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in
instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning
and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills
2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities
The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire
motivate and improve the performance of a selected target
group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It
encourages students to work in a team situation to organise
plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement
3 Injury in Sport
The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and
their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will
enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries
4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport
The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in
the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and
enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people
(Units to be studied are subject to change)
Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TEXTILES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of
textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The
students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following
areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction
applied textiles and embellished textiles
Assessment and Coursework Balance
In their first year the students will be required to produce two
extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will
follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The
students will work from first hand observations collecting and
developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and
textiles based techniques From this research and developmental
stage students will design and produce a final piece
During the second year students will begin by completing an
extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an
externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted
will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment
will account for 40
The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual
style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they
learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a
more personal response to a theme
Visits
Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources
such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second
year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within
the industry today
Why choose Textiles
Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more
confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level
course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles
The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range
of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior
design styling textiles design and costume design
46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)
Exam Board AQA
Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology
Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three
subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three
separate GCSEs
What are the differences between Triple Science and other
science GCSEs
This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will
be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of
the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award
What are the advantages of studying Triple Science
The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into
bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for
bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge
Who should consider taking Triple Science
Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope
with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a
related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those
students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this
course
The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school
GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics
Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25
Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25
Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25
Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25
Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS
2012 - 2014
Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4
option subjects
Please note
We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If
through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we
cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course
Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012
Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012
Make a record of your choice on the table below before
handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the
Options Information Evening
SUBJECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
Mo
st
De
sire
d
3D Design
Art
Catering
Construction
Dance
Drama
Ethics
Film Studies
French
Geography
Graphics
Hairdressing
History
ICT
Media Studies
Motor Vehicle
Music
Spanish
(Diploma) Sport
Textiles
Triple Sciences
Please tick if you would like to be
considered to do EBacc Please
remember that you need to
include Geography or History and
French or Spanish as your subject
options
Chessington Community College
Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS
Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603
wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk
![Page 28: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a](https://reader035.vdocument.in/reader035/viewer/2022062413/5a76533a7f8b9aa3618d22a0/html5/thumbnails/28.jpg)
Page|31 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board AQA
Career Links (As printed by the Royal Geographical Society)
How is the course assessed
GCSE Geography is assessed by two written Examinations (75) and by Coursework (25) in
the form of a Controlled Assessment
Fieldwork at the South Coast and elsewhere is an essential part of this course
Travel and tourist industry
Travel Guide Researcher
Property Researcher
Lawyers
Senior Researcher for County
Council
Government Statistician
TV Locations Unit
Business Consultants
Planners
32|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GRAPHICS (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
If you are interested in the world of advertising like
developing logos and posters always have an interest in
the covers of DVDs books amp games and really enjoy
making products then this is the course for you
Course Information
A large part of the course is a practical investigation
into the techniques and materials used in the
advertising and packaging we see around us every
day
Students will develop skills in drawing both free hand and using computer aided design
model making printing techniques logo designing greetings card and popup book
design and build up skills to design DVD covers labels and posters
To be able to present this to an industrial standard students will use desktop publishing
software such as GIMP (a variation of Photoshop) and computer aided design packages
such as Google Sketchup 2D Design and Fireworks They will get the chance to use the
new computer aided manufacturing milling machine to design and make work like
models signs and games
Assessment
Students will complete a major project and portfolio that counts towards 60 of the overall
GCSE grade Previous projects have included creating a popup book producing
promotional material for the Olympics designing the identity and packaging for a new band
and making a travel game for children
Externally set assignment by the Exam board will account for 40 The typical brief might look
like this
A leading perfumeaftershave manufacturer are aware that the environment is a
current issue The general public are concerned about so want an environmentally
friendly perfumeaftershave bottle and packaging designed to meet the current
market needs You are to design and make a model bottle including the packaging
Career Progression
Or anything in the creative industries
Graphic designer Work in advertising Web designer
Architect Product designer Set designer
Computer game designer Window dresser Magazine editor
Fashion designer Comic book creator Book illustrator
Artist
Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a
range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme
conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)
Content
Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated
situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a
portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are
required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key
skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam
They will study the following subjects at Level 1
Shampoo and condition hair
Blow drying
Contribute to performing and colouring process
Contribute to the development of effective working
relationships
Support the health and safety of the salon
Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas
Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is
complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and
seminars
All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical
assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress
How will they be assessed
They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical
assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on
progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered
individually at different stages throughout the course
There are four areas of assessment
Practical They carry out the skill
Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill
Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit
Online tests
Progression
They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such
as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme
34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and
opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal
subject for you
You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability
to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely
untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills
What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for
History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities
alike It is particularly useful for the following careers
Course Information
The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills
covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of
these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in
the classroom
Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams
almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students
maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two
year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work
Each of the following units is worth 25
Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations
Key topics
bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56
bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)
bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991
Law
Journalism
Television production and research
Advertising
Research
Marketing
Business Management
Accountancy
Archaeology
Museum work
Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939
Key Topics
bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939
bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Holocaust
Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970
Key topics
bull McCarthyism and the Red scare
bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King
bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies
bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)
Representations of History
CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990
36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT
Exam Board OCR
The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-
requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres
and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the
recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students
education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and
employers
Course Information
The course aims to develop
Problem-solving skills through the practical real life
application of ICT to complex problems
The ability to analyse appraise and make critical
judgements about the use of ICT systems
An awareness of the role of ICT in the management
manipulation and dissemination of information
Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with
others
The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and
competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist
tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final
student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms
of ICT problem solving and project management
There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been
completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer
Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc
Assessment
Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two
GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟
equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE
In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students
must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two
mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2
Diploma
Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become
increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics
magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such
as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students
to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages
we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as
they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of
audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-
world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very
relevant and very challenging
Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different
forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is
a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in
a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also
able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in
an organised way
Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to
looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as
bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns
constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe
Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied
interesting and highly rewarding
Coursework
The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall
assessment of the course Students produce three assignments
for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical
Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment
Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical
Production and Evaluation
Assessment
This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is
undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for
the qualification
Recent topics for the examination have included
Soap opera Quiz shows
Action Films The Popular Press
Music magazines
38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning
The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist
learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering
Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills
The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to
broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students
who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical
career within the sector
Progression
The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate
(VRQ) in the appropriate career route
Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using
the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship
framework) in the appropriate route
Potential Job Opportunities
Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder
Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician
Assessment Methods
Multiple Choice Examination
Oral Examination
Portfolio of Evidence
Practical Demonstration Assignment
Practical Examination
Task-based Controlled Assessment
Written Examination
Overall Assessment Method
Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit
The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the
learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test
results
Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing
and ListeningAppraising
Performing (30)
Students perform music throughout the course The two best
recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and
one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any
type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour
time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during
that period
For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental
vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)
a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc
For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an
improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing
a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording
Composing (30)
Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the
exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must
come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed
to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material
to make a new piece out of the old one
ListeningAppraising (40)
Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a
series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final
question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music
played in the exam hall
Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam
The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are
Western Classical Music 1600-1899
Music in the 20th Century
Popular Music in Context
World Music
40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching
research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic
Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not
required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music
classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C
grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas
There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some
they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is
hard work but its good fun too
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC
(EDEXCEL)
The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used
by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the
BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire
assessment is coursework based
Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)
Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the
Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a
portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of
A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links
with others
The Performer‟s role
Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer
Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)
Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students
the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the
equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own
recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves
A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)
including costs
A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it
safely
Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording
techniques
Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what
they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating
various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is
designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to
work in the Music Industry
This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic
Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will
spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software
and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs
The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both
exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both
qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)
Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as
individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily
being assessed on everything at the end of the course
A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction
grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up
with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx
42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will
learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer
software
You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white
photographs
Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based
photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-
journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new
media practice
Assessment
This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home
is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks
There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the
marks
Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SPANISH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
All students have the choice to continue
with Spanish which they have been
studying since Year 7 It would be a wise
choice to continue with Spanish as the
ability to speak a second language is not
only useful but is advantageous in
today‟s world Our closer connection
with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even
a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers
Course Information
The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based
on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage
Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to
communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding
Topics covered are
Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo
Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink
Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo
Free time shopping money new technology sports media
Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo
Home local area and the environment
Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo
School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs
Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and
listening at the end of Year 11
44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2
Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with
the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to
vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport
The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a
range of skills and techniques personal qualities and
attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter
the workplace
Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study
1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction
The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge
and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in
instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning
and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills
2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities
The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire
motivate and improve the performance of a selected target
group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It
encourages students to work in a team situation to organise
plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement
3 Injury in Sport
The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and
their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will
enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries
4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport
The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in
the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and
enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people
(Units to be studied are subject to change)
Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TEXTILES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of
textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The
students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following
areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction
applied textiles and embellished textiles
Assessment and Coursework Balance
In their first year the students will be required to produce two
extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will
follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The
students will work from first hand observations collecting and
developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and
textiles based techniques From this research and developmental
stage students will design and produce a final piece
During the second year students will begin by completing an
extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an
externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted
will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment
will account for 40
The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual
style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they
learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a
more personal response to a theme
Visits
Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources
such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second
year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within
the industry today
Why choose Textiles
Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more
confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level
course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles
The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range
of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior
design styling textiles design and costume design
46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)
Exam Board AQA
Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology
Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three
subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three
separate GCSEs
What are the differences between Triple Science and other
science GCSEs
This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will
be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of
the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award
What are the advantages of studying Triple Science
The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into
bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for
bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge
Who should consider taking Triple Science
Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope
with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a
related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those
students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this
course
The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school
GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics
Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25
Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25
Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25
Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25
Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS
2012 - 2014
Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4
option subjects
Please note
We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If
through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we
cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course
Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012
Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012
Make a record of your choice on the table below before
handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the
Options Information Evening
SUBJECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
Mo
st
De
sire
d
3D Design
Art
Catering
Construction
Dance
Drama
Ethics
Film Studies
French
Geography
Graphics
Hairdressing
History
ICT
Media Studies
Motor Vehicle
Music
Spanish
(Diploma) Sport
Textiles
Triple Sciences
Please tick if you would like to be
considered to do EBacc Please
remember that you need to
include Geography or History and
French or Spanish as your subject
options
Chessington Community College
Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS
Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603
wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk
![Page 29: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a](https://reader035.vdocument.in/reader035/viewer/2022062413/5a76533a7f8b9aa3618d22a0/html5/thumbnails/29.jpg)
32|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
GRAPHICS (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
If you are interested in the world of advertising like
developing logos and posters always have an interest in
the covers of DVDs books amp games and really enjoy
making products then this is the course for you
Course Information
A large part of the course is a practical investigation
into the techniques and materials used in the
advertising and packaging we see around us every
day
Students will develop skills in drawing both free hand and using computer aided design
model making printing techniques logo designing greetings card and popup book
design and build up skills to design DVD covers labels and posters
To be able to present this to an industrial standard students will use desktop publishing
software such as GIMP (a variation of Photoshop) and computer aided design packages
such as Google Sketchup 2D Design and Fireworks They will get the chance to use the
new computer aided manufacturing milling machine to design and make work like
models signs and games
Assessment
Students will complete a major project and portfolio that counts towards 60 of the overall
GCSE grade Previous projects have included creating a popup book producing
promotional material for the Olympics designing the identity and packaging for a new band
and making a travel game for children
Externally set assignment by the Exam board will account for 40 The typical brief might look
like this
A leading perfumeaftershave manufacturer are aware that the environment is a
current issue The general public are concerned about so want an environmentally
friendly perfumeaftershave bottle and packaging designed to meet the current
market needs You are to design and make a model bottle including the packaging
Career Progression
Or anything in the creative industries
Graphic designer Work in advertising Web designer
Architect Product designer Set designer
Computer game designer Window dresser Magazine editor
Fashion designer Comic book creator Book illustrator
Artist
Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a
range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme
conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)
Content
Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated
situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a
portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are
required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key
skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam
They will study the following subjects at Level 1
Shampoo and condition hair
Blow drying
Contribute to performing and colouring process
Contribute to the development of effective working
relationships
Support the health and safety of the salon
Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas
Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is
complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and
seminars
All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical
assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress
How will they be assessed
They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical
assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on
progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered
individually at different stages throughout the course
There are four areas of assessment
Practical They carry out the skill
Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill
Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit
Online tests
Progression
They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such
as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme
34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and
opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal
subject for you
You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability
to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely
untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills
What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for
History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities
alike It is particularly useful for the following careers
Course Information
The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills
covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of
these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in
the classroom
Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams
almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students
maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two
year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work
Each of the following units is worth 25
Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations
Key topics
bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56
bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)
bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991
Law
Journalism
Television production and research
Advertising
Research
Marketing
Business Management
Accountancy
Archaeology
Museum work
Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939
Key Topics
bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939
bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Holocaust
Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970
Key topics
bull McCarthyism and the Red scare
bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King
bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies
bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)
Representations of History
CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990
36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT
Exam Board OCR
The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-
requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres
and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the
recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students
education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and
employers
Course Information
The course aims to develop
Problem-solving skills through the practical real life
application of ICT to complex problems
The ability to analyse appraise and make critical
judgements about the use of ICT systems
An awareness of the role of ICT in the management
manipulation and dissemination of information
Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with
others
The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and
competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist
tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final
student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms
of ICT problem solving and project management
There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been
completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer
Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc
Assessment
Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two
GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟
equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE
In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students
must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two
mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2
Diploma
Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become
increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics
magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such
as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students
to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages
we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as
they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of
audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-
world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very
relevant and very challenging
Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different
forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is
a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in
a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also
able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in
an organised way
Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to
looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as
bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns
constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe
Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied
interesting and highly rewarding
Coursework
The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall
assessment of the course Students produce three assignments
for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical
Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment
Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical
Production and Evaluation
Assessment
This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is
undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for
the qualification
Recent topics for the examination have included
Soap opera Quiz shows
Action Films The Popular Press
Music magazines
38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning
The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist
learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering
Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills
The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to
broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students
who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical
career within the sector
Progression
The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate
(VRQ) in the appropriate career route
Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using
the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship
framework) in the appropriate route
Potential Job Opportunities
Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder
Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician
Assessment Methods
Multiple Choice Examination
Oral Examination
Portfolio of Evidence
Practical Demonstration Assignment
Practical Examination
Task-based Controlled Assessment
Written Examination
Overall Assessment Method
Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit
The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the
learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test
results
Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing
and ListeningAppraising
Performing (30)
Students perform music throughout the course The two best
recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and
one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any
type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour
time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during
that period
For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental
vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)
a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc
For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an
improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing
a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording
Composing (30)
Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the
exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must
come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed
to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material
to make a new piece out of the old one
ListeningAppraising (40)
Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a
series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final
question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music
played in the exam hall
Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam
The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are
Western Classical Music 1600-1899
Music in the 20th Century
Popular Music in Context
World Music
40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching
research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic
Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not
required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music
classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C
grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas
There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some
they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is
hard work but its good fun too
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC
(EDEXCEL)
The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used
by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the
BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire
assessment is coursework based
Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)
Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the
Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a
portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of
A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links
with others
The Performer‟s role
Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer
Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)
Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students
the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the
equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own
recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves
A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)
including costs
A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it
safely
Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording
techniques
Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what
they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating
various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is
designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to
work in the Music Industry
This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic
Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will
spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software
and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs
The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both
exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both
qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)
Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as
individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily
being assessed on everything at the end of the course
A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction
grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up
with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx
42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will
learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer
software
You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white
photographs
Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based
photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-
journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new
media practice
Assessment
This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home
is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks
There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the
marks
Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SPANISH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
All students have the choice to continue
with Spanish which they have been
studying since Year 7 It would be a wise
choice to continue with Spanish as the
ability to speak a second language is not
only useful but is advantageous in
today‟s world Our closer connection
with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even
a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers
Course Information
The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based
on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage
Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to
communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding
Topics covered are
Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo
Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink
Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo
Free time shopping money new technology sports media
Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo
Home local area and the environment
Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo
School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs
Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and
listening at the end of Year 11
44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2
Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with
the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to
vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport
The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a
range of skills and techniques personal qualities and
attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter
the workplace
Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study
1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction
The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge
and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in
instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning
and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills
2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities
The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire
motivate and improve the performance of a selected target
group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It
encourages students to work in a team situation to organise
plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement
3 Injury in Sport
The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and
their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will
enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries
4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport
The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in
the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and
enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people
(Units to be studied are subject to change)
Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TEXTILES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of
textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The
students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following
areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction
applied textiles and embellished textiles
Assessment and Coursework Balance
In their first year the students will be required to produce two
extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will
follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The
students will work from first hand observations collecting and
developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and
textiles based techniques From this research and developmental
stage students will design and produce a final piece
During the second year students will begin by completing an
extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an
externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted
will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment
will account for 40
The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual
style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they
learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a
more personal response to a theme
Visits
Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources
such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second
year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within
the industry today
Why choose Textiles
Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more
confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level
course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles
The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range
of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior
design styling textiles design and costume design
46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)
Exam Board AQA
Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology
Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three
subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three
separate GCSEs
What are the differences between Triple Science and other
science GCSEs
This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will
be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of
the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award
What are the advantages of studying Triple Science
The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into
bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for
bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge
Who should consider taking Triple Science
Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope
with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a
related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those
students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this
course
The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school
GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics
Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25
Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25
Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25
Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25
Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS
2012 - 2014
Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4
option subjects
Please note
We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If
through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we
cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course
Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012
Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012
Make a record of your choice on the table below before
handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the
Options Information Evening
SUBJECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
Mo
st
De
sire
d
3D Design
Art
Catering
Construction
Dance
Drama
Ethics
Film Studies
French
Geography
Graphics
Hairdressing
History
ICT
Media Studies
Motor Vehicle
Music
Spanish
(Diploma) Sport
Textiles
Triple Sciences
Please tick if you would like to be
considered to do EBacc Please
remember that you need to
include Geography or History and
French or Spanish as your subject
options
Chessington Community College
Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS
Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603
wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk
![Page 30: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a](https://reader035.vdocument.in/reader035/viewer/2022062413/5a76533a7f8b9aa3618d22a0/html5/thumbnails/30.jpg)
Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a
range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme
conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)
Content
Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated
situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a
portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are
required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key
skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam
They will study the following subjects at Level 1
Shampoo and condition hair
Blow drying
Contribute to performing and colouring process
Contribute to the development of effective working
relationships
Support the health and safety of the salon
Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas
Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is
complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and
seminars
All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical
assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress
How will they be assessed
They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical
assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on
progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered
individually at different stages throughout the course
There are four areas of assessment
Practical They carry out the skill
Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill
Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit
Online tests
Progression
They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such
as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme
34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and
opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal
subject for you
You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability
to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely
untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills
What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for
History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities
alike It is particularly useful for the following careers
Course Information
The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills
covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of
these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in
the classroom
Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams
almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students
maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two
year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work
Each of the following units is worth 25
Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations
Key topics
bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56
bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)
bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991
Law
Journalism
Television production and research
Advertising
Research
Marketing
Business Management
Accountancy
Archaeology
Museum work
Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939
Key Topics
bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939
bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Holocaust
Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970
Key topics
bull McCarthyism and the Red scare
bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King
bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies
bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)
Representations of History
CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990
36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT
Exam Board OCR
The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-
requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres
and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the
recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students
education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and
employers
Course Information
The course aims to develop
Problem-solving skills through the practical real life
application of ICT to complex problems
The ability to analyse appraise and make critical
judgements about the use of ICT systems
An awareness of the role of ICT in the management
manipulation and dissemination of information
Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with
others
The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and
competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist
tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final
student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms
of ICT problem solving and project management
There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been
completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer
Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc
Assessment
Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two
GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟
equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE
In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students
must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two
mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2
Diploma
Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become
increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics
magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such
as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students
to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages
we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as
they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of
audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-
world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very
relevant and very challenging
Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different
forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is
a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in
a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also
able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in
an organised way
Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to
looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as
bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns
constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe
Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied
interesting and highly rewarding
Coursework
The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall
assessment of the course Students produce three assignments
for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical
Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment
Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical
Production and Evaluation
Assessment
This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is
undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for
the qualification
Recent topics for the examination have included
Soap opera Quiz shows
Action Films The Popular Press
Music magazines
38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning
The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist
learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering
Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills
The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to
broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students
who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical
career within the sector
Progression
The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate
(VRQ) in the appropriate career route
Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using
the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship
framework) in the appropriate route
Potential Job Opportunities
Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder
Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician
Assessment Methods
Multiple Choice Examination
Oral Examination
Portfolio of Evidence
Practical Demonstration Assignment
Practical Examination
Task-based Controlled Assessment
Written Examination
Overall Assessment Method
Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit
The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the
learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test
results
Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing
and ListeningAppraising
Performing (30)
Students perform music throughout the course The two best
recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and
one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any
type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour
time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during
that period
For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental
vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)
a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc
For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an
improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing
a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording
Composing (30)
Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the
exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must
come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed
to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material
to make a new piece out of the old one
ListeningAppraising (40)
Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a
series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final
question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music
played in the exam hall
Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam
The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are
Western Classical Music 1600-1899
Music in the 20th Century
Popular Music in Context
World Music
40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching
research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic
Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not
required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music
classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C
grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas
There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some
they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is
hard work but its good fun too
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC
(EDEXCEL)
The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used
by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the
BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire
assessment is coursework based
Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)
Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the
Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a
portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of
A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links
with others
The Performer‟s role
Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer
Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)
Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students
the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the
equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own
recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves
A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)
including costs
A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it
safely
Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording
techniques
Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what
they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating
various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is
designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to
work in the Music Industry
This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic
Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will
spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software
and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs
The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both
exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both
qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)
Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as
individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily
being assessed on everything at the end of the course
A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction
grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up
with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx
42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will
learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer
software
You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white
photographs
Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based
photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-
journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new
media practice
Assessment
This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home
is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks
There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the
marks
Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SPANISH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
All students have the choice to continue
with Spanish which they have been
studying since Year 7 It would be a wise
choice to continue with Spanish as the
ability to speak a second language is not
only useful but is advantageous in
today‟s world Our closer connection
with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even
a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers
Course Information
The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based
on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage
Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to
communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding
Topics covered are
Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo
Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink
Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo
Free time shopping money new technology sports media
Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo
Home local area and the environment
Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo
School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs
Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and
listening at the end of Year 11
44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2
Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with
the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to
vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport
The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a
range of skills and techniques personal qualities and
attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter
the workplace
Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study
1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction
The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge
and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in
instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning
and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills
2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities
The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire
motivate and improve the performance of a selected target
group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It
encourages students to work in a team situation to organise
plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement
3 Injury in Sport
The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and
their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will
enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries
4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport
The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in
the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and
enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people
(Units to be studied are subject to change)
Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TEXTILES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of
textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The
students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following
areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction
applied textiles and embellished textiles
Assessment and Coursework Balance
In their first year the students will be required to produce two
extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will
follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The
students will work from first hand observations collecting and
developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and
textiles based techniques From this research and developmental
stage students will design and produce a final piece
During the second year students will begin by completing an
extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an
externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted
will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment
will account for 40
The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual
style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they
learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a
more personal response to a theme
Visits
Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources
such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second
year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within
the industry today
Why choose Textiles
Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more
confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level
course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles
The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range
of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior
design styling textiles design and costume design
46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)
Exam Board AQA
Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology
Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three
subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three
separate GCSEs
What are the differences between Triple Science and other
science GCSEs
This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will
be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of
the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award
What are the advantages of studying Triple Science
The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into
bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for
bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge
Who should consider taking Triple Science
Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope
with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a
related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those
students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this
course
The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school
GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics
Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25
Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25
Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25
Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25
Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS
2012 - 2014
Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4
option subjects
Please note
We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If
through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we
cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course
Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012
Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012
Make a record of your choice on the table below before
handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the
Options Information Evening
SUBJECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
Mo
st
De
sire
d
3D Design
Art
Catering
Construction
Dance
Drama
Ethics
Film Studies
French
Geography
Graphics
Hairdressing
History
ICT
Media Studies
Motor Vehicle
Music
Spanish
(Diploma) Sport
Textiles
Triple Sciences
Please tick if you would like to be
considered to do EBacc Please
remember that you need to
include Geography or History and
French or Spanish as your subject
options
Chessington Community College
Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS
Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603
wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk
![Page 31: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a](https://reader035.vdocument.in/reader035/viewer/2022062413/5a76533a7f8b9aa3618d22a0/html5/thumbnails/31.jpg)
34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and
opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal
subject for you
You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability
to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely
untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills
What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for
History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities
alike It is particularly useful for the following careers
Course Information
The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills
covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of
these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in
the classroom
Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams
almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students
maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two
year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work
Each of the following units is worth 25
Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations
Key topics
bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56
bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)
bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991
Law
Journalism
Television production and research
Advertising
Research
Marketing
Business Management
Accountancy
Archaeology
Museum work
Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939
Key Topics
bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939
bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Holocaust
Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970
Key topics
bull McCarthyism and the Red scare
bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King
bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies
bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)
Representations of History
CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990
36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT
Exam Board OCR
The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-
requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres
and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the
recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students
education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and
employers
Course Information
The course aims to develop
Problem-solving skills through the practical real life
application of ICT to complex problems
The ability to analyse appraise and make critical
judgements about the use of ICT systems
An awareness of the role of ICT in the management
manipulation and dissemination of information
Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with
others
The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and
competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist
tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final
student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms
of ICT problem solving and project management
There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been
completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer
Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc
Assessment
Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two
GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟
equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE
In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students
must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two
mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2
Diploma
Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become
increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics
magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such
as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students
to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages
we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as
they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of
audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-
world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very
relevant and very challenging
Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different
forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is
a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in
a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also
able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in
an organised way
Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to
looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as
bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns
constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe
Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied
interesting and highly rewarding
Coursework
The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall
assessment of the course Students produce three assignments
for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical
Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment
Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical
Production and Evaluation
Assessment
This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is
undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for
the qualification
Recent topics for the examination have included
Soap opera Quiz shows
Action Films The Popular Press
Music magazines
38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning
The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist
learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering
Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills
The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to
broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students
who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical
career within the sector
Progression
The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate
(VRQ) in the appropriate career route
Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using
the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship
framework) in the appropriate route
Potential Job Opportunities
Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder
Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician
Assessment Methods
Multiple Choice Examination
Oral Examination
Portfolio of Evidence
Practical Demonstration Assignment
Practical Examination
Task-based Controlled Assessment
Written Examination
Overall Assessment Method
Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit
The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the
learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test
results
Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing
and ListeningAppraising
Performing (30)
Students perform music throughout the course The two best
recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and
one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any
type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour
time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during
that period
For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental
vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)
a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc
For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an
improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing
a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording
Composing (30)
Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the
exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must
come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed
to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material
to make a new piece out of the old one
ListeningAppraising (40)
Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a
series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final
question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music
played in the exam hall
Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam
The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are
Western Classical Music 1600-1899
Music in the 20th Century
Popular Music in Context
World Music
40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching
research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic
Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not
required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music
classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C
grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas
There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some
they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is
hard work but its good fun too
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC
(EDEXCEL)
The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used
by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the
BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire
assessment is coursework based
Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)
Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the
Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a
portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of
A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links
with others
The Performer‟s role
Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer
Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)
Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students
the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the
equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own
recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves
A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)
including costs
A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it
safely
Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording
techniques
Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what
they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating
various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is
designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to
work in the Music Industry
This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic
Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will
spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software
and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs
The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both
exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both
qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)
Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as
individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily
being assessed on everything at the end of the course
A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction
grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up
with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx
42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will
learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer
software
You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white
photographs
Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based
photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-
journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new
media practice
Assessment
This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home
is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks
There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the
marks
Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SPANISH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
All students have the choice to continue
with Spanish which they have been
studying since Year 7 It would be a wise
choice to continue with Spanish as the
ability to speak a second language is not
only useful but is advantageous in
today‟s world Our closer connection
with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even
a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers
Course Information
The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based
on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage
Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to
communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding
Topics covered are
Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo
Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink
Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo
Free time shopping money new technology sports media
Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo
Home local area and the environment
Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo
School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs
Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and
listening at the end of Year 11
44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2
Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with
the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to
vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport
The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a
range of skills and techniques personal qualities and
attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter
the workplace
Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study
1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction
The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge
and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in
instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning
and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills
2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities
The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire
motivate and improve the performance of a selected target
group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It
encourages students to work in a team situation to organise
plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement
3 Injury in Sport
The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and
their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will
enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries
4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport
The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in
the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and
enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people
(Units to be studied are subject to change)
Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TEXTILES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of
textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The
students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following
areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction
applied textiles and embellished textiles
Assessment and Coursework Balance
In their first year the students will be required to produce two
extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will
follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The
students will work from first hand observations collecting and
developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and
textiles based techniques From this research and developmental
stage students will design and produce a final piece
During the second year students will begin by completing an
extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an
externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted
will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment
will account for 40
The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual
style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they
learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a
more personal response to a theme
Visits
Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources
such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second
year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within
the industry today
Why choose Textiles
Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more
confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level
course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles
The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range
of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior
design styling textiles design and costume design
46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)
Exam Board AQA
Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology
Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three
subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three
separate GCSEs
What are the differences between Triple Science and other
science GCSEs
This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will
be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of
the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award
What are the advantages of studying Triple Science
The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into
bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for
bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge
Who should consider taking Triple Science
Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope
with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a
related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those
students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this
course
The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school
GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics
Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25
Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25
Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25
Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25
Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS
2012 - 2014
Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4
option subjects
Please note
We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If
through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we
cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course
Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012
Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012
Make a record of your choice on the table below before
handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the
Options Information Evening
SUBJECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
Mo
st
De
sire
d
3D Design
Art
Catering
Construction
Dance
Drama
Ethics
Film Studies
French
Geography
Graphics
Hairdressing
History
ICT
Media Studies
Motor Vehicle
Music
Spanish
(Diploma) Sport
Textiles
Triple Sciences
Please tick if you would like to be
considered to do EBacc Please
remember that you need to
include Geography or History and
French or Spanish as your subject
options
Chessington Community College
Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS
Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603
wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk
![Page 32: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a](https://reader035.vdocument.in/reader035/viewer/2022062413/5a76533a7f8b9aa3618d22a0/html5/thumbnails/32.jpg)
Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
HISTORY (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939
Key Topics
bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939
bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933
bull The Holocaust
Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970
Key topics
bull McCarthyism and the Red scare
bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King
bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies
bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)
Representations of History
CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990
36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT
Exam Board OCR
The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-
requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres
and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the
recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students
education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and
employers
Course Information
The course aims to develop
Problem-solving skills through the practical real life
application of ICT to complex problems
The ability to analyse appraise and make critical
judgements about the use of ICT systems
An awareness of the role of ICT in the management
manipulation and dissemination of information
Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with
others
The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and
competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist
tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final
student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms
of ICT problem solving and project management
There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been
completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer
Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc
Assessment
Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two
GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟
equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE
In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students
must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two
mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2
Diploma
Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become
increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics
magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such
as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students
to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages
we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as
they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of
audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-
world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very
relevant and very challenging
Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different
forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is
a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in
a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also
able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in
an organised way
Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to
looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as
bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns
constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe
Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied
interesting and highly rewarding
Coursework
The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall
assessment of the course Students produce three assignments
for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical
Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment
Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical
Production and Evaluation
Assessment
This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is
undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for
the qualification
Recent topics for the examination have included
Soap opera Quiz shows
Action Films The Popular Press
Music magazines
38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning
The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist
learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering
Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills
The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to
broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students
who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical
career within the sector
Progression
The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate
(VRQ) in the appropriate career route
Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using
the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship
framework) in the appropriate route
Potential Job Opportunities
Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder
Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician
Assessment Methods
Multiple Choice Examination
Oral Examination
Portfolio of Evidence
Practical Demonstration Assignment
Practical Examination
Task-based Controlled Assessment
Written Examination
Overall Assessment Method
Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit
The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the
learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test
results
Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing
and ListeningAppraising
Performing (30)
Students perform music throughout the course The two best
recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and
one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any
type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour
time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during
that period
For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental
vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)
a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc
For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an
improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing
a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording
Composing (30)
Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the
exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must
come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed
to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material
to make a new piece out of the old one
ListeningAppraising (40)
Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a
series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final
question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music
played in the exam hall
Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam
The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are
Western Classical Music 1600-1899
Music in the 20th Century
Popular Music in Context
World Music
40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching
research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic
Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not
required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music
classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C
grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas
There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some
they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is
hard work but its good fun too
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC
(EDEXCEL)
The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used
by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the
BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire
assessment is coursework based
Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)
Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the
Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a
portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of
A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links
with others
The Performer‟s role
Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer
Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)
Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students
the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the
equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own
recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves
A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)
including costs
A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it
safely
Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording
techniques
Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what
they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating
various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is
designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to
work in the Music Industry
This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic
Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will
spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software
and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs
The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both
exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both
qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)
Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as
individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily
being assessed on everything at the end of the course
A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction
grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up
with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx
42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will
learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer
software
You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white
photographs
Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based
photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-
journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new
media practice
Assessment
This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home
is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks
There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the
marks
Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SPANISH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
All students have the choice to continue
with Spanish which they have been
studying since Year 7 It would be a wise
choice to continue with Spanish as the
ability to speak a second language is not
only useful but is advantageous in
today‟s world Our closer connection
with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even
a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers
Course Information
The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based
on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage
Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to
communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding
Topics covered are
Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo
Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink
Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo
Free time shopping money new technology sports media
Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo
Home local area and the environment
Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo
School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs
Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and
listening at the end of Year 11
44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2
Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with
the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to
vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport
The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a
range of skills and techniques personal qualities and
attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter
the workplace
Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study
1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction
The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge
and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in
instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning
and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills
2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities
The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire
motivate and improve the performance of a selected target
group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It
encourages students to work in a team situation to organise
plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement
3 Injury in Sport
The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and
their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will
enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries
4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport
The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in
the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and
enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people
(Units to be studied are subject to change)
Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TEXTILES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of
textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The
students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following
areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction
applied textiles and embellished textiles
Assessment and Coursework Balance
In their first year the students will be required to produce two
extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will
follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The
students will work from first hand observations collecting and
developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and
textiles based techniques From this research and developmental
stage students will design and produce a final piece
During the second year students will begin by completing an
extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an
externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted
will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment
will account for 40
The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual
style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they
learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a
more personal response to a theme
Visits
Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources
such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second
year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within
the industry today
Why choose Textiles
Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more
confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level
course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles
The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range
of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior
design styling textiles design and costume design
46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)
Exam Board AQA
Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology
Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three
subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three
separate GCSEs
What are the differences between Triple Science and other
science GCSEs
This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will
be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of
the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award
What are the advantages of studying Triple Science
The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into
bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for
bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge
Who should consider taking Triple Science
Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope
with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a
related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those
students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this
course
The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school
GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics
Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25
Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25
Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25
Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25
Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS
2012 - 2014
Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4
option subjects
Please note
We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If
through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we
cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course
Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012
Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012
Make a record of your choice on the table below before
handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the
Options Information Evening
SUBJECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
Mo
st
De
sire
d
3D Design
Art
Catering
Construction
Dance
Drama
Ethics
Film Studies
French
Geography
Graphics
Hairdressing
History
ICT
Media Studies
Motor Vehicle
Music
Spanish
(Diploma) Sport
Textiles
Triple Sciences
Please tick if you would like to be
considered to do EBacc Please
remember that you need to
include Geography or History and
French or Spanish as your subject
options
Chessington Community College
Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS
Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603
wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk
![Page 33: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a](https://reader035.vdocument.in/reader035/viewer/2022062413/5a76533a7f8b9aa3618d22a0/html5/thumbnails/33.jpg)
36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT
Exam Board OCR
The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-
requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres
and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the
recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students
education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and
employers
Course Information
The course aims to develop
Problem-solving skills through the practical real life
application of ICT to complex problems
The ability to analyse appraise and make critical
judgements about the use of ICT systems
An awareness of the role of ICT in the management
manipulation and dissemination of information
Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with
others
The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and
competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist
tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final
student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms
of ICT problem solving and project management
There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been
completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer
Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc
Assessment
Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two
GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟
equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE
In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students
must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two
mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2
Diploma
Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become
increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics
magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such
as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students
to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages
we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as
they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of
audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-
world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very
relevant and very challenging
Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different
forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is
a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in
a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also
able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in
an organised way
Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to
looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as
bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns
constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe
Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied
interesting and highly rewarding
Coursework
The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall
assessment of the course Students produce three assignments
for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical
Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment
Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical
Production and Evaluation
Assessment
This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is
undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for
the qualification
Recent topics for the examination have included
Soap opera Quiz shows
Action Films The Popular Press
Music magazines
38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning
The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist
learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering
Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills
The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to
broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students
who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical
career within the sector
Progression
The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate
(VRQ) in the appropriate career route
Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using
the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship
framework) in the appropriate route
Potential Job Opportunities
Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder
Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician
Assessment Methods
Multiple Choice Examination
Oral Examination
Portfolio of Evidence
Practical Demonstration Assignment
Practical Examination
Task-based Controlled Assessment
Written Examination
Overall Assessment Method
Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit
The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the
learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test
results
Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing
and ListeningAppraising
Performing (30)
Students perform music throughout the course The two best
recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and
one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any
type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour
time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during
that period
For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental
vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)
a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc
For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an
improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing
a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording
Composing (30)
Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the
exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must
come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed
to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material
to make a new piece out of the old one
ListeningAppraising (40)
Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a
series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final
question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music
played in the exam hall
Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam
The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are
Western Classical Music 1600-1899
Music in the 20th Century
Popular Music in Context
World Music
40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching
research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic
Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not
required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music
classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C
grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas
There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some
they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is
hard work but its good fun too
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC
(EDEXCEL)
The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used
by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the
BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire
assessment is coursework based
Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)
Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the
Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a
portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of
A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links
with others
The Performer‟s role
Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer
Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)
Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students
the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the
equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own
recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves
A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)
including costs
A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it
safely
Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording
techniques
Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what
they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating
various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is
designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to
work in the Music Industry
This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic
Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will
spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software
and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs
The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both
exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both
qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)
Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as
individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily
being assessed on everything at the end of the course
A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction
grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up
with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx
42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will
learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer
software
You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white
photographs
Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based
photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-
journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new
media practice
Assessment
This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home
is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks
There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the
marks
Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SPANISH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
All students have the choice to continue
with Spanish which they have been
studying since Year 7 It would be a wise
choice to continue with Spanish as the
ability to speak a second language is not
only useful but is advantageous in
today‟s world Our closer connection
with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even
a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers
Course Information
The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based
on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage
Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to
communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding
Topics covered are
Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo
Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink
Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo
Free time shopping money new technology sports media
Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo
Home local area and the environment
Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo
School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs
Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and
listening at the end of Year 11
44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2
Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with
the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to
vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport
The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a
range of skills and techniques personal qualities and
attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter
the workplace
Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study
1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction
The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge
and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in
instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning
and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills
2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities
The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire
motivate and improve the performance of a selected target
group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It
encourages students to work in a team situation to organise
plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement
3 Injury in Sport
The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and
their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will
enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries
4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport
The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in
the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and
enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people
(Units to be studied are subject to change)
Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TEXTILES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of
textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The
students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following
areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction
applied textiles and embellished textiles
Assessment and Coursework Balance
In their first year the students will be required to produce two
extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will
follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The
students will work from first hand observations collecting and
developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and
textiles based techniques From this research and developmental
stage students will design and produce a final piece
During the second year students will begin by completing an
extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an
externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted
will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment
will account for 40
The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual
style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they
learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a
more personal response to a theme
Visits
Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources
such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second
year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within
the industry today
Why choose Textiles
Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more
confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level
course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles
The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range
of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior
design styling textiles design and costume design
46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)
Exam Board AQA
Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology
Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three
subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three
separate GCSEs
What are the differences between Triple Science and other
science GCSEs
This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will
be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of
the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award
What are the advantages of studying Triple Science
The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into
bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for
bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge
Who should consider taking Triple Science
Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope
with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a
related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those
students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this
course
The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school
GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics
Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25
Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25
Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25
Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25
Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS
2012 - 2014
Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4
option subjects
Please note
We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If
through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we
cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course
Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012
Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012
Make a record of your choice on the table below before
handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the
Options Information Evening
SUBJECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
Mo
st
De
sire
d
3D Design
Art
Catering
Construction
Dance
Drama
Ethics
Film Studies
French
Geography
Graphics
Hairdressing
History
ICT
Media Studies
Motor Vehicle
Music
Spanish
(Diploma) Sport
Textiles
Triple Sciences
Please tick if you would like to be
considered to do EBacc Please
remember that you need to
include Geography or History and
French or Spanish as your subject
options
Chessington Community College
Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS
Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603
wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk
![Page 34: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a](https://reader035.vdocument.in/reader035/viewer/2022062413/5a76533a7f8b9aa3618d22a0/html5/thumbnails/34.jpg)
Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become
increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics
magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such
as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students
to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages
we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as
they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of
audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-
world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very
relevant and very challenging
Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different
forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is
a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in
a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also
able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in
an organised way
Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to
looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as
bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns
constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe
Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied
interesting and highly rewarding
Coursework
The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall
assessment of the course Students produce three assignments
for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical
Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment
Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical
Production and Evaluation
Assessment
This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is
undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for
the qualification
Recent topics for the examination have included
Soap opera Quiz shows
Action Films The Popular Press
Music magazines
38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning
The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist
learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering
Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills
The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to
broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students
who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical
career within the sector
Progression
The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate
(VRQ) in the appropriate career route
Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using
the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship
framework) in the appropriate route
Potential Job Opportunities
Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder
Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician
Assessment Methods
Multiple Choice Examination
Oral Examination
Portfolio of Evidence
Practical Demonstration Assignment
Practical Examination
Task-based Controlled Assessment
Written Examination
Overall Assessment Method
Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit
The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the
learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test
results
Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing
and ListeningAppraising
Performing (30)
Students perform music throughout the course The two best
recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and
one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any
type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour
time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during
that period
For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental
vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)
a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc
For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an
improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing
a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording
Composing (30)
Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the
exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must
come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed
to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material
to make a new piece out of the old one
ListeningAppraising (40)
Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a
series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final
question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music
played in the exam hall
Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam
The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are
Western Classical Music 1600-1899
Music in the 20th Century
Popular Music in Context
World Music
40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching
research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic
Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not
required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music
classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C
grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas
There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some
they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is
hard work but its good fun too
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC
(EDEXCEL)
The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used
by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the
BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire
assessment is coursework based
Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)
Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the
Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a
portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of
A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links
with others
The Performer‟s role
Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer
Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)
Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students
the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the
equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own
recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves
A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)
including costs
A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it
safely
Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording
techniques
Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what
they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating
various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is
designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to
work in the Music Industry
This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic
Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will
spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software
and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs
The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both
exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both
qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)
Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as
individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily
being assessed on everything at the end of the course
A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction
grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up
with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx
42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will
learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer
software
You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white
photographs
Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based
photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-
journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new
media practice
Assessment
This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home
is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks
There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the
marks
Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SPANISH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
All students have the choice to continue
with Spanish which they have been
studying since Year 7 It would be a wise
choice to continue with Spanish as the
ability to speak a second language is not
only useful but is advantageous in
today‟s world Our closer connection
with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even
a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers
Course Information
The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based
on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage
Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to
communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding
Topics covered are
Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo
Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink
Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo
Free time shopping money new technology sports media
Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo
Home local area and the environment
Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo
School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs
Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and
listening at the end of Year 11
44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2
Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with
the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to
vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport
The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a
range of skills and techniques personal qualities and
attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter
the workplace
Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study
1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction
The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge
and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in
instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning
and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills
2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities
The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire
motivate and improve the performance of a selected target
group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It
encourages students to work in a team situation to organise
plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement
3 Injury in Sport
The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and
their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will
enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries
4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport
The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in
the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and
enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people
(Units to be studied are subject to change)
Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TEXTILES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of
textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The
students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following
areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction
applied textiles and embellished textiles
Assessment and Coursework Balance
In their first year the students will be required to produce two
extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will
follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The
students will work from first hand observations collecting and
developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and
textiles based techniques From this research and developmental
stage students will design and produce a final piece
During the second year students will begin by completing an
extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an
externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted
will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment
will account for 40
The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual
style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they
learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a
more personal response to a theme
Visits
Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources
such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second
year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within
the industry today
Why choose Textiles
Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more
confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level
course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles
The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range
of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior
design styling textiles design and costume design
46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)
Exam Board AQA
Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology
Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three
subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three
separate GCSEs
What are the differences between Triple Science and other
science GCSEs
This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will
be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of
the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award
What are the advantages of studying Triple Science
The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into
bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for
bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge
Who should consider taking Triple Science
Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope
with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a
related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those
students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this
course
The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school
GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics
Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25
Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25
Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25
Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25
Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS
2012 - 2014
Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4
option subjects
Please note
We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If
through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we
cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course
Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012
Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012
Make a record of your choice on the table below before
handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the
Options Information Evening
SUBJECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
Mo
st
De
sire
d
3D Design
Art
Catering
Construction
Dance
Drama
Ethics
Film Studies
French
Geography
Graphics
Hairdressing
History
ICT
Media Studies
Motor Vehicle
Music
Spanish
(Diploma) Sport
Textiles
Triple Sciences
Please tick if you would like to be
considered to do EBacc Please
remember that you need to
include Geography or History and
French or Spanish as your subject
options
Chessington Community College
Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS
Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603
wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk
![Page 35: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a](https://reader035.vdocument.in/reader035/viewer/2022062413/5a76533a7f8b9aa3618d22a0/html5/thumbnails/35.jpg)
38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE
This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices
IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning
The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist
learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering
Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills
The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to
broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students
who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical
career within the sector
Progression
The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate
(VRQ) in the appropriate career route
Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using
the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship
framework) in the appropriate route
Potential Job Opportunities
Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder
Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician
Assessment Methods
Multiple Choice Examination
Oral Examination
Portfolio of Evidence
Practical Demonstration Assignment
Practical Examination
Task-based Controlled Assessment
Written Examination
Overall Assessment Method
Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit
The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the
learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test
results
Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing
and ListeningAppraising
Performing (30)
Students perform music throughout the course The two best
recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and
one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any
type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour
time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during
that period
For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental
vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)
a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc
For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an
improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing
a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording
Composing (30)
Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the
exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must
come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed
to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material
to make a new piece out of the old one
ListeningAppraising (40)
Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a
series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final
question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music
played in the exam hall
Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam
The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are
Western Classical Music 1600-1899
Music in the 20th Century
Popular Music in Context
World Music
40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching
research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic
Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not
required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music
classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C
grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas
There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some
they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is
hard work but its good fun too
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC
(EDEXCEL)
The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used
by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the
BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire
assessment is coursework based
Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)
Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the
Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a
portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of
A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links
with others
The Performer‟s role
Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer
Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)
Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students
the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the
equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own
recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves
A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)
including costs
A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it
safely
Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording
techniques
Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what
they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating
various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is
designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to
work in the Music Industry
This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic
Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will
spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software
and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs
The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both
exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both
qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)
Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as
individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily
being assessed on everything at the end of the course
A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction
grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up
with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx
42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will
learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer
software
You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white
photographs
Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based
photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-
journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new
media practice
Assessment
This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home
is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks
There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the
marks
Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SPANISH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
All students have the choice to continue
with Spanish which they have been
studying since Year 7 It would be a wise
choice to continue with Spanish as the
ability to speak a second language is not
only useful but is advantageous in
today‟s world Our closer connection
with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even
a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers
Course Information
The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based
on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage
Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to
communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding
Topics covered are
Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo
Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink
Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo
Free time shopping money new technology sports media
Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo
Home local area and the environment
Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo
School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs
Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and
listening at the end of Year 11
44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2
Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with
the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to
vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport
The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a
range of skills and techniques personal qualities and
attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter
the workplace
Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study
1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction
The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge
and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in
instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning
and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills
2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities
The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire
motivate and improve the performance of a selected target
group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It
encourages students to work in a team situation to organise
plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement
3 Injury in Sport
The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and
their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will
enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries
4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport
The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in
the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and
enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people
(Units to be studied are subject to change)
Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TEXTILES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of
textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The
students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following
areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction
applied textiles and embellished textiles
Assessment and Coursework Balance
In their first year the students will be required to produce two
extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will
follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The
students will work from first hand observations collecting and
developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and
textiles based techniques From this research and developmental
stage students will design and produce a final piece
During the second year students will begin by completing an
extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an
externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted
will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment
will account for 40
The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual
style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they
learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a
more personal response to a theme
Visits
Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources
such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second
year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within
the industry today
Why choose Textiles
Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more
confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level
course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles
The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range
of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior
design styling textiles design and costume design
46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)
Exam Board AQA
Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology
Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three
subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three
separate GCSEs
What are the differences between Triple Science and other
science GCSEs
This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will
be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of
the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award
What are the advantages of studying Triple Science
The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into
bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for
bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge
Who should consider taking Triple Science
Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope
with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a
related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those
students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this
course
The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school
GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics
Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25
Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25
Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25
Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25
Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS
2012 - 2014
Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4
option subjects
Please note
We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If
through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we
cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course
Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012
Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012
Make a record of your choice on the table below before
handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the
Options Information Evening
SUBJECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
Mo
st
De
sire
d
3D Design
Art
Catering
Construction
Dance
Drama
Ethics
Film Studies
French
Geography
Graphics
Hairdressing
History
ICT
Media Studies
Motor Vehicle
Music
Spanish
(Diploma) Sport
Textiles
Triple Sciences
Please tick if you would like to be
considered to do EBacc Please
remember that you need to
include Geography or History and
French or Spanish as your subject
options
Chessington Community College
Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS
Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603
wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk
![Page 36: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a](https://reader035.vdocument.in/reader035/viewer/2022062413/5a76533a7f8b9aa3618d22a0/html5/thumbnails/36.jpg)
Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE)
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing
and ListeningAppraising
Performing (30)
Students perform music throughout the course The two best
recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and
one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any
type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour
time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during
that period
For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental
vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)
a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc
For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an
improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing
a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording
Composing (30)
Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the
exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must
come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed
to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material
to make a new piece out of the old one
ListeningAppraising (40)
Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a
series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final
question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music
played in the exam hall
Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam
The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are
Western Classical Music 1600-1899
Music in the 20th Century
Popular Music in Context
World Music
40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching
research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic
Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not
required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music
classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C
grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas
There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some
they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is
hard work but its good fun too
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC
(EDEXCEL)
The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used
by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the
BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire
assessment is coursework based
Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)
Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the
Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a
portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of
A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links
with others
The Performer‟s role
Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer
Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)
Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students
the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the
equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own
recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves
A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)
including costs
A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it
safely
Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording
techniques
Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what
they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating
various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is
designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to
work in the Music Industry
This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic
Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will
spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software
and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs
The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both
exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both
qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)
Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as
individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily
being assessed on everything at the end of the course
A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction
grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up
with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx
42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will
learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer
software
You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white
photographs
Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based
photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-
journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new
media practice
Assessment
This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home
is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks
There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the
marks
Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SPANISH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
All students have the choice to continue
with Spanish which they have been
studying since Year 7 It would be a wise
choice to continue with Spanish as the
ability to speak a second language is not
only useful but is advantageous in
today‟s world Our closer connection
with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even
a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers
Course Information
The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based
on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage
Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to
communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding
Topics covered are
Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo
Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink
Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo
Free time shopping money new technology sports media
Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo
Home local area and the environment
Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo
School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs
Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and
listening at the end of Year 11
44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2
Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with
the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to
vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport
The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a
range of skills and techniques personal qualities and
attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter
the workplace
Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study
1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction
The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge
and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in
instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning
and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills
2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities
The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire
motivate and improve the performance of a selected target
group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It
encourages students to work in a team situation to organise
plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement
3 Injury in Sport
The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and
their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will
enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries
4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport
The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in
the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and
enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people
(Units to be studied are subject to change)
Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TEXTILES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of
textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The
students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following
areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction
applied textiles and embellished textiles
Assessment and Coursework Balance
In their first year the students will be required to produce two
extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will
follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The
students will work from first hand observations collecting and
developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and
textiles based techniques From this research and developmental
stage students will design and produce a final piece
During the second year students will begin by completing an
extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an
externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted
will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment
will account for 40
The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual
style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they
learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a
more personal response to a theme
Visits
Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources
such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second
year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within
the industry today
Why choose Textiles
Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more
confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level
course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles
The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range
of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior
design styling textiles design and costume design
46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)
Exam Board AQA
Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology
Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three
subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three
separate GCSEs
What are the differences between Triple Science and other
science GCSEs
This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will
be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of
the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award
What are the advantages of studying Triple Science
The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into
bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for
bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge
Who should consider taking Triple Science
Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope
with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a
related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those
students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this
course
The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school
GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics
Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25
Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25
Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25
Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25
Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS
2012 - 2014
Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4
option subjects
Please note
We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If
through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we
cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course
Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012
Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012
Make a record of your choice on the table below before
handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the
Options Information Evening
SUBJECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
Mo
st
De
sire
d
3D Design
Art
Catering
Construction
Dance
Drama
Ethics
Film Studies
French
Geography
Graphics
Hairdressing
History
ICT
Media Studies
Motor Vehicle
Music
Spanish
(Diploma) Sport
Textiles
Triple Sciences
Please tick if you would like to be
considered to do EBacc Please
remember that you need to
include Geography or History and
French or Spanish as your subject
options
Chessington Community College
Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS
Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603
wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk
![Page 37: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a](https://reader035.vdocument.in/reader035/viewer/2022062413/5a76533a7f8b9aa3618d22a0/html5/thumbnails/37.jpg)
40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
MUSIC (GCSE) continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching
research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic
Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not
required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music
classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C
grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas
There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some
they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is
hard work but its good fun too
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC
(EDEXCEL)
The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used
by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the
BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire
assessment is coursework based
Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)
Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the
Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a
portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of
A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links
with others
The Performer‟s role
Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer
Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)
Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students
the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the
equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own
recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves
A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)
including costs
A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it
safely
Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording
techniques
Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what
they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating
various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is
designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to
work in the Music Industry
This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic
Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will
spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software
and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs
The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both
exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both
qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)
Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as
individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily
being assessed on everything at the end of the course
A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction
grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up
with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx
42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will
learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer
software
You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white
photographs
Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based
photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-
journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new
media practice
Assessment
This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home
is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks
There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the
marks
Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SPANISH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
All students have the choice to continue
with Spanish which they have been
studying since Year 7 It would be a wise
choice to continue with Spanish as the
ability to speak a second language is not
only useful but is advantageous in
today‟s world Our closer connection
with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even
a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers
Course Information
The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based
on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage
Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to
communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding
Topics covered are
Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo
Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink
Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo
Free time shopping money new technology sports media
Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo
Home local area and the environment
Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo
School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs
Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and
listening at the end of Year 11
44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2
Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with
the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to
vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport
The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a
range of skills and techniques personal qualities and
attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter
the workplace
Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study
1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction
The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge
and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in
instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning
and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills
2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities
The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire
motivate and improve the performance of a selected target
group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It
encourages students to work in a team situation to organise
plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement
3 Injury in Sport
The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and
their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will
enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries
4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport
The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in
the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and
enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people
(Units to be studied are subject to change)
Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TEXTILES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of
textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The
students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following
areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction
applied textiles and embellished textiles
Assessment and Coursework Balance
In their first year the students will be required to produce two
extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will
follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The
students will work from first hand observations collecting and
developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and
textiles based techniques From this research and developmental
stage students will design and produce a final piece
During the second year students will begin by completing an
extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an
externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted
will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment
will account for 40
The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual
style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they
learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a
more personal response to a theme
Visits
Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources
such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second
year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within
the industry today
Why choose Textiles
Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more
confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level
course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles
The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range
of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior
design styling textiles design and costume design
46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)
Exam Board AQA
Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology
Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three
subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three
separate GCSEs
What are the differences between Triple Science and other
science GCSEs
This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will
be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of
the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award
What are the advantages of studying Triple Science
The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into
bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for
bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge
Who should consider taking Triple Science
Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope
with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a
related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those
students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this
course
The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school
GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics
Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25
Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25
Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25
Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25
Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS
2012 - 2014
Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4
option subjects
Please note
We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If
through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we
cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course
Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012
Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012
Make a record of your choice on the table below before
handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the
Options Information Evening
SUBJECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
Mo
st
De
sire
d
3D Design
Art
Catering
Construction
Dance
Drama
Ethics
Film Studies
French
Geography
Graphics
Hairdressing
History
ICT
Media Studies
Motor Vehicle
Music
Spanish
(Diploma) Sport
Textiles
Triple Sciences
Please tick if you would like to be
considered to do EBacc Please
remember that you need to
include Geography or History and
French or Spanish as your subject
options
Chessington Community College
Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS
Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603
wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk
![Page 38: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a](https://reader035.vdocument.in/reader035/viewer/2022062413/5a76533a7f8b9aa3618d22a0/html5/thumbnails/38.jpg)
Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued
Exam Board EDEXCEL
Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)
Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students
the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the
equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own
recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves
A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)
including costs
A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it
safely
Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording
techniques
Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what
they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating
various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is
designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to
work in the Music Industry
This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic
Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will
spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software
and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs
The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both
exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both
qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)
Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as
individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily
being assessed on everything at the end of the course
A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction
grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up
with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11
The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from
httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx
42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will
learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer
software
You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white
photographs
Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based
photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-
journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new
media practice
Assessment
This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home
is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks
There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the
marks
Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SPANISH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
All students have the choice to continue
with Spanish which they have been
studying since Year 7 It would be a wise
choice to continue with Spanish as the
ability to speak a second language is not
only useful but is advantageous in
today‟s world Our closer connection
with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even
a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers
Course Information
The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based
on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage
Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to
communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding
Topics covered are
Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo
Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink
Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo
Free time shopping money new technology sports media
Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo
Home local area and the environment
Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo
School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs
Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and
listening at the end of Year 11
44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2
Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with
the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to
vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport
The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a
range of skills and techniques personal qualities and
attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter
the workplace
Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study
1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction
The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge
and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in
instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning
and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills
2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities
The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire
motivate and improve the performance of a selected target
group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It
encourages students to work in a team situation to organise
plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement
3 Injury in Sport
The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and
their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will
enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries
4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport
The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in
the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and
enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people
(Units to be studied are subject to change)
Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TEXTILES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of
textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The
students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following
areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction
applied textiles and embellished textiles
Assessment and Coursework Balance
In their first year the students will be required to produce two
extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will
follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The
students will work from first hand observations collecting and
developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and
textiles based techniques From this research and developmental
stage students will design and produce a final piece
During the second year students will begin by completing an
extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an
externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted
will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment
will account for 40
The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual
style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they
learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a
more personal response to a theme
Visits
Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources
such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second
year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within
the industry today
Why choose Textiles
Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more
confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level
course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles
The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range
of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior
design styling textiles design and costume design
46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)
Exam Board AQA
Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology
Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three
subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three
separate GCSEs
What are the differences between Triple Science and other
science GCSEs
This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will
be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of
the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award
What are the advantages of studying Triple Science
The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into
bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for
bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge
Who should consider taking Triple Science
Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope
with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a
related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those
students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this
course
The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school
GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics
Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25
Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25
Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25
Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25
Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS
2012 - 2014
Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4
option subjects
Please note
We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If
through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we
cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course
Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012
Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012
Make a record of your choice on the table below before
handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the
Options Information Evening
SUBJECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
Mo
st
De
sire
d
3D Design
Art
Catering
Construction
Dance
Drama
Ethics
Film Studies
French
Geography
Graphics
Hairdressing
History
ICT
Media Studies
Motor Vehicle
Music
Spanish
(Diploma) Sport
Textiles
Triple Sciences
Please tick if you would like to be
considered to do EBacc Please
remember that you need to
include Geography or History and
French or Spanish as your subject
options
Chessington Community College
Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS
Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603
wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk
![Page 39: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a](https://reader035.vdocument.in/reader035/viewer/2022062413/5a76533a7f8b9aa3618d22a0/html5/thumbnails/39.jpg)
42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will
learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer
software
You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white
photographs
Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based
photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-
journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new
media practice
Assessment
This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home
is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks
There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the
marks
Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SPANISH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
All students have the choice to continue
with Spanish which they have been
studying since Year 7 It would be a wise
choice to continue with Spanish as the
ability to speak a second language is not
only useful but is advantageous in
today‟s world Our closer connection
with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even
a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers
Course Information
The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based
on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage
Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to
communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding
Topics covered are
Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo
Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink
Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo
Free time shopping money new technology sports media
Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo
Home local area and the environment
Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo
School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs
Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and
listening at the end of Year 11
44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2
Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with
the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to
vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport
The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a
range of skills and techniques personal qualities and
attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter
the workplace
Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study
1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction
The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge
and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in
instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning
and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills
2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities
The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire
motivate and improve the performance of a selected target
group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It
encourages students to work in a team situation to organise
plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement
3 Injury in Sport
The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and
their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will
enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries
4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport
The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in
the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and
enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people
(Units to be studied are subject to change)
Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TEXTILES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of
textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The
students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following
areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction
applied textiles and embellished textiles
Assessment and Coursework Balance
In their first year the students will be required to produce two
extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will
follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The
students will work from first hand observations collecting and
developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and
textiles based techniques From this research and developmental
stage students will design and produce a final piece
During the second year students will begin by completing an
extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an
externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted
will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment
will account for 40
The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual
style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they
learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a
more personal response to a theme
Visits
Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources
such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second
year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within
the industry today
Why choose Textiles
Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more
confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level
course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles
The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range
of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior
design styling textiles design and costume design
46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)
Exam Board AQA
Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology
Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three
subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three
separate GCSEs
What are the differences between Triple Science and other
science GCSEs
This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will
be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of
the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award
What are the advantages of studying Triple Science
The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into
bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for
bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge
Who should consider taking Triple Science
Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope
with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a
related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those
students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this
course
The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school
GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics
Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25
Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25
Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25
Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25
Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS
2012 - 2014
Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4
option subjects
Please note
We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If
through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we
cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course
Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012
Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012
Make a record of your choice on the table below before
handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the
Options Information Evening
SUBJECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
Mo
st
De
sire
d
3D Design
Art
Catering
Construction
Dance
Drama
Ethics
Film Studies
French
Geography
Graphics
Hairdressing
History
ICT
Media Studies
Motor Vehicle
Music
Spanish
(Diploma) Sport
Textiles
Triple Sciences
Please tick if you would like to be
considered to do EBacc Please
remember that you need to
include Geography or History and
French or Spanish as your subject
options
Chessington Community College
Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS
Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603
wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk
![Page 40: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a](https://reader035.vdocument.in/reader035/viewer/2022062413/5a76533a7f8b9aa3618d22a0/html5/thumbnails/40.jpg)
Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
SPANISH (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
All students have the choice to continue
with Spanish which they have been
studying since Year 7 It would be a wise
choice to continue with Spanish as the
ability to speak a second language is not
only useful but is advantageous in
today‟s world Our closer connection
with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even
a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers
Course Information
The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based
on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage
Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to
communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding
Topics covered are
Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo
Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink
Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo
Free time shopping money new technology sports media
Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo
Home local area and the environment
Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo
School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs
Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and
listening at the end of Year 11
44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2
Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with
the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to
vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport
The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a
range of skills and techniques personal qualities and
attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter
the workplace
Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study
1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction
The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge
and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in
instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning
and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills
2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities
The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire
motivate and improve the performance of a selected target
group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It
encourages students to work in a team situation to organise
plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement
3 Injury in Sport
The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and
their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will
enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries
4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport
The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in
the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and
enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people
(Units to be studied are subject to change)
Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TEXTILES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of
textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The
students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following
areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction
applied textiles and embellished textiles
Assessment and Coursework Balance
In their first year the students will be required to produce two
extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will
follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The
students will work from first hand observations collecting and
developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and
textiles based techniques From this research and developmental
stage students will design and produce a final piece
During the second year students will begin by completing an
extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an
externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted
will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment
will account for 40
The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual
style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they
learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a
more personal response to a theme
Visits
Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources
such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second
year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within
the industry today
Why choose Textiles
Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more
confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level
course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles
The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range
of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior
design styling textiles design and costume design
46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)
Exam Board AQA
Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology
Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three
subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three
separate GCSEs
What are the differences between Triple Science and other
science GCSEs
This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will
be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of
the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award
What are the advantages of studying Triple Science
The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into
bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for
bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge
Who should consider taking Triple Science
Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope
with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a
related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those
students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this
course
The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school
GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics
Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25
Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25
Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25
Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25
Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS
2012 - 2014
Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4
option subjects
Please note
We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If
through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we
cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course
Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012
Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012
Make a record of your choice on the table below before
handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the
Options Information Evening
SUBJECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
Mo
st
De
sire
d
3D Design
Art
Catering
Construction
Dance
Drama
Ethics
Film Studies
French
Geography
Graphics
Hairdressing
History
ICT
Media Studies
Motor Vehicle
Music
Spanish
(Diploma) Sport
Textiles
Triple Sciences
Please tick if you would like to be
considered to do EBacc Please
remember that you need to
include Geography or History and
French or Spanish as your subject
options
Chessington Community College
Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS
Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603
wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk
![Page 41: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a](https://reader035.vdocument.in/reader035/viewer/2022062413/5a76533a7f8b9aa3618d22a0/html5/thumbnails/41.jpg)
44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT
Exam Board EDEXCEL
The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2
Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with
the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to
vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport
The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a
range of skills and techniques personal qualities and
attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter
the workplace
Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study
1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction
The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge
and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in
instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning
and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills
2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities
The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire
motivate and improve the performance of a selected target
group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It
encourages students to work in a team situation to organise
plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement
3 Injury in Sport
The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and
their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will
enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries
4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport
The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in
the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and
enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people
(Units to be studied are subject to change)
Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TEXTILES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of
textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The
students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following
areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction
applied textiles and embellished textiles
Assessment and Coursework Balance
In their first year the students will be required to produce two
extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will
follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The
students will work from first hand observations collecting and
developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and
textiles based techniques From this research and developmental
stage students will design and produce a final piece
During the second year students will begin by completing an
extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an
externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted
will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment
will account for 40
The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual
style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they
learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a
more personal response to a theme
Visits
Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources
such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second
year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within
the industry today
Why choose Textiles
Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more
confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level
course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles
The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range
of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior
design styling textiles design and costume design
46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)
Exam Board AQA
Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology
Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three
subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three
separate GCSEs
What are the differences between Triple Science and other
science GCSEs
This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will
be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of
the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award
What are the advantages of studying Triple Science
The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into
bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for
bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge
Who should consider taking Triple Science
Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope
with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a
related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those
students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this
course
The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school
GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics
Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25
Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25
Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25
Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25
Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS
2012 - 2014
Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4
option subjects
Please note
We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If
through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we
cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course
Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012
Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012
Make a record of your choice on the table below before
handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the
Options Information Evening
SUBJECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
Mo
st
De
sire
d
3D Design
Art
Catering
Construction
Dance
Drama
Ethics
Film Studies
French
Geography
Graphics
Hairdressing
History
ICT
Media Studies
Motor Vehicle
Music
Spanish
(Diploma) Sport
Textiles
Triple Sciences
Please tick if you would like to be
considered to do EBacc Please
remember that you need to
include Geography or History and
French or Spanish as your subject
options
Chessington Community College
Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS
Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603
wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk
![Page 42: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a](https://reader035.vdocument.in/reader035/viewer/2022062413/5a76533a7f8b9aa3618d22a0/html5/thumbnails/42.jpg)
Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TEXTILES (GCSE)
Exam Board AQA
Course Information
During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of
textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The
students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following
areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction
applied textiles and embellished textiles
Assessment and Coursework Balance
In their first year the students will be required to produce two
extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will
follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The
students will work from first hand observations collecting and
developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and
textiles based techniques From this research and developmental
stage students will design and produce a final piece
During the second year students will begin by completing an
extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an
externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted
will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment
will account for 40
The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual
style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they
learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a
more personal response to a theme
Visits
Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources
such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second
year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within
the industry today
Why choose Textiles
Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more
confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level
course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles
The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range
of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior
design styling textiles design and costume design
46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)
Exam Board AQA
Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology
Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three
subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three
separate GCSEs
What are the differences between Triple Science and other
science GCSEs
This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will
be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of
the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award
What are the advantages of studying Triple Science
The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into
bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for
bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge
Who should consider taking Triple Science
Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope
with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a
related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those
students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this
course
The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school
GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics
Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25
Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25
Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25
Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25
Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS
2012 - 2014
Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4
option subjects
Please note
We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If
through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we
cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course
Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012
Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012
Make a record of your choice on the table below before
handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the
Options Information Evening
SUBJECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
Mo
st
De
sire
d
3D Design
Art
Catering
Construction
Dance
Drama
Ethics
Film Studies
French
Geography
Graphics
Hairdressing
History
ICT
Media Studies
Motor Vehicle
Music
Spanish
(Diploma) Sport
Textiles
Triple Sciences
Please tick if you would like to be
considered to do EBacc Please
remember that you need to
include Geography or History and
French or Spanish as your subject
options
Chessington Community College
Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS
Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603
wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk
![Page 43: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a](https://reader035.vdocument.in/reader035/viewer/2022062413/5a76533a7f8b9aa3618d22a0/html5/thumbnails/43.jpg)
46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)
Exam Board AQA
Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology
Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three
subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three
separate GCSEs
What are the differences between Triple Science and other
science GCSEs
This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will
be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of
the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award
What are the advantages of studying Triple Science
The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into
bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for
bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge
Who should consider taking Triple Science
Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope
with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a
related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those
students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this
course
The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school
GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics
Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25
Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25
Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25
Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25
Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS
2012 - 2014
Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4
option subjects
Please note
We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If
through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we
cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course
Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012
Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012
Make a record of your choice on the table below before
handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the
Options Information Evening
SUBJECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
Mo
st
De
sire
d
3D Design
Art
Catering
Construction
Dance
Drama
Ethics
Film Studies
French
Geography
Graphics
Hairdressing
History
ICT
Media Studies
Motor Vehicle
Music
Spanish
(Diploma) Sport
Textiles
Triple Sciences
Please tick if you would like to be
considered to do EBacc Please
remember that you need to
include Geography or History and
French or Spanish as your subject
options
Chessington Community College
Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS
Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603
wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk
![Page 44: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a](https://reader035.vdocument.in/reader035/viewer/2022062413/5a76533a7f8b9aa3618d22a0/html5/thumbnails/44.jpg)
Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014
KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS
2012 - 2014
Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4
option subjects
Please note
We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If
through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we
cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course
Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012
Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012
Make a record of your choice on the table below before
handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the
Options Information Evening
SUBJECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
Mo
st
De
sire
d
3D Design
Art
Catering
Construction
Dance
Drama
Ethics
Film Studies
French
Geography
Graphics
Hairdressing
History
ICT
Media Studies
Motor Vehicle
Music
Spanish
(Diploma) Sport
Textiles
Triple Sciences
Please tick if you would like to be
considered to do EBacc Please
remember that you need to
include Geography or History and
French or Spanish as your subject
options
Chessington Community College
Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS
Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603
wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk
![Page 45: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a](https://reader035.vdocument.in/reader035/viewer/2022062413/5a76533a7f8b9aa3618d22a0/html5/thumbnails/45.jpg)
Chessington Community College
Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS
Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603
wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk